Pontiac Wiki Pontiac Wiki

Bidder Documentation

Bidder Documentation

  • Overview
    • Hierarchy
    • Navigating the Pontiac Platform
    • How to Launch Your First Campaign
    • Terminology
    • Strategy Guide
    • Inventory & Planning
      • Deal Catalog
      • Planning Tool
      • Deal Landscape Tool
      • Inventory Availability Tool
      • Audience Research Tool
      • Audience Discovery Tool
    • Analytics Suite
    • Bid Recommendations
  • Troubleshooting
    • Troubleshooting Overview
    • Need Help? Footer Button
    • Bid Data
    • Inventory Availability
    • Blockers Graph
    • Troubleshoot Feature
    • Ask the Pontiac Assistant
    • Help Center
    • Campaign vs. Line Level Targeting
    • Creative Issues
  • ETA Guidance
  • MCP
    • Overview
    • ChatGPT Setup
    • Claude Code Setup
    • Prompts
  • Pontiac Assistant: In Platform Chatbot
    • Overview
    • How to Use It
    • Starting A Conversation
    • Example Prompts
  • Seats
    • Seats Overview
    • Seat Settings
      • Users
      • Addendums
      • Preferences
    • GDPR Compliant Seats
      • GDPR Countries
      • GDPR Query String Macros
      • GDPR Third Party Tag Handling
    • Sub Seats
  • Admin
    • Billing
    • Seat Settings
    • Help Center
    • Notifications
    • Wiki
  • Audiences
    • Audiences Overview
    • Custom Audiences
    • Contextual AI
    • ART Audiences
    • Third Party Audiences
    • Geo Fencing Audiences
    • Associate Segments
    • Audience Groups
    • Boolean Logic
  • Advertisers
    • Advertisers Overview
    • Create an Advertiser
    • Edit an Advertiser
    • Navigating the Advertiser Tab
      • Filter Advertisers
      • Advertiser Level Metrics
      • Advertiser Setup Tab
      • Advertiser Performance Tab
    • Download Campaign Setup
  • Creatives
    • Creative Overview
    • Creative Types
    • Creative Upload Process
      • Overview
      • Creative Acceptance Policy
      • New Creative Tab
      • Trackers Tab
      • Specs Tab
      • Flights Tab
      • Publisher Specs Eligibility Tab
    • Creative Specs
    • Creative Audit
      • Overview
      • Creative Brand & IAB Category
      • Sensitive Creatives
      • Political Creatives
      • Prohibited Content
    • Creative Macros
    • Edit Creatives
    • Bulk Upload
    • Creative Malicious Intent Test
    • Publisher Specs & Approval Process
  • Macros
    • Macros Overview
    • Supported Macros
  • Pixels
    • Pixels Overview
    • IP Conversion Pixels
    • Create an IP Conversion Pixel
    • Edit an IP Conversion Pixel
    • Piggyback Pixels
    • Query String Macro Parameters
    • Whitelabel Pixel Domain Setup
    • Shopify Custom Pixel Implementation
  • Targeting Methods
    • Overview
    • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Inventory
    • Location & Device
    • Content
    • Streaming & Video
    • Advanced
    • Audience Targeting
  • Pacing & Dayparts
  • Frequency & Recency
  • Setup Guides
    • Overview
    • Display Setup
    • Audio Setup
    • CTV Setup
    • OLV Setup
    • OTT Setup
    • Native Setup
    • National US Campaign Setup
    • Canada Campaign Setup
    • Political Campaign Setup
    • Sensitive Categories Setup
    • Programmatic Guaranteed (PG) Setup
    • Index and Microsoft Curation Setup
  • Campaigns
    • Campaign Overview
    • Create a Campaign
      • Overview
      • Campaign Setup
      • Campaign Targeting
      • Campaign Audiences
      • Campaign Creatives
      • Campaign Pixels
      • Campaign Pacing & Dayparts
      • Campaign Flights
      • Campaign Frequency & Recency
    • Campaign Flights
      • Overview
      • Flights Tab
      • Enable Flights
      • Configure Flight Line Settings
      • Flight Pacing and Monitoring
      • Manage Flights
    • Mange Campaigns
      • Manage Lines from a Campaign
      • Clone a Campaign
      • Edit a Campaign
    • Campaign Templates
    • Campaign Performance Tab
      • Overview
      • Campaign Metrics
      • Bid Data
      • Bid/Imp Ratios
      • Line Performance
      • Campaign Daily Performance
      • Completion Events
  • Lines
    • Overview
    • Create a Line
      • Line Setup
      • Line Pacing & Dayparts
      • Line Frequency & Recency
      • Line Foot Traffic Reporting
      • Line Targeting
      • Line Creatives
      • Line Audiences
      • Line Pixels
    • Edit a Line
    • Clone a Line
    • Line Templates
    • Line Performance Tab
      • Overview
      • Line Metrics
      • Inventory Availability
      • Bid Data
      • Bid/Imp Ratios
      • Blockers
      • Troubleshoot Checks
      • Line Daily Performance
      • Completion Events
  • Inventory
    • Inventory Overview
    • Inventory Targeting
    • Inventory Lists
      • Inventory Lists Overview
      • Site Lists
      • App Lists
      • Deal Lists
    • Deals
    • Deal Identifiers Explained
    • Negotiated Deals
    • Import Deal
  • Templates
    • Overview
    • Campaign Templates
      • Use a Campaign Template to Create a New Campaign
      • Create a Campaign Template
      • Find and Manage Campaign Templates
      • Edit a Campaign Template
      • Clone a Campaign Template
    • Line Templates
      • Use a Line Template to Create a New Line
      • Public Line Templates
      • Create a Line Template
      • Find and Manage Line Templates
      • Edit a Line Template
      • Clone a Line Template
  • Reporting
    • Reporting Overview
      • Reporting Timezones
      • Standard Reporting vs Custom Reporting
    • Standard Reporting
      • Overview
      • Summary
      • Inventory
      • Creatives
      • Device Type
      • Network
      • Deal
      • Channel
      • App
      • Foot Traffic
      • Geo
    • Custom Reporting
      • Overview
      • Scheduled Reports
      • Custom Report
      • Path To Conversion
      • IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits
      • IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate
      • Log Level Reporting
      • Reach/Frequency Report
    • Sub Seat Reporting
    • Conversion Tracking
    • Foot Traffic Studies
  • Pacing
    • Overview
    • Campaign Pacing Tab
    • Sub Seats Pacing Tab
  1. Home
  2. Bidder Documentation

Overview

With Pontiac, you can reach the best inventory across CTV, OLV, OOH, Audio, Display, HTML5, and Native. The platform is built for reach, flexibility, and control, giving you the ability to activate seamlessly across any channel.

Pontiac Intelligence provides access to top-tier CTV inventory, including Disney+/Hulu, NBCU, and other major publishers, platforms, and FAST (Free Ad-Supported TV) providers like Philo, Tubi, Samsung, and Vizio. This ensures broad reach and strong performance across premium and emerging inventory sources.

Our platform supports both online and linear TV advertisers, offering 100% access to CTV and OLV inventory with precise audience targeting. With flexible dayparting and budget controls, advertisers can plan campaigns like linear TV—but with greater transparency and efficiency.

Pontiac Capabilities

Bidder:

  • CTV : Access premium streaming inventory with full control over delivery, transparent reporting, and robust optimization tools.
  • OLV: Reach beyond Smart TVs to access streaming video inventory on any screen. Get all of the same features as CTV plus the added targeting of serving in web and mobile environments.
  • Audio: Whether streaming radio or podcasts, audio is a great way to get in front of your audience. Access a range of inventory sources to be in ear and top of mind.
  • Display: Scale reach with digital display inventory across premium publishers and formats, supporting both awareness and performance objectives.
  • HTML5: Deliver rich, interactive ad experiences that drive engagement through dynamic and visually compelling formats across web environments.
  • Native: Blend seamlessly into publisher environments with native formats designed to match the look and feel of the surrounding content, improving engagement and user experience.

Pontiac allows buyers to target inventory at a granular level, including title, series, channel, publisher, and genre, while optimizing performance with IP-based and Cookie ID tracking. Additionally, advertisers can control their buys based on supplier transparency levels and optimize towards online engagement metrics. We help agencies and advertisers navigate ad inventory with full control over where their brand appears, ensuring better targeting, better performance, and better results.

Continue reading to learn more about setting up and achieving success with Pontiac Intelligence. Our team is constantly building new features and tools to make our clients more effective in driving results and efficiencies. We work with you, our clients, to make sure the tools we’re building are helping you achieve better results and have more control. Our small size and agility are our biggest advantage over the tech behemoths. Make sure to stay up to date and check out our Platform Updates documentation to see what new features have been released: New Features

Hierarchy

LevelFeatures
SeatSeat Settings (Users, Addendum, Preferences)
Create & Edit Advertisers
Inventory Management (Site, App, & Deal Lists, Deals, Negotiated Deals)
Audiences Management (Custom, Contextual AI, ART Audiences, Third Party Audiences, On Boarded)
Templates Management
Reporting Management
AdvertiserEdit Advertisers
Set Advertiser Margin
Campaign Management (Create, Edit, Clone, Save as Template)
Creative Management
Pixel Management
Performance Overview (Bid Data, Campaign Performance, Advertiser Daily Performance, Video Events)
CampaignManage Budget
Manage Pacing & Dayparts
Enable & Manage Flights
Enable Campaign Frequency & Recency
Associate Creatives
Associate Audiences
Associate Pixels
Line Management (Create, Edit)
Performance Overview (Bid Data, Line Performance, Campaign Daily Performance, Video Events)
LineLine Management (Create, Edit, Clone, Save as Template)
Inventory Type
Manage Bidding
Manage Budget
Budget Multiplier & Allocation Weight
Manage Pacing & Dayparts
Enable Line Frequency & Recency
Enable & Manage Foot Traffic Reporting
Enable Custom Model
Targeting
Associate Creatives
Associate Audiences
Associate Pixels

Navigating the Pontiac Platform

The Pontiac Intelligence Platform provides tools for managing Advertisers, Campaigns, Lines, Inventory, Audiences, and Reporting. This guide covers how to navigate the platform and use common interface features, including searching, filtering, customizing table views, and reviewing performance data.

Switching Between Platform Sections

The dropdown in the upper-right corner allows users to switch between the available Pontiac platform sections.

Available options include:

  • Bidder: Manage programmatic advertising Sub Seats (if enabled), Advertisers, Campaigns, Lines, Inventory, Audiences, Templates, and Reporting.
  • ART: Access audience research and inventory availability tools.
  • DOOH: Access digital out-of-home advertising tools.
  • Analytics: Access Pontiac’s Analytics Suite for campaign planning, audience analysis, targeting optimization, and incrementality measurement.
  • Admin: Access account administration, Billing, Seat Settings, Help Center, Notifications, and Wiki.
  • Logout: Sign out of the platform.

Select the desired section from the dropdown to switch between platform tools. Available options may vary based on account access and permissions.

Bidder Navigation Tabs

Within the Bidder section, the top navigation menu provides access to the following:

  • Sub Seats: Access and manage Sub Seats, when enabled.
  • Advertisers: Create and manage Advertisers, Campaigns, Lines, Creatives, and Pixels.
  • Inventory: Manage Site, App, and Deal Lists, and access available and negotiated Deals.
  • Audiences: Create and manage Audiences used for targeting.
  • Templates: Manage reusable Campaign and Line templates.
  • Reporting: Create and manage performance reports.
  • Pacing: Monitor Campaign and Line budgets, pacing, and delivery.

Select a tab to access the corresponding features and tools.

Global Search

The Search field in the upper-right corner of the platform allows users to search for Pontiac objects across the current Seat, including Advertisers, Campaigns, Lines, Creatives, and Audiences.

Enter a name or ID to locate an object and select a result to navigate directly to it.

Unlike the Search fields within individual tables, Global Search allows users to find objects without first navigating to their corresponding section.

Notifications and Help

Icons in the upper-right corner provide access to additional platform resources, including:

  • Envelope Icon = Help Center: View and manage support requests and communications with the Pontiac Support team.
  • Bell Icon = Notifications: View platform updates, new feature announcements, and other notifications.
  • Chat Icon = Pontiac Assistant: Access Pontiac’s AI-powered assistant for help navigating the platform, understanding features, and managing Campaigns.

The Admin section also provides access to the Help Center, Notifications, and Wiki.

Pontiac Assistant

The Pontiac Assistant is an AI-powered tool designed to help users navigate the platform, understand available features, and streamline Campaign management.

Users can ask questions in natural language to get assistance with platform functionality, Campaign setup, troubleshooting, reporting, and other common workflows.

To access the Assistant, click the chat icon in the upper-right corner of the platform.

For more information on available capabilities, example prompts, and how to use the Assistant, see Pontiac Assistant.

Footer Navigation and Switching Seats

The footer provides quick access to additional navigation options, including:

  • Contact Us: Access Pontiac contact and support resources.
  • Switch Seat: Switch between Seats you have access to.

To switch Seats:

  1. Click Switch Seat in the footer.
  2. Enter the Seat ID or Seat Name you want to access.
  3. Select the desired Seat to switch to it.

The footer also displays the current Seat ID and platform version.

Note: Always confirm the selected Seat before creating or modifying Campaigns, Inventory, or other settings.

Navigating Advertisers, Campaigns, and Lines

Pontiac organizes Campaign management into four primary levels:

Seat → Advertiser → Campaign → Line

  • Seat: The account-level workspace for shared Inventory, Audiences, Templates, Reporting, and Seat Settings.
  • Advertiser: Represents an individual brand, client, or product and contains its Campaigns, Creatives, and Pixels.
  • Campaign: Organizes Lines under shared Campaign settings, such as budget, dates, Flights, pacing, and frequency caps.
  • Line: Controls how media is purchased, including bidding, Inventory Type, targeting, and other delivery settings.

To navigate between levels:

  1. Select Advertisers from the Bidder navigation menu.
  2. Click the Advertiser Name to open the Advertiser.
  3. Select a Campaign from the Advertiser’s Campaigns table.
  4. Select a Line from the Campaign’s Lines table.

Each level provides access to settings, management tools, and performance information relevant to that object.

For a complete overview of the features available at each level, see Hierarchy.

Searching and Filtering Tables

Tables throughout Pontiac include controls for locating records, filtering results, adjusting page size, and customizing displayed information.

The Advertisers table below provides an example of these controls.

  • Search bar
  • Filter Status
  • Page Size
  • Total Items
  • Page
  • Reporting Interval
  • Customizing Table Columns

Search

Use the Search field above a table to find specific records.

Enter a name or ID to narrow the results displayed in the table.

Search functionality may vary depending on the page.

Filter Status

The Filter Status dropdown allows users to filter records by their current status.

  • All: Displays both Active and Inactive records.
  • Active: Displays only Active records.
  • Inactive: Displays only Inactive records.

The default status filter may vary by page.

Changing this filter only affects which records are displayed in the table. It does not modify their actual status.

For example, if you cannot find an Advertiser, Campaign, or Line, check the Filter Status dropdown and select All to include Inactive records.

Understanding Status Indicators and Warnings

Pontiac uses status icons and color-coded indicators throughout the platform to help users identify whether objects are Active, Inactive, or require attention.

These indicators appear in areas such as Advertiser, Campaign, and Line tables, Troubleshoot Checks, Reports, and Creative Audits.

Active and Inactive Status

In Advertiser, Campaign, and Line tables, the Status column displays an object’s configured status.

  • Green Check Mark (✓) – Active: The object is enabled.
  • Red Minus (−) – Inactive: The object is disabled.

An Active status indicates that an object is enabled, but does not necessarily mean it is currently delivering impressions. Delivery also depends on Campaign and Line dates, budgets, targeting, Creative eligibility, and other settings.

An Inactive status indicates that the object is disabled and is not eligible to serve while inactive.

Note: The Status column displays an object’s configured status, while the Filter Status dropdown controls which objects are visible in the table. To see inactive objects, change the Filter Status to All or Inactive.

Validation Results: Pass, Fail, and Warning

Pontiac also displays validation results within tools such as Line-level Troubleshoot Checks and Creative Audits. These checks help identify potential configuration, eligibility, or delivery issues.

  • Green Check Mark – Pass: The evaluated requirements were met.
  • Red Indicator – Fail: One or more evaluated requirements were not met.
  • Yellow Caution Icon – Warning: A potential issue was identified, or the available information is insufficient to verify the check.

For example, within Line-level Troubleshoot Checks:

  • Pass: The targeted Exchange is compatible with the targeted Deal.
  • Fail: The targeted Exchange does not align with the Exchange associated with the targeted Deal.
  • Warning: Insufficient sample request data is available to verify Deal Exchange compatibility.

Review the individual check results and accompanying messages to understand whether any changes or additional verification are needed.

Creative Audits and Publisher Eligibility

Creative Audit tools help users identify whether Creative assets meet technical requirements and publisher-specific specifications.

Depending on the Creative Type and applicable requirements, these checks may evaluate:

  • Creative dimensions and aspect ratio
  • Video duration
  • Resolution and bitrate
  • VAST version and compatibility
  • Publisher-specific Creative requirements

A failed check indicates that the Creative does not meet an evaluated requirement and may need to be updated before serving on the applicable inventory.

A warning indicates that additional review or verification may be needed.

Review the individual Creative Audit results to identify which requirements passed, failed, or require attention.

Important: Active/Inactive and Pass/Fail/Warning represent different types of information.

  • Active/Inactive indicates whether an Advertiser, Campaign, or Line is enabled.
  • Pass/Fail/Warning indicates the outcome of a specific validation or eligibility check.

Although these indicators may use similar colors, they serve different purposes. An Active Campaign or Line may still fail a Troubleshoot Check, and a Creative may pass certain technical checks while failing others.

A green check mark does not guarantee that an object will deliver impressions. It only confirms that the specific status or check is satisfied.

Page Size and Pagination

The Page Size dropdown controls how many records appear on each page.

The Total Items field displays the number of records matching the current view, while the Page dropdown allows users to navigate between available pages.

For example, if the table contains 200 records and the Page Size is set to 50, the results will be divided across four pages.

Increase Page Size to display more records at once, or use the Page dropdown to navigate between pages.

Reporting Interval

Many tables include a Reporting Interval dropdown that controls the period used to calculate and display performance metrics.

Depending on the table, available intervals may include Yesterday, Today, 7 Days, 30 Days, Month to Date, Last Month, and Lifetime.

Selecting a different Reporting Interval updates the performance metrics displayed in the table, such as:

  • Impressions
  • Total Cost
  • Revenue
  • IP Conversions
  • Other available performance metrics

For example, selecting Yesterday displays the previous day’s performance, while selecting 7 Days displays performance for the corresponding seven-day period.

Note: The Reporting Interval changes the reporting period for displayed metrics. It does not modify Campaign settings, budgets, or delivery.

Customizing Table Columns

Many tables allow users to customize which columns and metrics are displayed.

To customize a table:

  1. Click the column selection icon (three horizontal lines) in the upper-right corner of the table.
  2. A dropdown will display the available columns.
  3. Check a column to display it in the table.
  4. Uncheck a column to hide it from the table.

Changes to the selected columns update the information displayed in the table.

For example, users reviewing Advertiser performance may choose to display:

  • Lines
  • Campaigns
  • Imps
  • Total Cost
  • Revenue
  • IP Convs
  • Clicks
  • CPC

Available columns vary depending on the table and platform level.

Selecting Reporting Dimensions and Metrics

Within Pontiac’s Reporting tools, users can select the Dimensions and Metrics included in their reports.

  • Dimensions determine how report data is grouped, such as by Advertiser, Campaign, Line, Creative, or Date.
  • Metrics determine which performance values are displayed, such as Impressions, Total Cost, Revenue, or Conversions.

The selected Dimensions and Metrics determine both the columns included in the report and their order.

Important: The order in which Dimensions and Metrics are selected determines the order in which their corresponding columns appear in the report. To change the column order, adjust the selection order when configuring the report.

For additional information on generating reports and selecting available Dimensions and Metrics, see Reporting.

Related Documentation

  • Hierarchy: Understand Pontiac’s Seat, Advertiser, Campaign, and Line structure.
  • How to Launch Your First Campaign: Step-by-step instructions for creating and launching a Campaign.
  • Reporting: Learn how to generate and customize performance reports.
  • Pacing: Learn how to monitor Campaign and Line budgets and delivery.

How to Launch Your First Campaign

This guide walks through the full process of launching a campaign in Pontiac, from setting up your Advertiser and Creatives to creating, launching, monitoring, and optimizing your Campaign and Lines. Links to the full documentation for each step are included throughout the guide for additional setup details and instructions.

  1. Set Up Your Advertiser
    • The Advertiser represents an individual brand, product, or client in Pontiac. It serves as the parent level for everything associated with that advertiser, including Campaigns, Lines, Creatives, Pixels, and Audiences.
      • Create an Advertiser
  2. Upload Your Creative
    • Upload the creative assets or third party tags that will be used in your campaign. Creatives are created and managed at the Advertiser level and can then be assigned at the Campaign and/or Line level.
      • Creative Upload Process
  3. Create Your Campaign
    • Create the Campaign that will house your Lines and define the overall Campaign settings, including dates, budget, Flights (if applicable) and other Campaign level controls.
    Best Practices:
    • Use Campaign level targeting only for settings that should apply universally across all Lines.
    • Use Line level targeting for strategy-specific targeting and optimization.
    • Apply targeting at one level whenever possible, unless the intent is to intentionally narrow eligible inventory through intersection filtering.
      • Campaigns
      • Flights
  4. Create Your Line
    • Lines control how your campaign buys media. This is where you will configure settings such as inventory, targeting, bid price, budget, dates, Creatives, and other strategy specific controls.
      • Lines
  5. Review Before Launching
    • Review your Campaign and Line settings to confirm that budgets, dates, targeting, Creatives, and other required settings are configured correctly. Use the Line level Performance tab troubleshooting checks to identify any setup or delivery issues.
      • Line Level > Performance Tab Troubleshoot Checks
    • From the Advertiser level, download the full campaign setup to review Campaign, Flight (if applicable), and Line configurations before launch.
      • Download Campaign Setup
    • Confirm that your Creatives meet the specifications for the publishers you plan to target using Creatives > Publisher Spec Eligibility.
      • Publisher Specs Eligibility
  6. Launch and Monitor
    • Once your setup has been reviewed, activate your Campaign and Lines and begin monitoring delivery and performance. Use the Pacing tab, reporting tools, and Line level troubleshooting checks to monitor campaign activity and identify issues that may affect delivery.
      • Pacing Tab
      • Reporting
      • Line Level > Performance Tab Troubleshoot Checks
  7. Optimize Performance
    • Once your campaign has collected enough performance data, use the Pontiac Analytics suite to identify opportunities for optimization. Run Targeting, Audience, or Incrementality analyses to better understand performance across different variables and audiences. You can also create and upload a User Defined Model to apply your own scoring strategy to campaign optimization.
      • Pontiac Analytics Suite
      • User Defined Models
      • Model Association

Terminology

As streaming services have become widely adopted and methods for consuming TV content have drastically changed, the terms OTT and CTV have become exceedingly popular in the advertising world. But with this growing popularity the terms have become ambiguous as players in the industry began to use them interchangeably and the lines between them became blurred. This guide is intended to provide clarity into the industry definitions, Pontiac terminology, and best practices for implementing both CTV and OTT campaigns through the Pontiac Platform.

CTV vs OTT vs Video

  • OTT (Over-the-Top) is TV content delivered to a device via an internet connection. OTT is defined as a delivery method and content type (premium TV content delivered via internet) and can be streamed on any device type: smart TVs or mobile devices or desktops. OTT is considered premium digital video, and it is the highest-quality format available programmatically, with completion rates as high as 90%. For example, this could be a user watching Hulu on their phone, desktop, OR on their Smart TV.
  • CTV (Connected TV) is a sub-set of OTT Video, where the OTT content is delivered specifically on TELEVISIONS connected to the internet. CTV is defined by the device type and includes – Device types: smart TVs, gaming consoles, and set-top boxes. An example of this would be a user watching Hulu on their TV.
  • Video is the creative type for all OTT and CTV. All OTT and CTV campaigns are Video, but not all Video is OTT or CTV. Online Video (OLV) can also run across other websites and apps within content that is not considered OTT and on devices that are not considered CTV. For example, a video ad in the Candy Crush app on a mobile device.

Despite the technical definitions above, it is commonly understood in the industry that CTV refers to any OTT across TVs, and ‘OTT’ is typically used to refer to other ‘non-CTV’ OTT content. For this reason and for the purposes of the Pontiac Platform, ‘CTV’ refers to OTT content that runs across connected television devices – Smart TVs, Game Consoles, and Set Top Boxes. The ‘Inventory Type’ ‘OTT’ will refer to all other OTT content that is not CTV, that being content streamed on other devices – Mobile Phones, Tablets, Desktops and Laptops.

Please see the following page for more information on CTV, OTT, and OLV best practices for setups: Setup Guides

Strategy Guide

Overview

The Pontiac Intelligence DSP offers a wide variety of granular targeting tools that enable Advertisers to better reach their target Audience and subsequently maximize their ad spend. Given how different types of inventories, data, and media interact, there are some complexities as to how targeting parameters and features can be combined and layered on a Campaign and/or Line Item (Inventory, Geo, Audience Targeting). The following Strategies Guide provides insight into creating intelligent and functional targeting on your Line Items according to your media type and KPIs.

Core Framework

LayerOptions
InventoryWeb · In-App · Combined
Media TypeAudio · Display · Online Video · Combined Video · Streaming / CTV
Device TypePersonal Computer · Phone · Tablet · Connected TV · Connected Device · Set Top Box
Creative TypeVideo (Ad Server Video Tag, First Party Video), Audio (Ad Server Audio Tag, First Party Audio), Banner (Ad Server Banner Tag, First Party Banner, HTML5), and Native

Strategies by Media Type

KPIs & AttributionAudioDisplayOLVOTT/CTV
CTRXXX
CPCXXX
ViewabilityXX
Post-Click ConversionsXX
Post-View ConversionsXX
CPAXX
IP ConversionsXXXX
Foot Traffic ConversionsXXXX
Video Completion RateXX
Listen Through RateX
Device TargetingAudioDisplayOLVOTT/CTV
Person ComputerXXXX
Mobile PhoneXXXX
TabletXXXX
Connected TVXX
Connected Device XX
Set Top BoxXX
Inventory TargetingAudioDisplayOLVOTT/CTV
App ListXXXX
Site ListXXX
Contextual AIXX
DealXXXX
Audience TargetingAudioDisplayOLVOTT/CTV
Creative AudienceXXX
Device ID TargetingXX
GeofencingXX
GeoframedXX
Liveramp CRM AudiencesXX
RemarketingXX
Third-Party AudiencesXXX
Zip Code TargetingXXXX

Strategies by Inventory Type

Web Inventory


Media Type/Device
PCPhoneTabletCTVConnected DeviceSet Top BoxCreative Types
DisplayXXXDisplay, HTML5, Native
OLVXXXVideo
Audio
Streaming/CTV

In-App Inventory

Media Type/DevicePCPhoneTabletCTVConnected DeviceSet Top BoxCreative Types
DisplayXXDisplay, HTML5, Native
OLVXXVideo
AudioXXAudio
Streaming/CTV

Streaming/CTV In-App Inventory

Media Type/DevicePCPhoneTabletCTVConnected DeviceSet Top BoxCreative Types
Display
OLV
Audio
Streaming/CTVXXXVideo

Combined Inventory

Media Type/DevicePCPhoneTabletCTVConnected DeviceSet Top BoxCreative Types
DisplayXXXDisplay, HTML5, Native
OLVXXXVideo
AudioXXAudio
Streaming/CTVXXXVideo
KPIs & AttributionWebMobile-WebMobile In-AppOTT/CTVCombined
CTRXXXX
CPCXXXX
ViewabilityXXXX
Post-Click ConversionsXXXX
Post-View ConversionsXXX
CPAXXXX
IP ConversionsXXXXX
Foot Traffic ConversionsXXXXX
Video Completion RateXXXXX
Listen Through RateXXXX
Device TargetingWebMobile – WebMobile In-AppOTT/CTVCombined
Person ComputerXXX
Mobile PhoneXXXX
TabletXXXX
Connected TVXX
Connected Device XX
Set Top BoxXX
Inventory TargetingWebMobile – WebMobile In-AppOTT/CTVCombined
App ListXXX
Site ListXXX
Contextual AIXXX
DealXXXXX
Audience TargetingWebMobile – WebMobile In-AppOTT/CTVCombined
Creative AudienceXXXX
Device ID TargetingXXXX
GeofencingXX
GeoframedXX
Liveramp CRM AudiencesXXXX
RemarketingXXXXX
Third-Party AudiencesXXXXX
Zip Code TargetingXXXXX

Inventory & Planning

Deal Catalog

The Pontiac premium video deal catalog can be found in the ‘Inventory’ tab of the platform, under ‘Deals’. When selecting deals that best align with your campaign goals, it is recommended to review all columns in this table to ensure your creatives meet specs, approval processes are completed, and campaigns are correctly configured to drive success. You may also want to review the Deal Landscape Tool, to understand the level of transparency in data shared by each Deal. Sample logs and forecasting reports are also available for each Deal in the ‘ART’ tab.

  • ID: The Deal ID assigned from Pontiac.
  • Name: The Deal Name that the importer assigns to the Deal.
  • Avails: The approximate number of available requests for that deal. This changes based on the Reporting Interval: Yesterday, 7 Days, or 30 Days.
  • Deal Provider: The entity with a direct relationship with Pontiac and supplies the external deal ID used to import the deal.
  • Brand: The brand or publisher of the content in the deal.
  • Content Type: The category of content being streamed when the ad is shown. Run of Network (RON) means all inventory from the publisher or deal provider.
  • Media Type: The type of media: Streaming/CTV (TV placements), OLV (online video – in-app/web, not streaming TV), Combined Video, Audio, Display.
  • Exchanges: The SSP or platform the deal provider uses to send bid requests to Pontiac.
  • Floor Price: The minimum bid price (CPM) required to enter the auction. Hover over the price to see Min, Max, Avg, and Median for Bid insight.
  • Recommended Bid: Suggested bids based on factors like inventory variation and competition.
  • Livestream: The percentage breakdown of sample requests across live content, video on demand (VOD) content, or unknown environments.
  • Duration: Allowed ad unit durations; multiple durations show the percentage of requests for each.
  • Sizes: The allowed ad unit sizes; hovering over the size tool shows request percentages per size.
  • Auction Type:
    • First Price: The winning bid is the price the advertiser pays.
    • Second Price Plus: The advertiser pays $0.01 above the second-highest bid.
  • Device Types: The devices where impressions are served, including Connected Device, Connected TV, Set Top Box, Personal Computer, Phone, and Tablet.
  • Countries: The Countries that the Deal is seeing bid requests from.
  • Permitted Sensitive Categories: Deals that allow sensitive content to be served.
  • Publisher Approval Required: Deals requiring publisher approval for each ad before launch. Submit ads for approval through the Help Center.
  • Notes: Any additional deal requirements, restrictions, inventory, or targeting.
  • Start Date: When the Deal is eligible.
  • End Date: When the Deal is no longer eligible.
  • Last Served Date: The most recent date that impressions were served through the Deal.
  • Action: Request access to public Deals if needed. Note that all deals will be approved within 24 hours after being requested.
  • Creative Types: Shows which creative formats are seen in the bid requests for a specific Deal.
  • Inventory Type: Shows what type of inventory is seen in the bid requests for a specific Deal.

Negotiated Deals

If you can’t find the deal you need in the catalog, reach out through the Help Center. The Pontiac Partnership team may be able to negotiate a deal for you or you can bring over your own negotiated deals. Any programmatic guaranteed deals or deals negotiated for a specific advertiser will appear under the ‘Negotiated Deals’ section in the ‘Inventory’ tab. See how to import your own deals documentation here: Import Deal

Planning Tool

The Analytics Planning Tool helps users build media plans using LLM-powered research, campaign inputs, and Pontiac marketplace data. Users can provide campaign goals, audience, geography, budget, inventory types, and optional supporting documents. The tool then researches the brand, recommends audience and content strategies, and matches those recommendations against Pontiac sample bid request data to identify relevant inventory and expected scale.

Users can review and refine recommended audiences, content veins, taxonomy selections, geo constraints, impression goals, and line structure before generating the final plan. Plans include projected scale, spend, CPMs, recommended Deals, inventory targeting, and sample availability estimates.

Once generated, the plan can be reviewed in the Executive Summary, Campaign, and Downloads tabs. Users can edit proposed Lines and targeting, download planning and deployment files, and import the completed Planning report directly into a Campaign for final QA and launch.

For complete setup instructions, plan configuration options, output details, and steps for importing a plan into a Campaign, see the full Planning Tool documentation.

Deal Landscape Tool

The Deal Landscape tool provides transparent insights into the data available for targeting and reporting across the accessible Deals through the Bidder. With great inconsistencies in the information shared by each media owner across the industry, this tool can be leveraged in the research and planning process to align campaign goals and expectations with available targeting and reporting capabilities.

For full documentation, see here: Deal Landscape Tool

Transparency Report

The Transparency Report aggregates bid request data to show how much information each deal provides, including fields such as Title, Series, Channel, Network, and Full IP.

This allows you to understand exactly what data is available for targeting and reporting.

  • View all bidder-specific deals your account has access to
  • Sort by any field to evaluate transparency levels
  • Download the full dataset using the arrow next to the search bar
  • Share results via a public link (valid for 30 days)

Deal Sample Logs

Click the Deal Name to view sample logs and see exactly what data is being passed.

This allows you to:

  • Analyze content details such as publisher, network, channel, series, and title
  • Optimize targeting based on real inventory signals

Custom Reporting

The Custom Reporting tool allows you to generate sample request logs for deeper analysis across one or multiple deals.

  1. Navigate to the Custom Reporting section
  2. Click New Custom Report
  3. Select your deal(s), date range, and dimensions
  4. Generate the report

Use the Deal Landscape Tool to understand inventory, evaluate transparency, and make smarter, data-driven decisions before and during campaign execution.

Inventory Availability Tool

The Inventory Availability Tool is a forecasting tool that provides directional guidance in Campaign planning. If your report returns no data, reach out through the Help Center for more information on the feasibility and potential scale for the selected targeting. By leveraging historical data, delivery trends, sample log data, and Pontiac’s proprietary forecasting formula, the tool helps advertisers:

  • Create and refine Inventory targeting lists.
  • Assess the feasibility of targeting parameters.
  • Optimize bid strategies.
  • Estimate potential scale for Campaign planning.

Create an Inventory Availability Report

  1. Switch to the ‘ART’ section using the toggle in the top right corner.
    • If the ‘ART’ button is unavailable, contact Pontiac Support via the Help Center.
  2. Navigate to the ‘Inventory Availability’ tab.
  3. Click ‘New Report’.
  4. The start date and end date default to 30 days before today’s date.
  5. Select how the report is built:
    • User Defined: Configure the report from scratch. This is great for when you’re gather precampaign insights.
    • Existing Line: Configure the report based on an existing line that is already set up. This is helpful for QAing campaign set up and delivery issues. When selected, the report is generated using the line’s current configuration, including:
      • Inventory type
      • Creative type
      • Advertiser
      • Campaign
      • Line
      • Effective targeting (Intersection of the Campaign and Line)
      • Audiences (only Line level)
        • If audiences are applied to the Campaign level, users can manually add an additional group and then run the report, but it will not be automatically included.
  6. Select Inventory Type: In App, Web or Combined.
  7. Select the Creative Type: Video, Audio, or Banner.
    • Only one creative type can be selected per report. If you need to run the same report for different creative types, clone the original report and update the creative type.
  8. Add Targeting parameters by the follow two methods
    • Edit Targeting: Select parameters for forecasting.
      • Available targeting options for In App include:
        • Deals
        • Exchanges
        • Geo (Country, Regions, DMAs)
        • Zip Codes
        • Livestream
        • App Lists
        • Apps
        • Device Types
        • Channel
        • Network
        • Publisher
        • Genre
        • Series
        • Title
        • Multi Field
      • Available targeting options for Web include:
        • Deals
        • Exchanges
        • Geo (Country, Regions, DMAs)
        • Zip Codes
        • Livestream
        • Publisher
        • Site Lists
        • Sites
        • Device Types
      • Available targeting options for Combined include:
        • Deals
        • Exchanges
        • Geo (Country, Regions, DMAs)
        • Zip Codes
        • Livestream
        • Publisher
        • Deal Lists
        • Device Types
        • Site Lists
        • Sites
        • App Lists
        • Apps
        • Channel
        • Network
        • Publisher
        • Genre
        • Series
        • Title
        • Multifield
    • Inventory Discovery: Due to the inconsistency in how inventory information is structured across the CTV landscape, this tool helps advertisers create well-informed targeting lists and identify variations in formatting for the desired inventory.
      • Search and click to add fields to targeting for the forecast report.
  9. Associate Audience Segments
    • Custom Audiences
    • Third Party Audiences
    • Contextual Audiences
    • ART Audiences
    • See Boolean Logic for more details on any and all logic for targeting between groups.
  10. Run the report and wait a couple of minutes for results to populate.

Understanding the Results

Summary Metrics
  • Forecasted Available Daily Impressions: Range of estimated daily impressions available.
  • Total Impressions: Estimated total impressions available over a 30-day period.
  • Avg Floor CPM: The average floor CPM for the inventory included in the report.
  • Unique IFAs: The estimated number of unique device identifiers available.
  • Unique IPs: The estimated number of unique households available, based on IP address.
  • Top Networks: Pie chart showing the most popular networks. Hover over each section to view the number of impressions over the 30-day period.
  • Top Publishers: Pie chart showing the most popular networks. Hover over each section to view the number of impressions over the 30-day period.
    Top Channels: Pie chart showing the most popular channels. Hover over each section to view the number of impressions over the 30-day period.

The report includes individual sections for the following:

  • Exchanges
  • Deals
  • Channel
  • Network
  • Publisher
  • Genre
  • Series
  • Titles
  • Apps
  • Device Types
  • Livestream
  • Zip Codes
  • Sample Requests: Provides deeper insights into impression-level parameter combinations.
    • For example:
      • If a specific Deal ID is selected, charts will display available Networks and Channels.
      • Sample logs will illustrate how specific networks grant access to certain channels within that deal.
Exchanges

This section shows the exchanges included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides exchange-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by exchange. Hover over the chart to view the exchange name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same exchange-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Deals

This section shows the deals included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides deal-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by deal. Hover over the chart to view the deal name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same deal-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Networks

This section shows the networks included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides network-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by network. Hover over the chart to view the network name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same network-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Channels

This section shows the channels included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides channel-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by channel. Hover over the chart to view the channel name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same channel-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Publishers

This section shows the publishers included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides publisher-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by publishers. Hover over the chart to view the publisher name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same publisher-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Series

This section shows the series included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides series-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by series. Hover over the chart to view the series name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same series-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Titles

This section shows the titles included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides title-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by title. Hover over the chart to view the title name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same title-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Genre

This section shows the genres included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides genre-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by genre. Hover over the chart to view the genre name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same genre-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Livestream

This section shows the livestream categories included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides livestream-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by livestream category. Hover over the chart to view the category name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same livestream-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Apps

This section shows the App Bundle ID and Name included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides app-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by app. Hover over the chart to view the app name, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same app-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Device Types

This section shows the device types included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides device type-level details for Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The chart compares total impressions and average floor CPM by device type. Hover over the chart to view the device type, total impressions, and average floor CPM. The table below provides the same device type-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Zip Codes

This section shows the zip codes included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides zip code-level details for City, State, Total Impressions, Avg Floor CPM, Unique IFAs, and Unique IPs.

The map displays inventory availability by zip code, with higher-density areas highlighted. Use the map controls to zoom, adjust the view, or reset the map. The table below provides the same zip code-level data in table format and can be downloaded as a CSV for further investigation.

Sample Requests

This section shows the Deal level Sample Requests included in the Inventory Availability report. It provides Deal Name, Publishers, Network, Channel, Series, Title , Genre, Exchange, Livestream, App Bundle, App Name, Device Type, Zip Code, and Impressions.

The table can be downloaded as a CSV for further review or investigation.

Audience Research Tool

Locate & understand the highest value users to your brand by utilizing the traffic on your website, or a list of U.S. zip codes, to create detailed insight reports, and leverage look-a-like modeling to find new targets that share key characteristics with your existing audience. For more information, please see the full ART Audience Research Tool documentation.

Audience Discovery Tool

Create your target Audience profile from the desired demographic variables to discover new zip code targets with the highest propensity match to your desired Audience profile. Leveraging the correlation between zip codes and demographics, ADT uses US Census Data to find the zip codes with the largest deviation from the US mean across the selected variables. Leveraging impression data and deep contextual analysis, interest categories can also be evaluated for each zip code to find areas that are over-indexing in content consumption for the selected topics. Audience Discovery data can be exported for targeting across all channels and media types. Additionally, browse our public reports to see if there is a report that fits your campaign needs already. For more information, please see the full ART Audience Discovery Tool documentation.

Analytics Suite

Pontiac Analytics Suite Overview

Understand > Activate > Prove

Insights are only as powerful as your ability to act on them. With Pontiac’s Analytics Suite, you can move from analysis to optimization instantly by applying model outputs directly to your campaigns with no manual translation or workflow gaps.

No complex integrations. No big lift. Just seamless activation within the same platform where you run your campaigns.

Deep Dive

  • Analytics Documentation: Deep dive into each pipeline and how to generate reports
  • Planning Documentation: Learn how to build AI-assisted media plans using campaign inputs, audience insights, and Pontiac marketplace data to recommend inventory and expected scale.
  • Audience Documentation: Learn how to understand your audience, build personas, and identify high-value and lookalike segments
  • Targeting Documentation: Explore how to identify performance drivers and apply optimizations to campaign delivery
  • Incrementality Documentation: Understand lift measurement, control vs exposed methodology, and true performance impact

No black boxes. No guesswork. Just transparent models, seamless activation, and results you can stand behind.

What is the Analytics Suite?

The Pontiac Analytics Suite is built around three core pipelines that cover the full campaign lifecycle:

  • Planning: Build smarter media plans before launch
    • Uses LLM-powered research and Pontiac marketplace data to recommend audiences, content, inventory, and expected scale
    • Helps align campaign goals, targeting strategy, budget, and available inventory
    • Produces a plan that can be reviewed, refined, and launched directly in the platform
  • Audience: Know who converts, what defines them, and where to find more of them before you spend a dollar.
    • Builds personas using privacy-safe, census-based data
    • Identifies high-value ZIP codes and lookalike expansion opportunities
    • Helps guide targeting and messaging strategy
  • Targeting: Activate and optimize performance in-flight
    • Surfaces key performance drivers across geo, device, content, time of day, and more
    • Applies insights directly to bidding and delivery
    • Reduces waste and improves efficiency with no manual breakouts
  • Incrementality: Prove the true impact of your media
    • Compares exposed vs control groups to isolate true lift
    • Calculates real CPA and statistically validated performance
    • Identifies where to scale, test, or reduce spend, with the ability to automatically apply those optimizations

Every model is fully transparent, showing exactly how decisions are made. And when you’re ready to act, applying those insights takes just a few clicks.

From Analysis to Activation

The Analytics Suite doesn’t just generate insights, it enables immediate action. Follow these simple steps:

  1. Generate a Targeting, Audience, Incrementality, or Full Analysis report
  2. Navigate to the Targeting section at the Campaign or Line level
  3. Select the Custom Model tab
  4. Enable Use Custom Models
  5. Choose your model from the available list

Once enabled, your model is applied directly to Campaign and or Line delivery.

Bid Recommendations

Bid recommendations vary by media type, inventory source, Deal requirements, targeting, and auction competition.

The recommendations below are intended as starting points. Actual clearing prices may vary, and bids may need to be adjusted based on delivery and available inventory.

For information on configuring Basic Bid, Bid at Total eCPM, Bid at Floor Price, Bid at Floor Price Plus, and Advanced Bid Controls, see Line Setup.

Bid Recommendations by Media Type

CTV

Typical CTV pricing ranges from approximately $28–$40 CPM, with premium inventory often available above $40 CPM.

When targeting a CTV Deal, the publisher will provide a CPM floor. We generally recommend setting the bid approximately 10–20% above the minimum floor to improve auction competitiveness.

CTV inventory may also be available through the Open Exchange at lower CPMs. However, PMP Deals are generally recommended when greater control over publisher and inventory quality is desired.

OTT

OTT PMP Deals operate in real-time bidding environments with a publisher-defined price floor. The price floor represents the minimum CPM required to participate in the auction.

These auctions can be competitive, and clearing prices may be approximately 20–40% above the Deal Price Floor. Closing CPMs commonly fall within the $20–$40 range, although actual pricing varies significantly based on factors including:

  • Publisher and inventory quality
  • The Deal’s position within the publisher’s waterfall
  • Auction competition
  • Content format, such as Live or Short Form
  • Seasonality and time of year

As a starting point, we generally recommend bidding approximately 10–20% above the Deal Price Floor. If the Line is not achieving the desired scale, gradually increase the bid.

OLV

Bid prices vary depending on the video inventory and Deal. As a starting point, we generally recommend a base bid of at least $5–$10 CPM.

Run an Inventory Availability Report to review average CPMs based on your Campaign targeting and available inventory.

Audio

Audio inventory can be purchased through either the Open Exchange or PMP Deals.

Open Exchange: Typically clears between $7–$13 CPM

PMP Deals: Commonly ranges from $9–$20 CPM

Individual PMP Deals may have their own recommended bid ranges or floor prices.

Display

Display bid prices vary based on targeting criteria and Audience data. A standard starting recommendation is approximately $2–$4 CPM, although recommended bids may increase as targeting becomes more granular.

Native

Native bid prices vary based on inventory, targeting criteria, and Deal requirements. As a starting point, we recommend a bid of approximately $4 CPM. PMP Deals may have specific floor prices or bid recommendations that should be used as guidance.

Bidding Above the Floor

For inventory with a defined floor price, bidding exactly at the floor may reduce auction competitiveness.

As a general starting point, consider bidding approximately 10–20% above the floor, particularly for competitive CTV, OTT, and PMP inventory.

Pontiac’s Bid at Floor Price Plus functionality can also be used to automatically add a CPM amount or percentage above the observed floor while respecting the configured Max Bid Price.

For configuration instructions and examples, see Line Setup.

How Audience and Attribution Fees Affect Cost

By default, Audience, data, and attribution fees are applied separately from the media bid and do not need to be manually added to the Line’s Bid Price.

The Line’s media bid determines how much Pontiac can bid for the inventory, while applicable additional fees are reflected in Total Cost.

For example, if a Line has a $2.50 media bid and targets a third-party Audience with a $1.50 CPM data cost, Pontiac can bid up to $2.50 CPM for the media. The $1.50 Audience fee is applied separately when calculating Total Cost.

As a result:

  • Bid Price / Media Cost CPM reflects the cost of the media.
  • Total Cost / Total Cost CPM reflects the media cost plus applicable Audience, data, attribution, and other platform fees.

Note: When Bid at Total eCPM is enabled, Pontiac adjusts the media bid to account for certain applicable fees so that the total eCPM remains within the configured Bid Price. See Line Setup for the fees included in this calculation and configuration instructions.

Third-Party Audience Fees

Third-party Audiences may have an associated CPM data cost. This fee is applied separately from the media cost and included in Total Cost.

Examples of third-party Audience costs include:

  • LiveRamp CRM segments: Associated Audience CPM
  • TransUnion CRM segments: Associated Audience CPM
  • OnSpot / Geoframed segments: Associated Audience CPM
  • Other Third-Party Audiences: Associated CPM displayed for the Audience

Depending on the Audience and seat configuration, additional data commissions may also be included in Total Cost.

Contextual AI and ART Audience Fees

Contextual AI and ART Audiences may also have associated data fees. These fees are applied separately from the media bid and included in Total Cost.

If no applicable third-party Audience fee is present:

  • A targeted Contextual AI Audience may apply the seat’s configured Contextual fee.
  • A targeted ART Audience may apply the seat’s configured ART fee.

Foot Traffic Attribution Fees

Foot Traffic Attribution fees are also applied separately from the media bid and included in Total Cost. They do not need to be added to the Line’s bid recommendation.

Foot Traffic Attribution pricing varies based on negotiated pricing and may differ by media type.

For example, a CTV Line with a $15.00 media bid and Foot Traffic Attribution enabled will continue to bid up to $15.00 CPM for media. The applicable Foot Traffic fee is added separately when calculating Total Cost.

If Bid at Total eCPM is enabled, the Foot Traffic fee is instead accounted for when Pontiac adjusts the media bid to remain within the configured total eCPM.

Troubleshooting Overview

Pontiac provides several tools to help diagnose Campaign and Line delivery issues, including Bid Metrics, Bid/Imp Ratios, the Blockers graph, Troubleshoot checks, Inventory Availability Reports, the Pontiac Assistant, and the Help Center.

Need Help?

For additional assistance, click the Need Help? button in the bottom-left footer of the Pontiac Platform to access the following support options:

  • Pontiac Assistant: Get help with Campaign setup, delivery, troubleshooting, and optimization. Click Open the Assistant or use the blue chat icon in the upper-right corner.
  • Help Center: Submit a support ticket for further investigation. Click Go to the Help Center or use the envelope icon in the upper-right corner.
  • Managed Services: For hands-on Campaign management assistance, contact ebogris@progmechs.com.

For more information, see Need Help? Footer Button.

If you want to…Review
Understand where delivery is breaking down between Eligible Requests, Bids, and ImpressionsBid Data
Understand how efficiently Eligible Requests turn into Bids and Bids turn into ImpressionsBid/Imp Ratios
Identify which targeting or serving requirements are blocking the most requestsBlockers Graph
Run automated checks for common issues related to Campaign setup, creatives, Deals, targeting, budgets, pacing, and auction performanceTroubleshoot Feature
Determine whether enough inventory is available for the current targeting setupInventory Availability
Get guided help interpreting delivery issues, Troubleshoot messages, or Campaign setupAsk the Pontiac Assistant
Understand how Campaign and Line targeting settings interactCampaign vs. Line Level Targeting
Troubleshoot rejected creatives or creative category issuesCreative Issues
Contact the Pontiac team for additional investigation or supportHelp Center

For Campaign or Line delivery issues, Bid Data is usually the best place to start. Review the delivery funnel to determine where the issue is occurring:

  1. Are there Eligible Requests?
  2. Are Bids being placed?
  3. Are Impressions being won?
  4. Is the Campaign or Line pacing to expectations?

Once you identify where delivery is being limited, use the applicable section above to investigate further.

Need Help? Footer Button

The Need Help? button, located in the bottom-left footer of the Pontiac Platform, provides quick access to support resources and assistance.

Click Need Help? to open a popup with three support options:

  • Pontiac Assistant: Click Open the Assistant to get help with Campaign setup, delivery, troubleshooting, optimization, and other platform questions. The Assistant can also automate many platform features.
  • Help Center: Click Go to the Help Center to submit a support ticket or request additional assistance from the Pontiac Support team.
  • Managed Services: For hands-on Campaign management assistance, contact ebogris@progmechs.com.

The Pontiac Assistant and Help Center can also be accessed directly using the blue chat icon and envelope icon in the upper-right corner of the platform.

Related Documentation

  • Pontiac Assistant: Learn about the Assistant’s capabilities, supported workflows, and example prompts.
  • Help Center: Learn how to submit and manage support tickets through the Help Center.

Bid Data

Bid metrics are displayed on the Advertiser, Campaign, and Line details pages to provide insight into the bid funnel, near-real-time delivery, auction competitiveness, and potential issues that may be affecting delivery.

Use Bid Data to understand where delivery may be restricted within the bidding process: Eligible Requests → Bids → Impressions → Confirmed Spend

Reviewing these metrics together can help determine whether a delivery issue is related to available inventory and Targeting, whether the platform is submitting bids on eligible requests, or whether submitted bids are successfully winning impressions.

Bid Data Metrics

  • Time Frame: Select 15 minutes, 1 hour, 12 hours, or 1 day. Data is displayed in 5-minute intervals.
  • Eligible Requests: Bid requests that meet the applicable Targeting criteria, including Deals, geo Targeting, inventory Targeting, Audiences, and other Targeting restrictions.
    • If there are no Eligible Requests, there may be no inventory matching the complete Targeting configuration or the Targeting may be too restrictive.
    • Review Blockers, Inventory Availability, and Troubleshoot Checks for additional insight.
  • Bids: Bids placed on Eligible Requests.
    • If Eligible Requests are present but Bids are low or zero, additional serving requirements may be preventing bids from being placed.
    • These can include budget or pacing restrictions, Frequency & Recency, Creative eligibility, publisher requirements, bid requirements, or other bidder-level conditions.
  • Imps: Confirmed impressions served after a submitted bid wins the auction.
    • If Bids are being placed but few or no Impressions are serving, review bid competitiveness, Deal floors, auction competition, and publisher requirements.
    • Creatives may also be subject to additional review outside of Pontiac. Pontiac audits and approves Creatives within the platform, but SSPs and publishers may have their own Creative approval processes that can temporarily or permanently affect winning bids.
  • Confirmed Spend: Confirmed spend generated by impressions served during the selected Time Frame.
  • Avg Eligible Lines: The average number of Lines across the platform competing for inventory that is also eligible for the Line. Higher values indicate greater competition for the same eligible inventory.
  • Competitive Position: Indicates how competitive the Line is relative to other eligible Lines on the platform. Values closer to 1 indicate a stronger competitive position.

Users can hover over the charts to view the timestamp and metric value for a specific point in time.

How to Interpret Bid Data

Use the relationship between Eligible Requests, Bids, and Impressions to determine where delivery may be restricted.

  • No Eligible Requests: Review Targeting, Inventory Availability, Deal activity, Creative compatibility, Audiences, and Campaign/Line Targeting intersections.
  • Eligible Requests but No Bids: Review budgets, pacing, Frequency & Recency, Creative eligibility, publisher approval, Deal requirements, and bidding configuration.
  • Bids but Few or No Impressions: Review bid competitiveness, Deal floors, auction competition, publisher requirements, and external Creative approval status where applicable.
  • Impressions are serving but pacing is low: Review available inventory scale, budgets, Budget Multiplier, pacing configuration, Frequency & Recency, and bid competitiveness.

Tip: Bid Data should be read as a funnel. Eligible Requests but no Bids indicates a different type of delivery restriction than Bids but no Impressions. Identifying where the drop-off occurs can help narrow the next troubleshooting steps.

Bid/Imp Ratios

The Bid/Imp Ratios section provides additional insight into how efficiently eligible inventory moves through the bidding and auction process. Bid/Imp Ratios are available on the Campaign and Line Performance tabs.

Available settings and metrics include:

  • Time Frame: Select 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, or 48 hours.
  • Imps to Bids Ratio: The ratio of impressions delivered to bids placed. This shows how frequently submitted bids result in won impressions.
    • A higher ratio indicates that a larger share of bids are winning and converting into impressions.
    • A lower ratio indicates that many bids are being submitted without winning. This may point to an uncompetitive bid price, auction competition, Deal conditions, or inventory conditions.
  • Bids to Eligible Bids Ratio: Shows how frequently the platform places a bid after a request passes Targeting eligibility.
    • A higher ratio indicates that the platform is bidding on a larger share of Eligible Requests.
    • A lower ratio indicates that requests are passing Targeting eligibility but are frequently being filtered before a bid is placed. This may point to budget or pacing constraints, Creative eligibility, Frequency & Recency, bid requirements, or other bidder-level restrictions.

Users can hover over the charts to view the timestamp and metric value for a specific point in time.

If delivery is being limited by pacing or budget allocation, increasing the Budget Multiplier or enabling Catch-up ASAP may help increase bid volume.

  • Budget Multiplier: Allows the Line to spend above its calculated daily budget by applying a multiplier to the daily budget target. Increasing the multiplier gives the Line more flexibility to spend when eligible inventory is available. A 1.3 Budget Multiplier is typically recommended as a starting point when additional pacing flexibility is needed.
  • Catch-up ASAP: Temporarily allows a Campaign or Line that is behind pace to spend more aggressively. While active, Catch-up ASAP overrides the configured Daily Budget and Daily Pacing Type until pacing returns to 100%, then the normal pacing configuration resumes.

These settings should only be adjusted when pacing or budget allocation is the cause of limited bid volume. They will not resolve delivery restrictions caused by Targeting, Creative eligibility, Deal availability, Frequency & Recency, publisher approval, or other serving requirements.

Inventory Availability

The Line Performance tab includes an Inventory Availability section that allows users to generate an Inventory Availability Report using the Line’s current setup.

Select Run Report to generate a new report.

The report is generated using the line’s current configuration, including:

  • Inventory type
  • Creative type
  • Advertiser
  • Campaign
  • Line
  • Effective targeting (Intersection of the Campaign and Line)
  • Line level Audiences
    • If audiences are applied to the Campaign level, users can manually add an additional group and then run the report, but it will not be automatically included.
    • See Boolean Logic for more details on any and all logic for targeting between groups.

After a report is submitted, it appears in the Inventory Availability report table for that line.

Use Inventory Availability to determine:

  • Whether inventory exists for the current setup.
  • Whether targeting may be too restrictive.
  • Whether selected Deals provide sufficient scale.
  • What bid floors are available.
  • Whether expanding targeting or inventory may improve delivery.

This is particularly useful when Eligible Requests are low or zero.

The table includes:

  • Report Status: Shows whether the report is processing, complete, or has an issue
  • Report ID
  • Report Name: Generated using the line name and date. When users click on the name, they are taken to the full report.
  • Date Submitted

Reports are ordered by Date Submitted, with the newest reports shown first.

Results

Once the report finishes processing, select the Report Name to review the results.

For additional details, see the Inventory Availability Tool

Blockers Graph

The Blockers section helps identify which types of restrictions are preventing bid requests from becoming eligible for the Line.

The horizontal bar chart groups blocked requests into the following categories:

  • Geography: Requests blocked by geographic Targeting requirements.
  • Deals: Requests blocked because they do not meet the applicable Deal Targeting or Deal eligibility requirements.
  • Inventory: Requests blocked by inventory-related Targeting or eligibility requirements.
  • Day Parting: Requests blocked because they fall outside the configured Daypart schedule.
  • Audiences: Requests blocked by applicable Audience Targeting requirements.
  • Creative: Requests blocked by Creative-related eligibility requirements.

Each blocker category is calculated independently. The chart is not a sequential bid funnel, and the same bid request may be blocked by more than one category.

Hover over a category to view:

  • Blocked %: The category’s share of the total blocked counts across the blocker categories currently displayed.
  • Total Blocked: The total number of bid requests blocked by that category.

All visible Blocked % values add up to 100%.

Use the legend below the chart to hide or restore individual blocker categories. The chart automatically rescales based on the categories currently displayed.

A larger Blocked % can help identify which part of the Line configuration is contributing most heavily to restricted inventory.

Important: A request can be blocked by multiple categories. Reducing one blocker does not guarantee that the request will become eligible if another Targeting or eligibility requirement still blocks it.

Use Blockers together with Bid Data and Troubleshoot Checks when investigating delivery. Blockers shows where requests are being filtered at a high level, while Troubleshoot Checks provides more specific validation and recommended areas to review.

Troubleshoot Feature

The Troubleshoot feature runs a series of checks designed to identify common delivery blockers related to Campaign and Line setup, Audiences, Creatives, Deals, Targeting, budgets, bidding, Dayparts, and auction performance. Select the Run All button to see the results of each check.

To access the feature:

  1. Open the applicable Line.
  2. Navigate to the Performance tab.
  3. Review the Troubleshoot section below Bid Data.

Use Troubleshoot Checks together with Bid Data, Blockers, and Inventory Availability to determine where delivery may be restricted.

Troubleshoot Checks can return:

  • Pass: The applicable delivery requirement is satisfied.
  • Warning: The check cannot be fully verified or part of the configuration requires review.
  • Fail: The check identified a condition that may prevent or limit delivery.

Status, Audience, and Auction Checks

  • Active Status: Confirms that the Advertiser, Campaign, Line, and current Flight (when Flights are enabled) are all active.
    • Pass: All applicable objects are active.
    • Fail: One or more objects are inactive.
      • The following are inactive: {Object Name} (ID: {object_id}). To resolve this issue, set the inactive object(s) to active.
    • Warning: Flights are enabled, but no Flight covers the current date. This may be intentional if delivery is paused. If delivery is expected, review the Flight dates.
  • Associated Audience Valid Records: Confirms that the effective audiences associated with the line have valid records available for targeting.
    • Pass: The associated audience(s) have valid records available for targeting: {audience_1} has {audience_1_records} valid records {audience_2} has {audience_2_records} valid records
    • Warning: The associated audience(s) have partially invalid record availability. The associated audience(s) have valid records available for targeting: {audience_1} has {audience_1_records} valid records. The associated audiences have 0 valid records and will not serve: {audience_2}, {audience_3}. These may limit overall delivery.
    • Fail: All associated audiences have 0 valid records and will not serve: {audience_1}, {audience_2}, {audience_3}
    • A Warning may still allow delivery, but Audiences with no valid records can reduce available scale depending on the configured Audience logic.
  • Auction Win Validation: Confirms that the Line has recently won auctions and served Impressions.
    • Pass: The Line is successfully winning auctions.
    • Fail: No qualifying Impressions were found.
    • If the Line is bidding but not yet winning Impressions, the Creative may still be undergoing an SSP or publisher Creative audit or approval process. These external review periods can take up to 24 hours in some cases and may temporarily prevent the Creative from winning inventory even when Pontiac is actively bidding.
    • This check reviews Impressions from the previous 48 hours. Recently won Impressions may appear in Bid Data before this check updates, so use Bid Data for the most current activity.

Bidding Checks

  • Bid Price vs Deal Floor Validation: Confirms that the Line’s bid meets or exceeds the floor price requirements of targeted Deals.
    • Pass: The bid meets or exceeds the applicable Deal floor.
    • Fail: The Line bid is below the floor for one or more targeted Deals.

Creative Checks

  • Creative Active Status: Ensures at least one creative is active
    • Pass: At least one creative associated with the line is active and eligible to receive bid requests.
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because there are no active creatives associated. The failure message identifies the Deal, Deal Floor, and current Bid Price.
    • Passing this check confirms that the bid meets the minimum floor. It does not guarantee the bid is competitive enough to win auctions.
  • Creative Active Status: Confirms that at least one Creative associated with the Line is Active.
    • Pass: At least one associated Creative is Active.
    • Fail: No Active Creatives are associated with the Line.
  • Creative Approval Status: Confirms that at least one associated Creative is approved in Pontiac for serving.
    • Pass: At least one Creative is approved.
    • Fail: The associated Creative or Creatives are not approved.
  • Creative Duration Compatibility: For video and audio inventory, confirms that at least one Creative duration is supported by the targeted Deals.
    • Pass: At least one creative duration(s) is supported by the targeted deal(s).
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because creative durations are not supported by the targeted deal(s).
  • Creative Size Compatibility: Validates creative size against deal requirements
    • Pass: At least one creative size is supported by the targeted deal(s).
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because creative sizes are not supported by the targeted deal(s).
  • Creative Sensitive Category Compatibility: Confirms that Creatives assigned a sensitive category are targeting inventory that permits that category.
    • Pass: Creative sensitive category is compatible with at least one targeted deal.
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because the creative(s): {creative_ids} must target a deal that allows for the creative’s sensitive category. If a creative has a sensitive category, it is not eligible to run on the open exchange.

Budget and Dayparts Checks

  • Daily Budget: Confirms that the line’s calculated daily budget is greater than $0.
    • Pass: The line has a daily budget of {line_daily_budget} and is eligible to spend.
    • Fail: The line is not eligible to spend because its calculated daily budget is $0.
      • The message identifies the applicable budget setting or settings that may need to be updated.
      • Depending on the line’s budget configuration, this may include:
        • Line Budget Allocation Weight
        • Line Budget Multiplier
        • Current Flight Budget
        • Current Flight Line Budget Allocation Weight
        • Current Flight Line Budget Multiplier
      • Only settings applicable to the line’s current budget and flight configuration are included.
      • The check will also fail when the campaign, flight, or line has no remaining budget.
        • Remaining Budget Fail: The line is not eligible to spend because the remaining budget is $0. If the line should continue delivering, increase the applicable campaign, flight, or line budget.
  • Dayparts Status: Confirms whether the line is currently eligible to serve based on its configured dayparting schedule.
    • Pass: The line is currently inside its active daypart window and is eligible to serve based on its dayparting schedule.
    • Fail: The line is currently outside of its active daypart window and is not eligible to serve based on its configured dayparting schedule.
      • A failed result reflects the line’s eligibility at the time the check is run. The line may become eligible when its next active daypart window begins.

Deal Availability and Compatibility Checks

  • Deal Bid Request Availability: Confirms targeted deals are sending requests
    • Pass: Targeted deal(s) are actively sending bid requests and eligible inventory is available.
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because the deal(s): {deal_ids} are not sending bid requests.
  • Deal Device Type Compatibility: Validates device targeting matches deal traffic
    • Pass: At least one targeted device type is compatible with device types observed in the targeted deal(s).
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because the deal(s): {deal_ids} do not support the targeted device types.
  • Deal Exchange Compatibility: Ensures exchange alignment with deals
    • Pass: At least one targeted exchange aligns with exchanges serving the targeted deal(s).
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because the deal(s): {deal_ids} and targeted exchanges are not aligned.
    • Warning: Unable to verify exchange compatibility for the targeted Deal(s): {deal_1}: {exchange_1}, {deal_2}: {exchange_2}. Insufficient deal sample log data is available. Please verify exchange compatibility manually.
  • Deal Inventory Type Compatibility: Validates that the line’s selected Inventory Type is compatible with the inventory type of its targeted deal(s). A line only needs one compatible targeted deal for this check to pass.
    • Pass: At least one targeted deal matches the line’s selected Inventory Type, and the line is eligible to receive bid requests.
    • Pass – Deal Inventory Type Undefined: The targeted deal(s): {deal_ids} do not have an Inventory Type defined. Compatibility with the line’s Inventory Type: {line_inventory_type} cannot be confirmed. Please review manually.
    • Fail: No targeted deals match the line’s current Inventory Type: {line’s inventory type}. Update the line’s Inventory Type or target compatible deals to enable delivery.
    • Line Inventory Type and Compatible Deal Inventory Type
      • Web: Web or Combined
      • In App: In App or Combined
      • Combined: Web, In App, or Combined
  • Deal Media Type Compatibility: Confirms creative type matches deal media type
    • Pass: At least one creative type is compatible with the targeted deal(s).
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because the deal(s): {deal_ids} have media types that do not match the associated creatives.
  • Deal Publisher Approval Status: Verifies publisher approval requirements
    • Pass: At least one targeted deal has satisfied publisher approval requirements and is eligible for bidding.
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because the deal(s): {deal_ids} require publisher approval.
  • Deal Required Field Presence: Ensures required fields are present in requests
    • Pass: At least one targeted deal is passing the required field(s) in bid requests and is eligible for delivery.
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because the deal(s): {deal_ids} do not pass the required field(s) in bid requests. Deal {deal_id}: Missing {field_name}

Campaign and Line Targeting Intersection Checks

Campaign- and Line-level Targeting are evaluated together. These checks confirm that settings applied at both levels have an intersection.

  • Deal Targeting Intersection: Ensures campaign and line deal targeting overlap
    • Pass: Campaign and line deal targeting settings intersect.
    • Fail: Campaign and line deal targeting parameters have no intersection. Ensures that when targeting is applied to both levels that they match or have an intersection.
  • Device Targeting Intersection: Confirms device targeting alignment
    • Pass: Campaign and line device targeting settings intersect.
    • Fail: Campaign and line device targeting parameters have no intersection. Ensures that when targeting is applied to both levels that they match or have an intersection.
  • Exchange Targeting Intersection: Confirms exchange targeting alignment
    • Pass: Campaign and line exchange targeting settings intersect.
    • Fail: Campaign and line exchange targeting parameters have no intersection. Ensure that when targeting is applied to both levels that they match or have an intersection.
  • Geo Targeting Intersection: Confirms geo targeting overlap
    • Pass: Campaign and line geo targeting settings intersect.
    • Fail: Campaign and line geo targeting parameters have no intersection. Ensure that when targeting is applied to both levels that they match or have an intersection.

Exchange-Specific Checks

  • Microsoft Creative Audit Approval: Validates Microsoft exchange approval if targeting Microsoft as an Exchange.
    • Pass: At least one creative is approved for the Microsoft exchange and eligible to receive bid requests.
    • Fail: The line is not showing eligible requests because the creative(s): {creative_ids} are not approved for Microsoft.

Open Exchange Lines

If no Deals are targeted and the Line is using open exchange inventory, Deal-specific checks are treated as not applicable and display:

  • No deals targeted; check not applicable for open exchange.

Additional Manual Troubleshooting

Automated checks provide a strong starting point, but some delivery issues require additional investigation.

Before working through the manual troubleshooting steps below, users can also ask the Pontiac Assistant for help reviewing the Line’s configuration and delivery signals. The Pontiac Assistant can help interpret Bid Data, Blockers, Inventory Availability, Troubleshoot Checks, and other Line settings to identify likely causes of limited delivery and recommend areas to review.

For more details, see Ask the Pontiac Assistant.

A useful troubleshooting order is: Eligible Requests → Bids → Impressions → Pacing

No Eligible Requests

If the Line has no Eligible Requests, first determine whether inventory exists that satisfies the full configuration.

Review the following:

  • Creative Audit Status: Pending Creatives cannot receive Eligible Requests until Pontiac’s Creative audit is complete. Rejected Creatives cannot serve.
  • Inventory Availability: Run an Inventory Availability Report using the Line’s current Targeting. Very low or zero estimated inventory may indicate overly restrictive Targeting.
  • Inventory Type Compatibility: Confirm that Web, In App, or Combined aligns with the selected Media Type, Device Type, and Creative Type.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting: Confirm that settings at both levels intersect. For example, Campaign Targeting for Florida combined with Line Targeting for Alabama would result in no eligible inventory.
  • Publisher Creative Requirements: Review Deal sample logs for Creative size, duration, bitrate, category, protocol, and other publisher requirements.
  • Contextual AI: Contextual AI should not be used with In App-only inventory because it relies on web-page content.
  • Content-Level Targeting: Confirm that targeted content values match the fields and formatting present in Deal sample requests.
  • Require Settings: If options such as Require Network or Require Channel are enabled, confirm that targeted Deals actually pass those fields.
  • Deal Activity: Review the Deal’s Last Served date to confirm that it is still active.
  • Deal Sample Logs: Confirm Deal floor, Creative requirements, Media Type, and other inventory characteristics align with the Line configuration.

Eligible Requests but No Bids

If Eligible Requests exist but no Bids are being placed, the request has passed Targeting but another serving requirement may be blocking bidding.

Review the following:

  • Publisher Approval: Determine whether the targeted Deal requires Creative approval from the publisher.
  • Sensitive Categories: Confirm that Deals explicitly permit any sensitive category assigned to the Creative.
  • Bid Configuration: Confirm that bids are set correctly for the targeted Deals.
  • Basic Bid: The Bid Price must meet the applicable Deal floor.
  • Advanced Bid Controls: When targeting multiple Deals, individual Deal bids can be configured independently.
  • Max Bid Price: To bid on all targeted Deals, the applicable maximum bid must meet the floor of each Deal.

If these settings appear correct and no Bids are being placed, contact the Help Center for additional investigation.

Bids but No Impressions

If Bids are being submitted but the Line is not winning Impressions, focus on auction competitiveness and publisher requirements.

Review the following:

  • Bid at Floor Price: If enabled, the Line bids at the Deal floor even when a higher maximum bid is configured. Disabling this option may allow a more competitive bid.
  • Bid Price: Test incremental bid increases to determine whether win rate improves.
  • Publisher Requirements: Publishers may have additional Creative specifications or approval requirements that affect whether submitted bids can win.

Deal sample logs and publisher specifications can provide additional detail about bitrate, VAST version, Creative dimensions, duration, and other requirements.

If the Line continues bidding without winning Impressions after these checks, contact the Help Center.

Impressions Are Serving but Delivery Is Low

If the Line is winning Impressions but is not pacing as expected, review whether the Line has enough available scale and enough budget flexibility to increase delivery.

Consider:

  • Inventory Availability: Confirm that sufficient estimated inventory exists for the current configuration.
  • Additional Deals: Run Inventory Availability without the current Deal restriction to identify other inventory sources that may provide scale.
  • Targeting Expansion: Consider adding inventory or expanding applicable Geo or Audience Targeting.
  • Bid Floors: Review Inventory Availability and Deal data to understand applicable bid floors.
  • Budget Multiplier: Increase the Budget Multiplier when additional daily pacing flexibility is appropriate. A 1.3 Budget Multiplier is typically recommended as a starting point when additional flexibility is needed.
  • Budget Allocation Weight: Allocate more Campaign budget to Lines that have available scale and are pacing effectively.
  • Catch-up ASAP: Enable Catch-up ASAP when a Campaign or Line is behind pace and should temporarily spend more aggressively. Catch-up ASAP overrides the Daily Budget and Daily Pacing Type until pacing returns to 100%.
  • Frequency & Recency: Increase Frequency Caps when the existing limits are unnecessarily restricting scale.
  • Bid Price: A low win rate may indicate that the Line’s bid is not competitive. Test incremental increases and review how win rate and delivery respond.

Important: Budget or pacing changes will not resolve a Line that is restricted by Targeting, Deal availability, Creative eligibility, publisher approval, or another serving requirement. Use Bid Data, Blockers, Inventory Availability, and Troubleshoot Checks together to identify the actual point of restriction before making changes.

Ask the Pontiac Assistant

The Pontiac Assistant can be used as an additional troubleshooting resource when reviewing Campaign and Line delivery.

Users can ask the Assistant questions about platform settings, troubleshooting messages, targeting configuration, pacing, Deals, creatives, and other Campaign setup questions.

For full documentation, see Pontiac Assistant: In Platform Chatbot.

For the most useful response, provide relevant context such as:

  • Advertiser ID or Name
  • Campaign ID or Name
  • Line ID or Name
  • Creative ID
  • Deal ID
  • Troubleshoot error or warning
  • Relevant Bid Metrics
  • Expected versus actual delivery behavior

Example questions include:

  • Why is Campaign ID: 1234 not spending?
  • What does this Troubleshoot warning mean?
  • Why do I have Eligible Requests but no Bids?
  • How do Campaign and Line targeting interact?
  • What could be preventing my creative from serving on a Deal?

The Pontiac Assistant can help guide troubleshooting, while the platform’s Bid Data, Blockers, Troubleshoot checks, and Inventory Availability tools provide the underlying delivery information needed for investigation.

Example

Prompt:

Why is Campaign ID: 1234 not spending?

Pontiac Assistant Response:

Here is what is going on with campaign 1234 (“ABC Example”).

Overall status: the campaign itself is active, and it did spend earlier — $100 of its $300 budget, but pacing shows it stopped spending. Looking at the bid funnel, requests and bids were healthy through August 1st at 5pm, then collapsed to essentially zero bids placed since then. So this isn’t “never delivered,” it’s “stopped delivering on the evening of the 1st.”

The cause, from the troubleshoot checks on both active lines (56789 “A” and 24680 “B”):

  1. Deal media type mismatch (the big one, and it lines up with the timing). Your change history shows that at 2026-08-15 16:55, a deal list called “CTV Deals” (100 deals) was added to this campaign’s targeting. Pontiac’s check says every one of those deals has a media type that doesn’t match the creatives currently associated with these lines (six html5 banner creatives). That addition is almost certainly what killed delivery — the timestamp matches exactly where your bid volume drops off in the bid-ratio data.

What I’d suggest:

  • Review the “CTV Deals” deal list (id 10) against the creatives on these lines. Either swap in creatives whose media type matches those deals, or remove/replace the mismatched deals from the line/campaign’s deal targeting.

Help Center

The Help Center is the primary way to contact the Pontiac team for platform support, troubleshooting, account questions, and feature requests.

Use the Help Center to submit a support ticket, provide relevant campaign or account details, attach screenshots or videos, and track responses from the Pontiac team in one place.

For the fastest response, include as much relevant information as possible when submitting your ticket, such as applicable IDs, names, screenshots, error messages, and a clear description of the issue.

Create a Support Ticket

Step 1: Navigate to the Help Center

You can access the Help Center in two ways:

  1. From anywhere in the platform, select the Messages icon in the top navigation to open the Help Center.
  2. Or, navigate to Admin > Help Center.

Step 2: Select Start New Conversation

Then select Start New Conversation to open the support ticket form and submit a new request to the Pontiac team.

  1. Click on the Help Center tab.
  2. Click the Start New Conversation button to open the support ticket form.
    • Here you will be able to submit a support ticket and the Pontiac team will efficiently and happily assist you with a variety of issues and questions.

Step 3: Fill Out the New Conversation Form

The following fields will appear:

  • Title: Provide a brief summary of the issue or request.
  • User: Your user name which will be auto-filled.
  • Date: The date of submission which will be auto-filled.
  • Urgency: Indicate how critical the issue is. Select Normal or Uber Important.
  • Status: Current status of the ticket. This is set to Open by default. Once the issue is resolved you or a Pontiac team member will change the status to Resolved to close out the ticket.
  • What can we help with?: Select the category that best matches your issue:
    • Product Support: Questions or issues related to the platform’s functionality.
    • Creative Issues: Problems related to creative (incorrect category, upload issue, macro questions, etc.).
    • Audience Onboarding: Requests or questions about importing or targeting audience segments (Liveramp or Transunion account set up, lookalike audience questions, creating custom pixel audiences, etc.)
    • Reporting: Questions or issues with analytics, metrics, or data exports.
    • Billing: Questions related to margin, invoicing, spend, or payment issues.
    • API: Issues or questions about API access, endpoints, or integrations.
    • White Label Issues: Problems specific to branded or custom instances of the platform.
    • Platform Suggestions: Requests for feature enhancements, improvements, or general feedback.
  • Message: Provide a detailed description of the issue or question. To help the Pontiac team respond as quickly as possible, include all relevant IDs and/or Names where applicable. Examples include: User ID, the Advertiser ID and Name, Campaign ID and Name, Line ID and Name, Creative ID or Name, Pixel ID or Name, etc. The more specific information you provide, the faster and more accurately the support team can address your request.
  • Additional Recipients: Email addresses of anyone who should receive update notifications for this conversation. Important: All responses must be made through the Help Center ticketing interface, not via the email notification, to ensure your updates are properly logged and tracked.
  • Attachments: Upload screenshots or videos to support your ticket. This is especially useful for bug-related issues, as visual evidence can help the support team diagnose and resolve problems more quickly.

Step 4: Submit or Save

  • Click Save to submit the ticket to the Pontiac team.
  • Click Cancel if you do not want to submit.

The Pontiac team will review your ticket and provide assistance as quickly as possible.

View and Manage Support Tickets

After a ticket has been submitted, you can return to the Help Center at any time to view the conversation, review responses from the Pontiac team, provide additional information, or update the ticket status.

View a Response

When the Pontiac team responds to a ticket, the response will be added to the existing Help Center conversation.

  1. Open the Help Center by selecting the Messages icon in the top navigation or navigating to Admin > Help Center.
  2. Select the conversation you want to review.
  3. Review the latest response and the previous conversation history.
  4. Add a new response if additional information or follow-up is needed.

If email notifications are enabled for you or any Additional Recipients, an email may also be sent when the conversation is updated. All responses should still be made through the Help Center, rather than replying directly to the notification email, so the complete conversation remains logged in the ticket.

Close a Ticket

Once the issue or request has been resolved, the ticket can be closed by updating the Status from Open to Resolved. Either you or a Pontiac team member may mark the conversation as Resolved once no additional assistance is needed.

Resolved conversations remain available in the Help Center so you can refer back to the discussion if needed.

Reopen a Ticket

If additional assistance is needed after a ticket has been resolved, reopen the existing conversation by changing the Status from Resolved back to Open and adding a new response with any relevant details.

Whenever possible, reopen the existing ticket when your question relates to the same issue. This keeps the previous troubleshooting history, attachments, and responses together and gives the Pontiac team helpful context.

For a new or unrelated issue, select Start New Conversation and create a separate support ticket.

Campaign vs. Line Level Targeting

Targeting settings in Pontiac can be applied at either the Campaign level and/or the Line level. Understanding how these interact is key to ensuring your impressions remain eligible.

The Intersection Rule

  • Campaign level targeting acts as a global filter for all line items under that campaign.
  • Line level targeting applies only to the specific line.
  • When targeting is applied at both levels, the effective targeting is the intersection of the two:
    • Effective Targeting = Campaign Targeting ∩ Line Targeting
  • This means an impression must satisfy all conditions applied at both levels in order to be eligible.

Best Practices

  • Use campaign level targeting when the parameter applies universally to all lines (e.g., every line must serve only in the US).
  • Use line level targeting when the parameter is unique to a strategy (e.g., one line targets ZIPs in California, another in New York).
  • Apply settings at one level only whenever possible, unless the intent is to explicitly restrict eligible inventory via intersection.

Creative Issues

Rejected Creatives

Creative audit results will be displayed under ‘Audit Status’ next to the name of the Creative, in the ‘Creatives’ section of the Advertiser, Campaign, or Line. If your Creative is rejected, a red box will appear here. Hover over this symbol to view additional information about the audit status. Pontiac Intelligence is unable to change the audit results of Xandr/AppNexus & RiskIQ. 

Audit results can only be changed by resolving the issue that caused the Creative to be rejected. If you think your Creative was rejected incorrectly, reach out to the Pontiac Team through the Help Center.

  • Rejected, Does not display properly: First check to see if there is a preview of the Creative in the green preview box in Pontiac and verify that the Creative fits in the designated area. If it does not fit correctly in the box you may have chosen the incorrect Creative size. You can edit the size then select ‘Save’. The Creative will be sent to audit and this process may take up to one business day to complete.
  • Rejected, Fails to render: If you are using an ad server tag, verify that the code you uploaded in Pontiac renders on your end. Check with your ad server that the tag is active and available. Email your Account Manager or reach out through the Help Center for additional help.
  • Rejected, Creative brand does not match Creative landing page: The brand displayed in the ad should match the brand of the website that the ad is driving users to. In order for this Creative to be accepted, you must change the brand displayed in the Creative, or change the Click URL to drive to this brand’s website. If you are driving to a third-party marketplace or other page that does not depict your branding, such as Amazon, check the ‘Use Alternative Mobile Click Url’ and enter a URL that contains the same branding represented in your ad. The audit team will use this URL to validate the branding represented in the creative. This will not be used as the landing page for the creative. Once you have edited the Creative details, ‘Save’ and close the Creative upload window. The Creative will be sent to audit and this process may take up to one business day to complete
  • Rejected, Creative does not click through properly: Your Creative will be rejected if the Creative is clicked and does not open a landing page, if the Creative is clicked and a landing page opens, but no content loads or if the Creative is clicked and a landing page loads, but an error keeps any content from being displayed. In any of these cases you must either update the landing page and then click ‘Reaudit’ or change the Click URL for the Creative and click ‘save’. The Creative will be sent to audit and this process may take up to one business day to complete.
  • Rejected, Malicious: Your account will be suspended, you will be notified in writing and an investigation will take place within three business days. Pontiac clients who upload ads deemed malicious will lose access to the platform and forfeit deposited funds.

Incorrect IAB Creative Category

The IAB category assigned to your creative can be found by clicking on the creative name to open the creative details window. This field is displayed below the creative in the ‘Creative Category’ field:

These categories come from the Open RTB Specs, that can be found here in table 5.1 ‘Content Categories’: Open RTB Specs v2.5

If you believe your creative has been assigned an incorrect IAB category, please submit a ticket through the Help Center. Be sure to include the Advertiser Name and ID associated with the creative in question so we can assist you promptly.

ETA Guidance

TaskETA
Pontiac Creative ApprovalUp to 24 hours
Lat/Long Audiences2-3 Days
Audiences Pushed To Microsoft3-4 Days
Custom Audience Segment Requests2-3 Days
Geo-Fence Audiences2-3 Days
CRM AudiencesUp to 1 week

Overview

What is Pontiac MCP?

Pontiac MCP (Model Context Protocol) is a secure integration that allows ChatGPT and Claude Code to connect directly to the Pontiac DSP platform.

It enables users to:

  • View and manage advertisers, campaigns, and lines
  • Pull performance data and pacing insights
  • Create and update campaigns, creatives, and targeting
  • Explore inventory, deals, and audiences

In short: it lets you operate Pontiac using natural language inside ChatGPT or Claude Code instead of navigating the UI manually.

Once connected, you can ask ChatGPT things like:

  • “Show me campaigns that are under pacing”
  • “Create a new CTV campaign for $10K in California”
  • “What’s my spend this week by campaign?”

This turns ChatGPT into a hands-on campaign management assistant.

What is the MCP Best Used For?

Pontiac MCP is most powerful when used to speed up workflows, reduce manual effort, and surface insights instantly.

Campaign Management

  • Quickly create, update, or duplicate campaigns without navigating multiple UI pages
  • Make bulk edits or adjustments using simple prompts

Performance Monitoring

  • Instantly check pacing, spend, and performance across campaigns
  • Identify underperforming or overspending campaigns in seconds

Troubleshooting & Optimization

  • Diagnose delivery issues (e.g., under pacing, no eligible bids)
  • Quickly adjust targeting, budgets, or creatives

Data Exploration

  • Pull reports and break down performance without building manually in the interface
  • Ask questions and get answers in real time instead of digging through dashboards

Operational Efficiency

  • Reduce time spent on repetitive tasks
  • Minimize context switching between tools
  • Enable faster decision-making and execution

MCP turns Pontiac into a conversational interface for campaign management, helping you move faster, work smarter, and focus on strategy instead of manual setup.

ChatGPT Setup

Follow the instructions below to connect to the Pontiac MCP through ChatGPT:

  1. Go to ChatGPT
  2. Open ChatGPT Settings
    • Click your profile (bottom left)
    • Select Settings

3. Navigate to Apps / Connectors

4. Select Advance Settings > Create App

5. Input the following information:

  • Give the app a name: For example Pontiac DSP
  • Enter the MCP Server URL: https://ai.pontiac.media/mcp
  • Check the I understand and want to continue checkbox
  • Click Create.

6. The screen will then take you to the Pontiac login console page. Enter your Username and Password as normal. Click Login.

7. Ensure MCP connection.

8. Start playing around! Some examples to kick off with:

Connection

Check on active advertisers

Get information about specific advertisers: Number of Lines

Claude Code Setup

This guide covers installing Claude Code on Windows and connecting it to the Pontiac MCP server for programmatic campaign management and data access.

  1. Install Claude Code
    • Run in PowerShell: irm https://claude.ai/install.ps1 | iex
    • Install location: C:\Users\.local\bin\claude.exe
  2. Configure PATH
    • Add your User PATH: C:\Users\.local\bin
    • Restart PowerShell
    • Verify installation: claude –help
      • Expected output: CLI help output with commands like mcp, agents, auth, etc.
  3. Add Pontiac MCP Server
    • Run: claude mcp add –transport http pontiac https://ai.pontiac.media/mcp
    • Verify MCP registration: claude mcp list
      • Expected output: pontiac: https://ai.pontiac.media/mcp (HTTP) – Needs authentication
  4. Launch Claude Code
    • Run: claude
    • Initial setup:
      • Select a theme
      • Confirm workspace access
  5. Authenticate Pontiac MCP
    • Inside Claude Code run: /mcp
    • Select pontiac
    • Complete authentication via browser or provided link and enter your pontiac username and password as normal
    • Return to Claude Code
  6. Confirm Connection
    • Run: /mcp
    • Expected output:

7. Run prompts to interact with the Pontiac MCP to manage campaigns.

Prompts

Below are some example natural language prompts to easily start using the Pontiac MCP!

Connection

Prompt: check pontiac dsp connection

Example response:

Please note that periods of inactivity will require you to reconnect and reauthenticate.

ChatGPT Reconnection Steps:

  1. Navigate to account settings on the bottom left corner.
  2. Select Apps.
  3. Click the three dots next to disconnect.
  4. Click the Reconnect button.
  5. Use Pontiac credentials to authenticate.

Active Advertisers

Prompt: check all active advertisers

Example response:

Creatives Check

Prompt: what type of creatives are uploaded to the papaya king advertiser?

Example Response:

Prompt: what creatives under rock hard ads have been approved?

Performance

Prompt: break down performance by exchange / device / geo for {insert campaign name here}

Example Response:

Overview

What is the Pontiac Assistant?

With great power comes great responsibility. – Stan Lee

The Pontiac Assistant brings Pontiac MCP capabilities directly into the Pontiac platform, allowing users to interact with the DSP using natural language without leaving the interface.

Instead of navigating through multiple screens, manually building reports, or searching for individual campaign settings, users can ask the Assistant questions or give it instructions directly within Pontiac.

The Assistant brings Pontiac’s automation, campaign management tools, reporting, and documentation together in one conversational interface. It can perform work in bulk, create and edit campaigns and lines, analyze performance, troubleshoot delivery, and guide you through campaign setup from scratch.

Use the Assistant deliberately. Be specific about what you want it to do and review the information it returns before relying on it.

Beta: The Pontiac Assistant is currently a beta feature. It can make real changes to your Pontiac account and live campaign configurations. Review proposed changes before confirming them and verify completed changes in the platform afterward.

Anything created through the Assistant is inactive by default and will not begin serving automatically. Editing an existing campaign or line also does not change its active status unless activation is explicitly requested.

How to Use It

Where to Find It

The Pontiac Assistant can be accessed directly from the main Pontiac navigation bar. Select the blue chat icon in the upper-right corner of the platform, next to the notifications bell, to open the Pontiac Assistant.

Once opened, enter a question or instruction in the chat. Prompts can be written naturally—you do not need to know API endpoints, database fields, or MCP tool names.

Managing Your Assistant Window and Chat History

  • Minimize the Assistant:
    • You can minimize the Pontiac Assistant at any time while continuing to work elsewhere in the platform.
    • Select the minimize icon at the top of the Assistant window to collapse the chat.
    • To reopen it, select the plus icon between New chat and the X.
    • Minimizing the Assistant allows you to move between the conversation and other areas of Pontiac without ending the chat.
  • Close the Assistant:
    • Select the X at the top of the Assistant window to close it.
    • Closing the Assistant removes the chat window from your current view, but you can reopen the Assistant at any time by selecting the blue chat icon in the main navigation bar.
  • Review Previous Chats:
    • Previously saved conversations can be reopened from the Assistant’s chat history. This allows you to review earlier questions, responses, recommendations, and completed workflows without starting over.
    • Select the arrow button next to the Pontiac Assistant name to view your previous chats.
    • Click each rows x to clear the chat from the history.
    • Chat history is isolated by both user and seat:
      • User: Your conversations are private to your Pontiac user. Other users within the same seat do not see your Assistant chat history.
      • Seat: Chat history is also specific to the seat in which the conversation occurred. If you have access to multiple seats, conversations from one seat will not appear while working within another seat.
  • Continuing a Previous Conversation
    • Select a previous chat to reopen it and review the conversation history. You can then continue asking follow-up questions within that same conversation.
    • Keep in mind that campaign settings and performance data may have changed since the conversation originally took place. When returning to an older chat, ask the Assistant to recheck the current setup or performance before relying on previously returned information.

How to Upload a Creative

Creatives can also be uploaded directly through the Pontiac Assistant, either individually or in bulk.

  1. Open the Pontiac Assistant.
  2. Select the + button next to Send.
  3. Choose the creative file you want to upload.
  4. Send the file to the Assistant and follow the prompts to complete the creative upload.

The Pontiac Assistant accepts the following creative formats:

  • Image
  • ZIP
  • Video
  • Audio

Starting A Conversation

Now that you’ve seen how the Pontiac Assistant works, start experimenting with your own prompts.

Ask questions, explore campaign performance, review setup, troubleshoot delivery, or try supported bulk updates. The more specific you are about what you want to accomplish, the more useful the Assistant can be.

A few ideas to try:

  • “Show me all active campaigns.”
  • “Which campaigns are under pacing?”
  • “Summarize the setup for Campaign 14142.”
  • “Why is this line not spending?”
  • “What creatives are approved for this advertiser?”
  • “Show me performance by exchange for the last 7 days.”
  • “How does Primetime pacing work?”
  • “Walk me through creating a new campaign.”

You can also ask follow-up questions and build on the same conversation rather than starting over.

Start simple, review the results, and keep exploring. The Pontiac Assistant is designed to help you spend less time navigating the platform and more time getting things done.

Not sure where to begin? Ask the Assistant what it can do.

Example Prompt: What capabilities do you have?

Example Output:

I’m your Pontiac RTB assistant — I help manage programmatic advertising campaigns on the Pontiac DSP. Here’s what I can do:

Setting things up

  • Create and manage advertisers (brands/clients)
  • Create campaigns (budgets, flight dates, targeting)
  • Create lines (bid prices, geo/device/inventory targeting)
  • Create and associate creatives (video, display, audio, CTV, HTML5)
  • Set up conversion tracking pixels and audiences (custom, third-party, or ART/lookalike)

Targeting options

  • Geography (countries, states/regions, DMAs, zip codes)
  • Device types, browsers, operating systems
  • Exchanges, deal lists, site/app lists
  • Dayparting, frequency capping
  • Private marketplace deals (browse, import, and build deal lists)

Budget and pacing

  • Even or ASAP pacing
  • Daily budget caps
  • Flighted budgets (splitting a campaign’s budget across dated periods, with optional rollover)

Monitoring and optimization

  • Performance metrics by campaign, line, creative, geography, device, exchange, deal, or day
  • Real-time bid data and pacing reports
  • Custom reports (flexible dimensions/metrics, exportable)
  • Bulk updates across multiple campaigns or lines
  • Cloning a proven campaign as a starting point for a new one

Other useful things

  • Searching across all your entities by name or ID
  • Reference data lookups (DMAs, regions, exchanges, IAB categories, etc.)
  • Templates for quick campaign/line setup
  • A guided step-by-step campaign builder for more complex setups
  • Wiki search for how-to and conceptual questions about the platform
  • Support ticketing if you need to reach the Pontiac team

Example Prompts

Bulk Update: Increase the bid price by $1.00 on all active lines under Campaign 14142

Currently, the line has the following bid prices for the following 13 lines.

Example Response:

All 13 lines under campaign 14142 are currently active.

Here’s the current state and the new $1.00 increase:

Group A — currently $24.00 → new $25.00 (4 lines)

  • 72751 CTV – Premium Endemic – Channels
  • 72752 CTV – Premium Endemic – Series
  • 72753 CTV – Premium Endemic – Networks
  • 72754 CTV – Premium Endemic – Apps

Group B — currently $25.00 → new $26.00 (7 lines)

  • 72755 CTV – Value Endemic – Channels
  • 72756 CTV – Value Endemic – Networks
  • 72757 CTV – Value Endemic – Apps
  • 72758 CTV – Premium Reach – Channels
  • 72759 CTV – Premium Reach – Series
  • 72760 CTV – Premium Reach – Networks
  • 72761 CTV – Premium Reach – Apps

Group C — currently $14.00 → new $15.00 (2 lines)

  • 72762 CTV – RON Reach
  • 72763 CTV – Open Exchange

Reminder: this bulk update will set all 13 lines to inactive as an enforced side effect of the MCP write — they will stop serving and you’ll need to reactivate them afterward in the Pontiac UI.

Shall I proceed with these three bulk updates?

User Response: Yes

Example Response:

All 13 bid price updates completed successfully:

  • Lines 72751–72754: now $25.00 CPM
  • Lines 72755–72761: now $26.00 CPM
  • Lines 72762–72763: now $15.00 CPM

Result:

Refreshing the page, you can see that the bid prices did increase by $1.00.

Upload A Creative

Example Prompt: Upload this banner under advertiser id: 966

Example Response:

I can upload Pontiac_display_300x250.jpg as a first-party banner creative under advertiser 966 (lily_tests). A couple of things I need to confirm before creating it:

  1. Name for the creative — I’ll suggest “Pontiac Display 300×250” unless you’d prefer something else.
  2. Click-through URL — where should clicks on this banner land? (I’ll default to the advertiser’s site, https://pontiac.media, if you don’t have a specific landing page.)

Let me know, or just say “go ahead with defaults.”

Proceed with the upload and refresh the page to ensure the creative uploaded successfully! The creative will automatically go through Pontiac’s auditing system and once approved, is ready to begin serving impressions.

Start Exploring

Now that you’ve seen how the Pontiac Assistant works, start experimenting with your own prompts.

Ask questions, explore campaign performance, review setup, troubleshoot delivery, or try supported bulk updates. The more specific you are about what you want to accomplish, the more useful the Assistant can be.

A few ideas to try:

  • “Show me all active campaigns.”
  • “Which campaigns are under pacing?”
  • “Summarize the setup for Campaign 14142.”
  • “Why is this line not spending?”
  • “What creatives are approved for this advertiser?”
  • “Show me performance by exchange for the last 7 days.”
  • “How does Primetime pacing work?”
  • “Walk me through creating a new campaign.”

You can also ask follow-up questions and build on the same conversation rather than starting over.

Start simple, review the results, and keep exploring. The Pontiac Assistant is designed to help you spend less time navigating the platform and more time getting things done.

Seats Overview

A Seat is the top level account structure within Pontiac. It represents the primary workspace through which users access and manage Advertisers, Audiences, account settings, and other platform functionality.

Seat level settings determine items such as:

  • Users and access permissions
  • Seat timezone and preferences
  • LiveRamp and TransUnion addendum acceptance
  • GDPR eligibility and configuration
  • Access to Sub Seats, when enabled

Advertisers are created within a Seat and contain the Campaigns, Lines, Creatives, and Pixels used for campaign setup and delivery. Audiences are managed at the Seat level and can be applied to eligible Campaigns or Lines.

Seat Hierarchy

For a standard Seat, the Pontiac hierarchy is:

Seat
├── Audiences
└── Advertisers
    ├── Creatives
    ├── Pixels
    └── Campaigns
        └── Lines

Users and Seat level preferences are managed through Admin > Seat Settings and control access and configuration for the Seat.

Master Seat and Sub Seat Hierarchy

Some accounts may be configured as a Master Seat with one or more associated Sub Seats. This allows users to access and manage multiple Seats through one central Master Seat.

Master Seat
├── Audiences
└── Sub-Seats
    ├── Audiences
    └── Advertisers
        ├── Creatives
        ├── Pixels
        └── Campaigns
            └── Lines

Audiences created at the Master Seat level may be made available to associated Sub Seats for targeting while remaining managed by the Master Seat. Sub Seats can also maintain their own audiences.

For more information, see the Sub Seats section below.

Seat Settings

Users

Create New Users

  1. Navigate to Admin and then to the Seat Settings tab.
  2. Click ‘Create New User’ to add a new user.
  3. Input the user’s Name and Email.
  4. Check the Read-Only box to give the user view-only access, or leave it unchecked to grant full access.

Edit Seat Users

  1. Navigate to Admin and then to the Seat Settings tab.
  2. Click the ‘Edit’ button on the far right to edit the user’s role.
  3. Choose the appropriate role:
    • Seat-admin
    • User
    • Read-only.
    • Note that if user roles are changed, the user will have to log out and log back in before the new role changes take effect.

Special Cases

  • If a user is deleted, a new user cannot be added with the same email address as the deleted user.
  • If you need to change a username or re-enable a previously deleted user, please create a ticket in our Help Center, and our engineering team will assist with the request.

In order to create new users, the user must be an Admin. Reach out to your Account Manager or through the Pontiac Help Center if you need additional assistance.

Addendums

Users can accept the LiveRamp and TransUnion addendums here.

Users must sign the applicable agreement before uploading, distributing, or using customer targeting data through LiveRamp or TransUnion in the Pontiac platform.

This ensures the user has confirmed they have the necessary legal rights, permissions, consent, and privacy compliance before Pontiac or the data partner processes the data on their behalf.

Liveramp

Pontiac requires users to confirm they have the legal rights, permissions, consent, and privacy compliance needed before Pontiac or LiveRamp can process customer targeting data on their behalf.

Signing this agreement is required for users who want to upload or distribute customer targeting data through LiveRamp using the Pontiac platform.

Transunion

Pontiac requires users to confirm they have the legal rights, permissions, consent, and privacy compliance needed before Pontiac or TransUnion can process customer targeting data on their behalf.

Signing this agreement is required for users who want to upload or distribute customer targeting data through TransUnion using the Pontiac platform.

Preferences

Preferences

Choose your Seat’s timezone, which defines when the Seat’s day starts and ends and establishes day boundaries across the platform. Campaign pacing and delivery are controlled separately at the Campaign level and may use a different timezone.

Note: All billing is calculated in UTC, regardless of the Seat or Campaign timezone settings.

Download the full list of supported timezones here or directly in the platform.

timezonesDownload

GDPR Compliant Seats

We are live with the Bidder in Europe. Due to EU/UK privacy restrictions, all data must be kept in the EU/UK. Therefore, you must register for a separate EU/UK seat to launch campaigns in Europe. Please reach out through the Help Center or to your account executive with questions.

For seats with GDPR enabled, the default country in the targeting section will now be set to United Kingdom (UK) instead of United States (US).

This applies to the country targeting field in both:

  • Campaign targeting
  • Line targeting

Users can still update the country targeting as needed, but for GDPR-enabled seats, the default selection will be United Kingdom.

GDPR Countries

The following are the countries that are restricted by GDPR and are only available in GDPR compliant seats.

CountryCode
AustriaAT
BelgiumBE
BulgariaBG
CroatiaHR
CyprusCY
Czech RepublicCZ
DenmarkDK
EstoniaEE
FinlandFI
FranceFR
GermanyDE
GreeceGR
HungaryHU
IrelandIE
ItalyIT
LatviaLV
LithuaniaLT
LuxembourgLU
MaltaMT
NetherlandsNL
PolandPL
PortugalPT
RomaniaRO
SlovakiaSK
SloveniaSl
SpainES
SwedenSE
IcelandIS
LiechtensteinLI
NorwayNO
United KingdomGB

GDPR Query String Macros

In the edit Pixel dialog box, two optional GDPR query string macros are available:

  • GDPR: GDPR
  • GDPR Consent: GDPR_CONSENT

These GDPR macros are also supported as Creative macros where applicable. For the full list of supported Creative macros, see the documentation here: Supported Macros

Work with your web developer to ensure these placeholders are implemented with the appropriate values for your integration.

GDPR Third Party Tag Handling

When adding a third-party tag, Pontiac validates the macros included in the tag before it can be saved. This helps prevent tags containing unsupported or incorrectly formatted macros from being added to a Creative.

1. General Macro Validation

  • If a third-party tag contains an unsupported macro:
    • The tag cannot be saved.
    • A warning message is displayed in red beneath the tag field indicating that an unsupported macro was detected.

2. GDPR Macro Handling

  • The following GDPR macro formats are supported in third-party Creative tags:
    • ${GDPR}
    • ${GDPR_CONSENT_X}
      • For ${GDPR_CONSENT_X}, the trailing value represents the applicable vendor ID and is dynamic. For example:

If a GDPR macro does not follow a supported format, the tag cannot be saved and a validation message will be displayed. Please contact us through the Pontiac Help Center.

For the full list of supported macros, see Supported Macros

Sub Seats

If Sub Seats are enabled for a Master Seat, they can be accessed through the Master Seat. This allows Master Seat users to view, manage, and switch into associated Sub Seats from one central account.

To learn more about enabling Sub Seats for your account, contact your Account Manager or submit a request through the Pontiac Help Center.

Admin

The Admin Console provides quick access to account-level settings, billing, support resources, notifications, and Pontiac documentation.

Users can access the Admin Console from the main navigation menu.

Billing

Seat Settings

The Seat Settings page covers:

  • Users
    • Creating and managing Seat users
    • Admin, User, and Read-Only roles
    • User access and special cases
  • Addendums
    • LiveRamp and TransUnion addendums
  • Preferences
    • Seat timezone configuration

For additional information on Seat Settings, including creating and editing users, user roles, LiveRamp and TransUnion addendums, and Seat-level timezone preferences, see the full Seat Settings documentation here: Seat Settings

Help Center

The Help Center allows users to submit support tickets and communicate directly with the Pontiac team.

Users can access the Help Center by either:

  • Clicking the Messages icon from anywhere in the platform
  • Navigating to Admin > Help Center

The Help Center documentation covers:

  • Creating a new support ticket
  • Selecting urgency and issue type
  • Providing relevant Advertiser, Campaign, Line, Creative, Pixel, or User details
  • Adding recipients and attachments
  • Viewing responses and continuing support conversations
  • Closing resolved tickets
  • Reopening tickets when additional assistance is needed
  • Tracking ticket status and conversation history

For additional information on submitting and managing support tickets, see the full Help Center documentation here: Help Center

Notifications

The Notifications section displays messages from the Pontiac team that may relate to campaign recommendations, account issues, or other important information.

When there is an active notification, a bell icon will appear in the Admin navigation between the Help Center Messages and Assistant options. This lets users know there is a notification available to review.

Users can open Notifications by either:

  • Clicking the bell icon
  • Navigating to Admin > Notifications

Use the Filter Status options to toggle between:

  • Open: Currently active notifications that may require review or action.
  • Dismissed: Notifications that have already been dismissed.
  • All: Displays both open and dismissed notifications.

Review this section regularly to stay informed about recommendations, account-related issues, and other updates from Pontiac.

Wiki

Selecting the Wiki tab will bring you to Pontiac Intelligence’s Full Wiki documentation.

The Wiki is organized into sections so users can browse documentation by topic, including:

  • Bidder Documentation
  • Platform Updates
  • DOOH Documentation
  • ART Documentation
  • Analytics Documentation
  • API Documentation
  • Product Offerings
  • Video Tutorials
  • Case Studies
  • Industry Education
  • Partnership Programs
  • Pontiac Partners
  • Pontiac Resellers
  • About Pontiac

Select View all pages within any section to browse the articles available in that category.

Search Bar

If you are looking for something specific, use the Search bar at the top of the Wiki and enter relevant keywords, such as campaign setup, creative upload, reporting, or pixels.

Search results will display articles containing those keywords and highlight the matching terms, making it easier to quickly find the most relevant documentation.

Explore the different sections or use Search whenever you need more information about a feature, setup workflow, troubleshooting question, or Pontiac product.

Audiences Overview

An Audience is a group of users, devices, locations, or content that can be used to refine who or what a Campaign or Line is eligible to target.

Audiences are managed at the Seat level, rather than within an individual Advertiser. Once an Audience is available to the Seat, it can be associated with eligible Campaigns or Lines for targeting or anti-targeting.

The Audiences section is organized into the following categories:

  • Custom Audiences: First-party audiences created directly in Pontiac using data such as IP Ranges, Zips, IFAs, Hashed IPs, Pixel IPs, or Full URLs.
    • Pixel IP Audiences: Remarketing audiences automatically created from qualifying Pontiac Pixels added as a Creative Impression Tracker and displayed within Custom Audiences.
  • Contextual AI: Content-based audiences created from example URLs, descriptive text, or Pontiac-curated contextual segments.
  • ART Audiences: Public ART Audiences or ART audiences created from Audience Research or Audience Discovery reports.
  • Third Party Audiences: Audiences provided through external data partners and integrated audience sources.
    • Third Party: Third-party data segments available through the TransUnion Data Marketplace.
    • Onboarded / CRM Audiences: First-party customer data onboarded through integrations such as LiveRamp or TransUnion.
    • Geo Fencing: Geo Fence Audiences use OnSpot data to identify users who have previously visited a specified geographic area. Geo fences can be configured using a custom Geo Fence Shape or a Latitude/Longitude Radius.

Audience availability, supported inventory, pricing, and setup requirements may vary by Audience type.

Audience Hierarchy

For a standard Seat, Audiences are managed alongside Advertisers at the Seat level:

Seat
├── Audiences
└── Advertisers
    ├── Creatives
    ├── Pixels
    └── Campaigns
        └── Lines

Audiences can then be associated with a Campaign or Line depending on the desired targeting strategy.

For accounts using a Master Seat and Sub Seats:

Master Seat
├── Audiences
└── Sub-Seats
    ├── Audiences
    └── Advertisers
        ├── Creatives
        ├── Pixels
        └── Campaigns
            └── Lines

Audiences created at the Master Seat level may be made available to associated Sub Seats for targeting while remaining managed by the Master Seat. Sub Seats can also create and manage their own Audiences.

The sections below explain each Audience type, how it is created or onboarded, and how it can be used for Campaign or Line targeting.

Custom Audiences

Custom Audiences are first-party audiences created or generated within Pontiac using data available to the Advertiser or Seat. They can be used to target users, devices, geographic areas, or specific web content.

Custom Audiences are managed under Bidder > Audiences > Custom and can be associated with eligible Campaigns or Lines for targeting or anti-targeting.

Custom Audiences include:

  • IP Ranges
  • Zips
  • IFAs
  • Hashed IPs
  • Full URLs
  • Lat Long Audiences
  • Pixel IP Audiences

Custom Audiences expire 180 days after they are created unless otherwise noted. The expiration date is displayed in the Custom Audiences table. An expired Audience can be reactivated by opening the Audience, selecting Active, and clicking Save.

If an Audience appears in gray and cannot be associated, it may be expired or incompatible with the selected Creative or inventory type.

Create a Custom Audience

To create a new Custom Audience:

  1. Navigate to Audiences > Custom.
  2. Select New Custom Audience.
  3. Enter an Audience Name.
  4. Select the applicable Audience Type.
  5. Enter the Audience data using the required format for that Audience type.
  6. Select Save.

The following Custom Audience types can be created manually:

  1. IP Ranges
  2. Zips
  3. IFA
  4. Hashed IPs
  5. Full URLs
  6. Lat Long

Pixel IP Audiences are remarketing audiences automatically generated from qualifying Pontiac Pixel activity and displayed under Audiences > Custom. See the below section for all of the details.

Enter the Audience data according to the indicated format. These Audiences will automatically be available to associate to any Campaign. To learn how to associate Custom Audience Segments to a Campaign or Line, continue to the following documentation: Associate Segments

  1. IP Ranges

Use IP Ranges to target individual IP addresses or ranges of IP addresses.

  • Line Format: [IP] or [Start IP],[End IP]
  • Line Example: 63.148.81.24
  • Range Example: 234.123.0.13,234.123.10.15
  1. Zips

Use Zip Audiences to target specific postal areas. A Zip Audience can contain up to 100,000 records.

Enter one Zip Code per line followed by the Country Code. If the Country Code is omitted, Pontiac defaults to the United States.

  • Line Format:[Zip Code],[Country Code]
  • Example: 03102,US
  1. IFA

Use IFA Audiences to target known device advertising identifiers. IFAs may be obtained from Pontiac reporting or log-level data from previous campaigns.

Enter one IFA per line.

  • Line Format:[Device IFA]
  • Example: 735612e1-d4b9-40ec-83da-9ea0d3c5ceb3
  1. Hashed IPs

Use Hashed IP Audiences to target Pontiac-hashed IPs obtained from Pontiac reporting, including:

  • IP Path to Conversion reports
  • Log Level reports
  • IP Pixel Page Visits reports

Only IPs that were hashed by Pontiac can be used.

  • Line Format:[IP Hash]
  • Example: 225f334d5db5e4c824d49cd7b03fc73ae21d1c715573a7c1a86abb7a11a80364
  1. Full URLs

Use Full URL Audiences to target specific page URLs, such as individual articles or content pages. These Audiences can be used for eligible web or OLV inventory.

Enter one URL per line and do not include the URL scheme.

  • Line Format:[Full URL]
  • Example: www.viki.com/videos/1153464v
  1. Lat Long

Use Lat Long Audiences to target geographic areas surrounding specific Latitude / Longitude coordinates.

A single radius is applied to every coordinate included in the Audience.

  1. Select Lat Long from the Type dropdown.
  2. Select the Radius (meters).
    • Minimum: 150 meters
    • Maximum: 1,000 meters
  3. Enter one Latitude / Longitude pair per line using:
    • [Latitude],[Longitude]

Example:

45.5189,-122.6772
45.4958,-122.8192
44.0533,-123.0897

If the radius is set to 500 meters, Pontiac applies that 500-meter radius to each coordinate included in the Audience.

Invalid or improperly formatted records must be corrected before the Audience can be saved.

Common use cases include:

  • Retail locations
  • Dealerships
  • Event venues
  • Campuses
  • Points of interest
  • Other known geographic coordinates

Lat Long targeting is useful when a Campaign requires more precise geographic targeting than broader ZIP, DMA, state, or regional targeting.

Viewing & Managing Custom Audiences

Navigate to Audiences > Custom to view and manage Custom Audiences available to the Seat.

The Custom Audiences table provides a summary of each audience and can be used to search, filter, review audience status, and open existing audiences for additional details or edits.

The following information is displayed for each Custom Audience:

  • Status: Indicates whether the audience is currently Active or Inactive.
  • Custom Audience ID: Pontiac’s unique identifier for the audience.
  • Name: The name assigned to the audience. Select the audience name to open and review its configuration.
  • Type: Identifies the type of audience data, such as Zips, Pixel IPs, or Lat Long.
  • Expiration Date: Displays the date and time the audience is scheduled to expire, when applicable.
  • Records: Displays the number of records currently included in the audience. The meaning of a record depends on the audience type. For example, a Lat Long audience with three coordinate rows will display 3 Records.

Use the table controls to:

  • Use the Search field to locate a Custom Audience by name or other searchable table values.
  • Use Filter Status to control which audiences are displayed, such as Active, Inactive, or All audiences.
  • The Page Size control determines how many Custom Audiences are shown on each page. Use the page selector to move between pages when additional audiences are available.

Edit an Existing Custom Audience

To edit an existing Audience:

  1. Navigate to Audiences > Custom.
  2. Select the Audience Name.
  3. Update the Audience as needed.
  4. Select Save.

When editing:

  • Type cannot be changed after the audience has been created.
  • The audience can be set to Active or Inactive.
  • Existing audience records can be updated, added, or removed as applicable for the audience type.
  • The Records value will update to reflect the currently saved Audience data.

The Records value in the Custom Audiences table will update to reflect the current number of records saved in the audience.

Because Custom Audiences may already be associated with active Campaigns or Lines, review existing targeting before making significant changes.

Pixel IP / Remarketing Audiences

Pixel IP Audiences are remarketing audiences automatically generated from qualifying Pontiac Pixels and displayed under Audiences > Custom.

They can be built from different types of exposure:

  • Website activity: Place a Pontiac Pixel on an Advertiser’s website, such as the homepage, product page, or checkout page, to build an Audience of qualifying visitors.
  • Creative exposure: Add a Pontiac Pixel to a Creative as an impression tracker to build an Audience of users exposed to that Creative. These users can later be retargeted, including through a different media type as part of a cross-channel strategy.

Create a Pixel IP Audience

When creating or editing a Pontiac Pixel, the following Audience settings are available:

  • Create Custom Audience: Creates a Pixel IP Audience from qualifying Pixel fires.
  • Days to Live: Determines the number of days each record remains active in the Audience.
    • The default value is 180 days. Common windows include 30, 60, or 90 days.
    • Updating the Days to Live value applies only to future records added to the Audience.
  • Pixel placement on a website or as a Creative Impression Tracker.

Once generated, the Audience automatically appears under Audiences > Custom using the associated Pixel name and ID. The Audience begins populating as qualifying Pixel activity is recorded.

When viewing the Audience, the displayed IP list is limited to a sample of 30,000 records, while the Records field displays the total Audience record count.

Pixel Placement

The Pixel can be implemented in one of two ways:

  • Website Remarketing: Place the Pixel on the desired page of the Advertiser’s website, such as:
    • Homepage
    • Product page
    • Checkout page
    • Thank you page
    • Users who generate qualifying Pixel activity can be added to the resulting Pixel IP Audience.
  • Creative Exposure Remarketing: Add the Pixel to a Creative as an Impression Tracker. To build an Audience based on Creative exposure:
    1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser.
    2. Open the Pixel and copy the desired Pixel Image URL, for example, using Pixel ID 1720: https://pix.pontiac.media/pixel?id=1710&type=2
    3. Open the applicable Creative.
    4. Select the Trackers tab.
    5. Add the Pixel URL as an Impression Event Tracker.
    6. Save the Creative.

Once the Pixel begins firing through either method, the resulting Pixel IP Audience will populate under Audiences > Custom, and the Records count will begin increasing as qualifying activity is captured.

View and Manage a Pixel IP Audience

Pixel IP Audiences can be viewed under Audiences > Custom.

The Records field displays the total Audience record count.

When the Audience itself is opened, Pontiac displays a sample of up to 30,000 IP records rather than the complete Audience membership.

Audience membership is primarily managed through:

  • Qualifying Pixel activity
  • The Pixel’s configured Days to Live
  • The Audience’s Active or Inactive status

Updating Days to Live affects only records added after the change.

Associate a Pixel IP Audience to a Campaign or Line

To use a Pixel IP Audience for targeting or anti-targeting:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Enter Edit mode.
  3. Open Audiences and select Associate Segments.
  4. Select Custom Audiences.
  5. Search for the Pixel IP Audience by Name or ID.
  6. Select Add New Group and add the Audience to the desired targeting group.
    • Select the green plus (+) to target the Audience.
    • Select the red minus (–) to anti-target the Audience.
  7. Configure any additional Audience or Boolean logic as needed.
  8. Close the dialog and select Save.

For more information on combining multiple Audiences or applying Campaign- and Line-level Audience logic, see Associate Segments and Boolean Logic.

Contextual AI

Contextual AI allows Advertisers to target web content based on the meaning and context of a page rather than relying only on individual keywords.

Using Natural Language Processing (NLP), Contextual AI analyzes the content of webpages to identify topics and concepts and find other contextually relevant content. This helps account for words that may have different meanings depending on how they are used. For example, the word “Apple” could refer to the technology company or the fruit.

Contextual AI can be used in two ways:

  • Custom Contextual Audiences: Build an Audience using representative webpage URLs or a written description of the desired content.
  • IAB Curated Contextual Segments: Select from more than 300 prebuilt contextual segments curated by Pontiac around IAB content categories.

Contextual AI segments have an additional $0.25 CPM fee that is included in the Total Cost CPM and does not need to be added to the Bid Price. Contextual AI can only be used with Web and Combined inventory types.

Create a Custom Contextual Audience

  1. Navigate to Audiences > Contextual AI.
  2. Select New Contextual Audience.
  3. Enter an Audience Name.
  4. Select an Input Type:
    • URLs: Use URLs when you have representative webpages that reflect the type of content you want to target. Enter one full URL per line, including the scheme, subdomain, and complete URL path.
    • Text: Use Text when you want to describe the desired content rather than provide example URLs.
  5. Enter the applicable source content.
  6. Save the Audience.
URLs

Use URLs when you have representative webpages that reflect the type of content you want to target.

Enter one full URL per line, including the scheme, subdomain, and complete URL path.

For example:

https://example.com/news/article-one
https://example.com/news/article-two

For best results:

  • Use at least 3–5 representative pages. Closer to 10 may be useful for broader topics.
  • Use more examples when defining a broad topic and fewer examples when defining a narrow or specific topic.
  • Select text-rich pages with at least five sentences.
  • News articles, blog posts, guides, and other content-heavy pages generally provide stronger source material.
  • Avoid pages that are primarily images, interactive content, infinite scroll, or located behind a paywall.

For example, a broad Audience focused on current events may benefit from source articles covering several different current-event topics. A narrowly defined Audience, such as 1960s muscle cars, may require fewer examples because the desired context is more specific.

Text

Use Text when you want to describe the desired content rather than provide example URLs.

Enter a descriptive paragraph explaining the topic, subject matter, or type of content you want the Audience to match.

  • Minimum: 50 words
  • Maximum: 500 words

The description should provide enough detail for Contextual AI to understand the intended topic and identify contextually relevant webpages.

View and Manage Contextual Audiences

Navigate to Audiences > Contextual AI to review the Contextual Audiences available to the Seat.

The table includes:

  • Status: Indicates whether the Audience is Active or Inactive.
  • ID: Pontiac’s unique identifier for the Audience.
  • Name: The name assigned to the Audience. Select the name to open and review the Audience.
  • Expiration Date: Displays when the Audience is scheduled to expire, when applicable.
  • Records: Displays the number of records associated with the Audience.
  • Valid Records: Displays the number of records successfully validated for use.
  • CPM: Displays the applicable Contextual AI data fee.

To view and edit the Custom Contextual AI segments Navigate to Audiences > Contextual AI > Custom.

Edit a Custom Contextual Audience

To edit an existing Custom Contextual Audience:

  1. Navigate to Audiences > Contextual AI > Custom.
  2. Select the Audience Name.
  3. Update the Name, Active Status, or Input Data as needed.
  4. Select Save.

Changes to the source URLs or text may change the content identified as contextually relevant to the Audience. Review existing Campaign and Line targeting before making significant changes to an Audience that is already in use.

Associate a Contextual Audience to a Campaign or Line

Once available, Contextual AI Audiences can be associated with eligible Campaigns or Lines through Audience targeting.

  1. Navigate to the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Enter Edit mode.
  3. Open Audiences and select Associate Segments.
  4. Select Contextual Audiences.
  5. Search for the desired Custom or IAB Curated Contextual Audience.
  6. Select Add New Group and add the Audience to the desired targeting group.
  7. Select:
    • the green plus (+) to target the Audience
    • the red minus (–) to anti-target the Audience, when applicable
  8. Configure any additional Audience or Boolean logic as needed.
  9. Close the dialog and select Save.

For additional information on combining Audiences and configuring Any / All logic, see Associate Segments and Boolean Logic.

IAB Curated Contextual Segments

Pontiac provides more than 300 prebuilt Contextual AI segments based on IAB content categories. These Audiences are already available for use across Advertisers and do not need to be created manually. To review a curated segment, select the Audience name. The Audience details include:

  • Site List: Displays the source articles used to define the intended content for the segment.
  • Example Audience Data: Displays a sample of webpages identified as contextually relevant to the segment.

Example Audience Data is a sample and does not represent the complete set of URLs contained in the Audience.

IAB Curated Contextual Segments:

  • Can be associated through Campaign or Line > Audiences > Associate Segments > Contextual Audiences.
  • Cannot be edited.
  • Are available across Advertisers.
  • Have an additional $0.25 CPM fee.

ART Audiences

ART Audiences allow users to turn insights from Audience Research or Audience Discovery reports into targetable geographic Audiences. Published ART Audiences use matched ZIP Codes from the ART report and can be associated with eligible Campaigns or Lines for cookieless targeting.

ART Audiences can be created from:

  • Audience Research: Analyze an existing Audience or selected geographies to identify demographic and interest characteristics and build a lookalike Audience.
  • Audience Discovery: Define a desired user profile using demographic and interest criteria, then identify geographic markets that best match that profile.

Pontiac also provides Public ART Audiences that are already available for targeting and do not need to be created manually.

Build an ART Report

Before publishing a Custom ART Audience, first create an ART report.

  1. Navigate to ART.
  2. Select either Audience Research or Audience Discovery.
    • Audience Research: Use Audience Research when you want to build a lookalike model from an existing Audience or geographic area. The source Audience can include data from a Pontiac IP Conversion Pixel placed on an Advertiser’s website, or selected geographies can be used to identify demographic and interest characteristics associated with those areas.
    • Audience Discovery: Use Audience Discovery when you want to define the demographics and interests of an ideal target Audience and identify geographic markets that best match those characteristics.
  3. Configure and generate the report.

Publish a Custom ART Audience

Once the Audience Research or Audience Discovery report has been generated, it can be published as an Audience for Campaign or Line targeting.

  1. Open the applicable ART Report.
  1. Scroll to the bottom of the report and select Publish New Audience.
  1. Enter an Audience Name
  2. Select the matched ZIP Code threshold:
    • All Results
    • Top 10%
    • Top 20%
    • Top 50%
  3. Select Save.

The Audience will appear in the following locations:

  • ART > Audience Research or Audience Discovery Report > Published Audiences and is editable. The Audience Name and threshold can be adjusted.
  • ART > Audiences > ART Audiences > Custom Audiences
  • Bidder > Audiences > ART Audiences > Custom Audiences
  • Bidder > Advertiser > Campaign or Line > Associate Segments > ART Audiences > Custom Audiences

View and Manage ART Audiences

Custom ART Audiences are tied to the ART report used to generate them.

The Auto Refresh setting on the source ART Report determines whether the report is refreshed as new data becomes available. Interest and Inventory data are updated every 30 days, and updated report results may change the matched ZIP Codes.

If Auto Refresh is enabled and the matched ZIP Codes in the report change, published Audiences associated with that report will automatically update to reflect the refreshed results.

To make changes to the underlying Audience definition, review the source Audience Research or Audience Discovery report and its refresh settings.

Because changes to an ART report may affect published Audiences already being used by Campaigns or Lines, review existing targeting before making significant changes to the source report.

Public ART Audiences

Pontiac also provides prebuilt Public ART Audiences.

To view available Public Audiences, navigate to the ART Audience selection area and expand Public Audiences.

Public ART Audiences:

  • Do not need to be created or published manually.
  • Are available for use through Audience targeting.
  • Can be reviewed and selected under ART Audiences > Public Audiences.

Associate an ART Audience to a Campaign or Line

Once a Custom ART Audience has been published, or when using an available Public ART Audience, it can be associated with an eligible Campaign or Line.

  1. Navigate to the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Enter Edit mode.
  3. Open Audiences and select Associate Segments.
  4. Select ART Audiences.
  5. Search for the desired Custom ART Audience, or expand Public Audiences to browse available Pontiac audiences.
  6. Select Add New Group and add the Audience to the desired targeting group.
  7. Select:
    • the green plus (+) to target the Audience
    • the red minus (–) to anti-target the Audience, when applicable
  8. Configure any additional Audience or Boolean logic as needed.
  9. Close the dialog and select Save.

For additional information on creating ART reports, see ART Documentation. For additional information on combining Audiences and configuring targeting logic, see Associate Segments, and Boolean Logic.

Third Party Audiences

Third Party Audiences include audience segments provided through external data partners as well as first-party CRM audiences that have been onboarded for targeting in Pontiac.

These audiences can be used to extend targeting beyond data created directly within Pontiac and may include demographic, behavioral, interest, lifestyle, purchase, household, and other audience attributes.

Within this section, users can:

  • Browse and activate prebuilt audiences from the TransUnion Data Marketplace
  • See onboarded first-party CRM data through TransUnion
  • See onboarded first-party CRM data through LiveRamp
  • Review onboarding requirements, file formats, processing timelines, and audience availability

Once processed, applicable audiences become available under Audiences > Third Party and can be associated with eligible Campaigns or Lines for targeting.

Third-party Audience fees are applied as a CPM and included in the Line’s Total Cost. If multiple paid Audiences are targeted or anti-targeted on the same Line, only the CPM of the highest-priced segment is applied.

TransUnion Data Marketplace

The TransUnion Data Marketplace provides prebuilt third-party audience segments that can be associated with eligible Campaigns or Lines.

Available audiences span categories such as:

  • Demographics
  • Interests and lifestyles
  • Purchase behavior
  • Auto intenders
  • Political and consumer attributes
  • Other behavioral and household characteristics

For assistance finding or activating a TransUnion Audience, reach out through the Pontiac Help Center.

CRM / Onboarded Audiences

Clients can also onboard their own first-party CRM data to create targetable audience segments. Once processed, these audiences appear under Audiences > Third Party and can be associated with eligible Campaigns or Lines. CRM audiences may be onboarded through integrations such as TransUnion or LiveRamp, depending on the desired workflow.

For CRM onboarding, processing requirements and timelines vary by provider. TransUnion onboarding is typically completed within 3–5 business days, while LiveRamp workflows may require additional time for upload, mapping, distribution, and matching.

TransUnion CRM Onboarding

  1. Email formatted file to protected@pontiac.media.
    • We cannot handle CRM data in any way other than in this protected inbox.
    • Files must be at minimum 1,000 customer contacts otherwise the segment cannot be created, and will not be accepted.
  2. The Pontiac team will upload the file to TransUnion, receive the matchback, and push the resulting segment into Pontiac.
  3. Once available, the Audience will appear under Audiences > Third Party.

The typical processing time is 3–5 business days, but we encourage early activation so the segment is ready well before the launch date.


Files should be formatted according to the required TransUnion structure:

LiveRamp

LiveRamp is a data management platform (DMP) that allows you to upload personally identifiable information (PII) that you have about your audience. This can include:

  • Name and postal addresses (NAP)
  • Email addresses
  • Phone numbers
  • Client customer IDs (your internal customer IDs)
    • This functions as an audience key that allows LiveRamp to delete duplicates in an uploaded file. If there is no customer ID, LiveRamp will use either the email addresses or NAPs provided.

Turn your CRM data into targetable audience lists in the Pontiac platform to digitally reach users from previous email lists and/or mailing campaigns on the open web.



MEDIA TYPE:
Banner, Video

INVENTORY TYPE:
Web, Mobile-Web, Mobile In-App

DEVICE TYPES:
Desktops & Laptops, Mobile Phones, Tablets

PRICING:
$2.00 CPM for Audience Data

You can upload a csv, tsv, or txt file containing information into LiveRamp, which will match the submitted information with cookies and allow you to target these individuals across the Internet through Pontiac.

We recommend clients allow for a two-week lead time when working with LiveRamp. The maximum number of records allowed per seat at any given time is 300,000. Please do no not send any files or screenshots of files containing PII through the Help Center or to anyone on the Pontiac team. 

Estimated Schedule:

  • 1-2 days to upload the files:
    • Once you upload the file there will be a delay in this file showing up in the Audience folder, it may take up to 48 hours to appear.
  • 5-8 days for the files to be mapped:
    • This is a manual process, so this stage can take some time. Typically, this takes 5-8 days for the first file in an Audience, but it is usually quicker for subsequent files.
  • 1-2 days for distribution to Microsoft:
    • Once mapping is completed you will get a notification email to distribute the audience. Select the file(s) that you wish to send to Microsoft. After you have selected your desired files, select ‘Add to Distribution’ at the bottom of the page and notify your Account Manager. It will take 1-2 days for the segment to appear in Microsoft.
  • 1-2 days for the file to be onboarded, matched & fully populated in Pontiac:
    • Once the segment appears in Xandr, your Account Manager will onboard the audience to Pontiac. While the audience will be available to associate to a Line, it may still be in the matching stage and could take an additional 1-2 days to fully populate in Xandr/Pontiac.

Terminology

  • File: A set or list of PII uploaded to LiveRamp as a CSV, TSV or TXT file. Each file uploaded will be converted into an Onboarded audience in Pontiac.
  • Audience: In the LiveRamp dashboard, an ‘Audience’ is a folder to which files with the same type of PII and column headers can be uploaded. Your first Audience folder will be created for you when the account is created. The folder will be ‘mapped’ based on the column headers of the first file uploaded. All subsequent files uploaded to an Audience will need to contain the same column headers. Notify your Account Manager if you need a new Audience folder created for a different type of data.
  • Mapping: This process is done manually by the LiveRamp team to determine which PII identifiers are in each column of the file, allowing the data to be properly ingested.
  • Matching: The process of matching personally identifiable information (PII) to the cookies for that individual, allowing them to be targeted on the open web.
  • Distribution: The publishing process through which data is delivered to Xandr and subsequently made available for targeting in Pontiac.
  • Records: The number of unique individuals in a file. There is a maximum of 300,000 distributed records per LiveRamp account at any given time.

Account Setup

  1. To start using a LiveRamp account, all Pontiac users will need to sign a LiveRamp user agreement. This agreement can be found in the ‘Admin’ tab under ‘Seat Settings’ in the ‘Addendum’ section. To sign this agreement, check the ‘Accept LiveRamp Addendum’ box at the bottom of the contract and click ‘Submit’. By checking this box, you are agreeing to the terms of the agreement.
  2. Once you have completed these steps, reach out through the Help Center with the email address you would like to be used for the account. The Pontiac Team will create an account on your behalf using the email address provided.  Once your account is set up, you will receive an email from LiveRamp asking you to follow a link for creating a Password. After establishing your Password, you will be able to sign into LiveRamp with your email address and new password.

You can download and review the LiveRamp addendum here: LiveRamp Addendum

File Format

Files uploaded to LiveRamp must be 500MB or smaller and a CSV, TSV or TXT with no spaces in the File Name. There are 3 types of PII that can be uploaded:

  1. Emails
  2. Phone numbers
  3. Name and Postal address

You can include one, two, or all three of these. But if you want to use Name and Postal address you must include all of the columns listed under ‘Name and postal address’ below (full name and full address).
Use the following column headers to identify the type of PII in your file:
Name and postal address:

  • FIRSTNAME
  • LASTNAME
  • ADDRESS1
  • ADDRESS2 (optional)
  • CITY
  • STATE
  • ZIP
  • ZIP4 (optional)

Plaintext email address:

  • EMAIL1
  • EMAIL2
  • EMAIL3

MD5 hashed email address:

  • MD5EMAIL1
  • MD5EMAIL2
  • MD5EMAIL3

SHA-1 hashed email address:

  • SHA1EMAIL1
  • SHA1EMAIL2
  • SHA1EMAIL3

SHA-256 hashed email address:

  • SHA256EMAIL1
  • SHA256EMAIL2
  • SHA256EMAIL3

Plaintext phone number:

  • PHONE1
  • PHONE2
  • PHONE3

SHA-1 hashed phone number:

  • SHA1PHONE1
  • SHA1PHONE2
  • SHA1PHONE3

Customer ID (used to de-duplicate rows):

  • CCID

See a sample 100 rows of fake data here: Sample File

Uploading Files to LiveRamp

(1-2 Days)

  1. Once you have signed into your account, you should be brought to this page:
  1. You are now ready to upload data files into the audience your AM created for you. From the Homepage (which you can access by clicking on the triangle symbol next to ‘Connect’ in the upper-left corner, pictured above), select ‘Upload a File’ and follow the prompt.
  2. Within the File Upload page, select the name of your audience from the drop-down ‘Upload to an Audience’ menu. Your first Audience folder will be created for you when the account is created. Each file uploaded to an Audience must contain the same data columns, as this is mapped for matching with the first file. If you need to upload files with different columns, your Account Manager can create additional Audience folders for you.
  1. Once you have selected the audience, a box will appear prompting you to either drag in or select the appropriate file. You should proceed to upload the desired csv, tsv, or txt.
  2. Once you select your file, click ‘Upload File’ in the ‘Upload Status’ window to begin processing.
  3. Once ‘Upload Status’ says the file upload is complete, you will have the option to select a button that says, ‘Go to Audience’. If you click this immediately after uploading, another tab will open in your window to bring you to the ‘Manage’ page for that audience. You will likely not see any segments listed within the audience as can take 24-48 hours for the newly uploaded segment to appear.

Mapping Process

(5-8 Days)

The first file uploaded to each audience is mapped to determine which data points are in each column of the document so that the PII can be properly ingested. This is a manual process completed by LiveRamp and it can take up to 5-8 days.

LiveRamp will send you an email when your file has been mapped and is ready for distribution. If you see delays in this process that exceed 8 days, let your Account Manager know and they will contact LiveRamp support to try to expedite this process.

Distributing Files to Xandr

 (1-2 Days)

  1. In order to publish your segment(s), you must configure Xandr as a destination. This only needs to happen once.  From the menu, select ‘Data Out  – ‘Active Destinations’ ‘New Destination Account’.
  2. You will be brought to a page listing many possible destinations. Use the search bar to look up ‘Xandr Invest’.
  1. When you hover over the icon, you will be prompted to ‘Activate’ the destination.
  1. You will be brought to a page titled ‘Configure Properties’. In the ‘Destination Specific Settings’, enter the client ID ‘3344’.
  2. After you have set up Xandr as a destination, you will be able to push your audience segment to distribution. Select ‘Active Destinations’ from ‘Data Out’ in the sidebar.
  1. Select ‘Manage’ from within the Xandr box
  2. Select the file(s) that you wish to send to Xandr. After you have selected your desired files, select ‘Add to Distribution’ at the bottom of the page. From distribution, it will take 1-2 days for the segment to appear in Xandr.

Audience Onboarding & Matching

 (1-2 Days)

  1. Once you have added a segment to distribution for Xandr, reach out to the Pontiac Team through the Help Center to say that you have pushed a segment. Please provide the segment name.
  2. The Pontiac Team will inform you when the file has been onboarded to your Pontiac seat.
  3. You will now have access to your audience Segment within the Pontiac console. Your audience will be located within the Audiences tab under ‘On Boarded.’

Note, while the segment may be available in Pontiac rather quickly, the file may still be in the matching process and the segment may take 1-2 days to fully populate in Xandr/Pontiac.

Removing Segments that are no longer in use

Any segments that are no longer being used in the Pontiac console or in LiveRamp should be removed from distribution. Your Account Manager will send a friendly reminder at the end of each month, reminding you to remove the segments that are no longer being used. The maximum number of records allowed per seat at any given time is 300,000.

To remove the segments from distribution, click on the out section in LiveRamp, and then click the ‘Manage’ button in Xandr Invest. There you will see all your segments that have been uploaded. Click the box next to the segment that you wish to remove from distribution. At the bottom, there will be a green button that states, remove from distribution. Once you click ‘remove,’ the process will be complete.

Geo Fencing Audiences

Geo Fencing Audiences allow users to build location-based audiences using visitation data from defined geographic areas using OnSpot data. Geo Fencing is useful for reaching users based on historical visits to real-world locations such as retail stores, dealerships, event venues, campuses, competitor locations, or other points of interest.

Geo Fencing Audiences are available under Audiences > Third Party Audiences > Geo Fencing and can be created using one of two location methods:

  • Geo Fence: Draw a custom geographic shape directly on the map.
  • Lat/Long: Define a location using latitude, longitude, and a radius in meters.

Both methods support Rolling and Static Audience types.

View and Manage Geo Fencing Audiences

Navigate to Audiences > Third Party Audiences > Geo Fencing to view existing Geo Fencing Audiences.

The table includes:

  • Name: The name assigned to the Audience.
  • Record Count: The number of qualifying records currently included in the Audience.
  • Start Date: The beginning of the Audience’s applicable date range.
  • End Date: The end of the applicable date range.
  • Expiration Date: Displays when the Audience is scheduled to expire, when applicable.
  • Type: Indicates whether the Audience is Rolling or Static.

Create a Geo Fencing Audience

  1. Navigate to Audiences > Third Party Audiences > Geo Fencing.
  2. Select New Geo Fence to create a new audience.
  1. Enter the audience Name.
  2. Select one of the following audience types:
    • Rolling: A Rolling audience continuously refreshes based on a selected lookback period.
      • Lookback: Select a lookback period of up to 90 days. The default value is 30 days.
      • Refresh: Choose whether the audience should refresh weekly or monthly.
      • The audience will be updated as new qualifying location data becomes available.
    • Static: A Static audience is created using a fixed date range.
      • Start Date
      • End Date: Must be on or before yesterday (UTC); ex. if today is 2025-05-08 the end date must be on or before 2025-05-07.
      • Static audiences expire 90 days after they are created.
  3. Enter your Lookback window: the number of days of historical location data to include. The maximum lookback is 90 days.
  4. Define the Geo Fence Audience.
    • Geo Fence Shape
    • Lat Long

Geo Fence Shape

  • Geo Fence is selected by default and allows users to define a custom geographic area by drawing a shape on the map.
  • To define the Geo Fence:
    • Use the Search bar to enter a location name or address.
    • Use the map controls to draw the boundaries of the desired area.
    • If needed, use the delete shape option to clear the current shape and start over.
    • Once the desired area has been defined, select Submit.
  • The Audience will then be submitted for processing using the selected shape and Rolling or Static settings.

Latitude / Longitude Radius Geo Fencing

  • The Lat/Long option allows users to define a geographic area using a specific latitude, longitude, and radius instead of drawing a custom shape.
  • When Lat/Long is selected, the map shape controls are replaced with the following fields:
    • Latitude: Decimal latitude value, for example 40.7128
    • Longitude: Decimal longitude value, for example -74.0060
    • Radius in Meters: The radius around the selected coordinate, for example 250
  • Latitude and longitude accept decimal values, and the radius is entered in meters.
  • The selected coordinates, radius, Audience type, and other settings are saved with the Audience and used when it is submitted for processing.

Edit and Manage a Geo Fencing Audience

Once created, Geo Fencing Audiences can be reviewed from Audiences > Third Party Audiences > Geo Fencing.

Use the Audience table to monitor the Audience’s:

  • Record Count
  • Date range
  • Expiration Date
  • Rolling or Static type

Associate a Geo Fencing Audience to a Campaign or Line

After the Geo Fencing Audience has been created, it becomes available for Audience targeting and can be associated.

  1. Navigate to the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Enter Edit mode.
  3. Open Audiences and select Associate Segments.
  4. Select Third Party Audiences and locate the applicable Geo Fencing Audience.
  5. Search for the Audience by Name or ID.
  6. Select Add New Group and add the Audience to the desired targeting group.
  7. Select:
    • the green plus (+) to target the Audience
    • the red minus (–) to anti-target the Audience
  8. Configure any additional Audience or Boolean logic as needed.
  9. Close the dialog and select Save.

The Geo Fencing Audience is now applied to the Campaign or Line.

For additional information on combining Audiences and configuring Any / All logic, see Associate Segments, and Boolean Logic.

Associate Segments

The Associate Segments window allows users to apply Audience Targeting to a Campaign or Line by selecting Audience segments and configuring Boolean logic. Multiple Audiences can be combined into groups to define which Impressions are eligible to serve.

UI Location: Campaign or Line > Audiences > Associate Segments

Available Audience Types

The Associate Segments window provides access to the following Audience types:

Audience TypeDescription
Custom AudiencesAudiences created or uploaded within Pontiac, including supported custom targeting lists.
Third Party AudiencesAudience segments provided by third party data providers and includes Geo Fencing Audiences.
Contextual AudiencesSite allow list-based Audiences created from supported contextual targeting criteria.
ART AudiencesZIP Code Audiences generated through Audience Research or Audience Discovery reports, as well as prebuilt public ART Audiences available in Pontiac.

Associating Audiences

To associate Audience segments with a Campaign or Line:

  1. Create a new Campaign or Line, or open an existing one in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Audiences section and select Associate Segments.
  1. Select an Audience type and use the search functionality to find the desired segments.
  2. Select Add New Group to create an Audience group.
  3. Drag the desired Audience segments into the group.
  4. Configure the Any / All Boolean logic to define how the selected Audiences should be evaluated.
  5. Add additional groups as needed and configure the logic between them.
  6. Review the full Audience configuration.
  7. Save the Audience configuration and submit the Campaign or Line changes.

Audience Groups and Boolean Logic

Audience groups allow multiple segments to be combined using Boolean targeting rules. Each group can contain one or more Audience segments, and additional groups can be added to create more complex targeting configurations.

The Any / All options determine how the selected segments or groups are evaluated:

  • Any (OR): An Impression is eligible if it satisfies at least one of the specified Audience conditions.
  • All (AND): An Impression must satisfy every specified Audience condition to be eligible.

For example, selecting Any between Audience A and Audience B allows Impressions that match either Audience. Selecting All requires Impressions to match both Audiences.

You can combine multiple groups to build more specific targeting requirements. Review the Boolean logic between and within groups to ensure the final configuration matches your intended targeting strategy.

Important: Boolean logic can significantly affect scale. Using All across Audiences that do not meaningfully overlap can greatly reduce eligible inventory or prevent delivery entirely.

For additional examples and guidance, see Boolean Logic .

Audience Type Compatibility

Audience types may rely on different underlying targeting signals. When multiple Audience types are combined, make sure their targeting requirements are compatible.

For example:

  • ART Audiences are ZIP Code-based. Combining an ART Audience with ZIP targeting requires the applicable ZIPs to overlap.
  • Contextual Audiences are based on eligible sites and content. Combining a Contextual Audience with a restrictive Site Allow List requires the eligible sites to overlap.
  • Other Audience types may depend on identifiers such as IP, IFA, geography, or inventory context. Layering incompatible requirements can reduce or eliminate eligible inventory.

Important: Adding more Audience types does not automatically broaden targeting. Depending on the configured Boolean logic, additional Audiences may further narrow eligibility.

Campaign and Line Audience Targeting

Audience Targeting can be configured at both the Campaign and Line levels.

  • Campaign level Audiences: Apply shared Audience requirements across all Lines within the Campaign.
  • Line level Audiences: Apply additional Audience requirements to an individual Line.

Campaign and Line Audience Targeting are evaluated together. An Impression must satisfy the applicable requirements from both levels to be eligible to serve.

If Audiences are associated at both the Campaign and Line levels, the Line does not replace the Campaign Audience configuration. Instead, the Audience requirements from both levels are combined.

For example, if a Campaign targets Audience A and a Line targets Audience B, an Impression must satisfy the applicable Audience requirements from both Audience A and Audience B to be eligible for that Line.

Example Scenario:

  • Campaign Audience A: A ZIP Code Audience containing ZIP codes in New York City.
  • Line Audience B: A Lat Long Audience containing Joe’s Pizza locations in New York City.

Because the geographic areas overlap, impressions may still be eligible to serve when they satisfy both Audience requirements.

However, if the Line Audience B instead used a Lat Long Audience containing Domino’s locations in Texas, the geographic requirements would not overlap with the Campaign’s New York City ZIP Code Audience. In that case, there would be no impressions that could satisfy both Audience requirements, preventing the Line from serving.

Important: Review the complete Campaign and Line Audience configuration together. Layering Audiences at both levels can significantly narrow eligible inventory, especially when the selected Audience types or underlying targeting signals do not overlap. A Line may appear to have broad Audience targeting on its own but still be restricted or prevented from serving by Audiences applied at the Campaign level.

Audience Groups

Audience Groups allow users to create, name, save, and reuse Audience targeting configurations across multiple Campaigns and Lines.

A saved Audience Group retains the selected Audience segments, grouping structure, and Any / All Boolean logic, allowing users to quickly reuse common Audience strategies without rebuilding the configuration each time.

Audience Groups can include Audiences from:

  • Custom Audiences
  • Third Party Audiences
  • Geo Fencing
  • Contextual Audiences
  • ART Audiences

Saved Audience Groups function as templates. When an Audience Group is applied to a Campaign or Line, the configuration is copied into that Campaign or Line and can be edited independently.

View Audience Groups

Navigate to:

Audiences > Audiences > Audience Groups

The Audience Groups section displays saved Audience Groups in a table containing:

  • Audience Group ID
  • Name

Use the table controls to search and navigate through saved Audience Groups and create new audience groups using the New Audience Group button.

Create an Audience Group

  1. Navigate to Audiences > Audiences > Audience Groups.
  2. Select New Audience Group.
  3. Enter the Audience Group Name.
  4. Use the Active checkbox to set the Audience Group as Active or Inactive.
  5. Search for and select the Audiences you want to include.
  6. Add additional Audience groups within the configuration as needed.
  7. Use the existing Any / All options to configure Boolean logic between and within groups.
  8. Remove or rearrange selected Audiences as needed.
  9. Select Save.

When saved, Pontiac assigns the Audience Group a unique Audience Group ID and stores the selected Audiences, group structure, Boolean logic, Name, and status.

The Audience Group is then available for reuse across Campaigns and Lines when associating segments.

Edit an Audience Group

To edit an existing Audience Group:

  1. Navigate to Audiences > Audiences > Audience Groups.
  2. Select the Audience Group Name.
  3. Update the Name, status, selected Audiences, groups, or Boolean logic as needed.
  4. Select Update to save the changes, or Cancel to exit without saving.

Updates to a saved Audience Group apply only when the template is used for new associations.

Campaigns and Lines that were previously populated from the Audience Group retain their existing Audience configuration and are not automatically updated.

Associate an Audience Group with a Campaign or Line

Saved Audience Groups can be applied through the existing Audience targeting workflow.

  1. Navigate to the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Open the Audiences section.
  3. Select Associate Segments.
  4. Expand Audience Groups in the selection window.
  5. Search for the saved Audience Group by Audience Group ID or Name.
  6. Select the green + next to the Audience Group.

The saved Audience Group configuration will populate on the right side of the window as though the Audience targeting had been configured manually.

The populated configuration retains:

  • Selected Audience segments
  • Audience groupings
  • Any / All Boolean logic

Once added, the configuration can be edited for that Campaign or Line.

Changes made at the Campaign or Line level do not update the saved Audience Group template.

Boolean Logic Warning

If the saved Audience Group uses different Boolean logic than the logic currently configured in the Associate Segments window, a warning will appear before the Audience Group is added.

Users can:

  • Select Accept to add the Audience Group while retaining the current Boolean logic.
  • Select Cancel to close the warning without adding the Audience Group.

After the Audience Group is added, the resulting configuration remains fully editable for that Campaign or Line.

Save Campaign or Line Targeting as an Audience Group

Users can also create a reusable Audience Group from an Audience configuration that has already been built on a Campaign or Line.

  1. Navigate to the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Open Audiences > Associate Segments.
  3. Configure the desired Audience targeting.
  1. Select Save As Group.
  2. Enter an Audience Group Name.
  1. Select Save.

The current configuration is saved as a new Audience Group, including:

  • Selected Audience segments
  • Audience groupings
  • Any / All Boolean logic

The new Audience Group is assigned an Audience Group ID and becomes available under:

  • Audiences > Audiences > Audience Groups
  • Campaign and Line level > Audiences > Associate Segments > Audience Groups

It can then be reused on other Campaigns and Lines.

Boolean Logic

If you are targeting multiple Audience segments they can be layered together in groups through Boolean logic. To choose ‘Any’ or ‘All’ between groups read the following descriptions of each.

‘All, between segment groups’

If you only have one segment group, the internal group logic will default to OR, meaning that if ANY of the conditions within the group are met the impression will be eligible to serve. For example, below is targeting users found in the ‘Female’ Audience OR ‘Age 20 to 30′.

If you have created multiple segment groups, the intergroup logic will automatically default to AND, meaning that at least one condition must be met in ALL segment groups. For example, below a user would need to be found in one of the two segments in the first grouping AND would need to be found in one segment in each of the other segment groups associated.

‘Any, between segment groups’

If you only have one segment group, the internal logic will default to AND, meaning that ALL the conditions within the group must be met for the creative to be eligible to serve. For example, a user must be found in ‘Female’ AND ‘Age 20 to 30’ for an impression to be served.

If you have created multiple segment groups, the intergroup logic will automatically default to OR, meaning that the conditions of one segment group are to be met OR the conditions of the second group are to be met.

Anti-Targeting: ‘All, between segment groups’

By selecting the ‘All’ between segment groups and using the ‘exclude’ feature with multiple Audiences the internal group logic will default to OR. For example, below an impression could server to any user found in the ‘Female’ OR NOT FOUND in the ‘Age 20 to 30’ Audience 

Anti-Targeting: ‘Any, between segment groups’

By selecting the ‘All’ between segment groups and using the ‘exclude’ feature with multiple Audiences, the internal logic will default to AND, meaning that ALL the conditions within the group must be met for the creative to be eligible to serve. For example, a user must be found in ‘Female’ AND NOT FOUND in ‘Age 20 to 30’ to be served. 

Advertisers Overview

An Advertiser represents an individual brand, product, or client within Pontiac. It serves as the primary organizational level for the campaigns and advertising assets associated with that brand or client.

Within an Advertiser, users can:

  • Create and manage Campaigns and Lines
  • Upload and manage Creatives
  • Create and manage Pixels
  • Review Advertiser-level delivery and performance
  • Access detailed Campaign, Line, Creative, Pixel, and reporting information

In the Pontiac hierarchy, the Advertiser sits between the Seat and Campaign levels:

Seat
└── Advertiser
    ├── Creatives
    ├── Pixels
    └── Campaigns
        └── Lines

After creating an Advertiser, select its name to open the Advertiser Setup and Advertiser Performance tabs, where you can manage setup and review performance from one centralized location.

Create an Advertiser

The Advertiser level in the Pontiac platform represents an individual brand, product or client. This Advertiser will house all of the Campaigns and Line Items for this brand or product and the associated Creatives, Pixels and Audiences. Follow the steps to below to create a new Advertiser.

  1. On the Bidder tab > Advertisers tab > Select the New Advertiser button.
  1. Name: Give the Advertiser a name.
  2. Active: The ‘Active’ box will be selected by default, setting the Advertiser as live. Unselect this box if you want to create the Advertiser with an Inactive status.
  3. Advertiser Margin: Enter an Advertiser Margin percentage if you want Pontiac to calculate client-facing Revenue from Total Cost. This can be used to account for an agency fee or other markup directly in Pontiac rather than calculating it separately.
    • Revenue = Total Cost / (1 − Advertiser Margin)
    • If no Advertiser Margin is entered, Pontiac will not apply an additional Advertiser-level margin to calculate Revenue.
    • Applicable platform, ad serving, data, and other fees contribute to Total Cost as applicable before the Advertiser Margin is applied.
  4. Advertiser URL: Add the URL of the Advertiser’s website. The Google Privacy Sandbox will track visits to this URL if the pixel is implemented on the site.
  5. Code: This is optional and used for reporting purposes only.
  6. Political Content: Choose ‘No’ or ‘Yes’ depending on whether the Advertiser is running ads related to any elections, ballot initiatives, or political candidates in the United States.

Once you have created an Advertiser, you can click on it’s name to open the Advertiser menu. This is where you will be able to upload Creatives, create Pixels, and create Campaigns and Line Items.

See the following links to learn more about these topics: Creatives, Pixels, Campaigns, and Lines.

Edit an Advertiser

  1. On the Bidder > Advertisers tab > Select the Advertiser’s name that you would like to edit.
  2. Next to Advertiser Details, click the ‘Edit’ button.
  1. Make edits to the following:
    • Name
    • Active Status
    • Advertiser Margin
    • Advertiser URL
    • Political Content
  2. Click the ‘Save’ button to apply the edits.

Navigating the Advertiser Tab

Filter Advertisers

By default, the Advertiser tab displays a list of all Active Advertisers, ordered by Advertiser ID. Users can customize their view using the following filers:

  • Filter Status: Display All, Active, or Inactive Advertisers.
  • Page Size: Select how many advertisers to display per page, from 5 to 500.
  • Total Items: Shows the number of advertisers currently displayed on the page.
  • Page: Shows the current page number and the total number of available pages.
  • Reporting Interval: Set to Yesterday by default and affects the metrics shown in the table. Users can select different time ranges, including Today, Yesterday, 7 Days, 30 Days, or Lifetime.
    • All intervals with the exception of yesterday include metrics from today. Today’s metrics update hourly and have a 3 hour delay.

To change the sorting order of the Advertiser list, users can click on any column heading. Clicking once sorts in ascending order, while clicking twice sorts in descending order. This functionality applies to all column headers. For example, to sort Advertisers by number of Lines in descending order, users should click the Lines column heading twice.

Advertiser Level Metrics

Under the Advertiser tab you will see a list of all of the Active Advertisers in your seat with their associated quick metrics. Metrics are displayed in seat timezone. To see Inactive Advertisers filter status to All or Inactive. These metrics are updated hourly, with a 3 hour delay, except for the IP Convs, which are updated once a day for the previous day.

Choose your Reporting Interval and evaluate the following metrics at a glance:

  • Lines: The number of Lines associated to the Advertiser.
  • Campaigns: The number of Campaigns associated to the Advertiser.
  • Imps: The number of impressions served under this Advertiser during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Total Cost: The total dollar amount this Advertiser has spent across all Campaigns and Lines during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Revenue: The total dollar amount this Advertiser has generated across all Campaigns and Lines during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • IP Convs: The number of conversions registered by the IP Conversion Pixel across all Campaigns and Lines during the selected Reporting Interval. Note that IP Conversion data is not available for the ‘Today’ interval. This metric is updated once a day for the previous day.

Advertiser Setup Tab

Overview

The Advertiser Setup tab provides a centralized view of everything associated with an Advertiser. From this page, users can review advertiser-level settings and performance, manage Campaigns and Creatives, create and monitor Pixels, and access reporting metrics across each section.

Users can also create new Campaigns, Creatives, and Pixels directly from the Advertiser, edit existing configurations, activate or deactivate Campaigns and Creatives, and use reporting intervals, filters, searches, and customizable table columns to review performance and manage setup from one place.

Advertiser Tiles

After selecting an Advertiser, users can adjust the Reporting Interval to update the summary metrics displayed at the top of the page. Select from today, yesterday, 7 days, 30 days, month to date, last month, lifetime, or input a custom range.

The following metrics are available:

  • Report Date
  • Impressions
  • Total Cost
  • Revenue
  • Total Cost CPM

Advertiser Details

Users can view the following Advertiser settings:

  • Name
  • Active Status
  • Advertiser Margin
  • Advertiser URL: The URL of the Advertiser’s website. The Google Privacy Sandbox will track visits to this URL if the pixel is implemented on the site. The URL must be secure (https://).
  • Political Content:
    • No, I am not running ads related to any elections, ballot initiatives, or political candidates in the United States.
    • Yes, I am running ads related to an election, ballot initiative, or political candidate in the United States.

Advertiser Edit Button

Users are brought into edit mode and can change the following Advertiser settings:

  • Name
  • Active Status
  • Advertiser Margin
  • Advertiser URL: The URL of the Advertiser’s website. The Google Privacy Sandbox will track visits to this URL if the pixel is implemented on the site. The URL must be secure (https://).
  • Political Content:
    • No, I am not running ads related to any elections, ballot initiatives, or political candidates in the United States.
    • Yes, I am running ads related to an election, ballot initiative, or political candidate in the United States.

Campaigns

The Campaigns section allows users to create, import, view, and manage campaigns associated with the Advertiser.

New Campaign

Select New Campaign to create a campaign from scratch.

Campaign Templates

Saved Campaign Templates are displayed here and can be used to create a new campaign using previously configured settings. Select the desired template to begin campaign creation.

For more information, see Campaign Templates.

Plan Import

Select Import to create a campaign from a media plan generated using the Planning tool.

For more information, see Planning.

View and Manage Campaigns

The Campaigns table allows users to search, filter, download, and customize campaign information and performance metrics.

Use the Search bar to find campaigns by keyword or ID. Select the Download button to export the table as a CSV.

  • Filter Status: Toggle between Active, Inactive, and All Campaigns.
  • Page Size: Adjust the number of campaign rows displayed on each page.
  • Total Items: Displays the total number of campaigns included in the current view.
  • Page: Displays the current page and total number of available pages.
  • Reporting Interval: Updates the performance metrics displayed in the table. All reporting intervals except Yesterday include data from the current day. Today’s metrics update hourly and are subject to an approximately three-hour reporting delay.
  • Columns: Select the three-line menu to choose which columns are displayed in the table and customize the view based on your needs.

Campaign Table Columns

The Campaigns table can include the following campaign settings and performance metrics:

  • Status: The current active or inactive status of the Campaign.
  • ID: The unique Pontiac Campaign ID.
  • Name: The Campaign name.
  • Pacing: Indicates how the Campaign is pacing against its expected budget delivery based on the Campaign’s dates and pacing settings.
  • Start Date: The Campaign start date.
  • End Date: The Campaign end date.
  • Budget: The Campaign’s configured budget.
  • Budget Type: Indicates whether the Campaign budget is based on spend or impressions.
  • Line Count: The number of Lines associated with the Campaign.
  • Clicks: The number of recorded clicks during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • CPC: Cost per Click, calculated using Total Cost divided by Clicks.
  • Imps: The number of confirmed impressions served during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Total Cost: The total cost incurred during the selected Reporting Interval and includes all fees.
  • Revenue: The total cost plus advertiser margin generated during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per 1,000 impressions.
  • IP Convs: The number of attributed IP-based conversions during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • CTR: Click-Through Rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.

Campaign Edit Button

Enter Edit mode and quickly activate or deactivate campaigns quickly using the status checkbox and then submitting the changes.

Creatives

The Creatives section allows users to upload new creatives and view, edit, and manage existing creatives associated with the Advertiser.

New Creative Button

Users can upload new first-party creative assets or add third-party creative tags to the Advertiser. Once created, creatives can be associated with Campaigns or Lines for delivery.

For more information on supported creative types, specifications, and the upload process, see the Creative Upload Process.

View and Manage Creatives

The Creatives table allows users to search, filter, download, and customize creative information and performance metrics.

Use the Search bar to find creatives by keyword or ID. Select the Download button to export the table as a CSV.

  • Filter Status: Toggle between Active, Inactive, and All Creatives.
  • Page Size: Adjust the number of creative rows displayed on each page.
  • Total Items: Displays the total number of creatives included in the current view.
  • Page: Displays the current page and total number of available pages.
  • Reporting Interval: Updates the performance metrics displayed in the table. All reporting intervals except Yesterday include data from the current day. Today’s metrics update hourly and are subject to an approximately three-hour reporting delay.
  • Columns: Select the three-line menu to choose which columns are displayed in the table and customize the view based on your needs.

Users can select an existing creative to view or edit its configuration.

Creative Table Columns

The Creatives table can include the following creative settings and performance metrics:

  • Status: The current active or inactive status of the Creative.
  • Audit Status: The Creative’s current audit or approval status.
  • ID: The unique Creative ID.
  • Name: The Creative name.
  • Creative Type: The format and hosting type of the Creative, such as hosted or third-party video, display, audio, or native.
  • Sizes: The creative dimensions associated with the Creative.
  • Weight: The Creative’s configured delivery weight when multiple creatives are eligible to serve.
  • Imps: The number of confirmed impressions served during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Clicks: The number of recorded clicks during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • CPC: Cost per Click, calculated using Total Cost divided by Clicks.
  • Total Cost: The total media cost associated with the Creative during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Revenue: The total advertiser revenue associated with the Creative during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Flights Enabled: Indicates whether the Creative uses scheduled flights or is always available to serve.
  • CTR: Click-Through Rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.
  • Tag: The third-party creative tag associated with the Creative, when applicable.
    • Only available when the table is downloaded.

Pixels

The Pixels section allows users to create new pixels and view and manage existing pixels associated with the Advertiser. Pixels are used to track site activity and conversions and can support campaign optimization, measurement, attribution, and audience creation.

New Pixel

Select New Pixel to create a new pixel for the Advertiser. Pixels can be used to track actions on the Advertiser’s site, measure campaign performance, attribute conversions, build audiences, and provide conversion data that can be used to optimize campaign delivery toward desired outcomes.

For more information, see Pixels.

View and Manage Pixels

The Pixels table allows users to search, download, and review pixel information and performance metrics.

Use the Search bar to find pixels by keyword or ID. Select the Download button to export the table as a CSV.

  • Page Size: Adjust the number of pixel rows displayed on each page.
  • Total Items: Displays the total number of pixels included in the current view.
  • Page: Displays the current page and total number of available pages.
  • Reporting Interval: Updates the performance metrics displayed in the table. All reporting intervals except Yesterday include data from the current day. Today’s metrics update hourly and are subject to an approximately three-hour reporting delay.
  • Columns: Select the three-line menu to choose which columns are displayed in the table and customize the view based on your needs.

Users can select an existing pixel to view or edit its configuration.

Pixel Table Columns

The Pixels table can include the following pixel information and performance metrics:

  • ID: The unique Pixel ID.
  • Name: The Pixel name.
  • Attributed Imps: The number of impressions attributed to conversions recorded by the Pixel during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Total Convs: The total number of conversions recorded by the Pixel during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Total Loads: The total number of times the Pixel loaded during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Uniques: The number of unique users or devices recorded by the Pixel during the selected Reporting Interval.

Advertiser Performance Tab

Overview

Switching to the Advertiser Performance tab, you can filter the Reporting Interval to adjust the top tiles section. Note that all intervals with the exception of yesterday, include metrics from today. Today’s metrics update hourly and have a 3 hour delay. The metrics include:

  • Report Date: Shows the selected report date or date range.
  • Impressions: The total number of impressions Advertiser served within the selected reporting interval.
  • Total Cost: The total Advertiser spend, including media costs and any applicable fees.
  • Revenue: The total Advertiser cost plus any additional advertiser margin.
  • Total Cost CPM: The total cost per thousand impressions for the Advertiser, calculated as (Total Cost / Impressions) x 1,000.

This tab provides dropdown insights into Bid Data, Campaign Performance, Advertiser Daily Performance, and Completion Events. See the sections below for more details on each.

Advertiser Tiles

After selecting an Advertiser, users can adjust the Reporting Interval to update the summary metrics displayed at the top of the page. Select from today, yesterday, 7 days, 30 days, month to date, last month, lifetime, or input a custom range.

The following metrics are available:

  • Report Date
  • Impressions
  • Total Cost
  • Revenue
  • Total Cost CPM

Full Report Link

The Full Report link opens the Reporting > Standard Reporting section and automatically populates the report with the Advertiser you are currently viewing. This allows users to quickly access more detailed reporting for that Advertiser without manually selecting it again.

For more details, see Standard Reporting

Bid Metrics

Bid metrics are displayed on the Advertiser, Campaign, and Line details pages to provide insight into the bid funnel, real-time delivery, and potential issues that may be affecting delivery.

  • Time Frame: Select a time frame such as 15 minutes, 1 hour, 12 hours, or 1 day. Data is displayed in 5-minute intervals.
  • Eligible Requests: Bid requests that meet the targeting criteria for the Line or Campaign, including settings such as deals, geo targeting, inventory targeting, audiences, and other targeting restrictions. If there are no eligible requests, the selected targeting criteria may be too restrictive or there may be no available inventory matching all criteria. See the Blockers graph and Troubleshooting delivery section below for more information.
  • Bids: Bids placed on eligible requests. If a Line or Campaign has eligible requests but is not bidding, additional requirements or settings may be preventing bids from being placed. See the Troubleshooting delivery section below for more information.
  • Imps: Confirmed impressions served by the Line or Campaign after winning an auction.
  • Confirmed Spend:Confirmed spend generated by impressions served during the selected time frame.
  • Avg Eligible Lines: Shows how many lines on average across the platform compete for impressions available to this line. Higher numbers indicate a lot of compeition of eligible inventory.
  • Competitive Position: Shows how competitive is this line in the platform. Higher numbers near 1 means that this line’s bid price is very competitive.

Bid/Imp Ratios

Below the Bid Data section there is the Bid/Imp Ratios data.

  • Time Frame: Select different time options such as 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, and 48 hours.
  • Imps to Bids Ratio: The ratio of impressions delivered to the number of bids placed. This provides insight into how frequently submitted bids result in won impressions.
    • A higher ratio indicates that a larger share of bids are winning and converting into impressions.
    • A lower ratio indicates that many bids are being submitted without winning, which may point to factors such as an uncompetitive bid price, auction competition, or deal/inventory conditions.
  • Bids to Eligible Bids Ratio: The ratio of bid requests seen which match targeting to the number of bids placed. This provides insight into how frequently the platform bids after a request passes targeting eligibility.
    • A higher ratio indicates that the platform is bidding on a larger share of eligible requests.
    • A lower ratio indicates that requests are passing targeting eligibility but are frequently being filtered out before a bid is placed. This may point to additional serving requirements such as budget or pacing constraints, creative eligibility, frequency caps, bid requirements, or other bidder-level restrictions. If delivery is being limited by pacing or budget allocation, increasing the Budget Multiplier or enabling Catch Up ASAP may help increase bid volume.

Campaign Performance

The Campaign Performance section provides a campaign-level view of delivery, performance, costs, conversions, and fees for the Advertiser. Use the Reporting Interval to adjust the time period reflected in the table.

Use the Search bar to find campaigns by keyword or ID. Select the Download button to export the table as a CSV.

  • Filter Status: Toggle between Active, Inactive, and All Campaigns.
  • Page Size: Adjust the number of campaign rows displayed on each page.
  • Total Items: Displays the total number of campaigns included in the current view.
  • Page: Displays the current page and total number of available pages.
  • Reporting Interval: Updates the performance metrics displayed in the table. All reporting intervals except Yesterday include data from the current day. Today’s metrics update hourly and are subject to an approximately three-hour reporting delay.
  • Columns: Select the three-line menu to choose which columns are displayed in the table and customize the view based on your needs.

Campaign Performance Table Columns

The Campaign Performance table can include the following campaign information and performance metrics:

  • Status: The current active or inactive status of the Campaign.
  • ID: The unique Pontiac Campaign ID.
  • Name: The Campaign name.
  • Imps: The number of confirmed impressions served during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Media Cost: The cost of media purchased during the selected Reporting Interval, excluding additional fees.
  • Total Cost: The total cost incurred during the selected Reporting Interval, including applicable fees.
  • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per 1,000 impressions.
  • IP Conversions: The number of conversions attributed using IP-based attribution during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Chrome Convs: The number of Chrome-attributed conversions recorded during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Clicks: The number of recorded clicks during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • CTR: Click-Through Rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.
  • CPC: Cost per Click, calculated using Total Cost divided by Clicks.
  • Transparency Score: The Campaign’s transparency score for the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Foot Traffic ‘Attributed Visitors’: The number of visitors attributed to campaign exposure through Foot Traffic measurement.
  • Revenue: The Total Cost plus Advertiser Margin generated during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Media Cost CPM: Media Cost per 1,000 impressions.
  • Data Cost: Costs associated with data used for campaign targeting.
  • Foot Traffic Cost: Costs associated with Foot Traffic measurement.
  • Credit Card Fee: Credit card processing fees associated with campaign spend, when applicable.
  • Hosting Fee: Costs associated with creative hosting, when applicable.
  • ART Fee: Costs associated with ART audience usage, when applicable.
  • Contextual Fee: Costs associated with contextual targeting, when applicable.
  • Chalice Fee: Costs associated with Chalice optimization, when applicable.
  • VCR: Video Completion Rate, representing the percentage of video impressions that were viewed to completion.

Advertiser Daily Performance

The Advertiser Daily Performance section provides a day-by-day view of the Advertiser’s delivery, performance, costs, conversions, and fees. Expand the section to view both the Daily Performance Chart and Daily Performance Table.

Daily Performance Chart

The chart allows users to compare two selected performance metrics over time to identify trends and changes in Advertiser performance.

Use the metric dropdowns in the upper-right corner of the chart to select the two metrics you want to compare.

The chart can also be filtered by:

  • Only Days with Data: Displays only dates where performance data was recorded.
  • All Days: Displays all dates within the selected Reporting Interval, including dates with no recorded activity.

Daily Performance Table

The Daily Performance table provides the same Advertiser performance data broken out by individual day.

Select the Download button to export the table as a CSV.

  • Page Size: Adjust the number of daily performance rows displayed on each page.
  • Total Items: Displays the total number of dates included in the current view.
  • Page: Displays the current page and total number of available pages.
  • Columns: Select the three-line menu to choose which columns are displayed in the table and customize the view based on your needs.

Daily Performance Table Columns

The Advertiser Daily Performance table can include the following daily performance metrics:

  • Date: The date associated with the performance metrics.
  • Imps: The number of confirmed impressions served on that date.
  • Media Cost: The cost of media purchased on that date, excluding additional fees.
  • Total Cost: The total cost incurred on that date, including applicable fees.
  • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per 1,000 impressions.
  • IP Conversions: The number of conversions attributed using IP-based attribution.
  • Chrome Convs: The number of Chrome-attributed conversions recorded.
  • Clicks: The number of recorded clicks.
  • CTR: Click-Through Rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.
  • CPC: Cost per Click, calculated using Total Cost divided by Clicks.
  • Transparency Score: The Advertiser’s transparency score for that date.
  • Foot Traffic ‘Attributed Visitors’: The number of visitors attributed to advertising exposure through Foot Traffic measurement.
  • Revenue: The Total Cost plus Advertiser Margin generated on that date.
  • Media Cost CPM: Media Cost per 1,000 impressions.
  • Data Cost: Costs associated with data used for campaign targeting.
  • Foot Traffic Cost: Costs associated with Foot Traffic measurement.
  • Credit Card Fee: Credit card processing fees associated with spend, when applicable.
  • Hosting Fee: Costs associated with creative hosting, when applicable.
  • Art Fee: Costs associated with ART audience usage, when applicable.
  • Contextual Fee: Costs associated with contextual targeting, when applicable.
  • Chalice Fee: Costs associated with Chalice optimization, when applicable.

Completion Events

The Completion Events dropdown section provides detailed completion performance for video and audio campaigns with creatives that have a duration. The table shows how users progress through the creative, from the start through completion, and can be used to evaluate engagement and completion efficiency.

Select the Download button to export the table as a CSV.

  • Page Size: Adjust the number of rows displayed on each page.
  • Total Items: Displays the total number of rows included in the current view.
  • Page: Displays the current page and total number of available pages.
  • Columns: Select the three-line menu to choose which columns are displayed in the table and customize the view based on your needs.

Completion Events Table Columns

  • Date: The date associated with the completion event metrics.
  • Imps: The number of confirmed impressions served.
  • Spend Per Complete: The average spend for each completed creative.
  • Starts: The number of times the creative began playing.
  • 25% Complete: The number of plays that reached 25% of the creative duration.
  • 50% Complete: The number of plays that reached 50% of the creative duration.
  • 75% Complete: The number of plays that reached 75% of the creative duration.
  • 100% Complete: The number of plays that reached the end of the creative.
  • Completion Rate: The percentage of started plays that reached 100% completion.

Download Campaign Setup

On the Advertiser Details screen, below the Setup and Performance subtabs, the Download Campaign Setup button allows you to export the advertiser’s active campaign, flight, and line configurations into an Excel workbook.

The export provides a consolidated view of campaign setup information, making it easier to compare configurations, audit campaign launches and settings, and perform QA.

Downloading the Campaign Setup

  1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser Details screen.
  2. Locate Download Campaign Setup below the Setup and Performance subtabs.
  3. Click Download Campaign Setup to download the Excel workbook.

The workbook includes all active campaigns under the advertiser and their active lines.

Export Structure

Depending on the advertiser’s campaign configurations, the workbook contains the following tabs:

  • Campaigns: Includes one row for each active campaign and its applicable campaign level settings, including budget, pacing, frequency, targeting, creatives, audiences, pixels, and other configured controls.
  • Flights: Included when one or more active campaigns have Enable Flights enabled. This tab displays the campaign’s flights and the lines associated with each flight, including flight dates, budgets, rollover settings, and line budget allocation information.
  • Lines: Includes one row for each active line and its applicable line level settings, including inventory type, dates, budgets, bid settings, frequency, targeting, creatives, audiences, pixels, and other configured controls.

Columns that are not applicable to the configurations included in the export are omitted to keep the workbook focused on relevant setup information.

Campaign Managed Settings

When a setting is managed at the campaign level, the applicable configuration is displayed on the Campaigns tab rather than repeated for each line.

For example, if Manage Dayparts is enabled for a campaign, the applicable pacing and daypart settings are included on the Campaigns tab and are not repeated on the Lines tab. If the setting is managed independently by each line, the applicable values are instead included for the individual lines where they are configured.

Flight Based Line Settings

For campaigns using flights, certain line settings can vary by flight, including:

  • Budget Allocation Weight
  • Budget Multiplier

The Flights tab provides the values associated with each campaign flight and line combination. The Lines tab displays the effective value based on the current active flight. If there is no active flight, the next upcoming flight is used. If there is no upcoming flight, the most recently completed flight is used.

Creative Overview

A Creative is the advertisement asset or third-party ad tag that is served as part of a Campaign. Creatives are created and managed at the Advertiser level and can then be associated with eligible Campaigns or Lines for delivery.

Pontiac supports creatives across multiple media types, including:

  • Banner / Display
    • Hosted Banner
    • Third-Party Banner
    • HTML5
  • Native
  • Audio
    • Hosted Audio
    • Third-Party Audio
    • Companion Banners
  • Video
    • Hosted Video
    • Third-Party Video / VAST

Creatives can be uploaded by navigating to the applicable Advertiser and selecting New Creative. Creative settings can only be edited from the Advertiser level.

Once saved, Creatives are submitted through the applicable creative audit process before they are eligible to serve. Creatives may also be subject to additional SSP, publisher, media owner, or other third-party approval requirements depending on the inventory being purchased.

The sections below cover supported Creative types, technical specifications, upload and configuration workflows, macros, trackers, auditing, and other Creative-related features.

Creative Hierarchy

Creatives are owned and managed at the Advertiser level:

Seat
└── Advertiser
    ├── Creatives
    ├── Pixels
    └── Campaigns
        └── Lines

Although Creatives belong to the Advertiser, they can be associated with a Campaign or Line depending on how Creative management is configured.

Advertiser
└── Creative
    ├── Campaign Association
    └── Line Association

When Creatives are managed at the Campaign level, the Campaign’s associated Creatives are inherited by its Lines. When Creative management is handled independently at the Line level, eligible Creatives can be associated directly with individual Lines.

This allows a single Advertiser to maintain a centralized Creative library while controlling which assets are eligible to serve across different Campaigns and Lines.

For setup instructions, see:

  • Campaign Creatives
  • Line Creatives

The Creatives documentation itself confirms that Creatives are managed at the Advertiser level and then used at Campaign or Line level.

Creative Types

Creatives can be uploaded in the Advertiser details screen by selecting the ‘New Creative’ button. At this time the platform supports the following Creative Types:

  • Banner/Display:
    • Banner: Hosted
      • First Party Banner
    • Banner: 3rd Party
      • Ad Server Tag Banner
    • HTML5
  • Native
  • Audio
    • Audio: Hosted
      • First Party Audio
    • Audio: 3rd Party
      • Ad Server Tag Audio
    • Companion Banners
      • First Party Audio or Third Party Audio
      • First Party Banner
  • Video
    • Video: Hosted
      • First Party Videos. Pontiac hosting fee will be applied and VAST tag will be created using Kevel.
    • Video: 3rd Party
      • Ad Server Tag Video (VAST) tags from reputable Ad Servers

For a comprehensive walkthrough of each creative type, see here: New Creative Tab

Creatives Table

On the Advertiser, Campaign, and Line level, users can download the Creatives table. By default the following columns are included:

  • Status: Active or Inactive
  • Audit Status: Approved, Pending, or Rejected
  • ID: Creative ID
  • Name: Creative Name
  • Creative Type: The creative’s type: Banner: Hosted, Banner: 3rd Party, Native, Audio: Hosted, Audio: 3rd Party, Video: Hosted, and Video: 3rd Party.
  • Weight: The creative’s weight.
  • Imps: The amount of Impressions the creative has served and is dependent on the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Clicks: The number of Clicks the creative has and is dependent on the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Total Cost: The total cost of serving the creative and is dependent on the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Revenue: The total cost, including any of the advertiser’s margin, of serving the creative and is dependent on the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Flights Enabled: Always on or the flights that the creative is active for.
  • CTR: The click through rate of the creative and is dependent on the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Tag: The creative’s tag

Creative Upload Process

Overview

Creatives can be uploaded in the Advertiser details screen by selecting the ‘New Creative’ button. At this time the platform supports Video: 3rd Party (VAST tags from reputable Ad Servers), Videos: Hosted, Audio: 3rd Party, Audio: Hosted, Banner: 3rd Party, Banner: Hosted, HTML5, and Native (Format A) creatives. If you do not have access to an ad server to create VAST tags, Pontiac Bidder offers hosting services at an additional charge via Kevel. This additional CPM fee is applied to the Line Item for each impression served and is a part of the total line and campaign budgets. Reach out through the Help Center or your account manager for more information.

To upload a Creative, go to the Advertisers tab and click on the name of the Advertiser under which you would like to upload the Creative. Select ‘New Creative’ and select the type of Creative that you will be uploading. A preview of the Creative should appear in the green ‘Preview’ box. Ensure that the Creative does not extend outside this preview box and loads as expected. Complete all relevant fields, then click ‘Save’.


Please note that Creatives can only be edited at the Advertiser Level. Please navigate to the Advertiser Level to modify your creatives.

For detailed documentation, see here: New Creative Tab

Creative Acceptance Policy

Pontiac-Creative-Acceptance-PolicyDownload

Please thoroughly review all Creative Policies before uploading Creative. All Creative units uploaded will be subject to the Pontiac Intelligence creative audit process as well as any additional SSP, publisher, media owner or other creative approval processes that may apply in the acquisition of ad space.

Pontiac Intelligence reserves the right to reject any creative unit at its discretion, and subsequently suspend the account without advanced warning. If your account is suspended, you will be notified in writing and an investigation will take place within three business days.  If at any point your ad tags are flagged as malicious, your account balance will be forfeited to Pontiac and will not be refundable.

In addition to Pontiac Intelligence’s content policies, certain sellers have additional policies that apply to buyers of those sellers’ inventory and certain data providers have additional policies that apply to buyers of those data providers’ data. Pontiac Intelligence clients wishing to purchase such inventory or data are responsible for understanding and adhering to any such additional policies. Pontiac shall have no liability or responsibility of any kind if a third-party declines to serve any Ads proposed by a Pontiac user, regardless of whether the ads meet the Pontiac Ad Standards or are approved by Pontiac, and users agree to indemnify and hold harmless Pontiac from any losses arising from a third-party’s decision not to serve a user’s ads. 

New Creative Tab

Creatives are managed on the Advertiser level. Navigate to the desired Advertiser and select the New Creative button to upload and configure creatives across video, display, audio, and native formats.

Getting Started

  1. Click New Creative.
  2. Select a Creative Type:
  • Banner/Display:
    • Banner: Hosted
      • First Party Banner
    • Banner: 3rd Party
      • Ad Server Tag Banner
    • HTML5
  • Native
  • Audio
    • Audio: Hosted
      • First Party Audio
    • Audio: 3rd Party
      • Ad Server Tag Audio
    • Companion Banners
      • First Party Audio or Third Party Audio
      • First Party Banner
  • Video
    • Video: Hosted
      • First Party Videos. Pontiac hosting fee will be applied and VAST tag will be created using Kevel.
    • Video: 3rd Party
      • Ad Server Tag Video (VAST) tags from reputable Ad Servers
  1. Enter a Creative Name.
  2. Set the creative to Active or Inactive (default is Active).

Continue below for detailed setup instructions and examples for each creative type.

For more details on creative specifications by type, see the Creative Specs documenation.

Video: Hosted

Upload Steps:

Start by clicking New Creative, then:

  1. Select Creative Type: First Party Video
  2. Name the creative.
  3. Choose Active or Inactive. Creatives are automatically set to Active.
  4. Select the creative’s duration. The default value is 30 seconds.
    • Supported Durations:
      • 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, and 90.
  5. Select the creative’s weight. The default value is 1.
  6. Click URL: The Click URL will automatically populate with the Advertiser’s URL. The field remains editable if it needs to be edited.
    • If previously audited, editing the Click URL will force a reaudit of this creative and the creative will stop serving until the reaudit is completed.
  7. Select the Aspect Ratio: 16:9 is selected by default.
    • 16:9 is the most common aspect ratio for CTV video creatives. When selected, the uploaded creative will serve to standard sizes like 1920×1080 and 1280×720, along with additional sizes sharing the same aspect ratio.
    • All Supported Aspect Ratios:
      • 16:9: Best for CTV and most desktop/mobile video placements. Standard for long-form and streaming content.
      • 1:1: Square and common for feeds and mobile as it takes up more screen space than horizontal video.
      • 9:16: Ideal for mobile, full screen experiences and OLV placements.
      • 4:5: Common for mobile feeds.
  8. Serve to all sizes with similar aspect ratio (recommended, enabled by default): When enabled, creatives run across more placements that support the same aspect ratios, increasing available inventory and campaign scale without distortion or cropping.
  9. Click the Choose File button and upload the creative video file.
  10. Preview the creative to ensure it is rendering correctly and there are no issues.
  11. Click Save, which will send the creative to audit.

Banner: Hosted

Upload Steps:

Start by clicking New Creative, then:

  1. Select Creative Type: First Party Banner
  2. Name the creative.
  3. Choose Active or Inactive. Creatives are automatically set to Active.
  4. Select the creative’s weight. The default value is 1.
  5. Click URL: The Click URL will automatically populate with the Advertiser’s URL. The field remains editable if it needs to be edited.
    • If previously audited, editing the Click URL will force a reaudit of this creative and the creative will stop serving until the reaudit is completed.
  6. Select the Size: 300×250 is selected by default.
    • Common sizes: 300×250, 728×90, 160×600
    • Supported Banner Sizes:
      • 88×31, 120×24, 120×60, 120×90, 120×160, 120×240, 120×600, 125×60, 125×125, 160×600, 180×150, 180×500, 200×200, 250×250,250×300, 300×50, 300×60, 300×100, 300×200, 300×250, 300×300, 300×400, 300×600, 300×1050, 320×50, 320×100, 320×250, 320×320, 320×360, 320×400, 320×480, 336×280, 400×300, 414×125, 468×60, 468×80, 580×400, 600×315, 600×600, 640×480, 640×720, 728×90, 728×200, 728×300, 732×610, 750×750, 900×1600, 930×180, 960×1200, 960×1600, 970×90, 970×250, 980×120, 980×150, 980×300, 980×500, 980×600, 1024×768, 1080×1080, 1080×1920, 1200×600, 1200×628, 1200×675, 1200×1200, 1280×720, 1920×1080, 1920×1200
  7. Click the Choose File button and upload the creative banner file.
  8. Preview the creative to ensure it is rendering correctly and there are no issues.
  9. Click Save, which will send the creative to audit.

Audio: Hosted

Upload Steps:

Start by clicking New Creative, then:

  1. Select Creative Type: First Party Audio
  2. Name the creative.
  3. Choose Active or Inactive. Creatives are automatically set to Active.
  4. Select the creative’s duration. The default value is 30 seconds.
    • Supported Durations:
      • 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, and 90.
  5. Select the creative’s weight. The default value is 1.
  6. Click URL: The Click URL will automatically populate with the Advertiser’s URL. The field remains editable if it needs to be edited.
    • If previously audited, editing the Click URL will force a reaudit of this creative and the creative will stop serving until the reaudit is completed.
  7. Click the Choose File button and upload the creative audio file.
    • MP3 audio file
  8. Preview the creative to ensure it is rendering correctly and there are no issues.
  9. Click Save, which will send the creative to audit.

Video: 3rd Party

Upload Steps:

Start by clicking New Creative, then:

  1. Select Creative Type: Ad Server Tag Video (VAST)
  2. Name the creative.
  3. Choose Active or Inactive. Creatives are automatically set to Active.
  4. Select the creative’s duration. The default value is 30 seconds.
    • Supported Durations:
      • 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, and 90.
  5. Select the creative’s weight. The default value is 1.
  6. Enter the Video VAST Tag URL
    • VAST 2, 3, and 4 are currently accepted
  7. Select how the creative’s sizes are uploaded:
    • Automatically Detect Sizes
      • All sizes detected from the VAST tag will populate the box.
    • Manually Set Sizes
      • Select sizes from the right hand side drop down menu.
  8. Serve to all sizes with similar aspect ratio (recommended, enabled by default): When enabled, creatives run across more placements that support the same aspect ratios, increasing available inventory and campaign scale without distortion or cropping.
  9. Preview the creative to ensure it is rendering correctly and there are no issues.
  10. Click Save, which will send the creative to audit.

Audio: 3rd Party

Upload Steps:

Start by clicking New Creative, then:

  1. Select Creative Type: Ad Server Tag Audio
  2. Name the creative.
  3. Choose Active or Inactive. Creatives are automatically set to Active.
  4. Select the creative’s duration. The default value is 30 seconds.
    • Supported Durations:
      • 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, and 90.
  5. Select the creative’s weight. The default value is 1.
  6. Enter the Audio VAST tag URL: Vast versions 2, 3 and 4 are currently accepted.
  7. Preview the creative to ensure it is rendering correctly and there are no issues.
  8. Click Save, which will send the creative to audit.

Companion Banners

Companion Banners are optional display assets that can be delivered alongside Audio creatives when supported by the available inventory. They are supported for both First Party Audio and Third Party Audio creatives. Companion Banners are uploaded directly as image files and are hosted and prepared for delivery by Pontiac.

Upload Steps:

A First Party Audio or Third Party Audio creative must first be uploaded and saved before Companion Banners can be added.

  1. Navigate to the Advertiser level and upload a new First Party Audio or Third Party Audio creative using the applicable upload steps.
  2. Once the Audio creative has been saved, open the creative. A new Companion Banners tab will be available.
  1. Navigate to the Companion Banners tab and click Add New Companion.
  2. Select and upload the desired Companion Banner image file.
  3. Select the correct size for the companion banner.
  4. Once uploaded, a preview of the Companion Banner will appear.
  5. Additional Companion Banners can be added as needed by selecting the Add new companion button. Existing Companion Banners can also be removed using the X button located in the top right corner.

Pontiac will automatically prepare the uploaded Companion Banners for delivery alongside the Audio creative.

Supported Sizes

  • 300×250 – Medium Rectangle
  • 728×90 – Leaderboard
  • 160×600 – Wide Skyscraper
  • 320×50 – Mobile Banner
  • 300×600 – Half Page

Supported File Types

  • PNG
  • JPG
  • JPEG
  • GIF

Creative Audit

Adding, replacing, or removing a Companion Banner after the Audio creative has been audited will return the creative to Pending status. The updated creative must complete the audit process again before it is eligible to serve.

Note: Companion Banners are currently supported for Audio creatives only. While they can be associated with both First Party and Third Party Audio creatives, the Companion Banner itself is always uploaded and hosted as a First Party asset.

Banner: 3rd Party

Upload Steps:

Start by clicking New Creative, then:

  1. Select Creative Type: Ad Server Tag Banner
  2. Name the creative.
  3. Choose Active or Inactive. Creatives are automatically set to Active.
  4. Select the creative’s weight. The default value is 1.
  5. Select the Size: 300×250 is selected by default.
    • Common sizes: 300×250, 728×90, 160×600
    • Supported Banner Sizes:
      • 88×31, 120×24, 120×60, 120×90, 120×160, 120×240, 120×600, 125×60, 125×125, 160×600, 180×150, 180×500, 200×200, 250×250,250×300, 300×50, 300×60, 300×100, 300×200, 300×250, 300×300, 300×400, 300×600, 300×1050, 320×50, 320×100, 320×250, 320×320, 320×360, 320×400, 320×480, 336×280, 400×300, 414×125, 468×60, 468×80, 580×400, 600×315, 600×600, 640×480, 640×720, 728×90, 728×200, 728×300, 732×610, 750×750, 900×1600, 930×180, 960×1200, 960×1600, 970×90, 970×250, 980×120, 980×150, 980×300, 980×500, 980×600, 1024×768, 1080×1080, 1080×1920, 1200×600, 1200×628, 1200×675, 1200×1200, 1280×720, 1920×1080, 1920×1200
  6. Enter the Third-Party HTML Tag.
  7. Preview the creative to ensure it is rendering correctly and there are no issues.
  8. Click Save, which will send the creative to audit.

Native: Format A

Upload Steps:

Start by clicking New Creative, then:

  1. Select Creative Type: Native
  2. Name the creative.
  3. Choose Active or Inactive. Creatives are automatically set to Active.
  4. Native Creative Type: Format A is selected by default and currently the only supported version.
  5. Enter Alternative Brand URL for Audit (if applicable): Applicable if you are using a Click URL to a site that does not represent your branding, such as Amazon, enter a URL that contains the same branding represented in your ad. The audit team will use this URL to validate the branding represented in the creative. This will not be used as the landing page for the creative.
  6. Creative Specs: Expand this section to view the Native Format A requirements.
    • Title: 25 Character Maximum
    • Body: 140 Character Maximum
    • Icon: 1:1 aspect ratio, at least 50×50 pix, no more than 200×200
    • Image: width cant exceed 1200 and aspect ratio has to be 1:1, 4:3 or 1.91:1
    • Click URL: URL to the page you are driving to (matches “sponsored by” brand)
    • Sponsored By: 25 Character maximum (Brand of advertisement)
    • Format A placements excel on the following exchanges: Triplelift, Sharethrough, Microsoft
    • 200kb max file size, overage fees will apply for larger files
  7. Enter the required fields: Title, Sponsored By, Call to Action, and Body.
  8. Click URL: The Click URL will automatically populate with the Advertiser’s URL. The field remains editable if it needs to be edited.
    • If previously audited, editing the Click URL will force a reaudit of this creative and the creative will stop serving until the reaudit is completed.
  9. Upload the Icon.
  10. Upload the Image.
  11. Preview the creative to ensure it is rendering correctly and there are no issues.
  12. Click Save, which will send the creative to audit.

Example Preview:

HTML5

Upload Steps:

Start by clicking New Creative, then:

  1. Select Creative Type: Html5
  2. Name the creative.
  3. Choose Active or Inactive. Creatives are automatically set to Active.
  4. Select the Size: 300×250 is selected by default.
    • Common sizes: 300×250, 728×90, 160×600
    • Supported Sizes:
      • 88×31, 120×24, 120×60, 120×90, 120×160, 120×240, 120×600, 125×60, 125×125, 160×600, 180×150, 180×500, 200×200, 250×250,250×300, 300×50, 300×60, 300×100, 300×200, 300×250, 300×300, 300×400, 300×600, 300×1050, 320×50, 320×100, 320×250, 320×320, 320×360, 320×400, 320×480, 336×280, 400×300, 414×125, 468×60, 468×80, 580×400, 600×315, 600×600, 640×480, 640×720, 728×90, 728×200, 728×300, 732×610, 750×750, 900×1600, 930×180, 960×1200, 960×1600, 970×90, 970×250, 980×120, 980×150, 980×300, 980×500, 980×600, 1024×768, 1080×1080, 1080×1920, 1200×600, 1200×628, 1200×675, 1200×1200, 1280×720, 1920×1080, 1920×1200
  5. Click URL: The Click URL will automatically populate with the Advertiser’s URL. The field remains editable if it needs to be edited.
    • If previously audited, editing the Click URL will force a reaudit of this creative and the creative will stop serving until the reaudit is completed.
  6. Enter Alternative Brand URL for Audit (if applicable): Applicable if you are using a Click URL to a site that does not represent your branding, such as Amazon, enter a URL that contains the same branding represented in your ad. The audit team will use this URL to validate the branding represented in the creative. This will not be used as the landing page for the creative.
  7. Creative Specs: Expand this section to view the html5 requirements.
    • Hosted HTML5 (Gif):
    • URL to the page you are driving to
    • Upload the entire zip file
    • Cannot animate after the 3rd rotation, and cannot exceed 30 seconds
    • 150kb max file size, overage fees will apply for larger files
    • Sufficient branding
  8. Click Choose File to upload the zip file.
    • The zip file must contain an index.html, specifically called index.html, which much reside in the root of the zip file and not in a subfolder. Index.html should be complete and valid HTML document and not an HTML fragment. All external resources must be secure (https).

9. Preview the creative to ensure it is rendering correctly and there are no issues.

10. Click Save, which will send the creative to audit.

You could add a general note like this:

File Type Validation

When uploading an HTML5 creative ZIP, each file inside the ZIP must have a file extension that matches its actual file type.

If a file is mislabeled, for example, a file with a .ttf extension that is actually an OpenType font (.otf)- the upload may fail with the following warning:

The file extension does not match the detected file content. Please upload a file with the correct extension.

If you receive this warning, review the files inside the ZIP and confirm that each file’s extension correctly reflects its content type before uploading again.

Trackers Tab

1×1 third party trackers can be added to creatives in Pontiac on upload or in the edit creative screen. In the creative window, open the Tracker tab and click Add New Tracker to enter the third-party tracking URL.

Pontiac supports the following tracker types:

  • Impressions
  • Start
  • First Quartile
  • Second Quartile
  • Third Quartile
  • Completion

Supported Tracker Types:

  • Image (Img): For image pixel tracker URLs.
    • Example: https://pix.pontiac.media/pixel?id=18419&type=2
    • Image trackers are simple pixel URLs that fire when the creative loads. They are usually preferred because they are lightweight, broadly compatible, and less likely to be blocked by creative environments.
  • JavaScript (JS): For script based tracker URLs.
    • Example: https://pix.pontiac.media/js-pixel?id=1516&type=2
    • JavaScript trackers are used when the tracking provider requires script logic to run, such as setting additional parameters, firing multiple calls, or supporting more complex measurement behavior.
  • For most standard impression tracking, Image is the better default.

Additional Information:

  • Banner ads support impression trackers only.
  • Video and audio ads support all tracker types.
  • Third-party click trackers should be configured in your ad server as the creative’s click URL.
  • Please refer to the Pontiac Macros here: Creative Macros which can be used to pass additional information when the tracker fires.
  • Pontiac macros must be implemented using the exact macro format within the tracker URL to pass data correctly. Incorrect formatting will result in missing data.
  • For additional assistance, please reach out to your account manager or the Help Center.

Using Trackers for Audience Building:

In addition to measurement, trackers can be used to support audience creation.

By adding a Pontiac pixel img as a tracker to a creative, you can capture exposed users and automatically build a custom audience based on IP data when the tracker fires.

Follow the following setups:

  1. Create a pixel and check the Create Custom Audience feature and set days to live.

2. Add the Pixel URL Img to your desired creative (CTV, Display, Audio, etc.) to the trackers tab as an impression tracker.

3. Check that the audience has started collecting records in the Audience tab > Custom section. If there are records proceed to the next step. If not, ensure that the campaign has been live long enough to collect data.

4. On the Campaign or Line level associate the custom audience.

This enables workflows such as:

  • Building audiences from users exposed to ads
  • Applying those audiences to future campaigns
  • Retargeting across different media types (e.g., video, display, audio)

This approach allows you to extend campaign impact across channels and scale retargeting strategies.

Specs Tab

The Specs tab displays technical details for supported creative types, including creative size, bit rates, MIME type, aspect ratio, and duration where applicable.

Creative types without a Specs tab

The following creative types do not have a Specs tab because their details are available in the main creative dialog window:

  • Banner: Hosted
  • Banner: 3rd Party
  • HTML5
  • Native

Video: 3rd Party

  • Size
  • Bit Rate (Video and Audio Combined)
  • Mime
  • Aspect Ratio

Video: Hosted

  • Size
  • Bit Rate (Video)
  • Audio Bit Rate
  • Mime
  • Aspect Ratio

Audio: 3rd Party

  • Bit Rate (Audio)
  • Mime
  • Duration

Flights Tab

On the Flights tab, choose to have the Creative Always On or Active for a specific Flight.

Flight dates can be applied on each creative to easily schedule and facilitate creative swaps on a Line or Campaign. For example, if you have a new creative for each week of a Campaign, you can associate all of the creatives to the Campaign, and set flight dates accordingly so that you do not have to edit the Campaign and swap creatives each week. The creative will only be eligible to serve during the date intervals selected unless the creative is set to ‘Always On’, in which case it will be eligible to serve whenever it is assigned to a Line or creative with current flight dates.

In the creative upload or edit window, under the ‘Flights’ tab, you can change the creative dates setting to ‘Flights’ then configure the dates when you would like the creative to serve. To add multiple flights, select the ‘Add Flight’ button.

To remove a flight, click the red circle next to the selected dates. If a creative is switched from ‘Flights’ to ‘Always On’, all existing flights will be removed.

Publisher Specs Eligibility Tab

The Publisher Specs Eligibility tab is available in the Creative window for:

  • Video: Hosted
  • Video: 3rd Party
  • Audio: Hosted
  • Audio: 3rd Party

This tab evaluates whether a hosted creative appears to meet the technical requirements of supported publishers and SSPs.

Publisher Specs Eligibility is a technical specification check only. A Pass result means the creative appears to meet the listed requirements, but it does not indicate final approval by Pontiac, the publisher, or the SSP. Publisher requirements are controlled by each publisher and are subject to change. Audio bitrate cannot be validated for 3rd party video creatives. Contact your ad server to confirm that the audio bitrate meets the publisher’s specifications.

For more information about publisher specific approval processes, contact your Account Manager or reach out through the Help Center.

Video Tests Check the Following:

  • Aspect Ratio
  • Duration
  • Sizes
  • Video Bitrate
  • Audio Bitrate (except 3rd party videos unable to check automatically and must be checked manually)

Video Publisher Test Requirements:

  • Disney
    • Disney+, DisneyXP, Hulu
      • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
      • Duration: 6, 15, or 30 seconds
      • Sizes: 1920×1080 (preferred) or 1280×720
      • Video Bitrate:
        • Minimum Bitrate: 10,000 Kbps
        • Maximum Bitrate: 40,000 Kbps
      • Audio Bitrate: 192 Kbps or higher
    • ESPN
      • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
      • Duration: 15 or 30 seconds
      • Sizes: 1920×1080 and 1280×720 required
      • Video Bitrate:
        • 1920×1080: Minimum Bitrate: 10,000 Kbps and Maximum Bitrate: 40,000 Kbps
        • 1280×720: Bitrate: 1,500 Kbps or less
      • Audio Bitrate: 192 Kbps or higher
    • ABC News
      • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
      • Duration: 6, 15, or 30 seconds
      • Sizes: 1920×1080 and 1280×720 required
      • Video Bitrate:
        • 1920×1080: Minimum Bitrate: 10,000 Kbps and Maximum Bitrate: 40,000 Kbps
        • 1280×720: Bitrate: 1,500 Kbps or less
      • Audio Bitrate: 192 Kbps or higher
  • NBCU
    • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
    • Duration: 6, 15, 30, 45, or 60 seconds
    • Sizes: All sizes required in the VAST tag
      • Mezz – 1920×1080 HD
      • High – 1920×1080 HD or 1280x 720 HD
      • Medium – 960×540 or 640×480
      • Low – 640×360 or 416×234
    • Video Bitrate
      • Mezz – 10,000-30,000 Kbps
      • High – 3,250-5,000 Kbps
      • Medium – 1,000-1,500 Kbps
      • Low – 340-460 Kbps
    • Audio Bitrate
      • Mezz – Minimum 192 kbps
      • High – Minimum 96 kbps
      • Medium – Minimum 96 kbps
      • Low – Minimum 96 kbps
  • Paramount
    • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
    • Duration: 15, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
    • Sizes: All sizes required in the VAST tag
      • 1920×1080
      • 1024×576
      • 960×540
      • 768×432
      • 640×360
    • Video Bitrate
      • 1920×1080:10,000 Kbps – 40,000 Kbps
      • 1024×576: 2,100 kbps +/- 50 kbps
      • 960×540: 1,500 kbps +/- 50 kbps
      • 768×432: 750 kbps+/- 50 kbps
      • 640×360: 375 kbps+/- 50 kbps
    • Audio Bitrate: 192 Kbps or higher
  • WBD
    • CNN, League Sports, MLB, NHL
      • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
      • Duration: 15 or 30 seconds
      • Sizes: All sizes required in the VAST tag
        • Mezz – 1920×1080
        • High – 1280x 720
        • Medium – 854×480
        • Low – 640×360
      • Video Bitrate
        • 1920×1080: 15,000-30,000 Kbps
        • 1280×720: Less than 15,000 Kbps
        • 854×480: Less than 1,500 Kbps
        • 640×360: Less than 1,000 Kbps
      • Audio Bitrate: 192 Kbps or higher
    • NCAA
      • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
      • Duration: 15 or 30 seconds
      • Sizes: 1920×1080
      • Video Bitrate: 18,000 – 30,000 Kbps
      • Audio Bitrate: 192 Kbps or higher
    • TBS, TNT, truTV
      • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
      • Duration: 15, 30, or 60 seconds
      • Sizes: All sizes required in the VAST tag
        • Mezz – 1920×1080
        • High – 1280x 720
        • Medium – 854×480
        • Low – 640×360
      • Video Bitrate
        • 1920×1080: 15,000-30,000 Kbps
        • 1280×720: Less than 15,000 Kbps
        • 854×480: Less than 1,500 Kbps
        • 640×360: Less than 1,000 Kbps
      • Audio Bitrate: 192 Kbps or higher
    • Discovery
      • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
      • Duration: 6, 15, 30, or 60 seconds
      • Sizes: All sizes required in the VAST tag
        • Mezz – 1920×1080
        • High – 1280x 720
        • Medium – 854×480
        • Low – 640×360
      • Video Bitrate: 10,000 Kbps minimum
      • Audio Bitrate: 192 Kbps or higher
    • HBO Max, WBD Stream
      • Aspect Ratio: 16:9
      • Duration: 15, 30, 45, or 60 seconds
      • Sizes: All 5 sizes required in the VAST tag
        • Mezz – 1920×1080 x 2 (2 1920×1080 sizes present in VAST tag)
        • High – 1280x 720
        • Medium – 854×480
        • Low – 640×360
      • Video Bitrate: 10,000 Kbps minimum
      • Audio Bitrate: 192 Kbps or higher

Audio Tests Check the Following:

  • Format
  • Audio Bitrate
  • Duration

Audio Publisher Test Requirements:

  • Triton
    • Format: MP3, MPEG, WAV
    • Audio Bitrate: 128 kbps minimum
    • Duration: up to 60 seconds
  • Spotify
    • Format: 3MPEG or MP3
    • Audio Bitrate: 192 kbps minimum
    • Duration: up to 30 seconds
    • Note: All elements within VAST must make secure calls via https. All third-party tags and tracking URLs need to be in HTTPS format. Javascript, OMID, and VPAID are not supported. Serves on desktop, mobile, and tablet. Ads may serve on connected devices and CTV, but these platforms cannot be targeted at this time, only excluded.

Failed checks will display the identified value in the creative and then the requirement for that test for easy comparison and updating.

Creative Specs

This page outlines the technical requirements for creatives across all supported media types in Pontiac and general recommendations.

Pontiac Hosted Creatives

Video: Hosted

Max ad length90
Length5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, and 90 most common, custom duration also supported
File format MP4
Max file size 200 MB
Unit size Matches player size selected
Recommended Sizes
1920×1080, 1280×720
Supported Aspect Ratio16:9 (Recommended), 9:16, 4:5, 1:1
Video Bit Rate 20,829 Kbps Maximum
Frame Rate Min of 14 FPS (30 FPS recommended)

Video Hosted 16:9 Kevel Template Specs

  • 1920 × 1080 at 20,829 Kbps
  • 1920 × 1080 at the original uploaded media file bitrate if it is less than 20,829 Kbps and not already included.
  • 1920 × 1080 at 19,963 Kbps
  • 1920 × 1080 at 15,000 Kbps
  • 1920 × 1080 at 10,000 Kbps
  • 1920 × 1080 at 4,006 Kbps
  • 1280 × 720 at 10,000 Kbps
  • 1280 × 720 at 5,000 Kbps
  • 1280 × 720 at 1,994 Kbps
  • 1280 × 720 at 1,000 Kbps
  • 1024 × 576 at 2,100 Kbps
  • 1024 × 576 at 1,799 Kbps
  • 960 × 540 at 1,219 Kbps
  • 854 × 480 at 714 Kbps
  • 768 × 432 at 750 Kbps
  • 720 × 406 at 486 Kbps
  • 640 × 360 at 1,101 Kbps
  • 640 × 360 at 907 Kbps
  • 640 × 360 at 397 Kbps
  • 640 × 360 at 300 Kbps
  • 480 × 270 at 390 Kbps

The platform does not upscale uploaded video files. If the original uploaded media file does not meet a listed size and bitrate combination, that rendition will not be generated or included.

For example, if a 1920 × 1080 video with a bitrate of 6,000 Kbps is uploaded, the 1920 × 1080 at 4,006 Kbps rendition can be generated, but the 10,000 Kbps, 15,000 Kbps, and higher-bitrate 1920 × 1080 renditions will not be included.

Banner: Hosted

Supported Sizes88×31, 120×24, 120×60, 120×90, 120×160, 120×240, 120×600, 125×60, 125×125, 160×600, 180×150, 180×500, 200×200, 250×250,250×300, 300×50, 300×60, 300×100, 300×200, 300×250, 300×300, 300×400, 300×600, 300×1050, 320×50, 320×100, 320×250, 320×320, 320×360, 320×400, 320×480, 336×280, 400×300, 414×125, 468×60, 468×80, 580×400, 600×315, 600×600, 640×480, 640×720, 728×90, 728×200, 728×300, 732×610, 750×750, 900×1600, 930×180, 960×1200, 960×1600, 970×90, 970×250, 980×120, 980×150, 980×300, 980×500, 980×600, 1024×768, 1080×1080, 1080×1920, 1200×600, 1200×628, 1200×675, 1200×1200, 1280×720, 1920×1080, 1920×1200
Click tracking requirementsMust include macro ${CLICK_URL} or ${CLICK_URL_ENCODED} to track clicks in Pontiac depending on your ad server. See here for more information: Creative Specs
Accepted File Formatsjpeg, png, gif (gif’s should use common banner sizes such as: 300×250, 320×50, 300×600, 728×90, 160×600, etc.)
Max file size5 MB

For additional macros see here: Creative Macros

Audio: Hosted

Length:15 seconds or :30 seconds or :60 seconds (popular and recommended), custom durations also supported
File FormatMP3
Max File Size200 MB
Bit rateAt least 128 kbps bit rate / 44100 Hz sample rate

Companion Banners

Companion Banners are optional display assets that can be delivered alongside First Party Audio or Third Party Audio creatives when supported by the available inventory.

A First Party Audio or Third Party Audio creative must be uploaded and saved before Companion Banners can be added.

SpecificationRequirement
Supported Audio Creative TypesFirst Party Audio, Third Party Audio
Supported Banner Sizes300×250, 728×90, 160×600, 320×50, 300×600
Accepted Banner File FormatsPNG, JPG, JPEG, GIF
HostingCompanion Banners are uploaded and hosted by Pontiac as First Party assets
Creative AuditAdding, replacing, or removing a Companion Banner after audit will return the Audio creative to Pending status for reaudit

Companion Banner delivery is dependent on the inventory supporting the associated Companion Banner size and format.

HTML5

Common Sizes300×250, 728×90, 160×600
File FormatThe zip file must contain an index.html, with this exact file name which much reside in the root of the zip file and not in a subfolder. Index.html should be complete and valid HTML document and not an HTML fragment. All external resources must be secure (https).
File Size200 MB max file size, overage fees will apply for larger files
LimitsCannot animate after the 3rd rotation, and cannot exceed 30 seconds

Native: Format A

Title25 Character Maximum
Body140 Character Maximum
Icon1:1 aspect ratio, at least 50×50 pix, no more than 200×200
Imagewidth cant exceed 1200 and aspect ratio has to be 1:1, 4:3 or 1.91:1
Click URLURL to the page you are driving to (matches “sponsored by” brand)
Sponsored By25 Character maximum (Brand of advertisement)
Recommended ExchangesFormat A placements excel on the following exchanges: Triplelift, Sharethrough, Microsoft
File Size200kb max file size, overage fees will apply for larger files

General Recommendations

Ad Server Tag

Banner Sub TypeiFrame, Raw HTML
Click tracking requirementsMust include macro ${CLICK_URL} or ${CLICK_URL_ENCODED} to track clicks in Pontiac depending on your ad server. See here for more information: Creative Specs
Video & Audio file formatVAST 4.0

CTV

Recommended Ad Duration*:15 seconds or :30 seconds
Creative TypeVAST 2, 3, 4
Media TypeMP4
Recommended BitrateBetween 15,000 Kbps and 30,000 Kbps
Recommended Resolution*1920×1080, 1280×720 (sometimes notated as 720p)
*other resolutions and durations are supported, these are the most common and are recommended for CTV

OTT

Max ad length:15 seconds or :30 seconds
File format VAST 2, 3, 4
Max file size 100 MB
Unit size 1080×1920
Min Resolution 1280×720 (sometimes notated as 720p)
Min Bit Rate 2,000 kbps
Frame Rate 24-25 or 29-30 FP
3rd party tracking1×1 tracking pixels accepted
CodecH.264

VPAID is not supported for OTT placements, and FLV, WebM and VPAID media types will not be eligible to serve on OTT inventory.

Spotify Audio File

Length:15 seconds or :30 seconds
File FormatMP3
File Size1MB
WAV bit rate16-bit 44.1 kHz
MP3 bit rateAt least 192 kbps

Specs may vary by publisher & media owner. Sample bid requests that contain the min & max duration, bit rate and other creative requirements can be found in the Deal Landscape report by Deal. Click on the Deal name to review this information for 50 sample impressions.

At this time all creatives are required to be uploaded as VAST tags. If you do not have access to an ad server to host your creatives, Pontiac offers hosting via DCM at an additional cost. Reach out via the Help Center for more information.

Creative Rotation on Tags Ad Tags

Tags uploaded to the Pontiac platform must not rotate brands or advertisers. Tags may rotate through various ads for the SAME brand, but all creative attributes (size, duration, brand), must be the same for all versions of the creative.

We automatically search each tag for malicious activity (including for malware and other viruses that can be distributed through ad tags), but you are solely responsible for any tags that you upload or any damage that they cause. If at any point your ad tags are flagged as malicious, your account will be suspended pending an investigation and the remaining account balance will be forfeited to Pontiac and will not be refundable.

Creative Audit

Overview

The Creative audit process takes one business day from the time you upload a Creative. Before uploading any Creatives read the Pontiac Intelligence Creative Acceptance Policy here: 

Pontiac-Creative-Acceptance-Policy-3Download

Pontiac Intelligence reserves the right to reject any Creative unit at its discretion, and subsequently suspend the account without advanced warning. If your account is suspended, you will be notified in writing and an investigation will take place within three business days. Pontiac Intelligence is unable to change the audit results of Xandr/AppNexus & RiskIQ. Audit results can only be changed by resolving the issue that caused a Creative to be rejected or flagged as sensitive.

Audit Status

Creative audit results will be displayed under ‘Audit Status’ next to the name of the Creative, in the ‘Creatives’ section of the Advertiser, Campaign or Line. Audit status will be indicated by a symbol; a yellow triangle for ‘audit pending’, a green check box for ‘passed audit’, a green triangle for ‘marked as sensitive’ and a red box for ‘rejected’. Hover over this symbol to view additional information about the audit status.

More Resources

For more information about Creative issues see the below links:

  • Sensitive Categories
  • Creative Flagged as Sensitive
  • Rejected Creatives
  • Creative Re-Audit

Overview

Pontiac Intelligence reserves the right to reject any Creative unit at its discretion, and subsequently suspend the account without advanced warning. If your account is suspended, you will be notified in writing and an investigation will take place within three business days. Audit results can only be changed by resolving the issue that caused a Creative to be rejected or flagged as sensitive.

Audit Status

Creative audit results will be displayed under ‘Audit Status’ next to the name of the Creative, in the ‘Creatives’ section of the Advertiser, Campaign or Line. Audit status will be indicated by a symbol; a yellow triangle for ‘pending’ audit, a green check box for ‘approved’, a green triangle for ‘marked as sensitive’ and a red box for ‘rejected’. Hover over this symbol to view additional information about the audit status.

At the Advertiser, Campaign, and Line levels, the Creatives table displays all creatives associated with that level, along with their current audit status.

When a creative is rejected, users can hover over the Audit Status to view the rejection reason. This allows users to quickly understand why the creative did not pass audit.

Creative Brand & IAB Category

In the Creative audit process, all ad units uploaded to the Pontiac platform will be assigned an IAB category and a brand using the Advertiser’s web domain or click URL if applicable. Both parameters are used by the publishers in the bid request to control the types of ads.

The IAB category assigned to your creative can be found by clicking on the creative name to open the creative details window. This field is displayed below the creative in the ‘Creative Category’ field:

These categories come from the Open RTB Specs, that can be found here in table 5.1 ‘Content Categories’: Open RTB Specs v2.5

If you believe the incorrect IAB category has been assigned to your creative, create a ticket in the Help Center for assistance.

Sensitive Creatives

Creatives that are flagged as ‘Sensitive’ will display a green triangle in the ‘Audit status’ column. Hover over this symbol to review the sensitive category the creative was assigned to. You can also see the category and sensitive attributes by opening the creative window. These are also displayed under the preview of the creative:

Permitted Sensitive Categories by Deals

Sensitive creatives will only be allowed to run on the platform through deals that explicitly accept content in the specified sensitive category. In the ‘Deals’ section of the ‘Inventory tab’ there is a column that lists sensitive categories that are accepted on each deal.

For inquiries regarding inventory that may be available for a sensitive category search here or reach out to our team through the Help Center.

List of Allowed Sensitive Categories

The following sensitive categories are allowed on the Pontiac platform, but ads will be restricted to deals, exchanges, and publishers or venues that have explicitly approved this content. Pontiac makes no guarantee that inventory will be available for any of the following categories or that creatives will be approved by SSP or publisher partners. As a platform user, it is your sole responsibility to ensure compliance with all applicable local and national laws, restrictions, or regulations, including licensing and/or registration and targeting requirements in each market where the content is serving.

  • Political
  • Gambling
  • Religion
  • Pharma
  • Liquor
  • Beer & Wine
  • Cannabis
  • CBD
  • Tobacco
  • Firearms & Weapons
  • Lawyer Advertising

Political

Political advertisements require additional actions as prompted within the platform. When creating an Advertiser ensure that for the Politicial Content field: Yes, I am running ads related to an election, ballot initiative, or political candidate in the United States is selected and the following information is filled out.

Cannabis

Index Exchange has the following cannabis specific creative guidelines. Cannabis ads are required to meet the following standards to be eligible to participate on the exchange. Their specialized quality control team will review all cannabis ads against these standards, and will reject any advertisements that contain prohibited content.

Cannabis-related advertisements are prohibited from containing the following content:

  • Depictions or promotion of underage consumption of cannabis
  • False, misleading or deceptive content
  • Medical claims;
  • Depictions or promotion of excessive consumption
  • A design, representation, picture or illustration that is obscene or indecent

Applicable laws, rules, and regulations may vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. Each Advertiser is responsible for ensuring compliance with the laws, rules and regulations of the jurisdictions in which it chooses to serve cannabis-related advertisements.

Lawyer Advertising

This sensitive category is blocked by Paramount and NBC.

Political Creatives

All Political Creatives must run under an Advertiser with the ‘Political’ box checked and the disclosure form completed. If the disclosure form has not been filled out and a creative is marked as political in the audit, the Advertiser and all associated Campaigns will be disabled until the required information has been entered.

Pontiac Intelligence permits political advertising on the Bidder platform (advertising relating to elections, ballot initiatives, or political candidates) in the United States, but requires that such advertising comply with applicable law. We also require that you certify certain information about the ads and the political organization that purchased them for certain political advertising on the state or local level, as legally required.

All necessary information must be entered directly into the Pontiac platform when creating the Advertiser. The platform will guide you through a series of questions. The below exemplifies the nature of the information that must be provided, but is subject to change. Failure to supply all applicable information into the platform could prevent your ads from serving.

Political creatives will only be allowed to run on the platform through deals that explicitly accept political content. Depending on the Partner or Publishers, there may also be additional creative approval processes in order to run on these deals.

This information can be found in the ‘Deals’ section of the Inventory Tab. Deals that allow political content will have ‘Political’ listed in the ‘Permitted Sensitive Categories’. If additional publisher approvals are required, this will be noted in the ‘Publisher Approval Required’ field. To request publisher approval for a deal, reach out through the Help Center.

Prohibited Content

The following content is prohibited across all Pontiac products. Any ad unit flagged under one of these categories will be blocked from serving on the platform and may result in account suspension or forfeiture.

  • Profanity, Hate Speech or Defamatory Language
  • Graphic or excessive violence
  • Pornography, Nudity, Obscenities, or other ‘Adult’ Content
  • Inappropriate content (at our discretion)
  • Sale of, or instructions for creating, guns, bombs, ammunition, or weapons
  • Discussing or promoting sale of federally illegal drugs, including marijuana, illegal pharmaceuticals, and other schedule 1 drugs.
  • Malware, privacy and security violations
  • Broken Ads or blank creative
  • Enabling or Permitting Piracy
  • Charging for government forms and services
  • Misappropriation of Copyright, Trademark, Trade Secret, or Patent
  • Executes or Downloads Files without User Interactions
  • Causing degradation of site performance (ex: excessive animation, weight)
  • Illegal Material or Content
  • Misleading or sensationalized messaging, content, or images
  • Pop ups or any ad or landing pages that spawn them.
  • Content that intends to, or does, induce user action through misleading appearance or behavior, including, but not limited to, creatives that mimic video players, functional buttons, errors or warnings about viruses, missing codecs, and corrupt disks.
  • Displaying fake errors to induce user action, or messaging that implies knowledge of a user’s computer or operating system.
  • Creatives must not rotate brands or advertisers.
  • The landing page must match brand of the advertisement.
  • The landing page must contain a privacy policy.

All creatives uploaded to the CTV platform, and advertiser landing pages when applicable, are subject to the Pontiac audit process. This process may take up to 1 business day and Pontiac reserves the right to deny any creative, even if they are compliant with listed standards and policies. Any ads deemed malicious or inappropriate at Pontiac’s discretion will result in your account being suspended.

Creative Macros

Pontiac macros can be used in supported third-party Creative tags and tracker URLs to dynamically pass available Campaign, Line, Creative, inventory, device, geographic, content, and auction data.

Macros must be implemented using the exact supported format. Incorrect formatting may prevent the macro from being replaced or result in missing data. Macro values are populated when the applicable data is available for the request.

Third Party Creative Example

Creative Tracker Example

See the complete list of available supported macros and descriptions here: Supported Macros

For additional assistance, contact your Account Manager or the Help Center.

Creative Macro Implementation Recommendations & Examples

Click Tracking: For Pontiac to track clicks properly when utilizing third-party creative tags, the Click Macro will need to be properly inserted into the tag. Below are examples for the common ad servers. If your ad server is not included here, contact your third-party server for the location where the macro should be placed. The macro is either ${CLICK_URL} or ${CLICK_URL_ENCODED}.

Pontiac Commonly Uses:

  • DCM Example:
    • data-dcm-click-tracker=’${CLICK_URL_ENCODED}’>
  • Kevel Example:
    • setRedirectUrl(‘${CLICK_URL}’)

Cache-busting: ${CACHEBUSTER} inserts a unique value into the request to help prevent a cached ad response from being reused. This helps ensure that a new request is made to the third-party ad server for each eligible ad serve and can help reduce reporting discrepancies.The required placement of ${CACHEBUSTER} varies by ad server and tag format. Confirm the appropriate placement with the provider that generated the tag.

Third-party ad server requirements may change. The examples below were provided by Xandr or Pontiac clients and are included for reference only. Pontiac cannot guarantee that they reflect the current implementation required by each third-party provider. Confirm macro placement, encoding requirements, and tag syntax with the applicable third-party ad server before implementation.

Third-Party Banner Tag Examples by Ad Server

AdForm:

<script language="javascript" src="http://track.adform.net/adfscript/?bn=123456;click=${CLICK_URL}"></script>
<noscript>
<a href="${CLICK_URL}http://track.adform.net/C/?bn=123456;C=0" target="_blank">
<img src="http://track.adform.net/adfserve/?bn=123456;srctype=4;ord=${CACHEBUSTER}" border="0" width="930" height="180" alt=""/>
</a>
</noscript>

AdGear:

<script type="text/javascript" language="JavaScript">
(function() {
ADGEAR_SOURCE_CLICKTRACKER = "${CLICK_URL}";
ADGEAR_SOURCE_CLICKTRACKER_EXPECTS_ENCODED = false;
ADGEAR_SOURCE_CLICKTRACKER_IS_ENCODED = false;
ADGEAR_SOURCE_CLICKTRACKER_IS_DOUBLE_ENCODED = false;
var randomnum = "${CACHEBUSTER}";
var agref = "";
var proto = "http:";
if (!agref.match(/^https?/i)) agref = "";
if (window.location.protocol == "https:") proto = "https:";
if (randomnum.substring(0,2) == "__") randomnum = String(Math.random());
document.writeln('<scr' + 'ipt type="text/ja' + 'vascr' + 'ipt" s' + 'rc="' +
proto + '//d.adgear.com' + '/impressions/ext/p=' +
'1234' + '.js?AG_R=' + randomnum +
(agref === "" ? "" : ("&AG_REF=" + encodeURIComponent(agref))) +
'"></scr' + 'ipt>');
})();
</script>

AdInterax:

<SCRIPT>adx_U_555555="";adx_D_55555="${CLICK_URL}";adx_I_555555="";</SCRIPT>

<SCRIPT
SRC="http://mi.adinterax.com/js/denvernp,atencio_300X_seren,C=XXXXX,P=XXXXX/ad2.js?q=55555555" LANGUAGE="JavaScript"></SCRIPT>

<NOSCRIPT><A HREF="${CLICK_URL}http://tr.adinterax.com/re/denvernp,atencio_300X_seren,C=XXXXXX ,P=XXXXX/0/0/tc,c:noscript/http://www.johnatencio.com/search?q=new+heart&x=16&y=9"><IMG SRC="http://tr.adinterax.com/re/XXXXXX,atencio_300X_seren,C=John_atencio,
P=Scott/0/0/in,ti/http://mi.adinterax.com/customer/XXXXXXX/0/300x250_FL_newart.jpg?adxq=1282775581" BORDER=0></A></NOSCRIPT>

Adition:

<!-- BEGIN ADITIONTAG -->
<script type="text/javascript" src="http://imagesrv.adition.com/js/adition.js"></script>
<script type="text/javascript" src="http://ad1.adfarm1.adition.com/js?wp_id=12345&kid=12345&clickurl=${CLICK_URL}"></script>
<noscript><a href="${CLICK_URL}http://ad1.adfarm1.adition.com/click?sid=12345&ts=${CACHEBUSTER}">
<img src="http://ad1.adfarm1.adition.com/banner?sid=12345&kid=12345&ts=${CACHEBUSTER}" border="0"></a></noscript>
<!-- END ADITIONTAG -->

AdShuffle:

<iframe allowTransparency="true" frameborder="0" scrolling="no"
marginheight="0" marginwidth="0" topmargin="0" leftmargin="0" width="728"
height="90"
src="http://this.content.served.by.adshuffle.com/p/kl/01/234/r/56/7/8/abdef/ghijkl/view.html?${CACHEBUSTER}&ASTPCT=${CLICK_URL}"></iframe>

Adtech:

<!--IFRAME Tag (General Redirect) // Page: 728x90 //  -->
<IFRAME WIDTH="728" HEIGHT="90" SCROLLING="No" FRAMEBORDER="0" MARGINHEIGHT="0" MARGINWIDTH="0" SRC="http://adserver.adtech.de/adiframe|3.0|1234|1234|0|1234|ADTECH;AdId=1234;BnId=-1;;target=_blank;misc=[timestamp];rdclick=${CLICK_URL}"><script language="javascript" src="http://adserver.adtech.de/addyn|3.0|1234|1234|0|1234|ADTECH;AdId=1234;BnId=-1;;loc=700;target=_blank;misc=[timestamp];rdclick=${CLICK_URL}"></script><noscript><a href="http://adserver.adtech.de/adlink|3.0|1234|1234|0|1234|ADTECH;AdId=9479763;BnId=-1;;loc=300;misc=[timestamp]" target="_blank;AdId=9479763;BnId=-1;"><img src="http://adserver.adtech.de/adserv|3.0|1234|1234|0|1234|ADTECH;loc=300;misc=[timestamp]" border="0" width="728" height="90"></a></noscript></IFRAME>
<!-- End of IFRAME Tag --> 

Atlas (New):

<script src='http://ad.atdmt.com/i/a.js;p=11002201227900;cache=${CACHEBUSTER}?click=${CLICK_URL_ENCODED}'></script><noscript><iframe frameborder='0' scrolling='no' marginheight='0' marginwidth='0' topmargin='0' leftmargin='0' allowtransparency='true' height='250' width='300' src='http://ad.atdmt.com/i/a.html;p=11002201227900;cache=${CACHEBUSTER}?click=${CLICK_URL_ENCODED}'></iframe></noscript>

Previous:

<iframe src="http://view.atdmt.com/CNT/iview/1234567890/direct;wi.160;hi.600/01${CACHEBUSTER}?click=${CLICK_URL}" frameborder="0" scrolling="no"
marginheight="0" marginwidth="0" topmargin="0" leftmargin="0" allowtransparency="true" width="160" height="600">
<script language="JavaScript" type="text/javascript"> document.write('<a href="${CLICK_URL}http://clk.atdmt.com/CNT/go/1234567890/direct;wi.160;hi.600/01/"
target="_blank"><img src="http://view.atdmt.com/CNT/view/195860978/direct;wi.160;hi.600/01/${CACHEBUSTER}"/></a>');
</script><noscript><a href="${CLICK_URL}http://clk.atdmt.com/CNT/go/195860978/direct;wi.160;hi.600/01/" target="_blank"><img border="0"
src="http://view.atdmt.com/CNT/view/1234567890/direct;wi.160;hi.600/01/${CACHEBUSTER}" /></a></noscript></iframe>

DoubleClick:

<script language="JavaScript" src="http://ad.doubleclick.net/adj/1234.567.890/;net=123456;sz=728x90;click=${CLICK_URL};ord=${CACHEBUSTER}?"
type="text/javascript"></script><noscript><a href="${CLICK_URL}http://ad.doubleclick.net/jump/1234.567.890/;net=123456;sz=728x90;ord=${CACHEBUSTER}?"
target="_blank"><img src="http://ad.doubleclick.net/ad/1234.567.890/;net=123456;sz=728x90;ord=${CACHEBUSTER}?" width="728" height="90" border="0"
alt=""></a></noscript>

DoubleClick (New Ins Tag):

Note: The DoubleClick ‘ins’ type tag will not need the Cachebuster macro.

<ins class='dcmads' style='display:inline-block;width:728px;height:90px'
   data-dcm-placement='N3241.163472.EXAMPLEAD/B8852666.112976410'
   data-dcm-rendering-mode='script'
   data-dcm-https-only
   data-dcm-click-tracker=${CLICK_URL_ENCODED}>
 <script src='//www.googletagservices.com/dcm/dcmads.js'></script>
</ins>

EyeReturn:

<script type="text/javascript" src="http://voken.eyereturn.com/?144857&click=${CLICK_URL}&params=${CACHEBUSTER}"></script>

Fetchback:

<script language='javascript' type='text/javascript' src='http://imp.fetchback.com/serve/fb/adtag.js?tid=47476&type=widesky&clicktrack=${CLICK_URL_ENCODED}'></script>

Flashtalking:

<script language="Javascript1.1" type="text/javascript">
var ftClick = "${CLICK_URL}";
var ftX = "";
var ftY = "";
var ftZ = "";
var ftContent = "";
var ft160x600_OOBclickTrack = "";
var ftRandom = Math.random()*1000000;
var ftBuildTag1 = "<scr";
var ftBuildTag2 = "</";
var ftTag = ftBuildTag1 + 'ipt language="javascript1.1" type="text/javascript" ';
ftTag += 'src="http://servedby.flashtalking.com/imp/55555;55555;201;js;MediaIQ;Sky160x600/?click='+ftClick+'&ftx='+ftX+'&fty='+ftY+'&ftadz='+ftZ+'&ftscw='+ftContent+'&cachebuster='+ftRandom+'" id="ftscript_160x600" name="ftscript_160x600"';
ftTag += '">' + ftBuildTag2 + 'script>'; document.write(ftTag);
</script>
<noscript>
<a href="${CLICK_URL}http://servedby.flashtalking.com/click/55555;55555;0;209;0/?url=232492" target="_blank">
<img border="0" src="http://servedby.flashtalking.com/imp/55555;55555;205;gif;MediaIQ;Sky160x600/?CB=${CACHEBUSTER}"></a>
</noscript>

Kevel:

<script type="text/javascript" src="https://static.adzerk.net/ados.js"></script>
<script type="text/javascript">
  var ados = ados || {};
  ados.run = ados.run || [];
  ados.run.push(function() {
    /* load placement for account: pontiac-dev,
                          site: Web,
                          ad: Ad_2BrainFreeze-300x250png,
                          size: 300x250 - Medium Rectangle */
    ados_add_placement(11428, 1265459, "azk36943", 5)
      .setFlightCreativeId(964774214).setRedirectUrl('${CLICK_URL}');
    ados_load();
  });
</script>
<div id="azk36943"></div>

MediaPlex:

<script type="text/javascript" src="http://altfarm.mediaplex.com/ad/js/12345-678901-23456-7?mpt=${CACHEBUSTER}&mpvc=${CLICK_URL_ENC}"></script>
<noscript><a href="${CLICK_URL}http://altfarm.mediaplex.com/ad/nc/12345-678901-23456-7?mpt=${CACHEBUSTER}">
<img src="http://altfarm.mediaplex.com/ad/nb/12345-678901-23456-7?mpt=${CACHEBUSTER}" alt="Click Here" border="0"></a></noscript>
<IFRAME SRC="http://b3.mookie1.com/2/abcdefg/hijkl/123456/Banner/300/1${CACHEBUSTER}@x90" WIDTH=0 HEIGHT=0 MARGINWIDTH=0
MARGINHEIGHT=0 HSPACE=0 VSPACE=0 FRAMEBORDER=0 SCROLLING=no BORDERCOLOR="#000000"></IFRAME>

Open Ad Stream (24/7):

<script LANGUAGE="JavaScript1.1"
SRC="http://oasn04.247realmedia.com/RealMedia/ads/adstream_jx.ads/XXXXX/XXXXX/XXXXX/XXXXX/300/1${CACHEBUSTER}@x90?${CLICK_URL}">
</script>

PointRoll:

<script type="text/javascript">
function pr_swfver(){
var osf,osfd,i,axo=1,v=0,nv=navigator;
if(nv.plugins&&nv.mimeTypes.length){osf=nv.plugins["Shockwave Flash"];if(osf&&osf.description){osfd=osf.description;v=parseInt(osfd.substring(osfd.indexOf(".")-2))}}
else{try{for(i=5;axo!=null;i++){axo=new ActiveXObject("ShockwaveFlash.ShockwaveFlash."+i);v=i}}catch(e){}}
return v;
}
var pr_d=new Date();pr_d=pr_d.getDay()+"|"+pr_d.getHours()+":"+pr_d.getMinutes()+"|"+-pr_d.getTimezoneOffset()/60;
var pr_postal="";
var pr_data="";var pr_ies="";

var pr_redir="${CLICK_URL}$CTURL$";

var pr_nua=navigator.userAgent.toLowerCase();
var prHost=(("https:"==document.location.protocol)?"https://":"http://");var pr_sec=((prHost=='https://')?'&secure=1':'');
var pr_pos="",pr_inif=(window!=top);
if(pr_inif){try{pr_pos=(typeof(parent.document)!="unknown")?(((typeof(inDapIF)!="undefined")&&(inDapIF))||(parent.document.domain==document.domain))?"&pos=s":"&pos=x":"&pos=x";}
catch(e){pr_pos="&pos=x";}if(pr_pos=="&pos=x"){var pr_u=new RegExp("[A-Za-z]+:[/][/][A-Za-z0-9.-]+");var pr_t=this.window.document.referrer;
var pr_m=pr_t.match(pr_u);if(pr_m!=null){pr_pos+="&dom="+pr_m[0];}}else{if(((typeof(inDapMgrIf)!="undefined")&&(inDapMgrIf))||((typeof(isAJAX)!="undefined")&&(isAJAX))){pr_pos+="&ajx=1"}}}
if(pr_postal!=""){var przipmatch=/^\d{5}$/;if(przipmatch.test(pr_postal)){pr_pos+="&postal="+pr_postal;}}
if((pr_data!="")&&(pr_data.indexOf("&")<0)){pr_pos+="&data="+pr_data;}
if((pr_ies!="")&&(pr_ies.indexOf("&")<0)){pr_pos+="&ies="+pr_ies;}
var pr_s="ads.pointroll.com/PortalServe/?pid=xxxx&flash="+pr_swfver()+"&time="+pr_d+"&redir="+pr_redir+pr_pos+pr_sec+"&r="+Math.random();
document.write("<scr"+"ipt type='text/javascript' src='"+prHost+pr_s+"'></scr"+"ipt>");
</script>

Project Sunblock:

When previewing Project Sunblock tags, please ensure you deselect Serve in iFrame as this will stop the tags previewing in our UI and you will be unable to test click-tracking.

<script type='text/javascript'>
    var _sblq = _sblq || [];
    (function() {
        var s = document.getElementsByTagName('script'), s0 = s[0], adElement = s[s.length-1];
        var sl = Math.random().toString(36).substring(2);
        _sblq.push([sl, 'setClickUrl', '${CLICK_URL}']);
        _sblq.push([sl, 'displayAd', adElement,300, 1234]);
        var sb = document.createElement('script'); sb.type = 'text/javascript'; sb.async = true; sb.defer = true;
        sb.src = ('http:'==document.location.protocol ? "http:" : "https:")+'//js.sblk.io/sb.js';
        s0.parentNode.insertBefore(sb, s0);
    })();
</script>
<noscript><img src='//api.sblk.io/request.gif?campaign_id=000&ad_id=0000' width='1' height='1'></noscript>

SmartAdServer:

<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript1.1" SRC="http://ww856.smartadserver.com/call/adj/306890/2591652/CLIENT.campaign/600x300/${CACHEBUSTER}/no?${CLICK_URL}"></SCRIPT>

<NOSCRIPT><a href="${CLICK_URL}http://ww856.smartadserver.com/call/jumpi/306343/2591652/CLIENT.campaign/600x300/${CACHEBUSTER}/no?" target="_blank">
<img src="http://ww856.smartadserver.com/call/adi/306890/2591343/CLIENT.campaign/600x300/${CACHEBUSTER}/no?" border="0"></a></NOSCRIPT>

Trade Doubler:

<script type="text/javascript">
var uri = 'http://impde.tradedoubler.com/imp?type(iframe)g(18906306)a(1838453)preurl(${CLICK_URL})' + new String (Math.random()).substring (2, 11);
document.write('<iframe src="'+uri +'" width="160" height="600" frameborder="0" border="0" marginwidth="0" marginheight="0" scrolling="no"></iframe>');
</script>

Traffiq:

<iframe src="http://ads.traffiq.com/ad.imp?pid=1234&oid=5678&rand=${CACHEBUSTER}/?pclk=${CLICK_URL}" width="728" height="90"
frameborder="0" marginheight="0" marginwidth="0" scrolling="no" topmargin="0" leftmargin="0"> </iframe>

Weborama:

<a href="${CLICK_URL}http://gae.solution.weborama.fr/fcgi-bin/dispatch.fcgi?a.A=cl&a.si=54&a.te=56&a.ra=__RANDOM__&a.im=1&g.lu=" target="_blank">
<img src="http://gae.solution.weborama.fr/fcgi-bin/dispatch.fcgi?a.A=im&a.si=54&a.te=56&a.he=600&a.wi=160&a.ra=__RANDOM__&a.hr=R" width="160" height="600"></a>

Yield Manager:

<IFRAME FRAMEBORDER=0 MARGINWIDTH=0 MARGINHEIGHT=0 SCROLLING=NO WIDTH=300 HEIGHT=250 SRC="http://ad.yieldmanager.com/st?ad_type=iframe&ad_size=300x250&section=XXXXXXX&pub_redirect_unencoded=1&pub_redirect=${CLICK_URL}"></IFRAME>

Zedo:

<script language="JavaScript" src="http://d7.zedo.com/jsc/d3/fl.js?n=809&c=1839/1740&s=704&d=14&w=728&h=90&l=${CLICK_URL}&z=${CACHEBUSTER}"></script> <noscript><a href="http://yads.zedo.com/ads2/r?n=809;c=1839/1740;s=704;x=3584;u=j;z=${CACHEBUSTER}" target="_blank"><img

 border="0" width="728" height="90" src="http://yads.zedo.com/ads2/x?n=809;c=1839/1740;s=704;x=3584;u=j;z=${CACHEBUSTER}" alt="Click here"></a> </noscript>

Edit Creatives

To Edit Creatives you must go to the Advertiser Level. Navigate down to the Creatives dropdown and click on the Creative Name that you want tot edit. Note that making changes to the Creative and then selecting ‘Save’ will automatically send the updated Creative to be Re-audit.

This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is Screenshot-2025-04-01-115838.png



Editable Fields on Creative Tab:

  • Name
  • Duration
  • Weight
  • Video URL
  • Sizes
    • Automatically Detect Sizes
    • Manually Set Sizes
  • Serve to all sizes with similar aspect ratio checkbox

Editable Fields on Trackers Tab:

  • Add New Tracker

Editable Fields on Flights

  • Creative Dates
    • Always On
    • Flights

Edit Click URLs for Hosted Creatives

Users can edit the Click URL for hosted creatives directly from the Advertiser level creative dialog.

This applies to the following Creative Types:

  • Banner: Hosted
  • HTML5
  • Native
  • Audio: Hosted
  • Video: Hosted

Editing the Click URL replaces the creative’s existing URL and automatically triggers a new creative audit. The creative will stop serving while the audit is pending and will remain ineligible to serve until the reaudit is completed.

Bulk Upload

Bulk Upload Third Party Creatives with Pontiac Assistant

Third party creatives can be uploaded in bulk through the Pontiac Assistant by providing a creative manifest in either JSON or CSV format. The manifest can include creatives across multiple Advertisers in a single upload.

Paste the JSON or CSV content directly into Pontiac Assistant. A separate file path is not required.

Required Fields

Each creative should include the following:

FieldDescription
advertiserIdAdvertiser ID the creative should be associated with. Different Advertiser IDs can be included in the same manifest.
nameCreative name.
creativeTypeUse video or audio for VAST tags, or display for an HTML/JavaScript ad tag.
creativeSizesCreative dimensions. For video/audio, this is typically the player size, such as 640x480. For display, use the banner size, such as 300x250.
durationRequired for all creative types. Enter the duration in seconds for video/audio. Use 0 for display creatives.
vastTagVAST XML URL. Required for video and audio third-party creatives.
creativeDataRaw HTML/JavaScript ad tag. Required for display third-party creatives.

The following fields are optional:

  • clickUrl
  • weight — value from 1–10
  • status
  • categories — IAB category codes
  • trackers — VAST tracking pixels for video/audio creatives
  • code
  • language

Upload Using JSON

Paste a JSON array containing one object per creative into Pontiac Assistant.

[
{
“advertiserId”: 966,
“name”: “Brand Video 30s – VAST”,
“creativeType”: “video”,
“vastTag”: “https://example.com/vast/spot30.xml“,
“duration”: 30,
“creativeSizes”: [
{
“width”: 640,
“height”: 480
}
],
“weight”: 1
},
{
“advertiserId”: 966,
“name”: “Podcast Audio 15s”,
“creativeType”: “audio”,
“vastTag”: “https://example.com/vast/audio15.xml“,
“duration”: 15
},
{
“advertiserId”: 966,
“name”: “300×250 Ad Tag”,
“creativeType”: “display”,
“creativeData”: “”,
“duration”: 0,
“creativeSizes”: [
{
“width”: 300,
“height”: 250
}
],
“clickUrl”: “https://example.com/landing“
}
]

UI Walkthrough

  1. Assistant Prompt:
    can you bulk upload these third party creatives to advertiser id 966:
    JSON:

[
{“advertiserId”:966,”name”:”Brand Video 30s – VAST”,”creativeType”:”video”,”vastTag”:”https://example.com/vast/spot30.xml”,”duration”:30,”creativeSizes”:[{“width”:640,”height”:480}],”weight”:1},
{“advertiserId”:966,”name”:”Podcast Audio 15s”,”creativeType”:”audio”,”vastTag”:”https://example.com/vast/audio15.xml”,”duration”:15,”creativeSizes”:[{“width”:1,”height”:1}]}
{“advertiserId”:966,”name”:”300×250 Ad Tag”,”creativeType”:”display”,”creativeData”:””,”duration”:0,”creativeSizes”:[{“width”:300,”height”:250}],”clickUrl”:”https://example.com/landing”}
]

  1. Assistant Response:
  1. UI Verification

The three creatives were successfully uploaded to the Advertiser. In the example shown, the creatives were rejected for testing purposes. In a standard upload, newly uploaded creatives will display a Pending status while they go through the normal creative audit process and will update once approved.

Upload Using CSV

CSV uploads must include a header row. Each creative should be entered as a separate row.

advertiserId,name,creativeType,vastTag,creativeData,clickUrl,duration,creativeSizes,weight
966,Brand Video 30s – VAST,video,https://example.com/vast/spot30.xml,,,30,640×480,1
966,Podcast Audio 15s,audio,https://example.com/vast/audio15.xml,,,15,,
966,300×250 Ad Tag,display,,””,https://example.com/landing,0,300×250,

CSV Formatting

When including multiple values within a CSV field:

  • Creative Sizes: separate multiple sizes with semicolons.
    Example: 640x480;300x250
  • Trackers: use type|url pairs separated by semicolons.
    Example: imps|https://track.example.com/imp;clicks|https://track.example.com/click
  • Categories: separate multiple IAB category codes with semicolons.

Once the manifest is ready, paste it into Pontiac Assistant and submit it to begin the bulk creative upload.

Creative Malicious Intent Test

Automated Testing is a quality check that evaluates creatives after they have been audited by Pontiac. This process helps ensure that creatives do not contain malicious intent. Testing results are displayed on the creative details view on the Advertiser, Campaign, and Line level under Automated Testing.

  • Pass message: Passed automated testing
  • Fail message: Failed automated testing
  • Not sent for testing: Not tested

Publisher Specs & Approval Process

Some publishers require advertisers to complete an approval process before their inventory can be targeted. If a deal requires publisher approval, it will be indicated in the ‘Publisher Approval Required’ column within the Deals table under the Inventory tab.

Once a creative is approved for a specific publisher, it will be displayed in the ‘Approved for:’ field

The following sections summarize publisher-specific specification links and approval process when applicable. These requirements are subject to change. Contact your publisher representative for the most current approval requirements and specification guidance. Please review the publisher’s specifications in detail and ensure that all tags and creatives fully comply with the stated requirements.

Disney

For all Disney-owned properties, including ESPN, Disney XP, Disney+, Hulu, ABC & more, an approval process is required before ads can run. This process involves two key steps:

  1. Brand Safe-Listing
  2. Advertiser and Creative QA conducted by the Disney team to ensure all assets meet the publisher’s specifications.

Ads that do not complete this process will not be allowed to run on these Disney-affiliated deals.

Before initiating the approval, please review the publisher’s specifications in detail and ensure that all tags and creatives fully comply with the stated requirements.

  • ESPN: https://files.disneyadvertising.com/MediaKit/ESPN/espn_watch-espn-mid-roll.pdf
  • Disney XP: https://files.disneyadvertising.com/MediaKit/Disney-XP/disney-xp_digital-video.pdf
  • Disney+: https://files.disneyadvertising.com/MediaKit/Disney-Plus/disneyplus_video.pdf
  • Hulu: https://assets.huluim.com/downloads/hulu_ad_specs_quicksheet.pdf
  • ABC:
    • https://files.disneyadvertising.com/MediaKit/Disney-Brands/shortformvideo.pdf
    • https://files.disneyadvertising.com/MediaKit/Disney-Brands/longformvideo.pdf

For more information, see Disney Company Ad Specifications page: https://www.disneyadvertising.com/mediakit/

To start the Disney approval process, reach out through the Help Center or your Account Manager with the following information:

  • Advertiser URL
  • Advertiser Creative Asset
  • Advertiser Tags
  • Properties you want access to (Disney XP, ESPN, Hulu, etc.)

NBCU

  • NBCU: https://nbcuniversal-creative-guidelines.scrollhelp.site/nbcuadspecs/nbcu-programmatic-video-guidelines

Paramount

  • Paramount: https://www.paramount.com/sites/g/files/dxjhpe356/files/2023-10/Paramount%20Digital%20Ads_Video_3rd_Party_VAST_Specs.pdf

WBD

  • WBD:
    • https://www.wbdadspecs.com/ad-spec/pre-roll-no-skippable/
    • https://www.wbdadspecs.com/ad-spec/mid-roll-no-skippable/

Spotify

Spotify: https://ads.spotify.com/en-GB/ad-specs/audio-ad-specs/

Publisher Specs Eligibility Tests

The Publisher Specs Eligibility tab is available in the Creative window for:

  • Video: Hosted
  • Video: 3rd Party
  • Audio: Hosted
  • Audio: 3rd Party

See the full documentation here: Publisher Specs Eligibility Tab

This tab evaluates whether a hosted creative appears to meet the technical requirements of supported publishers and SSPs.

Publisher Specs Eligibility is a technical specification check only. A Pass result means the creative appears to meet the listed requirements, but it does not indicate final approval by Pontiac, the publisher, or the SSP. Publisher requirements are controlled by each publisher and are subject to change. Audio bitrate cannot be validated for 3rd party video creatives. Contact your ad server to confirm that the audio bitrate meets the publisher’s specifications.

Publisher Blocked Categories

For each impression, there is a field called ‘b-cat’ (blocked categories) included in the request that allows the publisher to block creatives with content in certain IAB categories. If the IAB category assigned to your creative in the audit is included in the list of blocked categories, your ad will not be eligible to serve on that inventory. In the CTV landscape report, the request_bcat column can be found in the sample logs for each deal. While this is just a sample and blocked categories could vary for each impression, this provides insight into commonly blocked categories by Deal. If your creative category is blocked in all sample impressions, it is unlikely you will be able to run through the selected deal.

These categories come from the Open RTB Specs, that can be found here in table 5.1 ‘Content Categories’: Open RTB Specs v2.5

Publisher Audits

Certain inventory or deals may require an additional publisher audit for each creative ad unit targeting that inventory. Creatives will not run through Deals that require a publisher audit until they have been approved for this inventory by the publisher and deal provider. For questions regarding the process for these audits, reach out through the Help Center.

Pontiac shall have no liability or responsibility of any kind if a third-party declines to serve any Ads proposed by a Pontiac user, regardless of whether the ads meet the Pontiac Ad Standards or are approved by Pontiac, and users agree to indemnify and hold harmless Pontiac from any losses arising from a third-party’s decision not to serve a user’s ads. 

Macros Overview

Pontiac supports dynamic macros and query string parameters that allow additional data to be passed when ads, trackers, or Pixels are served or fired.

These values can be used with supported third-party Creative tags, Trackers, and Pixels for tracking, measurement, attribution, and reporting.

The Macros documentation includes:

  • Supported Macros: Complete list of Pontiac-supported macros and the value each macro returns.
  • Creative Macros: Guidance and examples for using supported macros in third-party Creative tags and tracker URLs, including click tracking and cache-busting.
  • Pixel Macros:Guidance for adding query string parameters to Pontiac Pixels to pass additional conversion and site data, including Order ID, Order Amount, Consumer ID, GDPR values, and Custom Variables.

Availability of values used in Creative tags and trackers may depend on the information provided in the applicable bid request. Pixel query string values must be populated by the website or implementation when the Pixel fires.

Supported Macros

The following macros are supported by Pontiac and may be used in applicable third-party tags, pixels, and trackers.

Macros must be implemented using the exact format shown below. Incorrect formatting may prevent the macro from being replaced or result in missing data.

Some macro values depend on information provided by the Exchange, publisher, device, or bid request and may not be available for every impression.

Pontiac IDs

MacroDescription
${ADVERTISER_ID}Pontiac Advertiser ID
${CAMPAIGN_ID}Pontiac Campaign ID
${LINE_ID}Pontiac Line ID
${CREATIVE_ID}Pontiac Creative ID
${TAG_ID}Unique identifier of the ad tag used for serving the impression

Inventory & Content

MacroDescription
${SITE_DOMAIN}The site domain associated with the impression
${APP_BUNDLE_ID}The app’s bundle identifier where the impression served
${PUBLISHER_NAME}The name of the publisher serving the impression
${PUBLISHER_ID}Unique ID of the publisher serving the impression
${SERIES}The series name associated with the content where the impression served
${CHANNEL}The channel name or identifier where the impression served
${NETWORK}The TV or media network associated with the impression
${GENRE}The genre classification of the content (e.g., Sports, News, Entertainment)
${TITLE}The specific title of the content where the impression served
${CONTENT_ID}The content ID of the impression
${GPID}A custom index specific placement identifier

Geography

MacroDescription
${GEO_POSTAL_CODE}The postal or ZIP code of the user’s location for the impression
${GEO_COUNTRY}The country of the user’s location for the impression
${GEO_REGION}The state, province, or region of the user’s location for the impression
${GEO_LAT}Latitude of the user’s location for the impression
${GEO_LONG}Longitude of the user’s location for the impression

Device

MacroDescription
${DEVICE_TYPE}The numeric IAB category code representing the type of device (e.g., mobile, desktop, CTV, set-top)
${DEVICE_IFA}Identifier for the device if available
${DEVICE_OS}The numeric IAB category code representing operating system of the device (e.g., iOS, Android, Roku OS)
${DEVICE_MAKE}Manufacturer of the device (e.g., Apple, Samsung, LG)
${DEVICE_MODEL}Model of the device (e.g., iPhone 14, Fire TV Stick 4K)

Auction & Deal

MacroDescription
${BID_PRICE}Bid price associated with the impression
${BID_ID}Unique identifier for the bid generated in the auction
${AUCTION_ID}The auction ID of the impression
${DEAL_ID}Identifier for the Deal associated with the impression
${EXCHANGE_ID}The Exchange ID serving the impression
${IMP_ID}The ID of the Imp object in the related bid request provided by the SSP

Creative, Click & Utility

MacroDescription
${HEIGHT}Pixel height of the Creative
${WIDTH}Pixel width of the Creative
${CLICK_URL}The destination click-through URL for the ad
${CLICK_URL_ENCODED}The destination click-through URL encoded for the ad
${CACHEBUSTER}Inserts a random value to help prevent cached responses and ensure each impression generates a new request
${TIMESTAMP}Timestamp when the impression was served (UTC)

Page & Referrer

MacroDescription
${SITE_PAGE}The full URL of the page where the request originated. Returned in lowercase and not URL-encoded.
${SITE_PAGE_ENC}The full URL of the page where the request originated, URL-encoded. Returned in lowercase and encoded using UTF-8 (e.g., https%3A%2F%2Fexample.com%2Fpage).
${SITE_REFERRER}The referrer URL indicating the page that led to the current request. Returned in lowercase and not URL-encoded.
${SITE_REFERRER_ENC}The referrer URL indicating the page that led to the current request, URL-encoded. Returned in lowercase and encoded using UTF-8.

Privacy & GDPR

MacroDescription
${GDPR}Flag indicating whether the impression falls under GDPR regulation
${GDPR_CONSENT_X}GDPR consent value for the specified vendor. Replace X with the applicable vendor ID. For example, ${GDPR_CONSENT_508} uses vendor ID 508, Sweden. For the IAB TCF Vendor List, see here: https://iabeurope.eu/vendor-list-tcf/
${IP_HASH}Salted hash of the IP address (blocked for GDPR compliance)

Pixel Query String Macro Parameters

Pontiac Pixels also support optional query string parameters that can be used to pass additional conversion, visitor, and site data when the Pixel fires. Unlike the Pontiac-populated macros listed above, these values must be populated by the website, tag manager, or other Pixel implementation.

ParametersDescription
ORDER_IDPasses the unique order or transaction ID generated by your site.
ORDER_AMOUNTPasses the value associated with the conversion or order. This value can be used in reporting for metrics such as revenue and ROAS.
CONSUMER_IDPasses a unique customer identifier generated by your site.
CLIENT_IPPasses the visitor IP address observed by your website when the Pixel fires. This can be useful when the Pixel is implemented through a container or another environment where the IP address detected directly by the Pixel may not accurately represent the visitor. When provided, the Client IP value is used for attribution and reporting.
GDPRIndicates whether GDPR applies to the visitor associated with the Pixel fire, typically using 1 when GDPR applies and 0 when it does not. For additional information, see GDPR Query String Macros
GDPR_CONSENTPasses the visitor’s IAB TCF consent string when applicable. Populate this value dynamically using consent information collected by the website or Consent Management Platform (CMP).
VAR1, VAR2, VAR3, VAR4Passes additional custom values to the Pixel using var1, var2, var3, and var4. These values are available in Custom Reporting as Custom Variable 1–4. Applicable Report Types: IP Conversion Pixel: Path to Conversion, IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits, Cookies: Path to Conversion

Pixels Overview

A Pixel is a tracking asset created within an Advertiser that can be used to measure website activity, conversions, and campaign performance in Pontiac. Pixels can be placed on an Advertiser’s website or used with Creatives depending on the desired measurement or audience-building workflow.

Pixels are created and managed at the Advertiser level. Once created, they can be associated with applicable Campaigns and Lines for conversion measurement and reporting.

Pontiac Pixels can support workflows such as:

  • Measuring website visits and conversion events
  • Attributing website activity to Pontiac Campaigns
  • Passing additional conversion information such as Order ID and Order Amount
  • Creating Pixel IP Audiences for remarketing or exclusion
  • Firing additional third-party measurement through Piggyback Pixels

Pixel capabilities and implementation requirements vary depending on how the Pixel will be used.

Pixel Hierarchy

Pixels are created and managed under an Advertiser:

Seat
└── Advertiser
    ├── Creatives
    ├── Pixels
    └── Campaigns
        └── Lines

Although Pixels belong to the Advertiser, they can be associated with Campaigns and Lines for conversion tracking and reporting.

IP Conversion Pixels

Overview

With the IP based pixel, a client can place this on their website and attribute online actions (browsing a page, loading the shopping cart, purchases) to CTV, Streaming Audio, and Display campaigns run through the Pontiac platform. Typically, pixels are based on third party cookies which work on browsers, and these do not allow for attribution for CTV and Streaming Audio campaigns. Pontiac IP Conversion Pixels are a proprietary and privacy safe attribution solution for CTV & Streaming Audio that utilizes the user’s IP Address to track website traffic and online purchases driven by your campaigns.

Metrics

At the Advertiser level, IP Conversion metrics will include conversions from ALL Line Items under this Advertiser, even if the pixel was not associated to the Line. If the pixel is associated to a Line Item, you can see metrics for that Line Item by opening the Line. Detailed reporting can be pulled in the Reporting tab under Custom Reports.

IP conversion pixels have a standard lookback of 30 days in the metrics under the Advertiser. This means that the user must complete the desired action within 30 days of seeing the ad for it to count as a conversion. If you would like to pull reporting with a custom lookback window, this can be done in Custom Reporting using the IP Conversion Custom Report. You can select from ‘5’, ‘7’, ’15’ or ’30’ day as the lookback.

  • Attributed Imps: The number of impressions served by a Line Item under the Advertiser to users that then converted.
  • Total Convs: The number of conversions, or unique actions that were driven by all Line Items under the Advertiser. A conversion event will be defined according to the pixel placement. For example, if the pixel is placed on all web pages, a conversion event would equal a page visit. If the pixel is placed on the ‘Thank you’ page after a purchase, then a conversion event would equal a purchase.
  • Total Loads: The Loads will indicate the number of times the pixel has fired on the page. This is the number of users that have visited the page in the selected time interval regardless if the Line Item drove the conversion. If the pixel is showing 0 loads, this may indicate the pixel is not properly placed or firing correctly.
  • Uniques: The total number of unique visitors (loads) to the web page where the pixel is placed in the reporting interval selected.

For information about IP Conversion attribution, Lookback Windows, and reporting, see Conversion Tracking.

Create an IP Conversion Pixel

To create an IP Conversion Pixel, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser, or create a new Advertiser if needed.
  2. Select New Pixel.
  3. Enter a Name for the Pixel.
  4. Configure the optional Create Custom Audience setting:
    • Select Create Custom Audience to create a Pixel IP Audience from qualifying Pixel fires for future targeting or exclusion.
    • Days to Live: Determines how long each record remains active in the Audience. The default is 180 days. Common values are 30, 60, or 90 days, with a maximum of 180 days. Users are added to the Audience only from qualifying Pixel activity that occurs after Audience creation is enabled.
  5. Create Custom Audience (Optional): Check the box if wanting to create an audience for retargeting or exclusion purposes.
    • Set Days to Live: Set to 180 days by default. Set the number of days to live. Typically 30, 60, 90 days is input here. The maximum is 180 days.
    • Note that users are only added to the audience if they visit the site after the pixel is placed.
  6. Select Save.
  7. Allow approximately 30–60 seconds for the Pixel to generate.
  8. Open the newly created Pixel to view the generated Pixel URLs and additional configuration options.

  1. Configure any optional Query String Parameters:
    • Order ID: The unique order ID generated by your site.
    • Order Amount: The total order value associated with the Order ID.
    • Client IP: The visitor’s IP address captured by your site when the Pixel fires.
    • Consumer ID: A unique customer, lead, or visitor ID generated by your site.
    • GDPR Consent: The visitor’s consent string collected by your site.
    • GDPR: A flag (0 or 1) indicating whether GDPR applies to the visitor.
      1. For additional information, see GDPR Query String Macros.
    • Custom Variable 1: Adds var1=VAR1 to the Pixel URL and makes the value available as Custom Variable 1 in Custom Reporting. Additional values can be passed using var2, var3, and var4.
    • When query string parameters are included, work with your web developer to dynamically replace the placeholders with the appropriate values before the Pixel fires.
  2. Select the desired Pixel implementation:
    • Pixel URL Img: Recommended for most use cases. Image pixels are widely supported and work reliably across environments.
    • Pixel URL JS: Supports additional functionality and may be used when JavaScript-based tracking is required and supported.
  3. Implement the Pixel in the desired location:
    • Website Activity: Place the Pixel on the Advertiser’s website. It can be placed across the site, such as in the header, or on a specific page such as a product, checkout, or confirmation page depending on the activity you want to measure.
    • Creative Exposure: A Pontiac Pixel can also be added to a Creative as an Impression Tracker when Creative exposure tracking or Pixel IP Audience creation is desired.
  4. Associate the Pixel with the applicable Campaign or Line where conversion performance should be measured.
    • For association instructions, see:
      • Campaign Creatives
      • Line Creatives

Edit an IP Conversion Pixel

To edit an existing IP Conversion Pixel:

  1. Navigate to the Advertiser where the Pixel was created, or search for the Pixel by Name or ID using the main search bar.
  2. Select the Pixel you would like to edit.
  3. Update any applicable fields:
    • Name: Update the Pixel name.
    • Create Custom Audience: Select or unselect this option to control whether a Pixel IP Audience is created from qualifying Pixel fires.
      • Days to Live: Determines how long each record remains active in the Audience. The default is 180 days. Common values are 30, 60, or 90 days, with a maximum of 180 days. Users are added to the Audience only from qualifying Pixel activity that occurs after Audience creation is enabled.
    • Query String Parameters: Select additional parameters to include in the Pixel URL:
      • Once the pixel has been generated, you can track additional parameters by selecting the corresponding boxes for:
        • Order ID: The unique order ID generated by your site.
        • Order Amount: The total order value associated with the Order ID generated by your site.
        • Client IP: The visitor’s IP address captured by your site at the time of the pixel fire.
        • Consumer ID: A unique customer, lead, or visitor ID generated by your site.
        • GDPR Consent: The visitor’s consent string collected by your site.
        • GDPR: A flag (0 or 1) that indicates whether GDPR applies to the visitor.
          • For more documentation, see here: GDPR Query String Macros
        • Custom Variable 1: This adds var1=VAR1 to the pixel URL and populates Custom Variable 1 in Custom Reporting. To pass additional values, add var2, var3, or var4 using the same format. Work with your web developer to replace the placeholders with the intended values.

When query string parameters are added or changed, work with your web developer to dynamically replace the placeholders with the appropriate values before the Pixel fires.

Update the Pixel Implementation

If an edit changes the Pixel URL or parameters being passed, update the Pixel anywhere it has already been implemented so the revised configuration is used.

This may include:

  • Website Activity: A Pontiac Pixel placed on an Advertiser’s website, such as a homepage, product page, checkout page, or other conversion page.
  • Creative Exposure: A Pontiac Pixel added to a Creative as an Impression Tracker to measure Creative exposure and, when enabled, build a Pixel IP Audience for future retargeting.

Save the Pixel after completing the desired changes.

Piggyback Pixels

Pontiac supports Piggyback Pixels so additional third-party tracking or measurement pixels can fire through a Pontiac JavaScript or Image pixel. The Piggyback Pixels tab is available when creating or editing a pixel, allowing users to add each piggyback pixel and enter its URL.

For JavaScript pixels:

  • Up to 10 piggyback pixels can be added.
  • When the Pontiac JavaScript pixel fires, it uses document.write to fire the associated piggyback image pixels.

For Image pixels:

  • A maximum of 1 piggyback pixel can be added.
  • When the Pontiac Image pixel fires, the request redirects to the configured piggyback pixel URL.

Query String Macro Parameters

After a Pixel has been generated, optional query string parameters can be added to pass additional information with each Pixel fire. When enabled, the corresponding parameters and placeholders are added to the Pixel URL.

Work with your web developer to dynamically replace each placeholder with the appropriate value before the Pixel fires. Values passed through these parameters are available in Custom Reporting and can provide additional insight into campaign-driven conversions.

  • Order ID: Passes the unique order or transaction ID generated by your site.
  • Order Amount: Passes the value associated with the conversion or order. This can be used in reporting for metrics such as revenue and ROAS.
  • Consumer ID: Passes a unique customer, lead, or visitor identifier generated by your site.
  • Client IP: Passes the visitor IP address observed by your website when the Pixel fires. This can be useful when the Pixel is implemented through a container or another environment where the IP address detected directly by the Pixel may not represent the visitor accurately. When provided, the Client IP value is used for attribution and reporting.
  • GDPR Consent: Passes the visitor’s IAB TCF consent string when applicable. This value should be populated dynamically using consent information collected by the website or Consent Management Platform (CMP).
  • GDPR: Indicates whether GDPR applies to the visitor associated with the Pixel fire, typically using 1 when GDPR applies and 0 when it does not.
    • For additional information, see GDPR Query String Macros.
  • Custom Variable 1: Adds var1=VAR1 to the Pixel URL and makes the value available as Custom Variable 1 in Custom Reporting. Additional values can be passed using var2, var3, and var4.
    • Applicable Report Types:
      • IP Conversion Pixel: Path to Conversion
      • IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits
      • Cookies: Path to Conversion

Whitelabel Pixel Domain Setup

Configure a Custom Pixel Domain

White-label clients can use a branded subdomain for Pontiac pixel URLs so that pixel requests display their own domain rather than the Pontiac domain.

For example, instead of: https://pix.pontiac.media/iap/1234

the pixel can use a custom branded domain such as: https://pixel.yourdomain.com/iap/1234

The underlying pixel functionality remains the same; only the domain displayed in the pixel URL is customized.

  1. Choose your custom subdomain.
    Select the subdomain you would like to use for your pixel URLs. For example:
    • pixel.yourdomain.com
    • p.yourdomain.com
    • tracking.yourdomain.com
  2. Provide the SSL certificate for the selected subdomain.
    For example, if you choose pixel.yourdomain.com, provide the SSL certificate that covers pixel.yourdomain.com. Pontiac uses this certificate to securely configure the custom hostname for HTTPS requests.
  3. Pontiac configures the custom hostname.
    Pontiac will configure the branded hostname to route requests to the Pontiac pixel service. Once configured, requests such as: https://pixel.yourdomain.com/iap/1234 can be processed by the same Pontiac pixel infrastructure as the standard Pontiac pixel URL.
  4. Pontiac provides the DNS target.
    After the hostname has been configured, Pontiac will provide the DNS target that should be used for your CNAME record. For example: pixel.yourdomain.com → <Pontiac-provided DNS target>
  5. Create the CNAME record with your DNS provider.
    In your DNS provider, such as Cloudflare or AWS Route 53, create a CNAME record for your selected subdomain and point it to the DNS target provided by Pontiac.

Once the SSL, Pontiac configuration, and DNS setup are complete, pixel URLs can continue using the same path structure while displaying your custom branded domain.

Shopify Custom Pixel Implementation

Completed Checkout Custom Pixel

A Shopify custom pixel can be used to report completed checkouts to Pontiac. The pixel subscribes to Shopify’s checkout_completed customer event and sends a request to the Pontiac pixel endpoint when an order is completed.

The request can include:

  • Pontiac pixel ID
  • Event type
  • Shopify order ID
  • Completed order amount

Shopify typically triggers the checkout_completed event once per checkout on the order confirmation or Thank You page.

Before configuring the custom pixel, confirm that:

  • You have access to the Shopify store’s admin settings.
  • A Pontiac conversion pixel has been created.
  • You know the Pontiac pixel ID that should receive the completed checkout event.

The example below uses Pontiac pixel ID 12345. Replace this value with the applicable Pontiac pixel ID.

Add the Custom Pixel in Shopify

  1. Log in to the Shopify admin.
  2. Go to Settings.
  3. Select Customer events.
  4. Open the Custom pixels section.
  5. Click Add custom pixel.
  6. Enter a name such as: Pontiac Completed Checkout Pixel
  7. Paste the completed checkout code into the code editor.
  8. Save the pixel.
  9. Click Connect to activate it.

The custom pixel must be connected before it can receive customer events.

Locate the Pontiac Pixel Information

The Pontiac img pixel is provided in the following format:

Pixel URL Img: <img src=”https://pix.pontiac.media/pixel?id=12345&type=2″ width=”1″ height=”1″ />

For the Shopify implementation, use only the URL contained in the src attribute: https://pix.pontiac.media/pixel?id=12345&type=2

The URL is separated into the following values in the custom pixel template:

“https://pix.pontiac.media/pixel” + “?id=12345” + “&type=2”

Replace 12345 with the ID from the Pontiac pixel. Do not paste the full HTML <img> tag into the Shopify custom pixel.

Shopify Custom Pixel Code

analytics.subscribe("checkout_completed", (event) => {
  const checkout = event.data?.checkout;

  if (!checkout) return;

  const orderId =
    checkout.order?.id ||
    checkout.order?.name ||
    checkout.id ||
    checkout.token ||
    "";

  const orderAmount =
    checkout.totalPrice?.amount ||
    "";

  const pixelUrl =
    "https://pix.pontiac.media/pixel" +
    "?id=12345" +
    "&type=2" +
    "&order-id=" + encodeURIComponent(orderId) +
    "&order-amount=" + encodeURIComponent(orderAmount);

  fetch(pixelUrl, {
 method: "GET",
 mode: "no-cors",
 keepalive: true
 });
});

Update the Pontiac Pixel ID

In the custom pixel code, locate:

"?id=12345"

Replace 12345 with the applicable Pontiac pixel ID.

For example, if the Pontiac pixel URL is: https://pix.pontiac.media/pixel?id=67890&type=2

the corresponding portion of the Shopify code should be:

"?id=67890" +
"&type=2"

Do not change the type=2 value for a completed checkout conversion pixel unless instructed by Pontiac.

Information Sent to Pontiac

When a checkout is completed, the custom pixel sends:

  • id: The Pontiac pixel ID
  • type: The Pontiac event type
  • order-id: The first available Shopify order or checkout identifier
  • order-amount: The completed checkout total

Reach out through the Pontiac Help Center or contact your account manager for additional guidance or questions.

Overview

Pontiac provides multiple targeting methods that allow users to control which Impressions are eligible to serve for a Campaign or Line. Targeting can be used to reach specific inventory sources, locations, devices, content, and Audiences.

Targeting options are organized into the following sections within the Targeting window:

SectionAvailable targeting
InventoryDeals, Deal Lists, Exchanges, Sites, Site Lists, App Bundle, App Name, App Lists, Curation*
Location & DeviceGeo, Zip Codes, Device Types, Browser, Operating Systems
ContentChannel, Content ID, Genre, Network, Publisher, Series, Title, Multi Field
Streaming & VideoLivestream, OLV
AdvancedCustom Model, Privacy
Note*Curation is available under Inventory at the Line level only.

Audience Targeting is configured separately through the Associate Segments window. For instructions on selecting Audiences and configuring Boolean targeting logic, see Associate Segments .

Campaign and Line Targeting

Targeting can be configured at the Campaign or Line level, depending on the desired strategy.

  • Campaign Targeting: Applies shared targeting requirements across all Lines within a Campaign. Use Campaign level targeting when the selected criteria should apply to every Line.
  • Line Targeting: Applies additional targeting requirements to an individual Line. Use Line level targeting to define a more specific inventory, geographic, device, content, or video strategy.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. An Impression must satisfy all applicable targeting requirements at both levels to be eligible to serve. Conflicting or overly restrictive targeting can reduce eligible inventory or prevent delivery.

Configuring Targeting

To configure targeting at either level:

  1. Create a new Campaign or Line, or open an existing one in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  3. Select Edit Targeting.
  4. Configure the applicable targeting options.
    • Inventory
      • Deals
      • Deal Lists
      • Exchanges
      • Sites
      • Site Lists
      • App Bundle
      • App Name
      • App Lists
      • Curation*
    • Location & Device
      • Geo
      • Zip Codes
      • Device Types
      • Browser
      • Operating Systems
    • Content
      • Channel
      • Content ID
      • Genre
      • Network
      • Publisher
      • Series
      • Title
      • Multi Field
    • Streaming & Video
      • Livesteam
      • OLV
    • Advanced
      • Custom Model
      • Privacy
  5. Select Save in the Targeting window.
  6. Complete and submit the Campaign or Line configuration as applicable.

Allow Lists, Block Lists, and Require Field

Several targeting methods support Allow Lists, Block Lists, and Require Field options to control which Impressions are eligible to serve.

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to the selected values.
  • Block List: Excludes the selected values from delivery.
  • Require Field: Requires the corresponding field to be populated in the bid request for the Impression to be eligible. For example, enabling Require Field for Channel, Content ID, Genre, or Site Domain restricts delivery to bid requests that contain a value for that field.

Targeting restrictions are cumulative. When multiple targeting methods are applied, impressions must satisfy all applicable requirements.

Inventory

Inventory Targeting controls the supply sources, Deals, Sites, and Apps where a Campaign or Line is eligible to serve. These settings allow advertisers to define which inventory they want to purchase and exclude inventory that does not align with their campaign strategy.

Inventory Targeting can be configured at both the Campaign and Line levels:

  • Campaign Targeting: Applies shared inventory requirements to all Lines within the Campaign.
  • Line Targeting: Allows users to apply additional inventory restrictions to an individual Line.

How to Access Inventory Targeting

To configure Inventory Targeting:

  1. Create a new Campaign or Line, or open an existing one in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  3. Select Edit Targeting.
  4. Under Inventory, select the applicable targeting method from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  5. Configure the desired targeting options and select Save.
  6. Complete and save the Campaign or Line configuration.

The following sections explain each available Inventory Targeting option and how to configure it.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. An impression must satisfy all applicable targeting requirements at both levels to be eligible to serve. Conflicting or overly restrictive settings can reduce available inventory or prevent delivery.

Inventory Type

Inventory Type determines the environment in which a Line is eligible to serve. This setting allows advertisers to restrict delivery to websites, applications, or both environments.

The following options are available:

  • Web: Inventory associated with websites accessed through a browser.
  • In App: Inventory associated with applications, including mobile and Connected TV Apps.
  • Combined: Includes both Web and In App inventory.

Configuring Inventory Type

Inventory Type is configured in the Line Setup section, rather than within the Edit Targeting window.

When creating or editing a Line, select the Inventory Type that corresponds to the environment in which you want your ads to appear.

Important Considerations

  • Device Type Compatibility: Inventory Type and Device Type targeting serve different purposes. Inventory Type determines the Web or In App environment, while Device Type identifies the device associated with an impression. For example, selecting In App does not automatically restrict delivery to Connected TV inventory. Additional Device Type targeting may be needed.
  • Additional Inventory Restrictions: Configure Inventory Type alongside other applicable targeting settings, including Exchanges, Deals, Sites, Site Lists, App Bundles, and App Lists. For example, selecting Web inventory while applying an App List Allow List creates incompatible inventory requirements and can prevent delivery.

Supply Source

Supply Source refers to the method through which advertising inventory is made available for purchase.

Pontiac supports the following supply sources:

  • Open Exchange: Inventory made available through an Exchange for eligible buyers to bid on without targeting a specific private Deal.
  • Private Marketplace (PMP) Deals: Inventory made available through a Deal negotiated with a publisher or supply partner. A Deal ID identifies the inventory and associated transaction.
  • Programmatic Guaranteed (PG) Deals: Inventory purchased through a Programmatic Guaranteed Deal with agreed delivery commitments and terms between the buyer and seller.

Configuring Supply Sources

Supply Source is not a separate selection within the Targeting menu. Inventory eligibility is controlled through the applicable Deals, Deal Lists, and Exchanges settings.

Use the corresponding sections below to configure these targeting options.

Important Considerations

  • Deal and Exchange Compatibility: When targeting PMP or PG Deals, ensure that Exchange targeting does not exclude the Exchanges associated with those Deals.
  • Inventory Availability: Selecting a supply source does not guarantee available impressions or delivery. Inventory must be available through the relevant Exchange or Deal and satisfy all applicable targeting requirements.

For additional information about inventory availability, Deal types, and Exchange eligibility, see the Inventory Documentation .

Deals

Deals allow users to target specific inventory arrangements available to their Seat. Deal targeting enables advertisers to purchase inventory through existing publisher or supply partner agreements rather than relying exclusively on Open Exchange availability.

Deals are organized into two categories.

  • Public Deals: Pontiac provides pre-negotiated CTV, OTT, OLV, Display, Native, and Audio Deals across various publishers and content categories. Select the Public Deals dropdown to view available options.
  • Negotiated Deals: Negotiated Deals are Deals associated with your Seat through your own arrangements with publishers or supply partners. Select the Negotiated Deals dropdown to view Deals associated with your Seat. If an expected Deal is unavailable, contact the Pontiac Help Center.
    • For instructions on how to import your own PMP Deals, see the Import Deal documentation.

Configuring Deal Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Open Deals under Inventory. This is the default selection.
  3. Expand the Public Deals or Negotiated Deals dropdown.
  4. Select the green plus sign (+) next to the applicable Deal or Deals.
    • To remove a selected Deal, use the red minus sign (−).
  5. Review your selections and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Exchange Compatibility
    • Deals are associated with specific Exchanges. Ensure the Exchange associated with each selected Deal is included in the Exchange targeting configuration.
    • For example, if a Deal is associated with Magnite but Exchange targeting excludes Magnite, the Deal will not be eligible to serve.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Deal targeting configured at the Campaign and Line levels is evaluated together. Ensure that the Deal selections at both levels are aligned.
    • For example, if a Campaign is restricted to Deal A and an individual Line is restricted to Deal B, the Line will not have eligible inventory if the two Deal selections do not overlap.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Selecting a Deal does not guarantee available impressions or delivery. Availability depends on the publisher sending eligible bid requests, the Deal’s configuration and status, and all applicable Campaign and Line targeting requirements.
    • If a targeted Deal is not receiving eligible inventory, confirm that the Deal is active on both the publisher and Pontiac sides, that bid requests are being sent, and that the remaining targeting requirements are aligned.

For more information about Deal discovery, access, and configuration, see the Deals Documentation .

Deal Lists

Deal Lists allow users to organize multiple Deals into a reusable list that can be applied to Campaign or Line Targeting.

Rather than selecting individual Deals each time a Campaign or Line is created, users can create a Deal List containing the desired Deals and reuse it across multiple targeting configurations. This is particularly useful when the same group of Deals is frequently used across Campaigns or when multiple Lines should target an identical set of inventory arrangements.

Deal Lists are created and managed under Inventory > Deal Lists. For detailed creation, editing, and management instructions, see the Deal Lists Documentation .

Once created, a saved Deal List becomes available for selection within Campaign or Line Targeting.

Configuring Deal List Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Under Inventory, select Deal Lists from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Select the green plus sign (+) next to the Deal List(s) you want to target.
    • To remove a selected Deal List, use the red minus sign (−).
  4. Review the selected Deal List and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

The Deals included in the selected list will be used as part of the Campaign or Line’s inventory targeting requirements.

Important Considerations

  • Reusable Targeting
    • A single Deal List can be used across multiple Campaigns and Lines, reducing the need to configure the same group of Deals repeatedly. This is useful when advertisers have a consistent set of preferred publisher Deals or inventory arrangements.
  • Deal Availability
    • Only Deals available and approved for the applicable Seat can be used for targeting.
  • Exchange Compatibility
    • Ensure that Exchange targeting does not exclude the Exchanges associated with the Deals contained in the selected Deal List.
    • For example, if a Deal List includes Deals from Magnite, OpenX, and Index, all three Exchanges must remain eligible for their respective Deals to serve.
    • Best Practice: When targeting inventory exclusively through Deals, either select all Exchanges or leave Exchange targeting unselected. Both approaches avoid unintentionally excluding an Exchange associated with a targeted Deal.
    • Deal targeting will continue to restrict delivery to the selected Deals, regardless of whether all Exchanges are selected or Exchange targeting is left unselected.
  • Campaign and Line Restrictions
    • When Deal Lists are applied at both levels, review the included Deals to avoid conflicting or overly restrictive requirements.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Applying a Deal List does not guarantee delivery. The Deals included in the list must be active, available to the Seat, and receiving bid requests that satisfy the remaining Campaign and Line targeting requirements.

For additional instructions on creating and managing reusable Deal Lists, see the Deal Lists Documentation .

Exchanges

Exchanges control which supply-side platforms (SSPs) a Campaign or Line is eligible to purchase inventory through.

An Exchange connects buyers with inventory made available by publishers and supply partners. Exchange targeting allows users to select specific inventory sources or restrict delivery to a subset of supported Exchanges.

Select the applicable Exchanges to include them in the targeting configuration.

Pontiac supports the following Exchanges and media types:

ExchangeSupported Media Types
AdsWizzAudio
Magnite (DV+)OLV, Audio, Display
FreewheelStreaming/CTV, OLV
IndexStreaming/CTV, OLV, Display, Native, Audio
MagniteStreaming/CTV, OLV
MicrosoftStreaming/CTV, OLV, Display
OpenXStreaming/CTV, OLV, Display
TritonAudio

Configuring Exchange Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Under Inventory, select Exchanges from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Select the Exchanges through which you want to purchase inventory.
  4. Review your selections and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Multiple Exchanges can be selected to access inventory across different supply sources.

If Exchange targeting is left unselected, no additional Exchange restriction is applied by this setting.

Important Considerations

  • Media Type Compatibility
    • Not every Exchange supports every media type. Select Exchanges that support the media type associated with your Campaign or Line.
    • For example, a Campaign running exclusively Audio creatives should use Exchanges that support Audio inventory.
  • Deal Compatibility
    • When targeting Deals or Deal Lists, ensure that Exchange targeting does not exclude their associated Exchanges.
    • For example, if a targeted Deal is available through OpenX but only Microsoft is added to the Exchange targeting, the Deal will not be eligible to serve. Either Target OpenX as an exchange or remove all exchanges.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Exchange restrictions are evaluated at both levels.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Selecting an Exchange does not guarantee that it will provide eligible inventory for every targeting combination.
    • Available inventory may vary by media type, geography, device, publisher, and other targeting criteria.

Sites

Sites allow users to target or exclude individual website domains directly within Campaign or Line Targeting without creating a reusable Site List.

This option is useful when targeting a small number of specific websites or when a reusable list is not needed. Site targeting relies on the website domain information provided in the bid request to determine whether an impression satisfies the selected requirements.

Configuring Site Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Under Inventory, select Sites from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Enter the applicable website domains.
  4. Select an Allow List or Block List based on the desired targeting strategy.
  5. Configure any additional options, such as Require Site.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to the specified website domains.
  • Block List: Excludes the specified website domains from delivery.

Additional Options

  • Require Site
    • Enable this option to require the bid request to contain a Site value. Impressions without a Site value will be ineligible to serve.
  • Split by Commas
    • When entering multiple website domains separated by commas, select Split by Commas to automatically separate them into individual entries. This eliminates the need to enter each separately.

Important Considerations

  • Site Information Availability
    • Site targeting relies on the Site information provided in the bid request. If Require Site is enabled, impressions without the required Site information will be ineligible to serve.
  • Direct Targeting vs. Site Lists
    • Use Sites when targeting or excluding a small number of individual domains.
    • For larger collections of domains or groups that need to be reused across multiple Campaigns or Lines, consider creating a Site List instead.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Site targeting configured at both levels is evaluated together. Ensure that the selected domains and targeting methods are aligned.
    • For example, if a Campaign uses an Allow List containing one set of domains and an individual Line uses an Allow List containing a completely different set, the conflicting requirements will prevent delivery.
  • Additional Inventory Restrictions
    • Review Site targeting alongside Inventory Type, Site Lists, and other applicable inventory restrictions to ensure the settings are compatible.

Site List

Site Lists allow users to organize website domains into reusable lists that can be applied to Campaign or Line Targeting.

Rather than entering individual domains each time a Campaign or Line is created, users can create a Site List containing the desired domains and reuse it across multiple targeting configurations. This is particularly useful when advertisers want to consistently target or exclude the same group of websites across multiple Campaigns or Lines.

Site Lists are created and managed under Inventory > Site Lists. For detailed creation, editing, and management instructions, see the Site Lists Documentation .

Once created, a saved Site List becomes available for selection within Campaign or Line Targeting.

Configuring Site List Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Under Inventory, select Site Lists from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List based on your targeting strategy.
  4. Select the green plus sign (+) next to each Site List you want to apply.
    • To remove a selected Site List, select the red minus sign (−).
  5. Review the selected Site Lists and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to the website domains included in the selected Site List.
  • Block List: Excludes the website domains included in the selected Site List.

Important Considerations

  • Reusable Targeting
    • A single Site List can be applied to multiple Campaigns and Lines, reducing the need to repeatedly configure the same website domains.
  • Site List Formatting
    • When creating a Site List, enter each website domain on a separate line.
    • When creating a Site List, enter each website domain on a separate line.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Site List targeting applied at the Campaign and Line levels is evaluated together. Review the selected lists and their included domains to ensure that the targeting requirements are compatible.
  • Direct Sites Targeting
    • If direct Sites targeting is also configured, review the individual domains and selected Site Lists together to avoid conflicting restrictions.

App Bundle

App Bundle allows users to target or exclude application inventory using the App Bundle identifier provided in the bid request.

An App Bundle is an identifier associated with a specific application. It allows advertisers to target an application using its identifier rather than relying on the reported App Name.

App Bundle identifiers may vary depending on the application, device, or operating system.

For example:

App BundleIdentifier format
com.spectrumtvAlphanumeric App Bundle identifier
569077959Numeric App identifier

Configuring App Bundle Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Under Inventory, select App Bundle from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Enter the applicable App Bundle identifiers.
  4. Select an Allow List or Block List based on your targeting strategy.
  5. Review the entered values and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to inventory matching the specified App Bundle identifiers.
  • Block List: Excludes inventory matching the specified App Bundle identifiers.

Additional Options

  • Require Apps
    • Enable this option to require the bid request to contain an App Bundle value. Impressions without an App Bundle value will be ineligible to serve.
  • Split by Commas
    • When entering multiple App Bundles separated by commas, select Split by Commas to automatically separate them into individual entries. This eliminates the need to enter each separately.

Important Considerations

  • App Bundle Accuracy
    • App Bundle targeting relies on the identifier provided in the bid request.
    • Ensure that the entered values correspond to the applications you intend to target or exclude.
    • Pull a custom report and select the App Bundle dimensions so see what is passed in the bid request.
  • Operating System Differences
    • The same application may use different App Bundle identifiers across operating systems or devices.
    • For example, an application available on both Android and iOS may have different identifiers for each operating system.
    • When targeting the same application across multiple environments, ensure that the applicable identifiers are included.
  • App Bundle vs. App Name
    • App Bundle targeting uses an application identifier, while App Name targeting uses the application name provided in the bid request.
    • App Bundle targeting can provide a more specific way to identify an application when the correct identifier is known.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • App Bundle targeting configured at both levels is evaluated together. Ensure that the selected identifiers and targeting methods are compatible.
  • Direct Targeting vs. App Lists
    • Use App Bundle targeting when applying individual identifiers directly.
    • For larger groups of App Bundle identifiers or targeting that needs to be reused across multiple Campaigns or Lines, consider creating an App List instead.

App Name

App Name allows users to target or exclude application inventory based on the App Name provided in the bid request.

Unlike App Bundle targeting, which uses an application’s identifier, App Name targeting uses its reported name.

This option allows advertisers to include or exclude inventory based on application names rather than individual App Bundle IDs.

Configuring App Name Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Under Inventory, select App Name from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Enter the applicable App Names.
  4. Select an Allow List or Block List based on your targeting strategy.
  5. Review the entered values and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to inventory matching the specified App Name.
  • Block List: Excludes inventory matching the specified App Name.

Additional Options

  • Require Apps
    • Enable this option to require the bid request to contain an App Name value. Impressions without an App Name value will be ineligible to serve.
  • Split by Commas
    • When entering multiple App Names separated by commas, select Split by Commas to automatically separate them into individual entries. This eliminates the need to enter each separately.

Important Considerations

  • App Name Availability
    • App Name targeting relies on the application name provided in the bid request.
    • The availability and formatting of this information may vary by publisher and inventory source.
  • Naming Variations
    • The same application may be reported under slightly different names across different inventory sources.
    • For example, an App’s display name may differ from the value passed by a publisher or SSP.
    • Review available inventory or reporting data to confirm that the entered App Names align with the values provided in bid requests.
  • App Name vs. App Bundle
    • App Name targeting uses the reported application name, while App Bundle and App Lists targeting uses an application identifier.
    • When a specific application identifier is known, App Bundle targeting can be used to target that identifier directly.
    • App Name targeting can be used when the desired targeting strategy is based on application names.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • App Name targeting configured at both levels is evaluated together. Ensure that the selected names and targeting methods are compatible.
  • Additional App Restrictions
    • If App Bundle targeting or App Lists are also applied, review all selected values together to avoid conflicting requirements or unintentionally restricting eligible inventory.

App List

App Lists allow users to organize multiple App Bundle identifiers into a reusable list that can be applied to Campaign or Line Targeting.

Rather than entering individual App Bundle IDs each time a Campaign or Line is created, users can create an App List containing the desired applications and reuse it across multiple targeting configurations. This is particularly useful when targeting a consistent group of applications across multiple Campaigns or Lines.

App Lists are created and managed under Inventory > App Lists. For detailed creation, editing, and management instructions, see the App Lists Documentation .

Once created, a saved App List becomes available for selection within Campaign or Line Targeting.

Configuring App List Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line.
  2. Under Inventory, select App Lists from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List based on your targeting strategy.
  4. Select the green plus sign (+) next to each App List you want to apply.
    • To remove a selected App List, select the red minus sign (−).
  5. Review the selected App Lists and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to applications associated with the App Bundle identifiers included in the selected App List.
  • Block List: Excludes applications associated with the App Bundle identifiers included in the selected App List.

Important Considerations

  • Reusable Targeting
    • A single App List can be applied to multiple Campaigns and Lines, reducing the need to configure the same group of applications repeatedly.
  • App Bundle Formatting
    • When creating an App List, enter each App Bundle identifier on a separate line.
    • Both alphanumeric and numeric App Bundle identifiers are supported.
  • Operating System Differences
    • The same application may use different identifiers across operating systems or devices.
    • Ensure the App List includes the appropriate identifiers for the intended inventory.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • App List targeting configured at both the Campaign and Line levels is evaluated together. Review the included App Bundle identifiers and targeting methods to ensure that the requirements are compatible.
  • Additional App Restrictions
    • If direct App Bundle or App Name targeting is also configured, review these settings alongside the selected App Lists to avoid conflicting restrictions.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Applying an App List does not guarantee delivery. The included applications must have available inventory that satisfies the remaining Campaign and Line targeting requirements.

Curation — Line Level Only

Curation is available under Inventory at the Line level only. It allows users to automatically create a curated Deal through Index or Microsoft using the Line’s targeting configuration.

For full documentation, see Line Targeting > Curation.

When enabled, Pontiac creates a Deal in the selected partner’s marketplace that mirrors the applicable Line targeting parameters and automatically associates it with the Line. This can help increase scale by making inventory available through a curated Deal without requiring manual Deal creation.

Curation supports Display and Video Campaigns.

Available Curation Options

  • Index Curation: Enable Use Index Curated Deal to automatically create a curated Deal through Index Exchange.
    • Index Curation – Target CTR (Optional): Index Curation also provides an optional Use Target CTR feature that attempts to filter inventory based on a selected Click-Through Rate (CTR) goal.
    • When enabled, select a Target CTR threshold from the available dropdown options.
    • Important: Higher CTR goals introduce more restrictive inventory filtering and may limit delivery.
  • Microsoft Curation: Enable Use Microsoft Curated Deal to automatically create a curated Deal through Microsoft Exchange.

Both options can be enabled on the same Line and require the following:

  • Exchange targeting includes Index and/or Microsoft
  • All creatives associated to the line must be of one media type: display or video
  • Geo targeting must be more granular than Regions or an audience must be attached that pushed to a curation platform

Configuring Curation Targeting

  1. Create a new Line or open an existing Line in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  3. Under Inventory, select Curation from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  4. Enable Use Index Curated Deal and/or Use Microsoft Curated Deal.
  5. Confirm that the Line meets the applicable Exchange, creative, and targeting requirements.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Location & Device

Location & Device Targeting controls the geographic locations and device environments where a Campaign or Line is eligible to serve. These settings allow advertisers to define where their ads can appear and restrict delivery based on Device Type, Browser, or Operating System.

Location & Device Targeting can be configured at both the Campaign and Line levels:

  • Campaign Targeting: Applies shared requirements to all Lines within the Campaign.
  • Line Targeting: Allows users to apply additional restrictions to an individual Line.

How to Access Location & Device Targeting

To configure Location & Device Targeting:

  1. Create a new Campaign or Line, or open an existing one in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  3. Select Edit Targeting.
  4. Under Location & Device, select the applicable targeting method from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  5. Configure the desired targeting options and select Save.
  6. Complete and save the Campaign or Line configuration.

The following sections explain each available targeting option, how to configure it, and important considerations for inventory eligibility.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. An impression must satisfy all applicable geographic and device requirements at both levels to be eligible to serve. Conflicting or overly restrictive settings can reduce available inventory or prevent delivery.

Geo

Geo Targeting allows users to target or exclude impressions based on their geographic location. Advertisers can define eligible locations at the Country, Region, or Designated Market Area (DMA) level.

The following geographic targeting options are available:

Geographic LevelDescriptionFormat
CountryTarget or exclude entire countries. Country level targeting is required.Two-letter country code (ISO 3166-1 alpha-2), e.g., US, CA
Region/StateRefine geographic targeting to specific states, provinces, or other supported regional divisions within a country.Numeric Region Code
DMATarget or exclude specific geographic markets, commonly used to reach audiences within a particular media market.DMA Name, e.g., Detroit

Configuring Geo Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line and select Edit Targeting.
  2. Under Location & Device, select Geo from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Select the applicable Country.
  4. Optionally, refine the geographic area by selecting Regions/States or DMAs.
  5. Configure the geographic selections as an Allow List or Block List, as applicable.
  6. Review the selected locations and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Geo > Countries

Geo > Regions

Geo > DMAs

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to the selected geographic locations. For example, selecting California as the only Region in an Allow List restricts delivery to eligible inventory within California.
  • Block List: Excludes the selected geographic locations from delivery. For example, adding California to a Region Block List prevents delivery to impressions identified as originating from California.

Important Considerations

  • Geographic Targeting Hierarchy
    • Geographic targeting works as a series of cumulative requirements. When multiple geographic targeting levels are applied, an impression must satisfy each applicable condition.
    • For example, selecting the United States, California, and the San Francisco-Oakland-San Jose CA DMA restricts eligible delivery to inventory that satisfies all three requirements.
  • Conflicting Geographic Requirements
    • All geographic targeting requirements must be compatible.
    • For example, selecting Alabama as the only Region while also targeting the Detroit DMA creates conflicting requirements because Detroit is not located in Alabama. No impressions can satisfy both conditions.
    • Review the selected Countries, Regions, and DMAs together to ensure they represent compatible geographic areas.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Geographic targeting configured at the Campaign level applies to all Lines within that Campaign. Additional geographic requirements can be configured at the Line level.
    • For example, a Campaign targeting the United States can contain individual Lines targeting California, Texas, and Florida.
    • However, if a Campaign targets only California and a Line targets only Texas, the conflicting requirements will prevent the Line from serving.
  • Geographic Data Availability
    • Geo Targeting relies on location information available in bid requests. The precision and availability of geographic data can vary by publisher, Exchange, and inventory source.
    • When applying restrictive geographic targeting, review available inventory to confirm that sufficient impressions meet the selected requirements.
  • Additional Geographic Restrictions
    • Geo Targeting should be reviewed alongside ZIP Code Targeting, geographic Audiences, ART Audiences, and curated Deals.
    • An impression must satisfy all applicable geographic targeting requirements, regardless of where they are configured.

Zip Codes

ZIP Code Targeting allows users to target or exclude specific ZIP or postal codes within a selected country.

This provides more granular geographic control than targeting entire Countries, Regions, or DMAs. It is useful when advertisers want to reach audiences within specific neighborhoods, service areas, or groups of postal codes.

ZIP Code Targeting supports Allow Lists and Block Lists.

Configuring ZIP Code Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line and select Edit Targeting.
  2. Under Location & Device, select Zip Codes from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Select the applicable Country.
  4. Enter or paste the desired ZIP or postal codes into the input field.
  5. Select Validate Zips to confirm that the entered values use the correct format.
  6. Select an Allow List or Block List based on the desired targeting strategy.
  7. Optionally, use Expand Zip Targets to find additional ZIP Codes within a specified radius.
  8. Review the selected ZIP Codes and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to impressions associated with the selected ZIP or postal codes.
  • Block List: Excludes impressions associated with the selected ZIP or postal codes.

Additional Options

  • Expand Zip Targets: Allows users to find additional ZIP Codes within a specified radius of the ZIP Codes originally entered.
    • To expand your ZIP Code targeting:
      1. Enter and validate the original ZIP Codes.
      2. Enter the desired radius in meters.
      3. Select Get Zips.
      4. Review the additional ZIP Codes returned in the results window.
      5. Select Add Zips to add the expanded results to your targeting, or select Close to keep the original list unchanged.
    • For example, enter the ZIP Codes 10010 and 10025 with a radius of 1000 meters. Select Get Zips to view the additional ZIP Codes identified within the specified radius.
    • Important: Expanding ZIP targets adds geographic areas to the original targeting list. Review the results before selecting Add Zips to ensure that the additional locations align with your intended targeting strategy.
  • Validate Zips: Select Validate Zips after entering your ZIP or postal codes to check that the values use the appropriate format for the selected country. ZIP or postal code requirements vary by country, so select the correct Country before entering and validating the values.

ZIP Code Formatting

ZIP or postal code formats vary by country.

For example:

CountrySupported format exampleNotes
United States10001
CanadaL4MFor Canadian postal code targeting, Pontiac supports the three-character Forward Sortation Area (FSA) format rather than the full six-character postal code.

Select Validate Zips before saving to confirm that the entered values are formatted correctly.

Countries That Support ZIP Code Targeting

The following countries are available for ZIP or postal code targeting:

Country NameCountry Code
AustraliaAU
CanadaCA
ColombiaCO
GermanyDE
DenmarkDK
SpainES
FinlandFI
FranceFR
United KingdomGB
IndonesiaID
ItalyIT
JapanJP
LithuaniaLT
New ZealandNZ
PolandPL
PortugalPT
SwedenSE
SingaporeSG
ThailandTH
United StatesUS

Important Considerations

  • Geographic Compatibility
    • ZIP Code targeting must be compatible with any Country, Region, or DMA targeting applied to the Campaign or Line.
    • For example, targeting the United States and the Miami DMA while adding a New York ZIP Code to an Allow List creates conflicting geographic requirements and prevents delivery.
    • Review all geographic selections to ensure that the targeted ZIP Codes fall within the intended areas.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • ZIP Code targeting can be configured at both levels, and all applicable restrictions are evaluated together.
    • For example, if a Campaign targets one set of ZIP Codes and a Line targets a different, non-overlapping set, the Line may have no eligible inventory.
  • Additional ZIP Code Restrictions
    • ZIP Code targeting can also be applied through Audiences, ART Audiences, and curated Deals.
    • Ensure that all ZIP Code-based targeting is aligned across these configurations to avoid conflicting requirements or unintended delivery limitations.
  • Postal Code Availability
    • ZIP Code targeting depends on the geographic information available in bid requests.
    • Not all inventory sources provide ZIP or postal code information at the same level of precision. Restrictive ZIP Code targeting may reduce eligible inventory when the required geographic information is unavailable.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Before applying a large or highly restrictive ZIP Code list, review available inventory to understand whether sufficient impressions are available within the selected locations.

Device Types

Device Type Targeting allows users to restrict delivery based on the type of device associated with an impression. This setting is useful when advertisers want to reach users on specific device categories, such as Connected TVs, mobile phones, tablets, or desktop computers.

Device Type targeting can be configured at both the Campaign and Line levels.

Pontiac supports the following Device Types:

ValueDescription
1Mobile/Tablet
2Personal Computer
3Connected TV
4Phone
5Tablet
6Connected Device
7Set Top Box

The numeric values identify the Device Type classifications. Mobile/Tablet is a broader classification, while Phone and Tablet are separate device categories.

Configuring Device Type Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line and select Edit Targeting.
  2. Under Location & Device, select Device Types from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Select the Device Types you want to target.
  4. Review your selections and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Multiple Device Types can be selected to include more than one device category.

If no Device Types are selected, the Campaign or Line is not restricted by Device Type targeting.

Device Targeting and Deal Compatibility

When using Device Type Targeting with Deals, ensure that the selected Device Types align with the inventory available through the targeted Deals. In the Inventory tab, the Deals table includes a Device Types field displaying the percentage breakdown of bid requests by Device Type for each Deal. This information allows users to review the types of devices associated with a Deal before configuring Device Type Targeting.

For example, a Deal may include a mix of OTT inventory across multiple device categories. If the objective is to serve exclusively within CTV environments, Device Type Targeting can be used to restrict eligibility to Connected TV and Set Top Box inventory.

To review Device Type availability for a Deal:

  1. Navigate to the Inventory tab.
  2. Locate the applicable Deal in the Deals table.
  3. Review the Device Types field to identify the percentage breakdown of requests by device category.
  4. Use this information to select compatible Device Types when configuring Campaign or Line targeting.

Important: The Device Types breakdown reflects the distribution of requests associated with the Deal. It does not guarantee delivery for a particular device category. Other targeting, bidding, and inventory requirements must still be satisfied.

Important Considerations

  • Device Type vs. Inventory Type
    • Device Type and Inventory Type are separate targeting settings.
      • Inventory Type determines whether eligible inventory originates from Web, In App, or both environments.
      • Device Type determines the category of device associated with the impression.
    • For example, selecting In App as the Inventory Type does not automatically restrict delivery to Connected TV devices. Mobile Apps and other application inventory may also be eligible.
    • To target CTV inventory specifically, select the appropriate Inventory Type and Device Type combination.
  • Media Type Compatibility
    • Select Device Types that align with the intended advertising format and inventory environment.
    • For example, a Campaign designed exclusively for Connected TV delivery should use Device Type targeting that reflects the intended CTV environment.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Device Type targeting is evaluated at both levels.
    • For example, if a Campaign is restricted to Connected TV while an individual Line is restricted to Mobile Phone, the Line will have no eligible inventory because the device requirements conflict.
  • Device Classification
    • Device Types are determined using information provided in the bid request. Device classification may vary depending on the publisher, Exchange, or inventory source.
    • Review available inventory and reporting data when determining which Device Types correspond to your intended audience and delivery environment.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Selecting fewer Device Types restricts the range of eligible inventory.
    • If delivery is limited, review Device Type targeting alongside Inventory Type, Exchanges, Deals, and other applicable requirements.

Browser

Browser Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory based on the web browser identified in the bid request.

Browser Targeting is available at both the Campaign and Line levels. Users can select multiple Browsers from the dropdown menu and configure them as an Allow List or Block List.

Available Browsers

The Browser dropdown includes the following options:

  • Chrome
  • Safari
  • Firefox
  • Opera
  • Internet Explorer
  • Other
    • Other represents inventory where the browser is classified but does not fall into one of the other listed categories. It should not be confused with impressions where browser information is missing.

Configuring Browser Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line and select Edit Targeting.
  2. Under Location & Device, select Browser from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Open the Browser dropdown and select one or more Browsers.
  4. Choose Allow List or Block List based on your targeting strategy.
  5. Optionally, enable Require Browser to require browser information in the bid request.
  6. Review your selections and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to impressions associated with the selected Browser.
  • Block List: Excludes impressions associated with the selected Browser.

Additional Options

  • Require Browser: Enable this option to require the bid request to contain browser information. Impressions without a Browser value will be ineligible to serve. This option can be used alongside an Allow List or Block List when browser information must be available for eligible inventory.

Important Considerations

  • Browser Information Availability
    • Browser Targeting relies on the browser information provided in the bid request.
    • Not all inventory environments provide the same browser information. Browser data may be unavailable or less relevant for certain application-based environments, including CTV Apps.
  • Inventory Type Compatibility
    • Review Browser Targeting alongside Inventory Type.
    • For example, Browser Targeting is generally more relevant when purchasing Web inventory, where impressions are associated with browser-based environments.
    • Applying restrictive Browser Targeting to an In App Campaign may significantly reduce the available inventory.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Browser Targeting configured at both levels is evaluated together.
    • Ensure that the selected Browsers are compatible to avoid conflicting requirements.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Restricting delivery to specific Browsers reduces the available inventory to impressions that satisfy the selected browser requirements.
    • Review available inventory when applying highly restrictive Browser Targeting.

Operating Systems

Operating System Targeting allows users to restrict delivery based on the operating system identified for the device associated with an impression.

This setting can be configured at both the Campaign and Line levels. Users can select multiple Operating Systems to target specific device environments or exclude operating systems that do not align with their campaign strategy.

Configuring Operating System Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line and select Edit Targeting.
  2. Under Location & Device, select Operating Systems from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Select the applicable Operating Systems based on your targeting strategy.
  4. Configure the selected Operating Systems as an Allow List or Block List.
  5. Optionally, enable Require Operating System to require operating system information in the bid request.
  6. Review your selections and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Download OS List

Select Download OS List to download a reference file containing the available Operating System options. Use this file to identify the appropriate values before configuring targeting.

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to impressions associated with any of the selected Operating Systems.
  • Block List: Excludes impressions associated with any of the selected Operating Systems.

Additional Options

  • Require Operating System: Enable this option to require the bid request to contain operating system information. Impressions without an Operating System value will be ineligible to serve.

Important Considerations

  • Operating System vs. Device Type
    • Operating System Targeting and Device Type Targeting serve different purposes.
    • Device Type identifies the category of device, while Operating System identifies the software platform associated with that device.
    • For example, targeting Mobile Phone as a Device Type restricts delivery to mobile phones, while Operating System Targeting can further refine which operating systems are eligible.
    • Both settings can be used together to create a more specific device strategy.
  • Application Compatibility
    • Applications may be available on different operating systems and use different App Bundle identifiers.
    • When combining Operating System Targeting with App Bundle or App List targeting, ensure that the selected identifiers correspond to applications available on the intended operating systems.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Operating System Targeting configured at both levels is evaluated together. Ensure that Campaign level requirements do not conflict with the Operating Systems selected for individual Lines.
  • Operating System Information Availability
    • Operating System Targeting relies on the device information provided in the bid request. The availability and accuracy of this information may vary by publisher, Exchange, and device environment.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Restricting delivery to specific Operating Systems can reduce eligible inventory.
    • Review Operating System Targeting alongside Device Types, Inventory Type, App Bundles, App Lists, and other applicable requirements when investigating limited delivery.

Content

Content Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory based on publisher and content metadata provided in the bid request.

These settings can be used to target specific channels, networks, publishers, genres, programs, and other content identifiers. They are particularly useful for Connected TV (CTV) and Online Video (OLV) campaigns where content-level information is available.

Content Targeting can be configured at both the Campaign and Line levels:

  • Campaign Targeting: Applies shared content requirements to every Line within the Campaign.
  • Line Targeting: Allows users to apply additional content restrictions to an individual Line.

The following Content Targeting options are available:

Targeting FieldDescription
ChannelThe channel associated with the content or impression.
Content IDAn identifier associated with a specific piece of content.
GenreThe category or genre associated with the content.
NetworkThe network associated with the content.
PublisherThe publisher associated with the content.
SeriesThe series associated with the content.
TitleThe title associated with the content.
Multi FieldAllows values to be matched across multiple supported content fields.

How to Access Content Targeting

  1. Create a new Campaign or Line, or open an existing one in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  3. Select Edit Targeting.
  4. Under Content, select the applicable targeting field from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  5. Enter the desired values and configure the targeting options.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.
  7. Complete and save the Campaign or Line configuration.

Each Content targeting field supports the following controls.

Targeting Methods

  • Allow List: Restricts delivery to impressions matching the entered values. For example, entering comedy in a Genre Allow List restricts delivery to inventory where the Genre value matches comedy. Multiple values can be entered. An impression can match any of the allowed values within the selected field, but must still satisfy all other applicable targeting requirements.
  • Block List: Excludes impressions matching the entered values. For example, entering comedy in a Genre Block List excludes inventory where the Genre value matches comedy.

Additional Options

  • Require Field: Each Content targeting section includes a Require option specific to that field, such as Require Channel, Require Genre, or Require Publisher. Enable this option to require the corresponding metadata field to be present in the bid request. For example, enabling Require Genre makes impressions without a Genre value ineligible to serve. Require Field can be used alongside an Allow List or Block List when the advertiser requires that information to be available.
  • Split by Commas: The Split by Commas button allows users to enter multiple targeting values separated by commas and automatically separate them into individual entries. For example, entering: comedy, drama, documentary and selecting Split by Commas separates the values into three individual entries.This is useful when adding multiple values without entering each one separately.

Important: Content Targeting relies on metadata provided by publishers and supply-side platforms (SSPs). The availability and formatting of this information can vary. Review available inventory and reporting data before applying highly restrictive content targeting.

Channel

Channel Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory based on the Channel value provided in the bid request.

A Channel identifies the content channel associated with an impression. It can be used to target particular television or streaming channels when that information is provided by the inventory source.

For example, a publisher may identify a channel using a value such as tlc.

Configuring Channel Targeting

  1. Under Content, select Channel from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  2. Enter the applicable Channel values.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List.
  4. Optionally, enable Require Channel to exclude impressions without Channel information.
  5. Use Split by Commas if entering multiple comma-separated values.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Channel Value Accuracy
    • Channel targeting matches against the Channel value provided in the bid request. Enter values that correspond to the channel metadata available through your intended inventory sources.
  • Channel vs. Network
    • A Channel and a Network may represent different levels of content organization.
    • For example, a publisher may pass a channel name in the Channel field and a broader network name in the Network field.
    • Targeting a value under Channel does not automatically search for that value in the Network field.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Channel restrictions configured at both levels are evaluated together. Ensure that the selected values and targeting methods are compatible.

Content ID

Content ID Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory based on the Content ID provided in the bid request.

A Content ID is an identifier assigned to a specific piece of content by a publisher or content provider. It can provide a way to target content using an identifier rather than relying on a program or title name.

Content IDs may be alphanumeric or use other identifier formats, depending on the publisher.

Configuring Content ID Targeting

  1. Under Content, select Content ID from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  2. Enter the applicable Content IDs.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List.
  4. Optionally, enable Require Content ID to exclude impressions without Content ID information.
  5. Use Split by Commas if entering multiple comma-separated identifiers.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Content ID Accuracy
    • Content ID targeting relies on the identifier provided in the bid request. Confirm that the entered IDs correspond to the specific content you intend to target or exclude.
  • Publisher-Specific Identifiers
    • Different publishers may use different identifiers for the same or similar content.
    • A Content ID from one publisher should not be assumed to identify that content across all inventory sources.
  • Content ID vs. Title
    • Content ID targets an identifier, while Title targets the name provided in the Title field.
    • For example, a publisher may provide an internal identifier for a program or episode separately from its readable title.
    • Use the field that corresponds to the information available in the intended inventory.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Ensure that Content ID restrictions are compatible with all other content targeting requirements, including Series and Title targeting.

Genre

Genre Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory based on the Genre metadata provided in the bid request.

A Genre describes the category or type of content associated with an impression.

For example, a publisher may provide Genre values such as:

  • comedy
  • drama
  • documentary
  • sports

Genre Targeting is useful when advertisers want to reach inventory associated with particular content categories without targeting individual programs, channels, or publishers.

Configuring Genre Targeting

  1. Under Content, select Genre from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  2. Enter the applicable Genre values.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List.
  4. Optionally, enable Require Genre to exclude impressions without Genre information.
  5. Use Split by Commas if entering multiple comma-separated Genres.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Genre Naming Conventions
    • Genre values may vary across publishers and inventory sources.
    • For example, similar programming may be classified using different Genre labels. Review the values available in your inventory before applying an Allow List.
  • Multiple Genre Values
    • If multiple Genres are entered in an Allow List, an impression can match any of the allowed values within the Genre field.
    • For example, entering comedy and drama allows inventory matching either value, provided all other targeting requirements are satisfied.
  • Genre vs. Other Content Fields
    • Genre identifies a content category rather than a specific publisher, channel, series, or title.
    • When Genre Targeting is combined with other content restrictions, the impression must satisfy all applicable requirements.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Restrictive Genre Targeting may reduce available inventory if publishers do not consistently provide Genre metadata or use values that differ from those entered.

Network

Network Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory based on the Network value provided in the bid request.

A Network identifies the television or media network associated with the content.

For example, a publisher may provide a Network value such as discovery.

Network Targeting is useful when advertisers want to target content associated with specific networks rather than individual titles or episodes.

Configuring Network Targeting

  1. Under Content, select Network from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  2. Enter the applicable Network values.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List.
  4. Optionally, enable Require Network to exclude impressions without Network information.
  5. Use Split by Commas if entering multiple comma-separated values.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Network vs. Channel
    • Network and Channel are separate metadata fields.
    • A media brand may be identified as a Network by one publisher and a Channel by another.
    • If the same value may appear in different content fields across inventory sources, consider using Multi Field Targeting.
  • Matching Network Values
    • Network Targeting matches the value provided in the Network field. It does not automatically search other content fields for the same value.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Network restrictions at both levels are evaluated together. Review the selected values to ensure they do not create conflicting requirements.

Publisher

Publisher Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory based on the Publisher value provided in the bid request.

A Publisher identifies the publishing entity associated with the content or inventory.

For example, a bid request may contain a Publisher value such as roku.

Publisher Targeting is useful when advertisers want to restrict delivery based on the publisher identified in the content metadata.

Configuring Publisher Targeting

  1. Under Content, select Publisher from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  2. Enter the applicable Publisher values.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List.
  4. Optionally, enable Require Publisher to exclude impressions without Publisher information.
  5. Use Split by Commas if entering multiple comma-separated Publishers.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Publisher vs. Network and Channel
    • Publisher, Network, and Channel are distinct targeting fields.
    • A media brand may appear in different fields depending on how the publisher or SSP structures its bid request.
    • For example, a value may appear as Publisher in one inventory source but as Network or Channel in another.
    • Use Multi Field when the goal is to match a value across supported content fields rather than requiring it to appear exclusively in Publisher.
  • Publisher Metadata vs. App Targeting
    • Publisher Targeting uses the Publisher value in the content metadata.
    • It should not be confused with App Bundle or App Name targeting, which uses application information.
    • If the objective is to target a specific application, review the App Bundle, App Name, or App List targeting options under Inventory.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Publisher information may not be consistently available across all inventory sources. Enabling Require Publisher or applying a restrictive Publisher Allow List can reduce eligible inventory.

Series

Series Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory based on the Series metadata provided in the bid request.

A Series identifies the television program or series associated with the content.

Depending on the publisher, this information may be represented as a readable series name or an identifier.

For example, a publisher may provide a Series name such as:

law & order: special victims unit

Series Targeting is useful when advertisers want to target content associated with particular programs rather than an entire network or genre.

Configuring Series Targeting

  1. Under Content, select Series from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  2. Enter the applicable Series values.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List.
  4. Optionally, enable Require Series to exclude impressions without Series information.
  5. Use Split by Commas if entering multiple comma-separated values.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Series Value Formatting
    • Series metadata may be provided as a name or identifier, depending on the publisher.
    • Use the value actually provided in the Series field rather than assuming that the program’s public-facing name will match.
  • Series vs. Title
    • Series typically identifies the broader program, while Title identifies the title associated with a specific piece of content.
    • For example, a bid request may identify a television series separately from an episode title.
    • The exact information provided in each field can vary by publisher.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Series-level metadata is not available in every bid request. Enable Require Series only when impressions without that information should be excluded.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Review Series Targeting alongside Title, Content ID, Genre, and other applicable requirements to ensure the settings are compatible.

Title

Title Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory based on the Title metadata provided in the bid request.

A Title identifies the name or title associated with the content being viewed.

Depending on the publisher, this may represent a program, movie, episode, or another piece of content.

Title Targeting is useful when advertisers want to target or exclude specific content titles rather than broader categories such as Genres or Networks.

Configuring Title Targeting

  1. Under Content, select Title from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  2. Enter the applicable Title values.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List.
  4. Optionally, enable Require Title to exclude impressions without Title information.
  5. Use Split by Commas if entering multiple comma-separated Titles.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Title Matching
    • Title Targeting relies on the Title value provided in the bid request.
    • Differences in naming conventions, punctuation, spacing, or the use of episode titles instead of series names may prevent the intended content from matching.
    • Review the available Title values before configuring restrictive targeting.
  • Title vs. Series
    • Title and Series are separate fields. A publisher may provide the program name in Series and the episode name in Title.
    • If the objective is to target an entire television series, confirm which metadata field contains the relevant value for the intended inventory.
  • Content Metadata Availability
    • Not all publishers provide Title metadata for every impression.
    • Enabling Require Title excludes impressions without this information.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Title restrictions are evaluated together with all other applicable content targeting requirements.
    • For example, a Line targeting a specific Title must also satisfy any Genre, Network, or Publisher restrictions applied at the Campaign level.

Multi Field

Multi Field Targeting allows users to include or exclude inventory by matching entered values across multiple supported content fields simultaneously.

Unlike individual content targeting options, which evaluate values within a specific field, Multi Field searches across the supported content fields.

This is useful when the same content value may be provided in different fields depending on the publisher or inventory source.

For example, a media brand may appear as Publisher in one bid request, Network in another, or Channel in another.

Instead of entering the same value separately in each field, Multi Field allows users to target it across the supported fields.

Configuring Multi Field Targeting

  1. Under Content, select Multi Field from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  2. Enter the content values you want to target or exclude.
  3. Select an Allow List or Block List.
  4. Optionally, enable Require Multi Field to require applicable content-field information.
  5. Use Split by Commas if entering multiple comma-separated values.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Multi Field vs. Individual Content Fields
    • Use individual Content targeting fields when the value must match a specific metadata field.
    • Use Multi Field when a value may appear across different supported fields and you do not want to restrict matching to a single field.

For example:

Targeting ConfigurationMatching Behavior
Publisher Allow List: rokuMatches roku in the Publisher field.
Network Allow List: rokuMatches roku in the Network field.
Multi Field Allow List: rokuMatches roku in any supported content field.
  • Additional Content Restrictions
    • Multi Field Targeting does not override other targeting requirements.
    • For example, if a Campaign has a Publisher Allow List and a Line has a Multi Field Allow List, the impression must satisfy both requirements.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Multi Field can accommodate variations in where content values are supplied, but it does not guarantee additional inventory or delivery. The relevant metadata and matching values must still be present in eligible bid requests.

Matching Content Values

Content Targeting depends on the values provided in the bid request. To target the intended inventory accurately, entered values must align with the corresponding publisher or content metadata. Matching is case-insensitive, but other formatting differences may prevent a match. For example, differences in spaces, underscores, punctuation, or naming conventions can affect whether an entered value matches the available inventory.

Field-Specific Matching

Individual Content targeting fields evaluate values against the corresponding field in the bid request.

For example:

Configured TargetingBid RequestResult
Channel Allow List: tlcChannel: TLCMatches
Channel Allow List: tlcNetwork: tlc, Channel: another valueDoes not satisfy the Channel Allow List
Genre Allow List: comedyGenre: COMEDYMatches
Publisher Allow List: rokuChannel: roku, Publisher: another valueDoes not satisfy the Publisher Allow List

Multi Field is the exception: it evaluates entered values across multiple supported content fields rather than requiring a match in one specific field.

Content Metadata Availability

Publishers and SSPs may provide different levels of content information. Some bid requests include detailed Publisher, Network, Channel, Series, and Title metadata, while others provide only a subset of these fields.

When a Require option is enabled, impressions without the corresponding metadata are ineligible to serve.

Restrictive Allow Lists can also reduce delivery when the requested content values are not present in available inventory.

Campaign and Line Compatibility

Content Targeting configured at the Campaign and Line levels is evaluated together.

For example, a Campaign targeting a specific Publisher and a Line targeting a specific Genre will only serve impressions that satisfy both requirements.

Conflicting or overly restrictive combinations may result in limited or no eligible impressions.

Best Practice: Use Pontiac’s Inventory Availability Tool, sample logs, and reporting data to review the content metadata available from your intended publishers and Exchanges before applying restrictive Content Targeting. Confirm that the values and fields you enter correspond to the inventory you want to reach.

Streaming & Video

Streaming & Video Targeting allows users to restrict delivery based on whether content is livestreamed and, for Online Video (OLV), the video placement, player size, and playback method associated with an impression.

These settings can be configured at both the Campaign and Line levels. Campaign-level targeting applies shared requirements to every Line, while Line-level targeting allows users to apply additional restrictions to an individual Line.

How to Access Streaming & Video Targeting

  1. Create a new Campaign or Line, or open an existing one in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  3. Select Edit Targeting.
  4. Under Streaming & Video, select Livestream or OLV from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  5. Configure the desired targeting options and select Save.
  6. Complete and save the Campaign or Line configuration.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. An impression must satisfy all applicable targeting requirements at both levels to be eligible to serve. Conflicting or overly restrictive settings can reduce available inventory or prevent delivery.

Livestream


Checking the livestream box will filter out any on-demand (VOD) inventory to target only impressions within content being live-streamed. Live content typically includes sports games, news, coverage of live events etc.

Not all publishers and streaming platforms contain live content, it is recommended to run an Inventory Availability report to verify if live content is available prior to applying this targeting

Live content can include sports, news, and other live events.

Configuring Livestream Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line and select Edit Targeting.
  2. Under Streaming & Video, select Livestream from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Enable the Livestream checkbox.
  4. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Livestream vs. Video on Demand
    • Livestream and VOD refer to how content is made available to viewers.
    • Livestream content is broadcast in real time, while VOD allows viewers to access prerecorded content when they choose.
    • Enabling Livestream specifically restricts delivery to the former.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Not all publishers and streaming platforms offer live programming. Available Livestream inventory can vary significantly by publisher, Exchange, geography, and other targeting requirements.
    • Before enabling Livestream, run an Inventory Availability Report to evaluate whether sufficient live inventory is available for your targeting configuration.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Livestream targeting configured at the Campaign level applies to every Line within that Campaign.
    • Review any additional Line-level targeting to ensure that the targeted Deals, Exchanges, and other requirements are compatible with live inventory.
  • Additional Inventory Restrictions
    • Enabling Livestream does not override other targeting settings.
    • The impression must also satisfy all applicable inventory, geographic, device, audience, and other Campaign and Line requirements.

OLV

Online Video (OLV) Targeting allows users to restrict video inventory based on the placement and playback characteristics of the video player. These settings provide additional control over where a video ad appears, the size of the player displaying it, and how playback is initiated.

OLV Targeting includes three categories:

Targeting CategoryDescription
Video Playback TypeDetermines where the advertisement appears in relation to video content or other page content.
Video Player SizeRestricts inventory based on the reported width of the video player.
Video Playback MethodRestricts inventory based on how video playback is initiated and whether sound is enabled by default.

OLV Targeting is available at both the Campaign and Line levels.

Configuring OLV Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line and select Edit Targeting.
  2. Under Streaming & Video, select OLV from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Configure the applicable Video Playback Type, Video Player Size, and Video Playback Method options.
  4. Review your selections and select Save to apply the targeting configuration.
  • Video Playback Type: Identifies where a video advertisement appears in relation to the video content being viewed.
    • Pre-Roll: An instream advertisement that plays before the primary video content begins.
    • Mid-Roll: An instream advertisement that plays during the primary video content.
    • Post-Roll: An instream advertisement that plays after the primary video content ends.
    • Outstream: A video advertisement displayed outside a traditional video-content player, such as within a web article or mobile game.
  • Video Player Size: Allows users to restrict inventory based on the reported width of the video player. These thresholds correspond to the player-size definitions in Pontiac’s OLV targeting documentation.
    • Large: 640 pixels or greater
    • Medium: 320–639 pixels
    • Small: 319 pixels or less
  • Video Playback Method: Allows users to restrict inventory based on how video playback is initiated and the default sound behavior associated with the player.
    • Autoplay with Sound On: Video playback starts automatically with sound enabled.
    • Autoplay with Sound Off by Default: Video playback starts automatically with sound muted by default.
    • Click to Play: Video playback begins when the user clicks or otherwise activates the video player.
    • Mouse-Over: Video playback is initiated when the user moves their cursor over the applicable video area.

Important Considerations

  • Inventory Type and Device Type
    • OLV Targeting should be configured alongside Inventory Type and Device Type targeting.
    • For example, an OLV Campaign designed to reach users on desktop and mobile devices can use the appropriate Web or In App inventory settings together with Phone, Tablet, and Personal Computer targeting.
  • Exchange Compatibility
    • Select Exchanges that support the intended OLV inventory.
    • Available video inventory and supported playback characteristics may vary across Exchanges.
  • Deal Targeting
    • When purchasing OLV inventory through Deals, select Deals that correspond to the intended video environment.
    • Ensure that the selected Deals and Exchanges are compatible with the OLV targeting requirements.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • OLV targeting configured at the Campaign and Line levels is evaluated together.
    • For example, if a Campaign is restricted to Pre-Roll inventory while an individual Line is restricted to Outstream, the conflicting playback requirements may prevent the Line from serving.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Combining multiple restrictive OLV settings can significantly reduce eligible inventory.
    • For example, selecting Pre-Roll, Large Player Size, and Click to Play restricts delivery to inventory satisfying all three conditions.
    • Use an Inventory Availability Report to evaluate available inventory before applying highly restrictive OLV targeting.

Advanced

Advanced Targeting provides additional controls for applying Custom Models and managing eligibility for inventory with specific privacy requirements.

These settings are available within the Campaign and Line Targeting workflow. Campaign-level targeting applies shared requirements across all Lines, while Line-level targeting allows users to configure additional requirements for an individual Line.

How to Access Advanced Targeting

  1. Create a new Campaign or Line, or open an existing one in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  3. Select Edit Targeting.
  4. Under Advanced, select Custom Model or Privacy from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  5. Configure the applicable settings and select Save.
  6. Complete and save the Campaign or Line configuration.

Custom Model

Custom Model Targeting allows users to apply an available Custom Model directly to a Campaign or Line.

Custom Models provide a way to activate optimization models generated through Pontiac’s Analytics Suite within the targeting workflow.

Configuring Custom Model Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line and select Edit Targeting.
  2. Under Advanced, select Custom Model from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Enable Use custom models.
  4. Select the model you want to apply using the radio button next to its name in the available models table.
  1. Select the applicable Threshold Type: Single Value or Spread.
    • Single Value uses one probability threshold to determine bid eligibility.
      • Predictions above the entered threshold will pass the model’s bidding criteria.
      • Predictions below the threshold will be excluded from bidding.
      • For example, if the Single Value threshold is set to 0.35, bid requests with a predicted probability above 0.35 pass the model’s criteria, while requests below that value are excluded.
    • Spread allows users to enter a lower and an upper probability threshold.
PredictionModel behavior
Above the upper thresholdAlways passes the model’s bidding criteria.
Below the lower thresholdExcluded from bidding.
Between the two thresholdsRandomly classified for bidding.

For example, if the lower threshold is 0.31 and the upper threshold is 0.42:

  • Predictions above 0.42 pass the model’s bidding criteria.
  • Predictions below 0.31 are excluded.
  • Predictions between 0.31 and 0.42 are randomly classified.

Spread provides flexibility in how the model handles predictions that fall between two defined thresholds.

Important: Passing the Custom Model’s bidding criteria does not guarantee an impression will serve. The bid request must still satisfy all other applicable targeting, budget, and bidding requirements.

  1. Enter the desired threshold value or values.
    • For guidance, hover over the Recommended Threshold figures. See further details below.
  1. Review your configuration and select Save.

Available Models

When Use custom models is enabled, a table displays the available models associated with the Advertiser.

The table includes the following information:

ColumnDescription
NameName of the model.
DateDate the model was generated.
PipelineAnalysis pipeline associated with the model.
EntitiesAdvertiser, Campaign, or Line entities associated with the model.
Recommended ThresholdRecommended probability threshold range associated with the model.

Use the Search bar to find a model by name. Select the radio button next to the desired model to apply it to the targeting configuration.

Recommended Threshold

The Recommended Threshold column displays a suggested probability range for each model.

For example, a model may display a Recommended Threshold of 0.31–0.42.

Users can reference this range when configuring their threshold settings:

  • Single Value: Choose one threshold value.
  • Spread: Configure a lower and upper threshold.

The recommended range serves as guidance for configuring the model. Users should review the selected thresholds based on their campaign objectives and desired inventory eligibility.

Important Considerations

  • Threshold Selection
    • Thresholds determine how restrictive the Custom Model is when evaluating bid requests.
    • For Single Value, increasing the threshold excludes more predictions below the cutoff.
    • For Spread, predictions between the lower and upper thresholds are randomly classified rather than automatically included or excluded.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Custom Model Targeting does not override other targeting requirements. An impression must still satisfy all applicable Campaign and Line settings to be eligible to serve.
  • Model Availability
    • Only models available to the applicable Advertiser are displayed for selection.

For information about generating models through Pontiac’s Analytics Suite, see the Analytics Documentation .

Privacy

Privacy Targeting controls eligibility for inventory associated with specific privacy restrictions. These settings allow advertisers to enable delivery to inventory identified as subject to COPPA or Do Not Track (DNT) restrictions.

Available Privacy Options

OptionDescription
Serve to COPPAAllows delivery to inventory identified as subject to the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act (COPPA).
Serve to DNTAllows delivery to impressions associated with users who have indicated a Do Not Track preference.

Configuring Privacy Targeting

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section of the applicable Campaign or Line and select Edit Targeting.
  2. Under Advanced, select Privacy from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  3. Enable Serve to COPPA and/or Serve to DNT, as applicable.
  4. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Data Restrictions
    • When either Serve to COPPA or Serve to DNT is enabled, the following information is restricted from use in targeting:
      • Persistent identifiers, including cookies, IDFAs, Google Advertising IDs, and device fingerprints.
      • Precise geolocation.
      • Full IP addresses.
      • Full referrer URLs.
    • Pontiac strips this restricted information from the bid request before targeting filters are applied.
    • Additionally, IP addresses and mobile advertising identifiers (IFAs) cannot be passed back to clients or included in pixel or creative macros for these impressions.
  • Targeting Compatibility
    • Targeting methods that depend on restricted identifiers or precise location information may not be applicable to this inventory.
    • Review Audience, Device, Geographic, and other targeting requirements to ensure the Campaign can serve without relying on unavailable information.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Privacy settings do not override other targeting requirements. Impressions must still satisfy all applicable Campaign and Line restrictions to be eligible to serve.

Important: Enabling these options allows delivery to the corresponding inventory categories; it does not remove the associated privacy restrictions or independently establish compliance with applicable requirements.

Audience Targeting

Audience Targeting allows users to apply Custom, Third Party, Contextual, and ART Audiences to a Campaign or Line.

Audiences can be organized into groups and combined using Boolean logic to create more specific targeting strategies.

Audience Targeting can be configured at both the Campaign and Line levels:

  • Campaign Targeting: Applies shared Audience requirements to all Lines within the Campaign.
  • Line Targeting: Allows users to apply additional Audience requirements to an individual Line.

Configuring Audience Targeting

  1. Create a new Campaign or Line, or open an existing one in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Audience section.
  3. Select Add New Group.
  4. Drag and drop the applicable Audiences to the group.
  5. Toggle the Target method between groups:
    • Any
    • All
  6. If needed, create additional Audience Groups and configure the Boolean logic used to combine them.
  7. Review your selections and save the Campaign or Line configuration.

For detailed instructions on selecting and applying Audience segments, see the Associate Segments Documentation .

Audience Groups and Boolean Logic

Audience Groups allow users to organize multiple Audiences and define how they work together.

Boolean logic determines whether an impression must satisfy multiple Audience conditions or can qualify by meeting one of several conditions.

For example:

LogicDescription
ANDRequires the impression to satisfy both Audience conditions.
ORAllows the impression to satisfy either Audience condition.

Multiple Audience Groups can be combined to create more complex targeting strategies.

For additional explanations and configuration examples, see the Boolean Logic Documentation .

Important Considerations

  • Campaign and Line Association
    • Audience associations configured at the Campaign and Line levels is evaluated together. Ensure the selected Audiences and Boolean logic do not create conflicting or overly restrictive requirements.
  • Audience Availability
    • Audience eligibility depends on the selected segment, available inventory, and the information required to identify qualifying impressions. Applying multiple restrictive Audience requirements may reduce available inventory.
  • Additional Targeting Requirements
    • Audience Targeting does not override other targeting settings. Impressions must also satisfy all applicable Inventory, Location & Device, Content, and other Campaign and Line requirements.
  • Best Practice: Review the Audience Groups and their Boolean logic before saving to ensure they reflect your intended targeting strategy. For step-by-step setup instructions, refer to the Associate Segments and Boolean Logic documentation linked above.

Pacing & Dayparts

Pacing & Dayparts control how budget is distributed throughout each day and when impressions are eligible to serve.

These settings can be configured at either the Campaign or Line level:

  • When Manage Dayparts is enabled on the Campaign, the Campaign’s Pacing & Dayparts settings apply across its Lines.
  • When Manage Dayparts is not enabled, Pacing & Dayparts can be configured independently at the Line level.

Use Campaign-level settings when the same pacing strategy and schedule should apply across all Lines. Use Line-level settings when individual Lines require different pacing behavior or delivery windows.

Configure Pacing & Dayparts

  1. Open the applicable Campaign or Line in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Pacing & Dayparts section.
  3. Select the applicable Daily Pacing Type.
  4. Configure the pacing curve settings, when applicable.
  5. Enable or disable Catch-up ASAP as needed.
  6. Configure the applicable Dayparts.
  7. Choose whether Dayparts should be evaluated in the User Time Zone.
  8. Review the configuration and select Submit to save.

Pacing Time Zone

The Campaign Pacing Time Zone, configured in Campaign Setup, determines the time zone used to define daily pacing boundaries and evaluate Daily Pacing weights.

Primetime and Custom pacing weighted curves are evaluated according to this time zone.

Dayparts also use the Campaign Pacing Time Zone unless Daypart in User Time Zone is enabled.

Daily Pacing Type

Daily Pacing Type controls how the available daily budget is distributed throughout each pacing day.

Available pacing types include:

  • Even: Spends the daily and lifetime budgets as evenly as possible.
  • ASAP: Spends the daily budget as quickly as possible while pacing the lifetime budget evenly.
  • Primetime: Uses a predefined hourly weighting curve to favor higher-weighted hours in the selected Pacing Time Zone.
  • Custom: Uses a user-configured hourly weighting curve in the selected Pacing Time Zone. Apply the custom curve to all days or configure individual curves by day.

Apply Curve to All Days

Apply Curve to All Days is available when Custom Daily Pacing is selected and is selected by default for Primetime.

When enabled, the same hourly pacing weights are applied across all selected days. When disabled, pacing weights can be configured independently for each selected day and hour.

Custom Daily Curve Applied to All Days Example
Individual Custom Daily Curves Example

Catch-up ASAP

Catch-up ASAP allows underspent budget to spend more aggressively when delivery falls behind pace.

While Catch-up ASAP is active, it overrides the configured Daily Budget and Daily Pacing Type so delivery can increase until pacing returns to 100%.

Once pacing catches up, delivery returns to the selected Daily Pacing configuration.

Catch-up ASAP is different from selecting ASAP as the Daily Pacing Type:

  • ASAP Daily Pacing: Controls how the current day’s available budget is spent. The daily budget is spent as quickly as possible while the overall lifetime budget continues pacing toward the Campaign or Line goal.
  • Catch-up ASAP: Activates only when delivery is behind pace. It temporarily overrides the configured Daily Budget and Daily Pacing Type to help recover underspent budget, then returns to the configured pacing settings once pacing reaches 100%.

Catch-up ASAP should be used carefully when a restrictive Daily Budget Cap is configured, because the cap may limit the additional delivery needed to catch up.

Daypart in User Time Zone

Daypart in User Time Zone determines which time zone is used to evaluate Daypart eligibility.

  • When enabled, Dayparts are evaluated using each user’s local day and hour.
  • When disabled, Dayparts are evaluated using the Campaign’s selected Pacing Time Zone.

This setting affects Daypart eligibility only. It does not shift Daily Pacing or its hourly weighting curve into the user’s local time zone.

Dayparts

Dayparts determine the days and hours when impressions are eligible to serve.

Use Dayparts to restrict delivery to selected periods, such as:

  • Specific days of the week
  • Business hours
  • Evening or Primetime periods
  • Other scheduled delivery windows

An impression is eligible only when it falls within an enabled Daypart period.

US National Best Practices

For national US Campaigns using a single Pacing Time Zone, Central Time is recommended as a practical default because it provides a more balanced alignment across Eastern, Central, Mountain, and Pacific audiences.

For national campaigns using Primetime pacing, consider using a Custom pacing curve that combines the Primetime periods of the targeted US time zones.

If Central Time is used as the Pacing Time Zone, an 8 PM local Primetime peak corresponds approximately to:

  • Eastern Time: 7 PM CT
  • Central Time: 8 PM CT
  • Mountain Time: 9 PM CT
  • Pacific Time: 10 PM CT

If targeting the broader US, Alaska Time and Hawaii-Aleutian Time can also be incorporated into the Custom curve.

Rather than producing a single sharp Primetime peak, a combined curve creates a broader evening delivery window as Primetime moves across the country.

Choosing Campaign-Level vs Line-Level Pacing

Use Campaign-level Pacing & Dayparts when:

  • The same Daily Pacing Type should apply across all Lines.
  • All Lines should follow the same Daypart schedule.
  • Centralized pacing management is preferred.

Use Line-level Pacing & Dayparts when:

  • Different Lines require different Daily Pacing Types.
  • Different Lines need different Daypart schedules.
  • Individual Line strategies should be managed independently.

Frequency & Recency

Frequency & Recency controls how often impressions can be served to the same user or identifier within a defined period.

These settings can be configured at the Campaign level, Line level, or both:

  • Campaign-level Frequency & Recency applies across all Lines within the Campaign.
  • Line-level Frequency & Recency applies only to the individual Line.
  • If Frequency & Recency is configured at both levels, the Campaign-level setting takes precedence over the Line-level setting.

Use Campaign-level controls when the same cap should apply across the full Campaign. Use Line-level controls when individual Lines require different Frequency or Recency settings and Campaign-level Frequency & Recency is not controlling delivery.

Campaign and Line Frequency & Recency

Campaign and Line Frequency & Recency can both be enabled at the same time.

When both are configured, the Campaign-level Frequency & Recency settings override the Line-level settings. The Line-level configuration may still be present, but the Campaign-level controls determine the applicable Frequency and Recency behavior.

If different Lines need independently controlled caps, do not apply Campaign-level Frequency & Recency.

Configure Frequency & Recency

  1. Open the applicable Campaign or Line in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Frequency & Recency section.
  3. Configure the applicable Frequency, Time Frame, Recency, and Cap By settings.
  4. Review the configuration and select Submit to save.

Frequency

Frequency sets the maximum number of impressions that can be served to the same identifier within the configured time frame.

Time Frame Days

Time Frame Days determines the period used to evaluate the Frequency cap.

Available values range from 1–14 days.

Recency

Recency sets the minimum amount of time that must pass before another impression can be served to the same identifier.

Available options include:

  • None
  • 1 minute
  • 5 minutes
  • 15 minutes
  • 30 minutes
  • 1 hour
  • 6 hours

Cap By

Cap By determines which identifier is used to apply Frequency and Recency.

  • IP: Applies the cap using the IP address. Commonly used for household-level frequency control.
  • IFA: Applies the cap at the device level using the Identifier for Advertising.
  • Cookies: Applies the cap at the browser level using cookies. Available in supported EU web environments.
  • IFA-IP: Uses IFA when available and falls back to IP when an IFA is not available.
    • When an IFA is available, the cap is applied at the device level.
    • When an IFA is not available, the IP address is used instead.

Example

For example:

  • Frequency: 10
  • Time Frame Days: 1
  • Recency: 30 minutes
  • Cap By: IP

This configuration allows up to 10 impressions per IP address within a 1-day period, with at least 30 minutes between impressions served to the same IP address.

Overview

The Campaign Setup Guides provide recommended configuration and targeting guidance for common media types, geographic strategies, and specialized Campaign workflows in Pontiac. Each guide outlines the Campaign and Line settings, inventory, targeting, Creatives, Audiences, and bidding considerations that are most relevant to that strategy.

If you are new to Pontiac or looking for an end-to-end walkthrough of the Campaign creation process, start with How to Launch Your First Campaign.

Important: Every Campaign must have at least one Line created under it in order to deliver impressions. The Campaign organizes and can control shared settings, but the Line is the object that executes bidding and delivery.

The guides below include setup recommendations for:

  • Display
  • Audio
  • CTV
  • Online Video (OLV)
  • OTT
  • Native
  • National US Campaigns
  • Canada Campaigns
  • Political Campaigns
  • Sensitive Categories
  • Programmatic Guaranteed (PG)
  • Index and Microsoft Curation

Use the guide that most closely matches the Campaign’s media type or strategy. Requirements may vary based on inventory, Deals, publishers, targeting, and Campaign goals. Reach out through the Help Center if you have any further questions.

Display Setup

Display campaigns allow advertisers to serve Banner and HTML5 creatives across supported exchanges: Index Exchange, Microsoft, OpenX and Magnite (DV+).

Pontiac supports multiple methods for accessing Display inventory:

  • Curated Deals (Recommended): Automatically create curated Deals through Index Exchange or Microsoft based on your Line’s targeting settings. This can help increase available inventory and improve delivery scale.
  • Open Exchange: Access eligible Display inventory directly through supported exchanges without targeting a specific Deal.
  • Public PMP Deals: Target Pontiac’s pre-negotiated Display Deals available under Inventory > Public Deals. Ensure the Deal’s Media Type = Display and Creative Type = Banner.
  • Negotiated PMP Deals: Target Display Deals negotiated directly with publishers or supply partners and made available to your Seat.

When setting up a Display Campaign, it’s important to ensure that your Creatives and targeting settings are compatible with Display inventory. All other Campaign and Line settings, including budgets, bidding, pacing, geographic targeting, and audiences, remain customizable based on your Campaign goals.

1. Upload Display Creatives

  1. Navigate to your Advertiser, or create a new Advertiser if needed.
  2. Upload your Banner or HTML5 Creatives.
  3. Allow up to 24 hours for the Pontiac Creative Audit to complete.
    • Note: Some exchanges require additional creative approval beyond Pontiac’s Creative Audit. Index Exchange, Microsoft, and Magnite (DV+) may take up to an additional 48 hours to approve creatives.

2. Create Your Campaign and Lines

Under your Advertiser, create a Campaign and one or more Lines.

Display Inventory and Targeting Recommendations

When configuring your Campaign and Line targeting, ensure that the selected inventory is compatible with Banner and HTML5 Creatives.

  • Inventory Type: Select Web, Combined, or In App. We recommend Web or Combined for the best scale, as In App Banner inventory can be more limited.
  • Exchanges: Target exchanges that support Display inventory: Index Exchange, Microsoft, OpenX, and Magnite (DV+).
  • Deals and Deal Lists: Ensure targeted Deals support Display/Banner inventory. For Public Deals, confirm Media Type = Display and Creative Type = Banner. CTV-only, Audio-only, and Video-only Deals are not compatible with standard Banner/HTML5 Creatives. Exchange targeting must also align with the selected Deals.
  • Sites and Apps: Site and Site List targeting applies to Web inventory, while App Name, App Bundle, and App List targeting applies to In App inventory. Ensure these settings align with the selected Inventory Type. For example, selecting Web inventory with an App List Allow List will prevent delivery.
  • Device Types: Select device categories compatible with Display inventory, such as Personal Computer, Phone, or Tablet. Restricting targeting exclusively to Connected TV or Set Top Box devices may prevent standard Banner delivery.
  • Content Targeting: Content fields such as Channel, Genre, Series, and Title are more commonly available in streaming and video inventory. Restrictive Content targeting or enabling Require Field can limit Display delivery when the corresponding metadata is unavailable in Banner bid requests.
  • Streaming & Video Targeting: Avoid OLV targeting for standard Banner/HTML5 Campaigns, as these settings are intended for video inventory. Livestream targeting can also significantly restrict eligible inventory and should only be used when the targeted Display supply supports it.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. Conflicting targeting requirements or settings that do not align with the associated creative format can prevent delivery, even when the Campaign and Line are otherwise configured correctly.

Other targeting options, including Audiences, geographic targeting, Browser, Operating Systems, and advanced settings, can be customized based on your Campaign goals. Highly restrictive targeting or requirements for fields not consistently available in Display bid requests may reduce eligible inventory.

For more information on targeting options, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

3. Select Your Display Inventory Setup

Display Campaigns can run through Curated Deals, Open Exchange inventory, or existing Public and Negotiated PMP Deals.

Option A: Index and Microsoft Curated Deals (Recommended)

Pontiac’s Curation feature automatically creates curated Deals through Index Exchange and Microsoft based on your Line’s targeting settings.

When enabled, Pontiac builds a curated Deal that reflects the Line’s targeting criteria and automatically associates the generated Deal with the Line. This can help increase available inventory and improve delivery scale.

How to Enable Curation

  1. Open your Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Curation.
  3. Ensure your Exchange targeting includes Index Exchange and/or Microsoft.
  4. Enable the applicable option:
    • Use Index Curated Deal: Automatically generates a curated Deal through Index Exchange.
    • Use Microsoft Curated Deal: Automatically generates a curated Deal through Microsoft.

Curation Requirements

To use the Curation feature, the following requirements must be met:

  • Exchange targeting must include Index Exchange and/or Microsoft, depending on the selected Curation option.
  • All Creatives associated with the Line must be of the same media type (Display or Video).
  • Geographic targeting must be more granular than Regions, or an eligible Audience must be attached that can be pushed to the curation platform.

Important: If these requirements are not met, the Line will fail to save and you will be redirected to the Line setup page to correct the configuration.

Optional: Target CTR (Index Exchange)

When using an Index Curated Deal, you can optionally enable Use Target CTR to filter inventory based on a desired Click-Through Rate.

Available thresholds range from Higher than 0% to 1% or Higher.

Note: Higher CTR goals restrict eligible inventory and may limit delivery. Target CTR is not supported for CTV or Audio Campaigns.

Option B: Open Exchange Display Inventory

Display Campaigns can also run directly through supported Open Exchanges without enabling the Curation feature.

To run on Open Exchange inventory, select the appropriate Exchange(s) in your Campaign or Line targeting and leave the Curation options disabled:

  • Index
  • Microsoft
  • OpenX
  • Magnite (DV+)

Option C: Public and Negotiated Display PMP Deals

Display Campaigns can also run through existing Public or Negotiated PMP Deals that support Banner/HTML5 inventory.

  • Public Deals: Navigate to Inventory > Public Deals to explore Pontiac’s available Display Deals.
  • Negotiated Deals: Navigate to Inventory > Negotiated Deals to view Deals associated with your Seat.

To target these Deals:

  1. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals.
  3. Select the applicable Public or Negotiated Display Deals.
  4. Confirm that the Deals support Banner/HTML5 inventory and that Exchange targeting includes the Exchanges associated with those Deals.
  5. Save your targeting settings.

Important: Not all Deals support Display inventory. Targeting CTV-only, Audio-only, or Video-only Deals with Banner/HTML5 Creatives will prevent delivery. Confirm that the selected Deals support the intended creative format.

For more information, see the Deals Documentation.

4. Review Display Inventory Compatibility

Before launching, confirm that:

  • Your Lines have approved Banner or HTML5 Creatives associated.
  • Your targeted Exchanges support Display inventory.
  • Any targeted Deals or Deal Lists contain compatible Display/Banner inventory.
  • Inventory Type, Device Types, and Site/App targeting align with your intended Display environment.
  • No incompatible Streaming & Video targeting is applied.
  • If using Curated Deals, the Curation requirements are satisfied.
  • Any required exchange-specific creative approvals have been completed.

Note: A Line may save successfully even if its targeted inventory is incompatible with its associated Creatives. Always verify inventory compatibility to avoid delivery issues.

Once the Campaign is active, monitor delivery and bidding performance under the Performance tab at the Campaign and Line levels.

For additional Campaign setup and targeting guidance, refer to the relevant Pontiac Wiki articles or contact the Help Center.

Audio Setup

Audio Campaigns allow advertisers to serve 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, or 90-second Audio Creatives across streaming music, digital radio, podcasts, and other digital audio inventory.

Available publishers and inventory providers include Spotify, Pandora, SiriusXM, SoundCloud, iHeartMedia, DAX, and other audio publishers, with inventory accessible through Magnite (DV+), Triton, AdsWizz, and Microsoft.

Pontiac supports two methods for accessing Audio inventory:

  • Deals (Recommended): Target Public or Negotiated Audio Deals to access specific publishers, podcasts, streaming services, or audio inventory packages.
  • Open Exchange: Access eligible Audio inventory directly through supported Exchanges. Additional App, Site, or Content targeting can help refine delivery to the desired audio environments.

When setting up an Audio Campaign, ensure that your Creatives, targeted Exchanges, Deals, and targeting settings are compatible with Audio inventory. All other Campaign and Line settings, including budgets, bidding, pacing, geographic targeting, and conversion tracking, remain customizable based on your Campaign goals.

1. Upload Audio Creatives

  1. Navigate to your Advertiser, or create a new Advertiser if needed.
  2. Upload one or more Audio Creatives that meet the applicable Creative Specs.
  3. Allow up to 24 hours for the Pontiac Creative Audit to complete.
  4. Associate the approved Audio Creatives with your Lines.

Note: Some publishers and Exchanges may require additional creative approval or have specific requirements for audio duration, MIME type, and file format.

2. Create Your Campaign and Lines

Under your Advertiser, create a Campaign and one or more Lines.

Audio Inventory and Targeting Recommendations

When configuring your Campaign and Line targeting, consider the following recommendations to ensure your settings are compatible with Audio inventory.

  • Inventory Type: Select Web, In App, or Combined based on your intended inventory. We recommend Combined for the broadest scale, as Audio inventory can be available across both websites and applications.
  • Exchanges: Target Exchanges supporting Audio inventory, including Magnite (DV+), Triton, AdsWizz, and Microsoft.
  • Deals and Deal Lists: Select Deals with Media Type = Audio. Confirm that the selected Deals support your intended publishers, content, and Audio Creatives. Targeting CTV-only, Display-only, or Video-only Deals with Audio Creatives will prevent delivery.
  • Device Types: Select device categories appropriate for your Audio strategy, such as Personal Computer, Phone, Tablet, or Connected Device. Restrictive Device Type targeting may exclude eligible streaming audio inventory.
  • Sites and Apps: Audio inventory can be available through both websites and applications. Use Sites, Site Lists, App Names, App Bundles, or App Lists to target specific audio publishers and streaming services. Ensure these settings align with your selected Inventory Type.
    • Important: Site and App Allow Lists cannot be combined on the same Line. If you want to target both specific websites and applications, create separate Lines: one targeting your Site/Site List Allow List and another targeting your App Name/App Bundle/App List Allow List.
  • Content Targeting: Audio inventory may include metadata such as Channel, Network, Publisher, Genre, Series, and Title. These fields are particularly useful for podcast and digital radio targeting. Review available Deal sample requests to confirm which fields and values are populated before applying restrictive targeting.
    • Multi Field Targeting: Allows matching across multiple supported Content fields rather than requiring the value to appear in one specific field. This can be helpful when publishers pass podcast or program information in different fields.
  • Frequency Capping: We recommend No Cap for maximum scale, as Audio publishers may not consistently provide usable device or user identifiers.
    • Important: If frequency capping is needed, we recommend selecting IFA-IP under Cap By. This uses the IFA (Identifier for Advertising) when available and falls back to the IP address when an IFA is not provided, helping maintain frequency capping coverage across inventory with varying identifier availability.
  • Audience Targeting: ART Audiences can be used to target ZIP codes that over-index for your desired audience. Other supported audience types can also be applied, although match rates and availability vary by inventory source and may limit scale.
  • Bid Price: Use Deal floors as guidance when bidding on Audio PMPs. Audio Deal floors have historically ranged from approximately $7–$20 CPM, depending on the publisher and inventory. For Open Exchange Audio, consider starting around $13 CPM and adjusting based on available inventory, bidding performance, and delivery.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. Conflicting targeting requirements or settings that do not align with Audio inventory can prevent delivery, even when the Campaign and Line are otherwise configured correctly.

Other targeting options, including geographic targeting, Browser, Operating Systems, and advanced settings, can be customized according to your Campaign goals. Highly restrictive targeting may reduce eligible Audio inventory.

For additional information, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

3. Select Your Audio Inventory Setup

Option A: Audio Campaigns Using Deals (Recommended)

We recommend using Public or Negotiated Audio Deals to access specific streaming services, podcasts, digital radio stations, and publisher inventory.

Targeting multiple compatible Deals can help increase available inventory and improve delivery scale.

How to Target Audio Deals

  1. Navigate to Inventory to explore available Public or Negotiated Deals.
  2. Identify Deals with Media Type = Audio.
  3. Review the publisher, inventory availability, Deal floor, and supported Audio Creative requirements.
  4. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  5. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals or Deal Lists.
  6. Select the applicable Audio Deals or Deal Lists.
  7. Leave Exchange targeting unselected to avoid excluding Exchanges associated with your selected Deals.
  8. Save your targeting settings.

Note: Audio Deals may contain different inventory types, including streaming music, podcasts, and digital radio. Review Deal information and available sample requests to confirm that the inventory aligns with your Campaign goals.

For more information, see the Deals Documentation.

Option B: Audio Campaigns Using Open Exchange

Audio Campaigns can also run directly through eligible Open Exchange inventory.

How to Configure Open Exchange Audio Inventory

  1. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Exchanges.
  3. Select the Exchanges through which you want to purchase Audio inventory:
    • Magnite (DV+)
    • Triton
    • AdsWizz
    • Microsoft
  4. Optionally, apply Site, Site List, App Name, App Bundle, or App List targeting to focus delivery on specific publishers or streaming services.
    • Important: Site and App Allow Lists cannot be combined on the same Line. If you want to target both specific websites and applications, create separate Lines: one targeting your Site/Site List Allow List and another targeting your App Name/App Bundle/App List Allow List.
  5. If targeting specific content, review available metadata and configure the appropriate Content targeting fields.
  6. Save your targeting settings.

Important: Open Exchange Audio inventory is not automatically restricted to specific podcast genres, shows, streaming services, or publishers. Additional inventory and Content targeting may be needed to reach the desired audio environments.

4. Review Audio Inventory Compatibility

Before launching, confirm that:

  • Your Lines have approved Audio Creatives that meet the applicable publisher and Exchange specifications.
  • Your targeted Deals or Exchanges support Audio inventory.
  • Any targeted Deals or Deal Lists have Media Type = Audio.
  • Inventory Type, Device Types, and Site/App targeting align with your intended Audio environment.
  • Any Content targeting values are supported by the available publisher metadata.
  • Frequency Capping is set to No Cap, if prioritizing maximum scale.
  • Any Audience targeting is appropriate for the selected inventory.
  • Any required publisher or Exchange creative approvals have been completed.

Note: A Line may save successfully even when its targeting configuration does not align with the intended Audio inventory. Always verify inventory and Creative compatibility before launching to avoid delivery issues.

Once your Campaign is active, monitor delivery and bidding performance under the Performance tab at both the Campaign and Line levels.

For additional Campaign setup and targeting guidance, refer to the relevant Pontiac Wiki articles or contact the Help Center.

CTV Setup

CTV (Connected TV) is a subset of OTT, referring to television content streamed over an internet connection and viewed on Smart TVs, connected streaming devices, gaming consoles, and Set Top Boxes.

Pontiac supports two methods for accessing CTV inventory:

  • Deals (Recommended): Target Public or Negotiated Deals offering CTV or OTT/CTV inventory. This provides greater control over the streaming publishers, content, and environments where your ads appear.
  • Open Exchange: Access eligible CTV inventory directly through supported Exchanges. Additional App targeting is recommended to restrict delivery to streaming TV applications.

When setting up a CTV Campaign, ensure that your Creatives, targeted inventory, Device Types, and targeting settings are compatible with CTV. All other Campaign and Line settings, including budgets, bidding, pacing, geographic targeting, and conversion tracking, remain customizable based on your Campaign goals.

1. Upload CTV Creatives

  1. Navigate to your Advertiser, or create a new Advertiser if needed.
  2. Upload one or more Video Creatives that meet the Creative Specs.
  3. Allow up to 24 hours for the Pontiac Creative Audit to complete.

Note: Some publishers and Exchanges may require additional creative approval before your Creatives are eligible to serve.

2. Create Your Campaign and Lines

Under your Advertiser, create a Campaign and one or more Lines.

CTV Inventory and Targeting Recommendations

When configuring your Campaign and Line targeting, consider the following recommendations to ensure your settings are compatible with CTV inventory.

  • Inventory Type: Select In App, as CTV inventory is typically delivered through applications on Smart TVs and connected devices.
  • Deals and Deal Lists: Target Deals offering CTV or OTT/CTV inventory. Confirm that the selected Deals support Video Creatives and provide inventory on Connected TV, Connected Device, or Set Top Box devices. OTT/CTV Deals may also contain Mobile, Tablet, or Desktop inventory that will not be eligible under CTV-specific Device Type targeting.
  • Device Types: Select Connected TV, Connected Device, and Set Top Box to focus delivery on CTV environments.
  • Sites and Apps: For Open Exchange delivery, use App Name, App Bundle, or App List targeting to identify streaming TV applications. Without these restrictions, delivery may extend to other applications available on Connected TV devices that are not primarily streaming TV services.
  • Frequency Capping: Select No Cap. CTV publishers may not consistently provide usable device or user identifiers, making frequency capping less reliable and potentially restricting delivery.
  • Audience Targeting: Custom Audiences and ART Audiences can be used for CTV Campaigns. ART Audiences allow advertisers to target ZIP codes that over-index for their desired audience. Audience availability and matching may vary across CTV inventory, and restrictive audience targeting can limit delivery scale.
  • Bid Price: For PMP Deals, use the Deal floors as guidance and consider starting approximately 40–50% above the floor, adjusting based on bidding performance and delivery. Premium CTV inventory can be competitive, and clearing prices vary by publisher, content, and inventory availability.
  • Video Playback Targeting: We recommend leaving Video Playback Type and Video Player Size unrestricted, particularly when targeting CTV-specific Deals. Additional restrictions may limit eligible inventory if publishers do not consistently provide the corresponding video metadata.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. Conflicting targeting requirements or settings that do not align with CTV inventory can prevent delivery, even when the Campaign and Line are otherwise configured correctly.

Other targeting options, including geographic targeting and advanced settings, can be customized based on your Campaign goals. Highly restrictive targeting may reduce eligible CTV inventory.

For additional information, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

3. Select Your CTV Inventory Setup

Option A: CTV Campaigns Using Deals (Recommended)

We recommend using Public or Negotiated CTV Deals to access streaming TV inventory with greater control over publishers, content, and supply sources.

For inventory that most closely resembles traditional linear television, consider selecting Deals offering Live or Long Form content, such as live programming and full television episodes.

Targeting multiple compatible CTV Deals can help increase available inventory and improve delivery scale.

How to Target CTV Deals

  1. Navigate to Inventory to explore available Public or Negotiated Deals.
  2. Identify Deals offering CTV or OTT/CTV inventory.
  3. Confirm that the Deals support Video Creatives and provide inventory on Connected TV, Connected Device, or Set Top Box devices.
  4. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  5. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals or Deal Lists.
  6. Select the applicable CTV Deals or Deal Lists.
  7. Leave Exchange targeting unselected to avoid excluding Exchanges associated with your selected Deals.
  8. Save your targeting settings.

Note: Not all OTT/CTV Deals provide inventory across every device category. Review the available Device Types for each Deal to confirm that it supports CTV delivery.

For more information, see the Deals Documentation.

Option B: CTV Campaigns Using Open Exchange

CTV Campaigns can also run through eligible Open Exchange inventory. However, additional App targeting is recommended to ensure delivery is focused on streaming TV applications.

Without App targeting, a Line may serve across other applications available on Connected TV devices, including weather, news, and other non-streaming TV environments.

How to Configure Open Exchange CTV Inventory

  1. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Exchanges.
  3. Select the Exchanges through which you want to purchase CTV inventory, such as Index Exchange, Microsoft, OpenX, Magnite, or Freewheel, where eligible Open Exchange CTV supply is available.
  4. Under Inventory targeting, apply an App Name, App Bundle, or App List Allow List containing your desired streaming TV applications.
  5. Confirm that Inventory Type is set to In App and Device Type targeting includes Connected TV, Connected Device, and/or Set Top Box.
  6. Save your targeting settings.

Important: Open Exchange inventory is not automatically restricted to traditional streaming TV content. Targeting appropriate CTV applications is recommended to avoid delivery across other connected device environments.

4. Review CTV Inventory Compatibility

Before launching, confirm that:

  • Your Lines have approved Video Creatives that meet the applicable CTV specifications.
  • Your targeted Deals or Exchanges provide CTV inventory.
  • Inventory Type is set to In App.
  • Device Type targeting includes Connected TV, Connected Device, and/or Set Top Box.
  • Frequency Capping is set to No Cap.
  • Video Playback Type and Video Player Size are left unrestricted unless specifically required.
  • If using Audience Targeting, the selected segments are appropriate for CTV inventory.
  • For Open Exchange delivery, an App Allow List is configured to target the intended streaming TV applications.
  • Any required publisher or Exchange creative approvals have been completed.

Note: A Line may save successfully even when its targeting configuration does not align with the intended CTV inventory. Always verify inventory compatibility before launching to avoid delivery issues.

Once your Campaign is active, monitor delivery and bidding performance under the Performance tab at both the Campaign and Line levels.

For additional Campaign setup and targeting guidance, refer to the relevant Pontiac Wiki articles or contact the Help Center.

OLV Setup

Online Video (OLV) Campaigns allow advertisers to serve Video Creatives across websites and mobile applications, including instream and outstream video placements.

  • Instream Video: Video ads served within video content, including Pre-Roll, Mid-Roll, and Post-Roll placements.
  • Outstream Video: Video ads served outside traditional video players, such as within website articles or other page content.

Pontiac supports two methods for accessing OLV inventory:

  • Deals (Recommended): Target Public or Negotiated Deals offering Online Video inventory to access specific publishers, video placements, or inventory packages.
  • Open Exchange: Access eligible OLV inventory directly through supported Exchanges, with optional Site or App targeting to refine delivery.

When setting up an OLV Campaign, ensure that your Creatives, targeted Exchanges, Deals, and Video targeting settings are compatible with Online Video inventory. All other Campaign and Line settings, including budgets, bidding, pacing, geographic targeting, and audiences, remain customizable based on your Campaign goals.

1. Upload OLV Creatives

  1. Navigate to your Advertiser, or create a new Advertiser if needed.
  2. Upload one or more Video Creatives that meet the applicable Creative Specs.
  3. Allow up to 24 hours for the Pontiac Creative Audit to complete.

Note: Some publishers and Exchanges may require additional creative approval before your Creatives are eligible to serve.

2. Create Your Campaign and Lines

Under your Advertiser, create a Campaign and one or more Lines.

OLV Inventory and Targeting Recommendations

When configuring your Campaign and Line targeting, consider the following recommendations to ensure your settings are compatible with OLV inventory.

  • Inventory Type: Select Combined for the broadest scale, as OLV inventory can be available across both Web and In App environments. Select Web or In App when targeting a specific environment.
  • Exchanges: Target Exchanges supporting Online Video inventory, including Index Exchange, Microsoft, Magnite (DV+), Freewheel, and OpenX, where eligible OLV supply is available.
  • Deals and Deal Lists: Select Deals with Media Type = Online Video. Confirm that the Deals support your intended Video Creatives and placement types. Targeting CTV-only, Audio-only, or Display-only Deals with OLV Creatives may prevent delivery.
  • Device Types: Select Personal Computer, Phone, and/or Tablet, depending on your strategy. Restricting targeting to Connected TV or Set Top Box devices may exclude eligible OLV inventory.
  • Sites and Apps: For Open Exchange delivery, use Site, Site List, App Name, App Bundle, or App List targeting to focus delivery on specific websites or applications. Ensure these settings align with your selected Inventory Type.
    • Important: Site and App Allow Lists should be configured on separate Lines. If targeting both specific websites and applications, create one Line for Site/Site List targeting and another for App Name/App Bundle/App List targeting.
  • Video Playback Type: Configure your preferred video placement under Edit Targeting > Streaming & Video > OLV.
    • Pre-Roll: Video ads served before the primary video content. Recommended for instream OLV Campaigns.
    • Mid-Roll: Video ads served during the primary video content.
    • Post-Roll: Video ads served after the primary video content.
    • Outstream: Video ads served outside traditional video content, such as within articles or other page placements.
    • Select the playback types that align with your Campaign goals. More restrictive selections may reduce eligible inventory.
  • Video Player Size: Select Large, Medium, or Small based on your requirements, or leave unrestricted for maximum scale.
  • Video Playback Method: Optionally target specific playback behaviors, such as Autoplay with Sound On, Autoplay with Sound Off, Click to Play, or Mouse-Over. Restrictive settings may reduce available inventory.
  • Livestream: Enable Livestream only when targeting live video content, such as sports, news, or live events. This excludes on-demand inventory and may significantly limit scale.
  • Content Targeting: Content metadata such as Channel, Network, Publisher, Genre, Series, and Title may be available for certain OLV inventory. Review available Deal sample requests before applying restrictive Content targeting.
  • Frequency Capping: We recommend No Cap for maximum scale. If frequency capping is needed, consider IFA-IP under Cap By, which caps by IFA when available and falls back to IP when an IFA is not provided.
  • Audience Targeting: Custom, Contextual, Third-Party, and ART Audiences can be used to refine OLV targeting. Audience availability and match rates vary by inventory source, and restrictive targeting may limit delivery.
  • Bid Price: Use Deal floors as guidance when bidding on OLV PMPs. For Open Exchange OLV, consider starting around $6–$8 CPM and adjusting based on bidding performance and available inventory.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. Conflicting targeting requirements or settings that do not align with Online Video inventory can prevent delivery, even when the Campaign and Line are otherwise configured correctly.

For additional information, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

3. Select Your OLV Inventory Setup

Option A: OLV Campaigns Using Deals (Recommended)

We recommend using Public or Negotiated Online Video Deals to access specific publishers, video placements, and inventory packages.

How to Target OLV Deals

  1. Navigate to Inventory to explore available Public or Negotiated Deals.
  2. Identify Deals with Media Type = Online Video.
  3. Review the available publishers, placement types, Device Types, and Deal floors.
  4. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  5. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals or Deal Lists.
  6. Select the applicable OLV Deals or Deal Lists.
  7. Leave Exchange targeting unselected to avoid excluding Exchanges associated with your selected Deals.
  8. Save your targeting settings.

Note: Not all OLV Deals contain the same placement types. Some may provide exclusively instream or outstream inventory. Confirm that your Video Playback Type targeting aligns with the selected Deals.

For more information, see the Deals Documentation.

Option B: OLV Campaigns Using Open Exchange

OLV Campaigns can also run directly through supported Open Exchanges.

How to Configure Open Exchange OLV Inventory

  1. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Exchanges.
  3. Select the Exchanges through which you want to purchase OLV inventory.
  4. Optionally, apply Site, Site List, App Name, App Bundle, or App List targeting to focus delivery on specific websites or applications.
  5. Under Edit Targeting > Streaming & Video > OLV, select your desired Video Playback Types:
    • Pre-Roll
    • Mid-Roll
    • Post-Roll
    • Outstream
  6. Optionally, configure Video Player Size and Video Playback Method.
  7. Confirm that Device Type targeting includes Personal Computer, Phone, and/or Tablet.
  8. Save your targeting settings.

Important: Open Exchange OLV inventory may contain a variety of video placement types and publisher environments. Configure Video Playback Type and optional Site/App targeting to align delivery with your intended video strategy.

4. Review OLV Inventory Compatibility

Before launching, confirm that:

  • Your Lines have approved Video Creatives that meet the applicable Video specifications.
  • Your targeted Exchanges support OLV inventory.
  • Any targeted Deals or Deal Lists contain compatible Online Video inventory.
  • Inventory Type and Device Type targeting align with your intended Web or In App environments.
  • Video Playback Type targeting matches your desired instream or outstream placements.
  • Video Player Size and Playback Method settings are configured appropriately, if used.
  • Any Site or App targeting aligns with the intended inventory environment.
  • Any required publisher or Exchange creative approvals have been completed.

Note: A Line may save successfully even when its targeting configuration does not align with the intended OLV inventory. Always verify inventory and Creative compatibility before launching to avoid delivery issues.

Once your Campaign is active, monitor delivery and bidding performance under the Performance tab at both the Campaign and Line levels.

For additional Campaign setup and targeting guidance, refer to the relevant Pontiac Wiki articles or contact the Help Center.

OTT Setup

OTT (Over-the-Top) refers to television content delivered over an internet connection. For this guide, OTT specifically refers to streaming TV content delivered on Mobile Phones, Tablets, and Desktop/Personal Computers, excluding Connected TV (CTV) devices.

Pontiac supports two methods for accessing OTT inventory:

  • Deals (Recommended): Target Public or Negotiated Deals offering OTT or OTT/CTV inventory. This provides greater control over the streaming publishers and environments where your ads appear.
  • Open Exchange: Access eligible OTT inventory through supported Exchanges. Additional App targeting is strongly recommended to restrict delivery to streaming TV applications rather than general mobile or desktop inventory.

When setting up an OTT Campaign, ensure that your Creatives, targeted inventory, Device Types, and Video targeting settings are compatible with OTT. All other Campaign and Line settings, including budgets, bidding, pacing, geographic targeting, and conversion tracking, remain customizable based on your Campaign goals.

1. Upload OTT Creatives

  1. Navigate to your Advertiser, or create a new Advertiser if needed.
  2. Upload one or more Video Creatives that meet the Creative Specs.
  3. Allow up to 24 hours for the Pontiac Creative Audit to complete.

Note: Some publishers and Exchanges may require additional creative approval before your Creatives are eligible to serve.

2. Create Your Campaign and Lines

Under your Advertiser, create a Campaign and one or more Lines.

OTT Inventory and Targeting Recommendations

When configuring your Campaign and Line targeting, consider the following recommendations to ensure your settings are compatible with OTT inventory.

  • Inventory Type: We recommend Combined for the broadest scale, as OTT inventory can be available across both Web and In App environments. Select Web or In App when targeting a specific environment.
  • Deals and Deal Lists: Target Deals offering OTT or OTT/CTV inventory. Confirm that the selected Deals support Video Creatives and provide inventory on Mobile, Tablet, or Desktop devices. Deals exclusively offering Connected TV inventory will not be eligible under the recommended OTT Device Type targeting.
  • Device Types: Select Phone, Tablet, and Personal Computer. Avoid targeting Connected TV and Set Top Box devices, as this guide focuses on OTT delivery outside the CTV environment.
  • Sites and Apps: For Open Exchange delivery, use Site, Site List, App Name, App Bundle, or App List targeting to identify streaming TV publishers and applications. Without these restrictions, delivery may extend to other video-enabled websites or applications that are not OTT streaming services.
  • Frequency Capping: Select No Cap. OTT publishers may not consistently provide usable device or user identifiers, making frequency capping less reliable and potentially restricting delivery.
  • Audience Targeting: We recommend using audiences from TruAudience (TransUnion) for OTT Campaigns, as these segments are designed for OTT environments. Alternatively, ART Audiences can be used to target ZIP codes that over-index for your desired audience. Keep in mind that audience targeting may reduce available inventory and limit delivery scale.
  • Video Playback Targeting: We recommend leaving Video Playback Type and Video Player Size unrestricted for OTT Campaigns, particularly when using OTT-specific Deals. Applying additional restrictions may limit eligible inventory.
  • Bid Price: For PMP Deals, use the Deal floors as guidance and consider starting approximately 40–50% above the floor, adjusting based on bidding performance and delivery.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. Conflicting targeting requirements or settings that do not align with OTT inventory can prevent delivery, even when the Campaign and Line are otherwise configured correctly.

Other targeting options, including geographic targeting, Browser, Operating Systems, and advanced settings, can be customized based on your Campaign goals. Highly restrictive targeting may reduce eligible OTT inventory.

For additional information, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

3. Select Your OTT Inventory Setup

Option A: OTT Campaigns Using Deals (Recommended)

We recommend using Public or Negotiated OTT Deals to access streaming TV inventory with greater control over publishers and supply sources.

How to Target OTT Deals

  1. Navigate to Inventory to explore available Public or Negotiated Deals.
  2. Identify Deals offering OTT or OTT/CTV inventory.
  3. Confirm that the Deals support Video Creatives and provide inventory on Mobile, Tablet, or Desktop devices.
  4. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  5. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals.
  6. Select the applicable OTT Deals.
  7. Leave Exchange targeting unselected to avoid excluding Exchanges associated with your selected Deals.
  8. Save your targeting settings.

Note: Not all OTT/CTV Deals provide inventory across every device category. Review the available Device Types for each Deal to confirm that it supports OTT delivery.

For more information, see the Deals Documentation.

Option B: OTT Campaigns Using Open Exchange

OTT Campaigns can also run through eligible Open Exchange inventory. However, additional App targeting is strongly recommended to ensure delivery is restricted to streaming TV applications.

Without App targeting, a Line may serve across other applications offering video placements, including mobile games, news applications, and other non-OTT environments.

How to Configure Open Exchange OTT Inventory

  1. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Exchanges.
  3. Select the Exchanges through which you want to purchase OTT inventory.
  4. Under Inventory targeting, apply a Site, Site List, App Name, App Bundle, or App List Allow List containing your desired streaming TV publishers or applications. Ensure these settings align with your selected Inventory Type.
  5. Confirm that Device Type targeting includes Phone, Tablet, and/or Personal Computer.
  6. Save your targeting settings.

Important: Open Exchange inventory is not automatically restricted to OTT streaming TV content. Targeting appropriate streaming TV applications is recommended to avoid delivery across other video environments.

4. Review OTT Inventory Compatibility

Before launching, confirm that:

  • Your Lines have approved Video Creatives that meet the applicable OTT/CTV specifications.
  • Your targeted Deals or Exchanges provide OTT streaming TV inventory.
  • Inventory Type and Device Type targeting align with the intended OTT environments (Mobile, Tablet, and Desktop).
  • Frequency Capping is set to No Cap.
  • Video Playback Type and Video Player Size are left unrestricted unless specifically required.
  • If using Audience Targeting, the selected segments are appropriate for OTT inventory.
  • For Open Exchange delivery, Site or App Allow Lists are configured to target the intended streaming TV publishers or applications.
  • Any required publisher or Exchange creative approvals have been completed.

Note: A Line may save successfully even when its targeting configuration does not align with the intended OTT inventory. Always verify inventory compatibility before launching to avoid delivery issues.

Once your Campaign is active, monitor delivery and bidding performance under the Performance tab at both the Campaign and Line levels.

For additional Campaign setup and targeting guidance, refer to the relevant Pontiac Wiki articles or contact the Help Center.

Native Setup

Native Campaigns allow advertisers to serve Native Format A Creatives across supported exchanges, including Index Exchange and Microsoft.

Native advertising integrates promotional content into the appearance and layout of the website or application where the ad is displayed.

When setting up a Native Campaign, it’s important to ensure that your Creatives and targeting settings are compatible with Native inventory. All other Campaign and Line settings, including budgets, bidding, pacing, geographic targeting, and audiences, remain customizable based on your Campaign goals.

1. Upload Native Creatives

  1. Navigate to your Advertiser, or create a new Advertiser if needed.
  2. Upload one or more Native Format A Creatives.
  3. Allow up to 24 hours for the Pontiac Creative Audit to complete.
    • Note: Index Exchange and Microsoft require additional creative approval beyond Pontiac’s Creative Audit. This approval must be completed before Creatives are eligible to serve on the respective exchanges.

2. Create Your Campaign and Lines

Under your Advertiser, create a Campaign and one or more Lines.

Native Inventory and Targeting Recommendations

When configuring your Campaign and Line targeting, consider the following recommendations to ensure your settings are compatible with Native inventory.

  • Inventory Type: Select Web, Combined, or In App. We recommend Combined for the broadest reach, while In App may be appropriate for mobile-native strategies and Web for website-specific campaigns.
  • Exchanges: Target Index Exchange and/or Microsoft, which support Native inventory.
  • Deals and Deal Lists: If targeting Deals, ensure they contain Native inventory and support Native Format A Creatives. Targeting Deals intended exclusively for CTV, Audio, Display, or Video inventory will prevent Native Creative delivery.
  • Sites and Apps: Site and Site List targeting applies to Web inventory, while App Name, App Bundle, and App List targeting applies to In App inventory. Ensure these settings align with your selected Inventory Type.
  • Device Types: Select device categories compatible with Native inventory, such as Personal Computer, Phone, or Tablet. Restricting targeting exclusively to Connected TV or Set Top Box devices may prevent delivery.
  • Content Targeting: Content-level fields such as Channel, Genre, Series, and Title may not be consistently available in Native bid requests. Restrictive Content targeting or enabling Require Field may significantly limit eligible inventory.
  • Streaming & Video Targeting: Avoid enabling Livestream or OLV targeting for standard Native Campaigns, as these settings are intended for streaming and video inventory and may prevent eligible Native impressions from matching.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. Conflicting targeting requirements or targeting that does not align with Native inventory can prevent delivery, even when the Campaign and Line are otherwise configured correctly.

Other targeting options, including Audiences, geographic targeting, Browser, Operating Systems, and advanced settings, can be customized as needed. Highly restrictive targeting may reduce available Native inventory.

For more information on available targeting options, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

3. Select Your Native Inventory

Native Campaigns can run through supported Native Deals available on Index Exchange and Microsoft.

How to Target Native Deals

  1. Navigate to Inventory to explore available Public or Negotiated Deals.
  2. Identify Deals that support Native inventory and Native Format A Creatives.
  3. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  4. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals.
  5. Select the applicable Native Deals.
  6. Confirm that your Exchange targeting includes the Exchange associated with each selected Deal.
  7. Save your targeting settings.

Important: Not all Deals support Native inventory. Confirm that the selected Deals support the intended Native creative format before launching.

For more information on available Deals, see the Deals Documentation.

4. Associate Native Creatives

  1. Open your Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Associate your uploaded Native Format A Creatives.
  3. Confirm that the Creatives have passed Pontiac’s Creative Audit and any required exchange-specific approvals.
  4. Save your Line.

Note: Index Exchange and Microsoft require additional creative approval before Native Creatives are eligible to serve.

For assistance with exchange-specific creative approvals, contact the Help Center.

5. Review Native Inventory Compatibility

Before launching, confirm that:

  • Your Lines have approved Native Format A Creatives associated.
  • Your targeted Exchanges support Native inventory (Index Exchange and/or Microsoft).
  • Any targeted Deals or Deal Lists contain compatible Native inventory.
  • Inventory Type, Device Types, and Site/App targeting align with your intended Native environment.
  • No incompatible Streaming & Video targeting is applied.
  • Any required exchange-specific creative approvals have been completed.

Note: A Line may save successfully even if its targeted inventory is incompatible with its associated Creatives. Always verify inventory compatibility to avoid delivery issues.

Once your Campaign is active, monitor delivery and bidding performance under the Performance tab at both the Campaign and Line levels.

For additional Campaign setup and targeting guidance, refer to the relevant Pontiac Wiki articles or contact the Help Center.

National US Campaign Setup

This guide outlines recommended pacing settings and geographic targeting options for running national United States Campaigns on the Pontiac platform.

1. Campaign Setup and Pacing Time Zone

Create your Campaign and configure the standard Campaign settings based on your advertising goals.

Pacing Time Zone

The Campaign’s Pacing Time Zone determines the start and end of each day for Campaign pacing and delivery.

For example, if your Campaign End Date is January 31 and the Pacing Time Zone is Eastern Time, the Campaign will stop delivering at 11:59:59 PM Eastern Time on January 31.

Recommended Pacing Time Zone for National US Campaigns

For national US Campaigns using a single Pacing Time Zone, Central Time is recommended as a practical default because it provides a balanced reference point across Eastern, Central, Mountain, and Pacific time zones. The ideal Pacing Time Zone may vary depending on your geographic targeting and delivery goals.

  • Eastern Time (ET)
  • Central Time (CT)
  • Mountain Time (MT)
  • Pacific Time (PT)

A single Pacing Time Zone will not perfectly align pacing with local hours across all US regions. If targeting Alaska or Hawaii, their respective time zones should also be considered.

Note: Pacing Time Zone determines the Campaign’s pacing schedule and daily boundaries. Daypart Targeting is configured separately and can be used to restrict delivery to specific days and hours.

Primetime Pacing for National US Campaigns

For national Campaigns using Primetime pacing, consider configuring a Custom pacing curve that combines Primetime hours across the targeted US time zones.

For example, when Central Time is selected as the Campaign Pacing Time Zone, an 8 PM local Primetime peak corresponds to:

Targeted Time ZoneEquivalent Central Time
Eastern (ET)7 PM CT
Central (CT)8 PM CT
Mountain (MT)9 PM CT
Pacific (PT)10 PM CT

Instead of concentrating delivery around a single Primetime peak, a Custom pacing curve can distribute higher pacing weights across a broader evening window, helping align delivery with Primetime hours throughout the country.

For more precise local Primetime pacing, consider creating separate Campaigns by time zone, with corresponding geographic targeting and Pacing Time Zone settings.

2. United States Geographic Targeting

Pontiac supports geographic targeting at the Country, Region, DMA, and ZIP Code levels.

Targeting can be configured at the Campaign or Line level. When targeting is applied at both levels, the requirements are evaluated together and must be compatible.

Country-Level Targeting

To target the entire United States:

  1. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Location & Device > Geo.
  2. Select Countries and search for United States.
  3. Click the green plus (+) button to add the United States to your targeting.
  4. Save your changes.

Region-Level Targeting

To target specific US states or regions:

  1. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Location & Device > Geo.
  2. Select Regions from the dropdown.
  3. Search for United States to view available US Regions.
  4. Click the green plus (+) button to add your desired Regions.
  5. Save your changes.

Use the Block List option to exclude specific Regions from delivery.

DMA-Level Targeting

To target specific US Designated Market Areas (DMAs):

  1. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Location & Device > Geo.
  2. Select DMAs from the dropdown.
  3. Search for United States to view available US DMAs.
  4. Click the green plus (+) button to add your desired DMAs.
  5. Save your changes.

Use the Block List option to exclude specific DMAs from delivery.

ZIP Code Targeting

To target specific US ZIP codes:

  1. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Location & Device > Zip Codes.
  2. Select United States as the Country.
  3. Enter or paste your ZIP code list using the standard five-digit format (e.g., 10001).
  4. Select Validate Zips to verify the entered values.
  5. Save your changes.

Use the Block List option to exclude specific ZIP codes from delivery.

Important: Geographic targeting requirements are cumulative. If Country, Region, DMA, or ZIP Code targeting is configured at both the Campaign and Line levels, all applicable restrictions must align. Conflicting geographic requirements can prevent delivery.

3. Deals and Inventory Availability

If your Campaign will target specific Deals:

  1. Navigate to Inventory to explore available Public or Negotiated Deals.
  2. Filter the Country to USA to identify inventory available in the United States.
  3. Confirm that the Deal’s Media Type is compatible with your Campaign’s Creatives and intended inventory.
  4. Associate the selected Deals with your Campaign or Line under Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals.

Available Deals and inventory offerings may change over time.

For additional targeting information, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

Canada Campaign Setup

This guide outlines recommended pacing settings and geographic targeting options for running national Canadian Campaigns on the Pontiac platform.

1. Campaign Setup and Pacing Time Zone

Create your Campaign and configure the standard Campaign settings based on your advertising goals.

Pacing Time Zone

The Campaign’s Pacing Time Zone determines the start and end of each day for Campaign pacing and delivery.

For example, if your Campaign End Date is January 31 and the Pacing Time Zone is Eastern Time, the Campaign will stop delivering at 11:59:59 PM Eastern Time on January 31.

Recommended Pacing Time Zone for National Canadian Campaigns

For national Canadian Campaigns using a single Pacing Time Zone, Eastern Time is recommended as a practical default because a large share of Canada’s population is concentrated in the Eastern Time Zone.

Canada spans six primary time zones:

  • Pacific Time (PT)
  • Mountain Time (MT)
  • Central Time (CT)
  • Eastern Time (ET)
  • Atlantic Time (AT)
  • Newfoundland Time (NT)

A single Pacing Time Zone will not perfectly align pacing with local hours across the entire country. The ideal selection may vary depending on your geographic targeting and delivery goals.

Primetime Pacing for National Canadian Campaigns

For national Campaigns using Primetime pacing, consider configuring a Custom pacing curve that combines Primetime hours across the targeted Canadian time zones.

For example, when Eastern Time is selected as the Campaign Pacing Time Zone, an 8 PM local Primetime peak corresponds to:

Targeted Time ZoneEquivalent Eastern Time
Pacific (PT)11 PM ET
Mountain (MT)10 PM ET
Central (CT)9 PM ET
Eastern (ET)8 PM ET
Atlantic (AT)7 PM ET
Newfoundland (NT)6:30 PM ET

Instead of concentrating delivery around a single Primetime peak, a Custom pacing curve can distribute higher pacing weights across a broader evening window, helping align delivery with Primetime hours throughout Canada.

For more precise local Primetime pacing, consider creating separate Campaigns by time zone with corresponding geographic targeting and Pacing Time Zone settings.

Note: Pacing Time Zone determines the Campaign’s pacing schedule and daily boundaries. Daypart Targeting is configured separately and can be used to restrict delivery to specific days and hours. Daylight saving time differences may also affect local time alignment in certain regions.

2. Canada Geographic Targeting

Pontiac supports geographic targeting in Canada at the Country, Region, and Postal Code levels.

Targeting can be configured at the Campaign or Line level. When targeting is applied at both levels, the requirements are evaluated together and must be compatible.

Country-Level Targeting

To target the entire country of Canada:

  1. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Location & Device > Geo.
  2. Select Countries and search for Canada.
  3. Click the green plus (+) button to add Canada to your targeting.
  4. Save your changes.

Region-Level Targeting

To target specific Canadian provinces or territories:

  1. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Location & Device > Geo.
  2. Select Regions from the dropdown.
  3. Search for Canada to view available Canadian Regions.
  4. Click the green plus (+) button to add your desired Regions.
  5. Save your changes.

Use the Block List option to exclude specific Regions from delivery.

Postal Code Targeting

Pontiac supports Canadian postal code targeting using the three-character Forward Sortation Area (FSA) format rather than the full six-character postal code.

For example, A0K is a valid Canadian FSA format consisting of a letter, number, and letter.

To target specific Canadian FSAs:

  1. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Location & Device > Zip Codes.
  2. Select Canada as the Country.
  3. Enter or paste your FSA list using the three-character alphanumeric format (e.g., A0K).
  4. Select Validate Zips to verify the entered values.
  5. Save your changes.

Use the Block List option to exclude specific FSAs from delivery.

Important: Geographic targeting requirements are cumulative. If Country, Region, or Postal Code targeting is configured at both the Campaign and Line levels, all applicable restrictions must align. Conflicting geographic requirements can prevent delivery.

3. Deals and Inventory Availability

If your Campaign will target specific Deals:

  1. Navigate to Inventory to explore available Public or Negotiated Deals.
  2. Filter the Country to Canada to identify inventory available in Canada.
  3. Confirm that the Deal’s Media Type is compatible with your Campaign’s Creatives and intended inventory.
  4. Associate the selected Deals with your Campaign or Line under Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals.

Note: The Deal inventory screenshot reflects availability as of October 20th, 2026. Current Deal offerings may differ.

For additional targeting information, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

Political Campaign Setup

Pontiac supports Political advertising relating to elections, ballot initiatives, and political candidates in the United States. Political Campaigns are subject to additional advertiser verification, disclosure requirements, creative approvals, and inventory restrictions.

Important: All Political Creatives must run under an Advertiser with the Political checkbox enabled and the required disclosure form completed. If a Creative is identified as Political during the Creative Audit and the Advertiser has not completed the required disclosures, the Advertiser and all associated Campaigns will be disabled until the required information has been provided.

Political Creatives are only eligible to serve through Deals that explicitly permit Political advertising.

1. Create Your Political Advertiser

Before uploading Political Creatives or launching a Campaign, ensure that your Advertiser is properly configured.

  1. Navigate to Advertisers.
  2. Create a new Advertiser.
  3. Enable the Political checkbox.
  4. Complete the required Political Advertising disclosure form directly in the Pontiac platform.
  5. Save your Advertiser.

The platform will guide you through a series of questions regarding the Political Advertiser and the organization purchasing the advertising.

Depending on the type of Political advertising and applicable state or local requirements, additional certification information may be required.

Important: All applicable disclosure information must be completed in the platform. If the required information is missing and a Creative is flagged as Political during the Creative Audit, the Advertiser and all associated Campaigns will be disabled until the disclosures are completed.

Political advertising must also comply with applicable federal, state, and local laws.

2. Upload Political Creatives

  1. Open your Political Advertiser.
  2. Upload the Creatives you intend to use for your Campaign.
  3. Allow up to 24 hours for the Pontiac Creative Audit to complete.

Creatives identified as Sensitive will display a green triangle in the Audit Status column.

  • Hover over the triangle to view the assigned Sensitive Category.
  • Open the Creative details to review its Sensitive Category and attributes displayed below the Creative preview.
  • Confirm that the Creative is correctly identified as Political.

Note: Political Creatives may require additional publisher or Exchange approval before they are eligible to serve.

For more information, see the Political Creatives Documentation.

3. Identify Deals That Permit Political Advertising

Political Creatives are only eligible to serve through Deals that explicitly allow Political advertising.

To identify compatible Deals:

  1. Navigate to Inventory > Deals.
  2. Locate the Permitted Sensitive Categories column.
  3. Identify Deals that list Political as a permitted category.
  4. Review the Publisher Approval Required field to determine whether additional approval is needed.
  5. Confirm that the Deal’s Media Type and Inventory Type are compatible with your Creative and intended Campaign setup.

Publisher Approval Requirements

Some publishers and supply partners require additional approval before Political Creatives can run through their Deals.

If the Publisher Approval Required field indicates that approval is necessary, contact the Help Center to request approval for the applicable Deal.

Important: A Deal must explicitly permit Political advertising and support the Creative’s media format. A Deal allowing Political advertising will not be eligible for a Political Banner Creative if it only supports CTV inventory.

4. Create Your Campaign and Lines

Under your Political Advertiser, create a Campaign and one or more Lines.

Political Inventory and Targeting Recommendations

When configuring your Campaign and Line targeting, consider the following recommendations:

  • Inventory Type: Select Web, In App, or Combined based on the inventory available through your targeted Deals.
  • Deals and Deal Lists: Target Deals that explicitly permit Political advertising. If using Deal Lists, confirm that the included Deals allow Political content and support the Creative format.
  • Exchanges: Ensure Exchange targeting aligns with the Exchanges associated with your selected Deals. When targeting exclusively through Deals, we recommend leaving Exchange targeting unselected to avoid unintentionally excluding eligible inventory.
  • Device Types: Select Device Types compatible with the intended Creative format and available Deal inventory.
  • Bid Price: Use the Deal floors as guidance and adjust based on bidding performance and inventory availability.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. Conflicting targeting requirements or settings that do not align with eligible Political inventory can prevent delivery.

All other Campaign and Line settings, including budgets, pacing, geographic targeting, and audiences, remain customizable based on your Campaign goals, subject to applicable platform, publisher, and legal restrictions.

For more information, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

5. Associate Political Creatives and Target Compatible Deals

Once your Campaign and Lines are created:

  1. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals.
  3. Select Deals that explicitly permit Political advertising.
  4. Confirm that any required publisher approvals have been completed.
  5. Associate your approved Political Creatives with the Campaign or Line.
  6. Save your changes.

6. Review Political Campaign Compatibility

Before launching, confirm that:

  • The Advertiser has the Political checkbox enabled.
  • The required Political Advertising disclosure form has been completed.
  • Political Creatives have completed the Pontiac Creative Audit.
  • The Creatives are correctly identified under the Political Sensitive Category.
  • Targeted Deals explicitly permit Political advertising.
  • The selected Deals support the Creatives’ Media Type and Inventory Type.
  • Any required publisher approvals have been completed.
  • Exchange and Device Type targeting align with the selected Deals.

Important: Political advertising may have limited eligible inventory even when correctly configured. Publisher, Exchange, and jurisdiction-specific restrictions can affect availability and delivery.

Once your Campaign is active, monitor delivery and bidding performance under the Performance tab at both the Campaign and Line levels.

For additional information, see the Political Creatives Documentation or contact the Help Center.

Sensitive Categories Setup

Pontiac supports select sensitive advertising categories. However, Creatives containing sensitive content are subject to additional restrictions, approvals, and inventory limitations.

Sensitive Campaigns must target Deals that explicitly permit the Creative’s sensitive category. Follow the recommendations below to ensure your Creatives and targeting settings are compatible with eligible inventory.

1. Upload and Identify Sensitive Creatives

  1. Navigate to your Advertiser, or create a new Advertiser if needed.
  2. Upload your Creatives.
  3. Allow up to 24 hours for the Pontiac Creative Audit to complete.

Creatives identified as Sensitive will display a green triangle in the Audit Status column.

  • Hover over the triangle to view the assigned Sensitive Category.
  • Click the Creative name to open its details and review the Sensitive Category and attributes displayed beneath the Creative preview.

Supported Sensitive Categories

  • Political
  • Gambling
  • Religion
  • Pharma
  • Liquor
  • Beer & Wine
  • Cannabis
  • CBD
  • Tobacco
  • Firearms & Weapons
  • Lawyer Advertising

For additional information about Sensitive Creative identification and approval requirements, see the Sensitive Creatives Documentation.

2. Identify Deals That Permit Sensitive Categories

Sensitive Creatives are only eligible to serve through Deals that explicitly allow their assigned Sensitive Category.

To identify compatible Deals:

  1. Navigate to Inventory > Deals.
  2. Locate the Permitted Sensitive Categories column.
  3. Identify Deals that explicitly permit the category assigned to your Creative.
  4. Confirm that the Deal’s Media Type and Inventory Type are compatible with your Creative and intended Campaign setup.

Important: A Deal must permit the Creative’s Sensitive Category and support its media format. For example, a Deal permitting Political advertising will not be eligible for a Political Banner Creative if the Deal only supports CTV inventory.

Available Sensitive Category permissions may vary by publisher, Exchange, and Deal.

3. Create Your Campaign and Lines

Under your Advertiser, create a Campaign and one or more Lines.

Sensitive Inventory and Targeting Recommendations

When configuring your Campaign and Line targeting, consider the following recommendations:

  • Inventory Type: Select Web, In App, or Combined based on the inventory available through your targeted Deals. Ensure the selected Inventory Type aligns with the Deal’s supported inventory environment.
  • Deals and Deal Lists: Target Deals that explicitly permit your Creative’s Sensitive Category. If using Deal Lists, confirm that the included Deals support the applicable Sensitive Category and Creative format.
  • Exchanges: Ensure Exchange targeting includes the Exchanges associated with your selected Deals. When targeting exclusively through Deals, we recommend leaving Exchange targeting unselected to avoid unintentionally excluding eligible inventory.
  • Device Types: Select Device Types compatible with the intended Creative format and available Deal inventory.
  • Bid Price: Use the Deal floors as guidance and consider starting approximately 40–50% above the floor, adjusting based on bidding performance and delivery.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. Conflicting targeting requirements or settings that do not align with the eligible Sensitive Category Deals can prevent delivery.

All other Campaign and Line settings, including budgets, pacing, geographic targeting, and audiences, remain customizable based on your Campaign goals. Keep in mind that additional targeting restrictions may further limit the already restricted inventory available for Sensitive Categories.

For more information, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

4. Associate Sensitive Creatives and Target Compatible Deals

Once your Campaign and Lines are created:

  1. Open your Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals.
  3. Select the Deals that explicitly permit the Sensitive Category assigned to your Creatives.
  4. Confirm that the selected Deals support the Creative’s Media Type and intended Inventory Type.
  5. Associate your approved Sensitive Creatives with the Campaign or Line.
  6. Save your changes.

Note: If your Campaign or Line contains Creatives assigned to different Sensitive Categories, confirm that the targeted Deals permit all applicable categories. Consider separating Creatives into different Lines when their eligible inventory differs.

5. Review Sensitive Campaign Compatibility

Before launching, confirm that:

  • Your Sensitive Creatives have completed the Pontiac Creative Audit.
  • The assigned Sensitive Categories have been reviewed.
  • Your targeted Deals explicitly permit the associated Sensitive Categories.
  • The Deals support the Media Type and Inventory Type of your Creatives.
  • Exchange and Device Type targeting align with the selected Deals.
  • Any additional publisher or Exchange approvals have been completed.

Important: Sensitive Creatives may have limited eligible inventory even when properly configured. Publishers and Exchanges may apply additional restrictions or approval requirements.

Once your Campaign is active, monitor delivery and bidding performance under the Performance tab at both the Campaign and Line levels.

For additional information about Sensitive Creative requirements and available inventory, refer to the Sensitive Creatives Documentation or contact the Help Center.

Programmatic Guaranteed (PG) Setup

Programmatic Guaranteed (PG) Campaigns allow advertisers to purchase a guaranteed volume of impressions directly from a publisher at a fixed CPM through a prearranged Deal.

Unlike standard Programmatic Marketplace (PMP) Deals, PG Deals do not participate in a competitive auction. The advertiser agrees to purchase the impressions delivered through the Deal according to the terms established with the publisher.

Important PG Considerations:

  • Publisher-Controlled Delivery: Budgets, flight dates, and delivery commitments must be configured with the publisher. Pontiac’s Campaign and Line budgets and flight dates are used for monitoring and pacing visibility only and are not enforced by the bidder.
  • Supply-Side Targeting: All targeting requirements must be applied by the publisher or SSP when configuring the PG Deal. Standard Pontiac targeting restrictions are not available for PG Campaigns.
  • One Deal per Line: Each PG Line must target exactly one Programmatic Guaranteed Deal.
  • PG Campaign Setting: The Programmatic Guaranteed checkbox must be enabled at the Campaign level.

1. Import Your Programmatic Guaranteed Deal

Before setting up your PG Campaign, ensure that the publisher has created the Deal and that it is available in Pontiac.

  1. Coordinate with your publisher or SSP to establish the PG Deal, including the fixed CPM, budget, flight dates, targeting, and guaranteed impression volume.
  2. Navigate to Inventory > Import Deal.
  3. Import the Programmatic Guaranteed Deal using the information provided by the publisher.
  4. Once the Deal becomes available, it can be associated with your PG Line.

Note: We recommend importing the PG Deal before it begins appearing in Pontiac’s database to help avoid launch delays.

For detailed instructions, see the Import Deal Documentation.

2. Create Your PG Campaign

Under your Advertiser, create a new Campaign.

  1. Configure the Campaign’s standard setup fields.
  2. Enable the Programmatic Guaranteed checkbox.
  3. Enter the Campaign’s Budget Type, Budget, and Flight Dates for monitoring and pacing visibility.
  4. Optionally, enable Manage Creatives and Manage Pixels if you want to associate the same Creatives or Pixels across all Lines.
  5. Save your Campaign.

Important: Enabling Programmatic Guaranteed restricts Campaign and Line targeting and capabilities to respect the publisher’s PG Deal configuration.

The Budget Type, Budget, and Flight Dates entered in Pontiac are for monitoring purposes only. They do not control or limit actual PG delivery. The publisher must enforce the agreed budget and flight dates on the supply side.

3. Create Your PG Line

Under your PG Campaign, create a Line.

  1. Configure the Line’s setup fields.
  2. Enter the Line’s Budget Type, Budget, and Flight Dates for monitoring and pacing visibility.
  3. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Deals.
  4. Select the Programmatic Guaranteed Deal associated with the Line.
  5. If Creatives and Pixels are not managed at the Campaign level, associate them directly with the Line.
  6. Save your Line.

PG Line Requirements:

  • Each Line must target exactly one PG Deal.
  • Only Programmatic Guaranteed Deals will be available for selection in the Deals targeting window.
  • Standard targeting restrictions are not configurable because eligibility is determined by the publisher’s Deal setup.
  • Line budgets and flight dates are used for monitoring only and are not enforced by the bidder.

If you need to target multiple PG Deals, create a separate Line for each Deal.

4. Review Your PG Campaign Setup

Before launching, confirm that:

  • The PG Deal has been created by the publisher and imported into Pontiac.
  • The publisher has configured the agreed budget, flight dates, CPM, guaranteed volume, and targeting requirements.
  • The Programmatic Guaranteed checkbox is enabled at the Campaign level.
  • Each PG Line targets exactly one PG Deal.
  • Appropriate Creatives are associated at the Campaign or Line level.
  • Budget and Flight Date values in Pontiac align with the publisher’s agreed terms for accurate monitoring.

Important: Pontiac does not enforce Campaign or Line budgets, flight dates, or standard targeting restrictions for PG Campaigns. Confirm all delivery requirements directly with the publisher before launch.

Once your Campaign is active, monitor delivery and pacing progress in Pontiac to compare actual delivery against the agreed campaign goals.

For assistance with PG Deal imports, setup, or delivery, contact your Account Manager or the Help Center.

Index and Microsoft Curation Setup

Pontiac’s Curation feature allows advertisers to automatically create curated Deals through Index Exchange and Microsoft based on a Line’s targeting settings.

When enabled, Pontiac builds a curated marketplace Deal in the selected external platform that reflects the Line’s targeting criteria and automatically associates the generated Deal with the Line. This can help increase available inventory and improve delivery scale.

Curation supports Display and Video Campaigns, with the following requirements:

  • All Creatives associated with a Line must be of the same media type: Display or Video.
  • Exchange targeting must include Index Exchange and/or Microsoft.
  • Geographic targeting must be more granular than Regions, or an eligible Audience must be attached that can be pushed to the curation platform.

All other Campaign and Line settings, including budgets, bidding, pacing, and additional targeting, remain customizable based on your Campaign goals.

1. Upload Creatives

  1. Navigate to your Advertiser, or create a new Advertiser if needed.
  2. Upload your Display or Video Creatives.
  3. Allow up to 24 hours for the Pontiac Creative Audit to complete.

Important: Each Line must contain Creatives from only one media type. Lines combining Display and Video Creatives are not eligible for Curation.

Note: Index Exchange and Microsoft require additional creative approval beyond Pontiac’s Creative Audit, which may take up to an additional 48 hours.

2. Create Your Campaign and Lines

Under your Advertiser, create a Campaign and one or more Lines.

Curation Inventory and Targeting Recommendations

When configuring your Campaign and Line targeting, consider the following recommendations:

  • Inventory Type: Select Web, In App, or Combined based on your intended inventory and creative format.
    • Display: We recommend Web or Combined for the best scale, as In App Banner inventory can be more limited.
    • Video: For CTV inventory, select In App. For OLV inventory, select Web or Combined, with Combined recommended when broader video scale is the priority.
  • Exchanges: Target Index Exchange and/or Microsoft, depending on which Curation option you intend to enable.
  • Creatives: Associate only Display or only Video Creatives with each Line. Mixing media types on the same Line will prevent Curation from being enabled successfully.
  • Geographic and Audience Targeting: Geographic targeting must be more granular than Regions, or an eligible Audience must be attached that can be pushed to the curation platform.
  • Additional Targeting: Ensure that Device Types, Sites, Apps, and other targeting settings align with the selected media type and intended inventory environment.

Important: Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together. Conflicting targeting requirements or settings that do not align with the intended Display or Video inventory may limit or prevent delivery.

For more information, see the Targeting Methods Documentation.

3. Enable the Curation Feature

The Curation feature is available under Inventory targeting at the Line level only.

How to Enable Curation

  1. Open your Line in Edit Mode.
  2. Navigate to Edit Targeting > Inventory > Curation.
  3. Ensure your Exchange targeting includes Index Exchange and/or Microsoft.
  4. Enable one or both of the following options:
    • Use Index Curated Deal: Automatically generates a curated Deal through Index Exchange.
    • Use Microsoft Curated Deal: Automatically generates a curated Deal through Microsoft.
  5. Configure any optional Curation settings.
  6. Save your Line.

When enabled, Pontiac automatically generates and associates the curated Deal with the corresponding Line.

4. Optional: Target CTR (Index Exchange)

When Use Index Curated Deal is enabled, you can optionally select Use Target CTR to filter inventory based on a desired Click-Through Rate (CTR).

Available Target CTR thresholds include:

  • Higher than 0%
  • 0.01% or Higher
  • 0.02% or Higher
  • 0.05% or Higher
  • 0.075% or Higher
  • 0.1% or Higher
  • 0.15% or Higher
  • 0.2% or Higher
  • 0.5% or Higher
  • 1% or Higher

Note: Higher Target CTR thresholds restrict eligible inventory and may limit delivery. Target CTR is not supported for CTV or Audio Campaigns.

5. Review Curation Requirements

Before launching, confirm that:

  • All Creatives associated with the Line are of the same media type (Display or Video).
  • The selected Inventory Type and Device Types align with the intended media format.
  • Exchange targeting includes Index Exchange and/or Microsoft.
  • Geographic targeting is more granular than Regions, or an eligible Audience is attached that can be pushed to the curation platform.
  • The appropriate Curation option is enabled at the Line level.
  • Any optional Target CTR settings align with your Campaign goals.
  • Creatives have passed the required Pontiac and exchange-specific approvals.

Important: If the Curation validation requirements are not met, the Line will fail to save and you will be redirected to the Line setup page to correct the configuration.

Once your Campaign is active, monitor delivery and bidding performance under the Performance tab at both the Campaign and Line levels.

For assistance with Curation setup or creative approvals, contact the Help Center.

Campaign Overview

A Campaign, or Insertion Order, organizes a group of Lines and strategies under a shared flight and budget. For example, a Pet Supply Advertiser may have separate Campaigns for dog food and cat food, with individual Lines under each Campaign used to divide budget across different inventory, geographic, audience, or other targeting strategies.

All Campaigns must contain at least one Line to deliver impressions. The Campaign can control shared settings and budgets for its Lines, but the Campaign itself does not execute bidding or spend.

Campaign-level targeting should be used for settings that apply universally across all Lines, while Line-level targeting should be used for strategy-specific execution. For example, a Campaign may broadly target the United States, while individual Lines target specific states, DMAs, ZIP codes, audiences, inventory types, or devices. If targeting settings conflict between levels, impressions may become ineligible and delivery may be limited.

Campaign Hierarchy

Campaigns are created under an Advertiser and serve as the parent structure for one or more Lines.

Seat
├── Audiences
└── Advertisers
    ├── Creatives
    ├── Pixels
    └── Campaigns
        ├── Flights (optional)
        └── Lines

Each Campaign belongs to a single Advertiser and contains one or more Lines, which control bidding and delivery. Campaigns can also optionally use Flights to divide the Campaign into separate date ranges with individual budgets and budget allocation settings. Flights are managed at the Campaign level and apply across the Campaign’s Lines.

Creatives and Pixels are created and managed at the Advertiser level and can be associated with applicable Campaigns or Lines. Audiences are managed at the Seat level and can also be associated with Campaigns or Lines for targeting or anti-targeting.

Depending on the Campaign Setup, certain settings can be managed centrally at the Campaign level and inherited by its Lines, or managed independently at the Line level for greater control.

Best Practices

  • Use Campaign-level targeting only for settings that should apply universally across all Lines.
  • Use Line-level targeting for strategy-specific targeting and optimization.
  • Apply targeting at one level whenever possible unless the intent is to intentionally narrow eligible inventory through intersection filtering.

Campaign Fields

  • Name: Give your Campaign a name.
  • Code: The code field is a space that can be used to associate an external ID to your campaigns. This code can be pulled in reporting and allows users to easily tie all campaigns to salesforce IDs, client IO numbers, billing codes etc.
  • Active: Must be checked for the campaign to run. Leave unchecked to pause the campaign.
  • Start Date: The date the campaign becomes eligible to begin delivering.
  • End Date: The final date the campaign is eligible to deliver.
  • Budget Type: Set the campaign budget as either a dollar amount or an impression goal.
  • Budget: Enter the campaign’s total dollar amount or impression goal based on the selected budget type.
  • Daily Budget Cap: This is an optional field to set a cap on total daily spend or impressions for the campaign.
    • If ‘Manage Budgets’ is checked and the pacing time zone is set at the campaign level, this time zone will be used to define the ‘day’ and apply the cap.
    • If ‘Manage Budgets’ is not applied to the campaign and pacing time zone is controlled by the lines, the seat time zone will be used here.
    • When the daily budget cap is reached for the campaign, all lines under the campaign will stop bidding regardless of line budget and pacing. It is not recommended to enable catchup pacing if a daily budget cap is set as this may cause erratic behavior.
  • Manage Budgets: When selected, all lines under the campaign will be modified to match the campaign’s start date, end date, and budget type. Budgets must be allocated below using budget allocation weights.
    • If ‘Manage Budgets’ is selected on the campaign, the budget entered at the campaign level will be controlling. The associated line items will inherit the same flight dates as the campaign and Line budgets will be applied as a weight. Changes to the campaign budget or flight dates will automatically update the Line flight dates & budgets accordingly.
      • When budget allocation weights are updated, the system does not immediately rewrite line budgets on save. Instead, the update is queued and processed asynchronously. Budget allocation weights only apply to the remaining campaign budget, not the full campaign budget.
      • When weights are updated, the remaining impressions are redistributed across active lines only, using the allocation weights. New line budget = current lifetime delivered + (remaining campaign budget × allocation weight)
    • If ‘Manage Budgets’ is not applied to a campaign, each line can have a dollar amount or impression budget assigned. Keep in mind your line budgets will not have to equal the campaign budget, so be sure to check the ‘Flight Checks’ section to verify that you have not over or under allocated budget to your lines. Updates to campaign budget and dates will not change associated line settings.
    • Auto Pace: Available when Manage Budgets is enabled. Automatically keeps budgets fluid between Lines and optimizes delivery to pace toward the Campaign goal.
      • Set target allocations to divide the total campaign budget between each line item, then allow the system to optimize according to available impressions and real time delivery to pace towards the over-arching campaign goal.
  • Enable Campaign Frequency: Apply frequency and recency caps across all lines under the campaign using the selected identifier.
  • Manage Creatives: Associate creatives at the campaign level so they are targeted by all lines under the campaign. For more information about creatives, see here: Campaign Creatives
  • Manage Dayparts: Control pacing and dayparting at the campaign level for all associated lines. For more information on setting pacing & dayparts, see here: Campaign Pacing & Daypartsrts
  • Manage Pixels: Associate conversion pixels at the campaign level for attribution across all lines under the campaign. For more information about pixels, see here: Campaign Pixels
  • Programmatic Guaranteed: Enable for campaigns using a Programmatic Guaranteed deal negotiated directly with a publisher at a fixed rate and committed impression volume. The campaign must target the associated PG deal. Targeting is controlled by the publisher, while the campaign budget and flight dates are used for monitoring only.
    • If you have a programmatic guaranteed deal created for a campaign, this will need to be set up in Pontiac with the ‘Programmatic Guaranteed’ check box applied at the campaign level. This will restrict the targeting and capabilities at both the campaign and line level to respect the parameters of the deal configured with the publisher. The budget and flight dates can be set on the campaign in Pontiac, but these fields are only used for monitoring pacing and campaign progress – they will not be respected by the bidder. Flight dates and budget should be configured on the deal by the publisher.
    • Documentation Links:
      • How to Import your PG deal: Import Deal
      • PG Campaign Setup Guide: Programmatic Guaranteed Setup Guide
  • Enable Flights: Used to split the campaign into flight date ranges with separate budgets.
    • Campaign Flights allow users to set different budgets for specific date ranges within the overall Campaign’s date range. This enables more granular control of pacing, spend, and scheduling, helping teams optimize delivery throughout a Campaign’s lifecycle.
      • If ‘Manage Budgets’ is enabled, in the Flights tab > Lines expandable section, users can filter by a selected flight and change the Budget Allocation Weight and Budget Multiplier by Line for each Flight.
      • If ‘Manage Budgets’ is not enabled, in the Flights tab > Lines expandable section, users can filter by a selected flight and change the Flight Budget manually based on impression or spend and Budget Multiplier by Line for each Flight.
      • Rollover Budgets: For each Campaign Flight, Rollover Budgets is an option to move any remaining budget over to another flight. There are two different rollover types:
        • Even: The remaining budget will rollover evenly across the other flights. For example, if remaining impressions are 100 and there are three more flights in the Campaign, then 33 would be rolled over to each flight.
        • Next Flight: The remaining budget will rollover to the next flight. In our above example, 100 impressions would rollover to the next flight and 0 impressions would get rollover to the last two flights.
  • Average Bid: The average of the bid values configured across all lines in the campaign. For lines using Basic Bid, the configured bid is included in the average. For lines using Bid at Floor or Advanced Bid Controls, the configured maximum bid is included. This value reflects campaign setup and may not match the actual bid submitted for each impression.
  • Pacing Time Zone: Determines the time zone used to define the start and end of each day for campaign pacing.
    • For example, if end date is 1/31 and pacing time zone is EST, the campaign will stop delivering at 11:59:59 pm EST on that date.

Targeting on a Campaign

Campaign-level settings should generally be used when the same configuration should apply across all Lines. Line-level settings should be used for strategy-specific execution.

For configuration instructions, continue to Create a Campaign and Campaign Setup.

Create a Campaign

Overview

Campaigns are created under an Advertiser and organize one or more Lines under shared Campaign settings. A Campaign must contain at least one Line to be eligible to deliver Impressions.

When creating a Campaign, first configure the core Campaign Setup, then apply any settings that should be shared across the Lines within the Campaign.

The general Campaign creation workflow is:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser.
  2. Select New Campaign.
  3. Configure the Campaign Setup.
  4. Configure any Campaign-level Targeting and Audiences that should apply to all Lines.
  5. Configure optional Campaign-level features such as Creatives, Pixels, Pacing & Dayparts, Flights, and Frequency & Recency, when enabled.
  6. Create at least one Line under the Campaign.
  7. Review the Campaign and Line configuration and select Submit to save.

Important: Campaign-level settings should generally be used only when they should apply to every Line within the Campaign. Campaign and Line targeting are evaluated together, so overlapping or conflicting settings can restrict eligible inventory and limit delivery.

Campaign Setup

The Campaign Setup section defines the Campaign’s overall dates, budget, pacing configuration, and which settings will be controlled at the Campaign level.

Basic Campaign Settings

  • Name: Enter a name used to identify the Campaign.
  • Code: Optional field that can be used to associate an external identifier with the Campaign for reporting.
  • Active: Determines whether the Campaign is Active or Inactive.
  • Start Date: The date the Campaign becomes eligible to begin delivering.
  • End Date: The final date the Campaign is eligible to deliver.
    • The Campaign Start Date and End Date define the overall Campaign flight. Individual Line dates must fall within the Campaign’s applicable date range.
  • Budget Type: Select whether the Campaign budget is based on Spend or Impressions.
  • Budget: Enter the Campaign’s total Spend or Impression budget based on the selected Budget Type.

Daily Budget Cap

Daily Budget Cap is an optional limit on the total amount of Spend or Impressions the Campaign can deliver within a pacing day. When the Daily Budget Cap is reached, all Lines under the Campaign stop bidding for the remainder of that day, regardless of their individual budgets or pacing.

The time zone used to define the day depends on the Campaign configuration:

  • When Campaign-level pacing controls the Lines, the Campaign’s Pacing Time Zone is used.
  • When pacing is controlled independently by the Lines, the Seat Time Zone is used.

Note: Catch-up ASAP is generally not recommended in combination with a restrictive Daily Budget Cap because Catch-up ASAP attempts to increase delivery when the Campaign is behind pace while the Daily Budget Cap limits how much can be delivered in a day.

Manage Budgets

Enable Manage Budgets when the Campaign should centrally control the Start Date, End Date, Budget Type, and budget allocation for its Lines.

When enabled:

  • Lines align to the Campaign’s Start Date and End Date.
  • Lines use the Campaign’s Budget Type.
  • Line budgets are managed using Budget Allocation Weights rather than independent lifetime budgets.
  • Changes to applicable Campaign budget and flight settings are reflected in the Line budget configuration.

Budget Allocation Weights determine how Campaign budget is distributed across Lines.

For example, for a $10,000 Campaign Budget:

  • Line A Weight = 2
  • Line B Weight = 1

The target allocation is:

  • Line A: $10,000 × 2/3 = $6,666.67
  • Line B: $10,000 × 1/3 = $3,333.33

If Manage Budgets is not enabled, Lines maintain their own individual budgets and flight settings. Line budgets do not need to equal the Campaign Budget, so Campaign and Line allocations should be reviewed to avoid over- or under-allocation.

Campaign Level Management Options

  • Auto Pace: Available with Manage Budgets to allow Campaign budget to remain fluid between Lines and optimize delivery toward the overall Campaign goal. Budget Allocation Weights therefore act as target allocations while Auto Pace is enabled.
  • Manage Creatives: Enable when the same Creative set should apply across the Campaign’s Lines. See Campaign Creatives for setup instructions.
  • Manage Dayparts: Enable when Pacing & Dayparts should be controlled at the Campaign level. See Campaign Pacing & Dayparts for detailed configuration.
  • Manage Pixels: Enable when the same Pixel configuration should apply across the Campaign’s Lines. See Campaign Pixels for setup instructions.
  • Enable Flights: Divide the Campaign into separate date ranges with individual Flight Budgets. See Campaign Flights for setup instructions.
  • Enable Campaign Frequency: Apply Frequency & Recency controls across Campaign Lines. See Campaign Frequency & Recency for setup instructions.

Pacing Timezone

Select the Pacing Time Zone used to define the start and end of each Campaign pacing day. The Pacing Time Zone affects Campaign-level functionality that depends on daily boundaries, including pacing curves, Campaign flight dates, and applicable Daypart behavior.

For geographic-specific recommendations, see the applicable Campaign Setup Guide.

Programmatic Guaranteed

Enable Programmatic Guaranteed only for Campaigns using a Programmatic Guaranteed Deal. When enabled, Pontiac restricts Campaign and Line configuration to support the terms established through the publisher’s PG Deal. Targeting is controlled on the supply side, and Campaign Budget and flight dates in Pontiac are used for monitoring rather than controlling delivery.

See the Programmatic Guaranteed Setup Guide for the complete workflow.

Campaign Targeting

Campaign-level Targeting applies shared targeting requirements across every Line in the Campaign. Use it only when the selected criteria should apply universally. Campaign and Line Targeting are evaluated together. An impression must satisfy the applicable criteria at both levels.

To configure Campaign Targeting:

  1. Create a new Campaign or open an existing Campaign.
  2. Select Edit.
  3. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  4. Select Edit Targeting.
  5. Configure the applicable targeting options.
  6. Select Save.
  7. Submit the Campaign when finished.

Campaign Targeting is organized into the following sections:

  • Inventory
    • Deals
    • Deal Lists
    • Exchanges
    • Sites
    • Site Lists
    • App Bundle
    • App Name
    • App Lists
  • Location & Device
    • Geo
    • Zip Codes
    • Device Types
    • Browser
    • Operating Systems
  • Content
    • Channel
    • Content ID
    • Genre
    • Network
    • Publisher
    • Series
    • Title
    • Multi Field
  • Streaming & Video
    • Livestream
    • OLV
  • Advanced
    • Custom Model
    • Privacy

See Targeting Methods for definitions, formatting requirements, configuration instructions, and best practices for all targeting options.

Campaign Audiences

Audiences can be associated at the Campaign level when the same Audience targeting should apply across all Lines within the Campaign.

Campaigns can use eligible:

  • Custom Audiences
  • Third Party Audiences
  • Contextual Audiences
  • ART Audiences
  • Audience Groups

Audiences are created and managed from the Audiences section at the Seat level. Once available, they can be associated with a Campaign for targeting or anti-targeting.

Use Campaign-level Audiences when the same Audience requirements should apply across all Lines in the Campaign. If different Lines require different Audience strategies, manage those Audiences at the Line level instead.

Campaign and Line Audience targeting are evaluated together. If Audiences are applied at both levels, review the combined configuration to make sure it does not unintentionally restrict eligible inventory.

For instructions on associating Audience Segments, configuring Include or Exclude behavior, Audience Groups, and Boolean Logic, see Associate Segments.

For information on creating and managing Audience types, see Audiences.

Campaign Creatives

Creatives can be managed at the Campaign level when the same Creative set should apply across all Lines within the Campaign.

When Manage Creatives is enabled in Campaign Setup, Creatives associated with the Campaign are inherited by its Lines.

Use Campaign-level Creative management when the same Creatives should be eligible across the full Campaign. If different Lines require different Creative sets, manage Creatives at the Line level instead.

Creatives must first be created under the Campaign’s Advertiser. Creatives cannot be uploaded or edited directly from the Campaign.

Associate a Creative to the Campaign

  1. Open the applicable Campaign.
  2. Select Edit.
  3. Confirm Manage Creatives is enabled or enable in Campaign Setup.
  4. Navigate to the Creatives section.
  5. Select Associate Creatives.
  6. Select the green plus sign (+) next to the applicable Creative or Creatives.
    • To remove an associated Creative, use the red minus sign (−).
  7. Review the associated Creatives and close the Associate Creatives window.
  8. Select Submit in the upper-right corner of the screen to save.

For information on uploading, editing, auditing, and managing Creatives, see the Creatives documentation.

Campaign Pixels

Pixels can be managed at the Campaign level when the same Pixel configuration should apply across all Lines within the Campaign.

When Manage Pixels is enabled in Campaign Setup, Pixels associated with the Campaign apply across its Lines.

Pixels must first be created under the Campaign’s Advertiser. Pixels cannot be created or edited directly from the Campaign.

Associate Pixels to the Campaign

  1. Open the applicable Campaign and select Edit.
  2. Confirm Manage Pixels is enabled in Campaign Setup.
  3. Navigate to the Pixels section.
  4. Select Associate Pixel.
  5. Select the green plus sign (+) next to the applicable Pixel or Pixels.
    • To remove an associated Pixel, use the red minus sign (−).
  6. Review the associated Pixels and close the Associate Pixel window.
  7. Select Submit to save the Campaign.

For information on creating, editing, and managing Pixels, see the Pixels documentation.

Campaign Pacing & Dayparts

Use Campaign-level Pacing & Dayparts when the same pacing strategy and Daypart schedule should apply across all Lines within the Campaign.

When Manage Dayparts is enabled in Campaign Setup, the Campaign controls Pacing & Dayparts for its Lines.

To configure Campaign-level Pacing & Dayparts:

  1. Open the applicable Campaign and select Edit.
  2. Confirm Manage Dayparts is enabled in Campaign Setup.
  3. Navigate to the Pacing & Dayparts section.
  4. Configure the applicable pacing and Daypart settings.
  5. Select Submit to save the Campaign.

Campaign-level settings can include:

  • Daily Pacing Type
  • Primetime or Custom pacing curves
  • Apply Curve to All Days
  • Catch-up ASAP
  • Daypart in User Time Zone
  • Dayparts

These settings are evaluated using the Campaign’s selected Pacing Time Zone, except when Daypart in User Time Zone is enabled for Daypart eligibility.

For detailed definitions, setup instructions, pacing behavior, and US national best practices, see Pacing & Dayparts.

If different Lines require different pacing strategies or Daypart schedules, leave Manage Dayparts disabled and configure Pacing & Dayparts at the Line level instead.

Campaign Flights

Use Campaign Flights when the Campaign needs to be divided into separate date ranges with individual budgets.

When Enable Flights is selected in Campaign Setup, the Campaign can use multiple Flight periods within its overall Start Date and End Date.

Flights can be used to:

  • Divide budget across scheduled periods such as weeks, months, or promotions.
  • Use different budget allocations across Lines by Flight.
  • Pause delivery between Flight periods.
  • Roll unused budget into future Flights.
  • Monitor pacing for an individual Flight in addition to the overall Campaign.

Important: Once Flights are enabled for a Campaign, they cannot be disabled.

To begin using Flights:

  1. Open the applicable Campaign and select Edit.
  2. In Campaign Setup, select Enable Flights.
  3. Configure the initial Flight date ranges and Campaign-level Flight Budgets.
  4. Select Submit to save the Campaign.
  5. After the Flights are saved, use the Flights tab to manage Flights and configure Flight-specific Line settings.

For detailed setup and management instructions, see Campaign Flights, including:

  • Enable Flights
  • Flights Tab
  • Manage Flights
  • Configure Flight Line Settings
  • Flight Pacing and Monitoring

Campaign Frequency & Recency

Use Campaign-level Frequency & Recency when the same Frequency and Recency controls should apply across all Lines within the Campaign.

When Enable Campaign Frequency is selected in Campaign Setup, the Frequency & Recency section becomes available for the Campaign.

To configure Campaign-level Frequency & Recency:

  1. Open the applicable Campaign and select Edit.
  2. Confirm Enable Campaign Frequency is enabled in Campaign Setup.
  3. Navigate to the Frequency & Recency section.
  4. Configure the applicable settings.
  5. Select Submit to save the Campaign.

For definitions and configuration guidance for Frequency, Recency, Time Frame Days, and Cap By, see Frequency & Recency.

Campaign Flights

Overview

Campaign Flights allow a Campaign to be divided into separate date ranges with individual budgets. Flights provide more granular control over when Campaign budget is available and how that budget is distributed across Lines throughout the Campaign.

Flights are optional and are enabled at the Campaign level. When Flights are not enabled, the Campaign and its Lines operate against their standard Campaign and Line date and budget settings. When Flights are enabled, the Campaign can contain multiple Flight periods within the overall Campaign date range. Pasted text

A single Line can participate across multiple Flights. Depending on whether Manage Budgets is enabled, each Flight can use different Line Budget Allocation Weights or manually configured Line Flight Budgets.

Flights are useful for Campaigns that need to:

  • Divide budget by week, month, promotion, or other scheduled period.
  • Allocate different amounts of budget to different Lines throughout the Campaign.
  • Pause delivery between scheduled periods.
  • Roll unused budget into future Flights.
  • Monitor pacing against a specific Flight in addition to the overall Campaign.

Flight Hierarchy

Flights are managed within the Campaign but do not change the relationship between the Campaign and its Lines.

Seat
├── Audiences
└── Advertisers
    ├── Creatives
    ├── Pixels
    └── Campaigns
        ├── Flights (optional)
        └── Lines

Each Campaign belongs to a single Advertiser and contains one or more Lines, which control bidding and delivery. Campaigns can optionally use Flights to divide the Campaign into separate date ranges with individual budgets and Line allocation settings.

When Flights are enabled, the same Line can participate across multiple Flights with different budget allocations without changing the Campaign-to-Line hierarchy.

Flights Tab

After Flights have been enabled and the Campaign has been saved, the Flights tab provides Campaign- and Flight-level delivery metrics, pacing information, and access to the individual Flights and Lines sections.

The Flights tab includes:

  • Metric tiles for Report Date, Impressions, Total Cost, Revenue, and Total Cost CPM and a Reporting Interval
  • Campaign Lifetime Pacing
  • Flight Pacing
  • A Flights section
  • A Lines section

Metric Tiles and Reporting Interval

The Reporting Interval determines the date range used for the metric tiles displayed at the top of the Flights tab.

Changing the Reporting Interval updates the displayed Report Date, Impressions, Total Cost, Revenue, and Total Cost CPM for the selected period.

Metrics are displayed using the Campaign’s selected Pacing Time Zone.

The metric tiles provide a summary of Campaign performance for the selected Reporting Interval.

  • Report Date: The date or date range represented by the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Impressions: The total number of impressions delivered by the Campaign during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Total Cost: The total Campaign spend during the selected Reporting Interval, including media costs and any applicable margins or fees.
  • Revenue: The total Campaign Revenue for the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Total Cost CPM: The Campaign’s Total Cost per thousand impressions, calculated as:Total Cost CPM = (Total Cost / Impressions) × 1,000

The metric tiles reflect Campaign performance for the selected Reporting Interval and are separate from the Flight-specific budgets and pacing displayed elsewhere on the tab.

Campaign Lifetime and Flight Pacing

The top of the Flights tab provides pacing information for both the overall Campaign and the applicable Flight.

Campaign Lifetime Pacing

Lifetime Pacing shows how the Campaign is pacing against its overall Campaign Budget and full Campaign date range.

Lifetime Pacing considers the Campaign’s:

  • Start Date
  • End Date
  • Campaign Budget
  • Delivery to date

Use Lifetime Pacing to evaluate whether the Campaign as a whole is ahead of, behind, or aligned with its expected delivery pace.

Flight Pacing

Flight Pacing shows how the Campaign is pacing against the applicable Flight’s Budget and date range.

Flight Pacing considers the Flight’s:

  • Start Date
  • End Date
  • Flight Budget
  • Delivery attributed to that Flight

Because Lifetime Pacing evaluates the full Campaign while Flight Pacing evaluates an individual Flight period, the two pacing values may differ.

For example, a Campaign may be on pace across its full lifetime while the current Flight is temporarily underpacing, or the current Flight may be pacing well even if earlier Flights caused the Campaign’s Lifetime Pacing to fall behind.

Flights Section

The Flights section displays each configured Flight and its Campaign-level Flight settings.

The Flights table includes:

  • Status: Indicates whether the Flight is active and highlights configuration issues that may prevent the Flight from serving.
    • When a potential delivery issue is detected, a warning icon is displayed. Hover over the icon to view the applicable message(s).
    • The warning begins with: This flight may not serve because:
    • Possible warnings include:
      • No available Line Flight Budget: An active Line has no available budget for the Flight.
        This flight’s line budget is 0 for: {line_name} ({line_id})
      • Budget Allocation Weight is 0: An active Line has a Budget Allocation Weight of 0 for the Flight.
        This flight’s line Budget Allocation Weight is 0 for: {line_name} ({line_id})
      • Budget Multiplier is 0: An active Line has a Budget Multiplier of 0 for the Flight.
        This flight’s line Budget Multiplier is 0 for: {line_name} ({line_id})
      • No active Lines: No active Lines are associated with the Flight.
        No active lines are associated with this flight.
      • No active Creatives: No active Creatives are associated with the Flight.
        No active creatives are associated with this flight.
    • Only applicable warnings are displayed. If multiple issues apply, each message appears on a separate line.
  • Flight ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Flight.
  • Start Date: The first date of the Flight.
  • End Date: The final date of the Flight.
  • Budget Type: Indicates whether the Flight Budget is based on Spend or Impressions. The Budget Type follows the Campaign Budget Type.
  • Budget: The total Spend or Impression Budget assigned to the Flight.
  • Remaining Spend / Remaining Impressions: The amount of the Flight Budget that remains available.
  • Flight Pacing: The Flight’s delivery progress relative to its dates and Budget.
  • Rollover Budgets: Indicates whether unused Flight Budget is configured to move into future Flights.
  • Rollover Type: Indicates how unused Budget is redistributed when Rollover Budgets is enabled.

Users can review, add, and edit Flights from this section.

See Manage Flights for instructions on adding, editing, activating, and configuring Flight Budgets and rollover settings..

Lines Section

The Lines section displays Line-level configuration and delivery information for the Flight selected in the Flight dropdown.

Use the Flight dropdown to move between Flights and review the Line configuration and performance for each period.

Depending on the Campaign’s Manage Budgets setting, the editable Line settings differ:

  • Manage Budgets enabled: Budget Allocation Weight and Budget Multiplier
  • Manage Budgets disabled: Flight Budget and Budget Multiplier

The Lines table may include:

  • Active: Indicates whether the Line is active for the selected Flight.
  • ID: The Line ID.
  • Name: The Line Name.
  • Bid: The Line’s configured Bid Price.
  • Allocation: The Line’s actual percentage of the selected Flight Budget based on delivery to date. This value may change over time as spend and budget allocation rates adjust throughout the Flight.
  • Budget Allocation Weight: The configured weight used to influence how the Flight Budget is distributed across Lines when Manage Budgets is enabled.
  • Daily Budget: The Line’s applicable daily budget for the selected Flight.
  • Total Flight Budget: The total Budget assigned to the Line for the selected Flight.
  • Pacing: The Line’s delivery progress against its selected Flight Budget and dates.
  • Impressions: Impressions delivered by the Line during the selected Flight.
  • Total Cost: Total Cost attributed to the Line during the selected Flight.
  • IP Conversions: IP-based conversions attributed to the Line during the selected Flight.

See Configure Flight Line Settings for instructions on configuring Budget Allocation Weights, Flight Budgets, Budget Multipliers, and settings that can be carried into future Flights.

Enable Flights

Flights must be enabled at the Campaign level before Flight-specific dates, budgets, pacing, and Line allocations can be configured.

Flights can be used with or without Manage Budgets enabled. However, enabling Manage Budgets is recommended when using Flights, as it allows Campaign Flight Budgets to be distributed across Lines using Budget Allocation Weights rather than requiring individual Line Flight Budgets to be maintained manually.

Important: Once Flights are enabled for a Campaign, they cannot be disabled. Review the Campaign setup before enabling Flights.

When Flights are first enabled, configure the Flight date ranges and Campaign-level Flight Budgets, then Submit the Campaign. Flight-specific Line settings cannot be configured until the Flights have been saved.

After the Campaign is saved, Line settings can be configured for each individual Flight under Flights > Lines. The available settings depend on whether Manage Budgets is enabled:

  • Manage Budgets enabled: Configure each Line’s Budget Allocation Weight and Budget Multiplier by Flight.
  • Manage Budgets disabled: Configure each Line’s Flight Budget and Budget Multiplier by Flight.

See Flight Line Settings for detailed instructions on configuring Line budgets, allocation weights, Budget Multipliers, and applying settings to future Flights.

Flight Date Coverage

Flights do not have to cover every date within the Campaign’s overall Start Date and End Date. However, the Campaign can only spend during dates that are covered by an active Flight.

If the configured Flights do not extend through the Campaign End Date, Pontiac displays a warning confirming that the Campaign will stop spending when the final Flight ends.

For example, if the Campaign End Date is 7/1/2027 but the last Flight ends on 3/31/2027, the Campaign will stop spending after 3/31/2027 unless another Flight is added.

Gaps between Flights are also allowed and can be used intentionally to pause delivery during specific periods.

Enable Flights on a New Campaign

To enable Flights while creating a new Campaign:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser and select New Campaign.
  2. Configure the Campaign Setup, including the Campaign Start Date, End Date, Budget Type, and Budget.
  3. Configure Manage Budgets as desired.
  4. Select Enable Flights.
  5. The Flights section will become available below the Campaign Setup.
  6. Configure the Flight date ranges, Flight Budgets, and applicable rollover settings.
  7. Continue setting up the Campaign and select Submit when finished.

After the Campaign is saved, return to Flights > Lines to configure the Line settings for each individual Flight. See Flight Line Settings for additional instructions.

Enable Flights on an Existing Campaign

Flights can also be enabled for an existing Campaign. When Flights are enabled, the first Flight initially inherits the Campaign’s current Start Date and End Date.

Review the inherited Flight before saving and adjust the Flight structure based on the Campaign Start Date.

Scenario 1: The Campaign Start Date Is in the Past

If the Campaign Start Date has already passed, the first Flight should account for the Campaign period that has already elapsed.

For example, if the Campaign:

  • Started on 7/22/2026
  • Delivered media through 10/7/2026
  • Should begin quarterly Flights on 10/8/2026
  • Ends on 7/1/2027

The first Flight should cover 7/22/2026–10/7/2026. Additional Flights can then begin on 10/8/2026 and continue through the Campaign End Date of 7/1/2027.

This preserves the historical Campaign period before the new Flight schedule begins.

Scenario 2: The Campaign Start Date Is in the Future

If the Campaign has not started yet, there is no historical Campaign period to account for.

For example, a Campaign running from 10/8/2026–7/1/2027 could be divided into quarterly Flights beginning on 10/8/2026, without creating a separate historical Flight.

To enable Flights on an existing Campaign:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Campaign.
  2. Select Edit.
  3. In Campaign Setup, review the Campaign dates, Budget, and Manage Budgets setting.
  4. Select Enable Flights.
  5. Review the inherited first Flight.
  6. Adjust the first Flight and add additional Flights based on whether the Campaign Start Date is in the past or future.
  7. Configure the Campaign-level Flight Budgets and applicable rollover settings.
  8. Select Submit.

After the Campaign is saved, return to Flights > Lines to configure the Line-level settings for each Flight. See Flight Line Settings for additional instructions.

Configure Flight Line Settings

After Flights have been enabled and saved, Flight-specific Line settings can be managed from the Campaign’s Flights > Lines section.

Use the Flight dropdown to select the Flight you want to review or configure. Line settings can vary between Flights, allowing the same Line to have different budget allocations or Budget Multipliers throughout the Campaign.

The available settings depend on whether Manage Budgets is enabled:

  • Manage Budgets enabled: Configure Budget Allocation Weight and Budget Multiplier by Flight.
  • Manage Budgets disabled: Configure Flight Budget and Budget Multiplier by Flight.

Manage Budgets Enabled

When Manage Budgets is enabled, the Campaign Flight Budget is distributed across Lines using Budget Allocation Weights.

To configure Line settings for a Flight:

  1. Open the applicable Campaign.
  2. Navigate to the Flights tab.
  3. Expand the Lines section.
  4. Select Edit.
  5. Use the Flight dropdown to select the Flight you want to configure.
  6. Update the Budget Allocation Weight for each Line.
  7. Update the Budget Multiplier, if needed.
  8. Select Save.

Budget Allocation Weights determine each Line’s target share of the Flight Budget and can be configured differently for each Flight.

For example, if a Flight has a Budget of 10,000 impressions and:

  • Line A has a Budget Allocation Weight of 2
  • Line B has a Budget Allocation Weight of 1

the target allocation would be approximately:

  • Line A: 6,667 impressions
  • Line B: 3,333 impressions

Manage Budgets Disabled

When Manage Budgets is not enabled, each Line’s budget is configured independently for each Flight.

The main Campaign Lines section displays each Line’s Total Budget across the full Campaign. This is separate from the Line’s individual Flight Budget.

For example, if a Flight has a Budget of 33 impressions and the goal is to divide the budget approximately evenly across two Lines, each Line could be assigned a Flight Budget of 16 impressions, leaving 1 impression unallocated.

To configure individual Line Flight Budgets:

  1. Open the applicable Campaign.
  2. Navigate to the Flights tab.
  3. Expand the Lines section.
  4. Select Edit.
  5. Use the Flight dropdown to select the Flight you want to configure.
  6. Update the Flight Budget for each Line.
  7. Update the Budget Multiplier, if needed.
  8. Select Save.

The Line Flight Budget follows the Campaign Budget Type:

  • Spend: Enter the Flight Budget as a dollar amount.
  • Impressions: Enter the Flight Budget as an impression amount.

Because Line Flight Budgets are configured independently, review the combined Line Flight Budgets against the Campaign Flight Budget to avoid over- or under-allocation.

Configure Different Settings by Flight

Use the Flight dropdown in Flights > Lines to move between Flights and configure different Line settings for each period.

For example, the same Line could have:

  • Flight 1: A larger Budget Allocation Weight or Flight Budget.
  • Flight 2: A smaller allocation.
  • Flight 3: A different Budget Multiplier.

This allows Line-level budget strategy to change throughout the Campaign without creating separate Campaigns or Lines.

Apply Settings to Future Flights

When editing Flight Line settings, users can apply selected settings to future Flights:

  • Apply weights to all future flights: Applies the configured Budget Allocation Weights to future Flights.
    • Available only when Manage Budgets is enabled.
  • Apply budget multiplier to all future flights: Applies the configured Budget Multipliers to future Flights.

Use these options when the same Line configuration should continue across later Flights without updating each Flight individually.

Best Practices

  • Confirm the selected Flight before making changes.
  • When Manage Budgets is enabled, review Budget Allocation Weights across all active Lines within each Flight.
  • When Manage Budgets is disabled, compare the combined Line Flight Budgets with the Campaign Flight Budget.
  • Use the future Flight options when the same settings should carry forward.
  • Review Flight Line settings whenever a new Flight is added or a Flight Budget is significantly changed.

Flight Pacing and Monitoring

Use Campaign Lifetime Pacing, Flight Pacing, and the Flights > Lines section together to monitor delivery and identify where pacing issues are occurring.

For definitions of the metrics and fields displayed on the Flights tab, see Flights Tab.

Compare Campaign Lifetime and Flight Pacing

Campaign Lifetime Pacing and Flight Pacing may differ because they evaluate delivery against different budgets and date ranges.

Review both when monitoring Campaign performance:

  • Campaign Lifetime Pacing shows progress toward the overall Campaign goal.
  • Flight Pacing shows progress within the applicable Flight.

For example, the current Flight may be pacing normally while Campaign Lifetime Pacing remains behind because an earlier Flight underdelivered.

Conversely, the overall Campaign may be on pace while the current Flight is temporarily behind.

Monitor Line Pacing

If Flight Pacing is above or below the desired range, use Flights > Lines to identify which Lines are contributing to the difference.

Use the Flight dropdown to select the applicable Flight and review each Line’s:

  • Pacing
  • Allocation
  • Budget Allocation Weight or Flight Budget
  • Budget Multiplier
  • Impressions
  • Total Cost

This helps determine whether the pacing issue affects the full Flight or is concentrated on specific Lines.

Budget Multiplier

The Budget Multiplier can be configured separately for each Line and Flight to adjust how aggressively the Line can spend against its available budget.

In general:

  • Increasing the Budget Multiplier allows more aggressive delivery.
  • Decreasing the Budget Multiplier restricts delivery.
  • A Budget Multiplier of 0 will prevent the Line from serving during the Flight.

Use Budget Multiplier when a Line needs to spend faster or slower without changing its underlying Budget Allocation Weight or Flight Budget.

If the same Budget Multiplier should apply to later Flights, select Apply budget multiplier to all future flights.

Using Budget Multiplier to Adjust Pacing

Before changing the Budget Multiplier, confirm that the Line has enough eligible inventory to support additional delivery.

If a Line is underpacing:

  • Review its available budget and pacing.
  • Confirm the Bid is competitive.
  • Confirm targeting and inventory are not overly restrictive.
  • Check for Flight Status warnings.
  • If delivery is primarily budget constrained, consider increasing the Budget Multiplier.

If a Line is delivering too quickly:

  • Review its Allocation or Flight Budget.
  • Review the current Budget Multiplier.
  • Consider lowering the Budget Multiplier to restrict delivery.

Continue monitoring pacing after making changes to confirm the adjustment has the intended effect.

Monitor After Budget or Flight Changes

Recheck pacing whenever significant Flight settings change, including:

  • Flight Budget changes
  • Budget Allocation Weight changes
  • Line Flight Budget changes
  • Budget Multiplier changes
  • Budget rollover
  • New Flights being added

Changes to these settings can alter how quickly budget is expected to deliver during the remainder of the Flight.

Best Practices

  • Review Campaign Lifetime Pacing and Flight Pacing together.
  • Use Flights > Lines to investigate Flight-level pacing differences.
  • Confirm inventory and eligibility before increasing Budget Multiplier.
  • Make pacing adjustments at the Line level only when needed.
  • Continue monitoring after changes to confirm delivery responds as expected.

Manage Flights

Use the Flights section of the Campaign’s Flights tab to view, add, and edit individual Flights.

Each Flight defines a specific date range and Budget within the Campaign’s overall Start Date and End Date. The Flight Budget Type is inherited from the Campaign.

View Flights

The Flights table displays each configured Flight along with its dates, Budget, remaining Budget, pacing, and rollover settings.

Use this section to review the Campaign’s Flight schedule and confirm that each Flight has the intended dates, Budget, and status.

For definitions of the fields displayed in the Flights table, see Flights Tab.

Add a Flight

To add a new Flight:

  1. Open the applicable Campaign.
  2. Navigate to the Flights tab.
  3. In the Flights section, select Edit.
  4. Select Add Flight.
  5. Configure the Flight:
    • Active: Determines whether the Flight is active.
    • Start Date: The first date of the Flight.
    • End Date: The final date of the Flight.
    • Budget: Enter the Spend or Impression Budget for the Flight.
    • Rollover Budgets: Enable if unused Budget should move into future Flights.
    • Rollover Type: Select how unused Budget should be redistributed when rollover is enabled.
      • Even
      • Next Flight
  6. Select Save.

The Flight Budget Type is inherited from the Campaign:

  • Spend: Enter the Flight Budget as a dollar amount.
  • Impressions: Enter the Flight Budget as an impression amount.

Flight dates must fall within the Campaign’s overall Start Date and End Date.

Flights do not have to cover every date within the Campaign. Gaps between Flights are allowed and can be used intentionally to pause delivery. The Campaign can only spend during dates covered by an active Flight.

Edit a Flight

To edit an existing Flight:

  1. Open the applicable Campaign.
  2. Navigate to the Flights tab.
  3. In the Flights section, select Edit.
  4. Update the applicable Flight settings.
  5. Select Save.

The following Flight settings can be edited where applicable:

  • Delete future flights
  • Active Status
  • Start Date, if the Flight has not started
  • End Date, if the Flight has not ended
  • Flight Budget
  • Rollover Budgets
  • Rollover Type

Review the Flight schedule after making date or Budget changes to confirm that the Campaign still has the intended delivery coverage.

Active and Inactive Flights

The Active setting determines whether a Flight is eligible for delivery during its configured date range.

An inactive Flight will not allow Campaign delivery during that Flight period, even if the Campaign and its Lines are otherwise active.

The Flight Status indicator may also display warnings when required delivery inputs are missing or configured in a way that may prevent serving. See Flights Tab for Flight Status warning definitions.

Flight Budget

Each Flight has its own Budget within the Campaign.

The Flight Budget controls the amount of Campaign Budget available during that Flight period. How that Budget is distributed across Lines depends on the Campaign’s Manage Budgets setting:

  • Manage Budgets enabled: The Flight Budget is distributed across Lines using Budget Allocation Weights.
  • Manage Budgets disabled: Individual Line Flight Budgets are configured manually.

Flight-specific Line settings are configured separately under Flights > Lines after the Flights have been saved.

See Configure Flight Line Settings for detailed instructions.

Rollover Budgets

Rollover Budgets allows unused Budget from a Flight to move into future Flights.

Two Rollover Types are available:

  • Even: Distributes the remaining Budget evenly across the remaining Flights.
  • Next Flight: Moves the remaining Budget into the next scheduled Flight.

For example, if a Flight ends with 900 impressions remaining and three future Flights remain:

  • Even: Each remaining Flight receives an additional 300 impressions.
  • Next Flight: The next Flight receives the full additional 900 impressions.

Important: Once unused Budget has rolled over into future Flights, the rollover cannot be undone. Review the Flight Budget and Rollover Type before the Flight ends.

Rollover applies only when Rollover Budgets is enabled for the Flight.

Review future Flight Budgets after rollover occurs, particularly when Line allocations or Line Flight Budgets differ between Flights.

Best Practices

  • Keep all Flight dates within the Campaign Start Date and End Date.
  • Review the full Flight schedule after adding or editing Flights.
  • Use intentional gaps only when Campaign delivery should pause.
  • Confirm that each active Flight has sufficient Budget.
  • Review rollover settings before a Flight ends.
  • After changing a Flight Budget, review the associated Line settings under Flights > Lines to confirm the intended allocation.

Mange Campaigns

Manage Lines from a Campaign

Create a New Line

From the Campaign level, you can create a new Line from scratch or by using a Line template.

Refer to the following documentation for detailed instructions:

  • Create a Line
  • Create Line From Template

Edit a Line from the Campaign

You can make basic Line updates directly from the Campaign page.

  1. Navigate to the Lines section of the Campaign.
  2. Select Edit to enable editing for the Lines section.
  3. Update the applicable Line fields:
    • Active Status
    • Start Date
    • End Date
    • Total Budget
    • Bid Type: For details, see Line Setup for details on the following Bid Types.
      • Basic Bid
      • Bid at Floor Price
      • Advanced Bid Controls
    • Bid Price
    • Budget Multiplier
  4. Select Submit to save the changes.
    • Select Cancel to discard your changes.

The fields available when editing Lines from the Campaign page may differ from the fields available when editing the Campaign itself.

To make additional changes to a Line, select the Line name to open the Line level and refer to Edit a Line.

Clone a Campaign

Cloning a Campaign creates a new Campaign under the same Advertiser using the existing Campaign as the starting configuration.

To clone a Campaign:

  1. Navigate to the Campaign you want to clone.
  2. Select Clone in the upper-right corner.
  3. Enter a name for the new Campaign.
  4. Review and update the Campaign settings as needed.
  5. Select Submit to create the cloned Campaign.

Refer to Edit a Campaign for additional information about Campaign settings.

Edit a Campaign

To edit an existing Campaign:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser.
  2. Open the Campaigns section.
  3. Select the Campaign you want to edit.
  4. Select Edit in the upper-right corner.
  5. Update the applicable Campaign sections.
  6. Select Submit to save your changes.

Select Cancel to discard your changes and restore the previously saved settings.

Setup

The Setup section contains the primary Campaign settings.

The following fields are editable:

  • Name: Rename the Campaign.
  • Code: Optional value used for reporting purposes.
  • Active Status: Determines whether the Campaign is active.
  • Start Date: Editable if the Campaign has not started.
  • End Date: Editable if the Campaign has not ended.
  • Budget Type: Spend or Impressions.
  • Budget: Enter the total Campaign budget based on the selected Budget Type.
  • Set a Daily Budget Cap: Sets an optional daily delivery limit for the Campaign.
  • Manage Budgets: Enables Campaign-level management of Line budgets.
  • Auto Pace: Allows the system to automatically pace the Campaign.
  • Manage Creatives: Enables Creative management at the Campaign level.
  • Manage Dayparts: Enables Pacing & Dayparts management at the Campaign level.
  • Manage Pixels: Enables Pixel management at the Campaign level.
  • Enable Flights: Enables Campaign Flights.
  • Pacing Timezone: Determines the timezone used for Campaign pacing.
  • Enable Campaign Frequency: Enables Campaign-level Frequency & Recency controls.

Daily Budget Cap

The Daily Budget Cap limits Campaign delivery within a single day.

If Manage Dayparts is enabled and the pacing timezone is controlled at the Campaign level, the Campaign pacing timezone is used to define the day. If pacing timezone is controlled by the Lines, the Seat timezone is used.

When the Daily Budget Cap is reached, all Lines under the Campaign stop bidding regardless of their individual budget or pacing settings.

Catch-up pacing is not recommended when a Daily Budget Cap is enabled, as the combination may cause inconsistent pacing behavior.

Manage Budgets

When Manage Budgets is enabled:

  • Line flight dates align with the Campaign Start Date and End Date.
  • Line Budget Type aligns with the Campaign Budget Type.
  • Line lifetime budgets are converted into allocation weights based on each Line’s percentage of the total Campaign budget.

Leave Manage Budgets disabled if Line budgets should continue to be managed independently.

Manage Creatives

When Manage Creatives is enabled, Creatives can be associated at the Campaign level.

Manage Dayparts

When Manage Dayparts is enabled, Pacing & Dayparts are controlled at the Campaign level and override Pacing & Dayparts settings configured on associated Lines.

Refer to Pacing & Dayparts for configuration options and instructions.

Manage Pixels

When Manage Pixels is enabled, Pixels can be associated at the Campaign level.

For Lines under the Campaign, Pixels configured at the Line level are removed and replaced by the Pixels selected at the Campaign level.

Enable Flights

When Enable Flights is selected, Campaign Flights can be configured with:

  • Start Date
  • End Date
  • Budget
  • Rollover Budgets
  • Rollover Type
    • Even
    • Next Flight

Refer to Campaign Flights for detailed Flight configuration.

Enable Campaign Frequency

When Enable Campaign Frequency is selected, Frequency & Recency can be managed at the Campaign level.

Refer to Frequency & Recency for available settings and configuration instructions.

Targeting

Campaign-level Targeting can be updated from the Campaign page.

  1. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  2. Select Edit Targeting.
  3. Update the applicable Targeting settings.
  4. Select Save to apply the changes within the Targeting window.
  5. Select Submit on the Campaign page to save the Campaign changes.

Select Cancel to discard changes.

Refer to Targeting Methods for available Targeting options and configuration instructions.

Audiences

Audience Segments can be associated with the Campaign from the Audiences section.

  1. Navigate to the Audiences section.
  2. Select Associate Segments.
  3. Add or remove the applicable Audience Segments.
  4. Close the window when complete.
  5. Select Submit to save the Campaign changes.

Refer to the Audience documentation for available Audience options and configuration instructions.

Flights

The Flights section is available when Enable Flights is selected in Campaign Setup.

To edit Campaign Flights:

  1. Navigate to the Campaign.
  2. Select Edit.
  3. Open the Flights section.
  4. Update the applicable Flight settings.
  5. Select Submit to save the changes.

Available Flight settings include:

  • Add or remove Flights
  • Active Status
  • Start Date
  • End Date
  • Flight Budget
  • Rollover Budgets
  • Rollover Type
    • Even
    • Next Flight

Refer to Campaign Flights for detailed Flight configuration.

Lines

Basic Line settings can be updated directly from the Campaign page.

The following fields are editable:

  • Active Status
  • Line Name
  • Budget Allocation Weight
  • Bid Type
    • Basic Bid
    • Bid at Floor Price
    • Advanced Bid Controls
  • Bid Price
  • Budget Multiplier

Select Submit to save changes or Cancel to discard them.

For additional Line settings, open the applicable Line and refer to Edit a Line.

Pacing & Dayparts

When Manage Dayparts is enabled, Pacing & Dayparts can be configured at the Campaign level.

  1. Navigate to the Pacing & Dayparts section.
  2. Update the applicable settings.
  3. Select Submit to save the changes.

Refer to Pacing & Dayparts for configuration options and instructions.

Frequency & Recency

When Enable Campaign Frequency is enabled, Frequency & Recency can be configured at the Campaign level.

  1. Navigate to the Frequency & Recency section.
  2. Update the applicable settings.
  3. Select Submit to save the changes.

Refer to Frequency & Recency for available settings and configuration instructions.

Creatives

When Manage Creatives is enabled, Creatives can be associated with the Campaign.

  1. Navigate to the Creatives section.
  2. Select Associate Creatives.
  3. Add or remove the applicable Creatives.
  4. Close the window when complete.
  5. Select Submit to save the Campaign changes.

Creatives can only be created or edited at the Advertiser level.

Pixels

When Manage Pixels is enabled, Pixels can be associated with the Campaign.

  1. Navigate to the Pixels section.
  2. Select Associate Pixels.
  3. Add or remove the applicable Pixels.
  4. Close the window when complete.
  5. Select Submit to save the Campaign changes.

Pixels can only be created or edited at the Advertiser level.

Campaign Templates

Campaign Templates allow users to save and reuse broader Campaign configurations, including applicable Campaign settings, targeting, and selected Lines.

Use a Campaign Template when the same Campaign structure or multi-Line strategy will be reused across future Campaigns or Advertisers.

Campaign Templates are especially useful for:

  • Standard Campaign structures used across multiple Advertisers
  • Campaigns that regularly contain the same types of Lines
  • Reusable Campaign-level TargetingStandard pacing, Frequency & Recency, Creative management, or budget management configurations
  • Multi-Line strategies that should be recreated together

Campaign Templates include the Lines from the source Campaign by default. After the Campaign Template is saved, users can edit the Template under Templates > Campaign Templates to control which Lines should remain included.

For an overview of how Campaign and Line Templates work, see the Templates documentation.

Create a Campaign From a Template

Saved Campaign Templates can be used when creating a new Campaign under an Advertiser.

  1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser.
  2. Locate the Campaign Templates section within Campaigns.
  3. Select the desired Campaign Template.
  4. Review the Campaign settings and included Lines created from the Template.
  5. Make any Campaign-specific changes needed for the new Campaign.
  6. Select Submit to save the Campaign.

Templates provide a starting configuration. Before launch, review applicable dates, budgets, targeting, Lines, bids, pacing, Frequency & Recency settings, Creatives, and other Campaign requirements to confirm they are appropriate for the new Campaign. Pasted text

Save a Campaign as a Template

Save a Campaign as a Template when its configuration or multi-Line structure is expected to be reused.

  1. Open the Campaign you want to use as the basis for the Template, or create and configure a new Campaign.
  2. Select Save as Template in the upper-right corner.
  3. Enter a Name, Description, and Icon for the Campaign Template. Name and Icon are required fields.
  4. Select Save.

The Campaign Template is then available for future Campaign creation and can be managed from the Seat-level Templates tab.

Included Lines

Campaign Templates include all Lines from the source Campaign by default.

To add or remove Lines from the saved Campaign Template, navigate to Templates > Campaign Templates and edit the applicable Template.

Manage Campaign Templates

Saved Campaign Templates are managed at the Seat level under Templates > Campaign Templates.

From the Campaign Template page, users can:

  • View the saved Campaign configuration
  • Edit the Template
  • Clone the Template to create a new variation

Changes made to a Campaign Template affect Campaigns created from the Template in the future. They do not update Campaigns that were previously created from that Template.

For detailed instructions on editing, cloning, and managing saved Campaign Templates, see the Templates documentaton.

Campaign Performance Tab

Overview

Switching to the Campaign Performance tab, you can filter the Reporting Interval to adjust the top tiles section. This tab provides dropdown insights into Bid Data, Line Performance, Campaign Daily Performance, and Video Events. See the sections below for more details on each.

Overview

The Campaign Performance tab provides a consolidated view of Campaign delivery, pacing, bidding activity, Line performance, daily trends, and Completion Events.

The Full Report Link opens Standard Reporting with the applicable Advertiser and Campaign preselected for a more detailed reporting view.

Metrics are displayed in the Campaign’s Pacing Time Zone, shown at the top of the page.

Use the Reporting Interval dropdown to update the summary metrics. All intervals except Yesterday include activity from today. Today’s metrics update hourly and may have an approximately 3-hour delay.

The Campaign Performance tab includes:

  • Campaign Metrics and Pacing
  • Bid Data: Near-real-time Campaign bid funnel metrics, including Eligible Requests, Bids, Impressions, Confirmed Spend, Avg Eligible Lines, and Competitive Position.
  • Bid/Imp Ratios: Ratios showing how efficiently Eligible Requests progress to Bids and how frequently Bids result in Impressions.
  • Line Performance: Line-level delivery and cost metrics for each Line within the Campaign.
  • Campaign Daily Performance: Day-by-day Campaign performance with customizable chart metrics, table data, and CSV export.
  • Completion Events: Video and audio playback metrics, including Starts, quartile completions, Spend Per Complete, and Completion Rate.

Use these sections together to monitor overall Campaign performance and drill into individual Lines or stages of delivery when additional analysis is needed.

Campaign Metrics

The top of the Campaign Performance tab provides a summary of Campaign delivery and pacing for the selected Reporting Interval. Use the Reporting Interval dropdown to update the summary metrics displayed in the top tiles.

All Reporting Intervals except Yesterday include activity from today. Today’s metrics update hourly and may have an approximately 3-hour delay.

Available Campaign Metrics include:

  • Report Date: The selected reporting date or date range.
  • Impressions: Total Impressions served by the Campaign during the selected Reporting Interval.
  • Total Cost: Total Campaign cost, including applicable media costs and fees.
  • Revenue: Total Cost plus the applicable margin.
  • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per 1,000 Impressions, calculated as (Total Cost / Impressions) × 1,000.

Campaign Pacing

Campaign pacing is calculated using delivery through yesterday and updates daily.

  • Lifetime Pacing: Shows Campaign spend compared with ideal pacing across the full Campaign budget and date range.
  • Flight Pacing: When Flights are enabled, shows spend compared with ideal pacing for the current Flight.

A pacing value around 100% indicates that delivery is on track. As a general guideline, 90%–110% is considered an acceptable pacing range.

Below the pacing section, the Campaign Performance tab provides additional insights through Bid Data, Bid/Imp Ratios, Line Performance, Campaign Daily Performance, and Completion Events.

Bid Data

The Bid Data section provides a near-real-time view of Campaign bidding activity and helps show how inventory progresses from eligibility through delivery.

Use the Time Frame filter to view data for 15 minutes, 1 hour, 12 hours, or 1 day.

Available metrics include:

  • Eligible Requests: Bid requests that meet the applicable Campaign and Line Targeting requirements.
  • Bids: Bids submitted on Eligible Requests.
  • Imps: Confirmed Impressions resulting from won auctions.
  • Confirmed Spend: Spend associated with confirmed Impressions.
  • Avg Eligible Lines: Average number of Lines eligible to compete for the same inventory.
  • Competitive Position: Relative competitive position of eligible Lines. Values closer to 1 indicate a stronger position.

Hover over the charts to view the exact timestamp and metric value for a specific point in time.

Use Bid Data to identify where delivery may be restricted across the bidding flow:

Eligible Requests → Bids → Impressions → Confirmed Spend

For detailed definitions, interpretation guidance, and troubleshooting recommendations, see Bid Data.

Bid/Imp Ratios

The Bid/Imp Ratios section provides additional insight into Campaign bidding efficiency by showing how frequently Eligible Requests progress to Bids and how often Bids result in Impressions.

Use the Time Frame filter to view data for 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, or 48 hours. Data is displayed in hourly increments.

Available ratios include:

  • Imps to Bids Ratio: Shows how frequently submitted Bids result in won Impressions.
    • A higher ratio indicates that a larger share of Bids are winning.
    • A lower ratio may indicate lower bid competitiveness, stronger auction competition, or Deal/inventory conditions.
  • Bids to Eligible Bids Ratio: Shows how frequently the platform submits a Bid after a request passes eligibility.
    • A higher ratio indicates that the Campaign is bidding on a larger share of Eligible Requests.
    • A lower ratio may indicate additional serving restrictions such as budget, pacing, Creative eligibility, Frequency & Recency, or bid requirements.

Hover over either chart to view the timestamp and ratio value for a specific point in time.

Use these ratios together with Bid Data to identify whether delivery is being restricted between Eligible Requests and Bids or between Bids and Impressions.

For detailed interpretation and troubleshooting guidance, see Bid Data.

Line Performance

The Line Performance section provides Line-level delivery and cost metrics for each Line within the Campaign and can be filtered to focus on the Lines and reporting period you want to review.

Use the controls above the table to customize the view:

  • Search: Find a Line by Name or ID.
  • Filter Status: Filter Lines by status, such as Active.
  • Page Size: Adjust the number of Lines displayed per page.
  • Reporting Interval: Change the reporting period used for the Line metrics.
  • Column Selector: Select the three-line icon in the upper-right corner to add or remove metrics from the table.
  • Download: Export the Line Performance table as a CSV file.

Available columns include:

  • Status: Current Line status.
  • ID: Unique Line ID.
  • Name: Line Name.
  • Imps: Total Impressions served.
  • Media Cost: Media spend before additional fees or margins.
  • Total Cost: Total Line cost, including applicable fees.
  • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per 1,000 Impressions.
  • IP Conversions: Conversions attributed through IP-based tracking.
  • Clicks: Total ad Clicks.
  • CTR: Percentage of Impressions that resulted in a Click.
  • CPC: Average Total Cost per Click.
  • Transparency Score: Measure of inventory transparency.
  • Foot Traffic Attributed Visitors: Visitors attributed through Foot Traffic Reporting.
  • Revenue: Total Cost plus the applicable margin.
  • Media Cost CPM: Media Cost per 1,000 Impressions.
  • Data Cost: Cost associated with Audience data.
  • Foot Traffic Cost: Cost associated with Foot Traffic Reporting.
  • Credit Card Fee: Applicable credit card processing fee.
  • Hosting Fee: Applicable Creative hosting fee.
  • ART Fee: Cost associated with ART usage.
  • Contextual Fee: Cost associated with Contextual AI usage.
  • Chalice Fee: Cost associated with Chalice usage.
  • VCR: Video Completion Rate for applicable video inventory.

The bottom row displays Campaign Total values for applicable metrics across the Lines included in the table.

Use this section to compare Lines within the Campaign, identify which Lines are driving delivery and spend, and surface Lines that may require additional pacing or performance review.

Campaign Daily Performance

The Campaign Daily Performance section provides a day-by-day view of Campaign delivery, cost, conversions, and other performance metrics.

Performance Chart

Use the chart to compare two selected metrics across daily Campaign performance.

The chart can be filtered to display:

  • Only Days with Data: Displays only dates where Campaign activity was recorded.
  • All Days: Displays all dates in the reporting period, including dates with no activity.

Use the metric dropdowns in the upper-right corner to select the two metrics to compare.

Available metrics include:

  • Imps: Total Impressions served.
  • Media Cost: Media spend before additional fees or margins.
  • Total Cost: Total Campaign cost, including applicable fees.
  • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per 1,000 Impressions.
  • IP Conversions: Conversions attributed through IP-based tracking.
  • Chrome Convs: Conversions recorded through Chrome conversion tracking.
  • Clicks: Total ad Clicks.
  • CTR: Percentage of Impressions that resulted in a Click.
  • CPC: Average Total Cost per Click.
  • Transparency Score: Measure of inventory transparency.
  • Foot Traffic Attributed Visitors: Visitors attributed through Foot Traffic Reporting.
  • Revenue: Total Cost plus the applicable margin.
  • Media Cost CPM: Media Cost per 1,000 Impressions.
  • Data Cost: Cost associated with Audience data.
  • Foot Traffic Cost: Cost associated with Foot Traffic Reporting.
  • Credit Card Fee: Applicable credit card processing fee.
  • Hosting Fee: Applicable Creative hosting fee.
  • ART Fee: Cost associated with ART usage.
  • Contextual Fee: Cost associated with Contextual AI usage.
  • Chalice Fee: Cost associated with Chalice usage.
  • VCR: Video Completion Rate for applicable video inventory.

Daily Performance Table and CSV Export

The table below the chart provides Campaign performance by day and can be customized using the available column controls.

To export the data:

  1. Navigate to the Campaign Daily Performance table.
  2. Select the download button beside the search bar.
  3. A CSV containing the selected Campaign Daily Performance metrics will be downloaded.

To customize the metrics displayed in the table and included in the CSV, select the three-line column selector in the upper-right corner of the table and select or deselect the desired metrics.

Use the chart for quickly comparing daily trends and the table or CSV export for more detailed day-level analysis.

Completion Events

The Completion Events section provides detailed video and audio playback metrics for the Campaign and can be downloaded as a CSV file.

Available metrics include:

  • Date: Reporting date for the video or audio event metrics.
  • Imps: Number of times the video or audio ad was served.
  • Spend Per Complete: Average cost for each fully completed video or audio ad.
  • Starts: Number of times the video or audio ad started.
  • 25% Complete: Number of video or audio ads played through at least 25% of the duration.
  • 50% Complete: Number of video or audio ads played through at least 50% of the duration.
  • 75% Complete: Number of video or audio ads played through at least 75% of the duration.
  • 100% Complete: Number of video or audio ads played through the full duration.
  • Completion Rate: Percentage of Starts that reached 100% Complete, calculated as (100% Complete ÷ Starts) × 100.

All available metrics can be exported. To customize the metrics displayed in the table and included in the CSV, select the three-line column selector in the upper-right corner and select or deselect the desired Campaign metrics.

Overview

A Line executes a specific media buying strategy within a Campaign. While the Campaign organizes one or more strategies under a shared structure, the Line controls the actual bidding, delivery, and spend.

Each Campaign must contain at least one active Line in order to deliver impressions. Multiple Lines can be created under a single Campaign to separate strategies by factors such as:

  • Inventory source or Publisher
  • Audience
  • Geography
  • Device
  • Media type
  • Bidding strategy
  • Optimization approach

Lines can inherit certain settings managed centrally at the Campaign level while also defining their own strategy-specific configuration. This allows shared requirements to be applied consistently across the Campaign while individual Lines control the targeting, inventory, bidding, and optimization needed for their specific strategy.

Line Hierarchy

Lines sit under a Campaign and are the lowest level of the core Campaign structure.

Seat
├── Audiences
└── Advertisers
    ├── Creatives
    ├── Pixels
    └── Campaigns
        ├── Flights (optional)
        └── Lines

Each Line belongs to a single Campaign and inherits any applicable Campaign-level settings.

Campaign-Managed Settings

Depending on the Campaign Setup, certain settings can be managed centrally at the Campaign level and inherited by all Lines.

For example:

  • Creatives can be managed at the Campaign level so the same Creative set is inherited by all Lines.
  • Pixels can be managed at the Campaign level so the same Pixels apply across all Lines.
  • Pacing & Dayparts can be controlled at the Campaign level.
  • Frequency & Recency can be controlled at the Campaign level.
  • Budgets can be managed at the Campaign level.

When these settings are not managed at the Campaign level, they can be configured independently for each Line.

Campaign and Line Targeting

Campaign-level targeting acts as an additional eligibility filter across all Lines, while Line-level targeting can further refine the inventory eligible for an individual strategy.

When targeting is configured at both levels, the settings are evaluated together. An impression must satisfy the applicable targeting requirements at both the Campaign and Line levels in order to be eligible to serve.

For example, if a Campaign targets the United States, an individual Line can further narrow that targeting to Oregon. However, if the Campaign targets Oregon and the Line targets only New York, no impressions would satisfy both targeting layers.

Campaign and Line targeting should therefore remain aligned.

For complete targeting options and configuration instructions, see Targeting Methods.

Best Practices

  • Use Campaign-level managed settings for requirements that should apply consistently across all Lines.
  • Use Campaign-level targeting only for targeting that should apply universally across all Lines.
  • Use Line-level settings and targeting for strategy-specific execution.
  • Ensure Campaign and Line targeting are aligned when using both levels.
  • Review settings at both levels when troubleshooting limited delivery.

Create a Line

Line Setup

All Campaigns must have at least one active Line in order to deliver impressions.

To create a Line:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser > Campaign.
  2. Navigate to the Lines section.
  3. Select New Line.
  4. Configure the Line Setup settings.
  5. Continue through the applicable Line sections.
  6. Select Submit to create the Line.

Setup

The Setup section contains the primary Line configuration.

General Settings

  • Name: Enter a name for the Line.
  • Code: Optional value used for reporting.
  • Active Status: Determines whether the Line is active.
  • Start Date: Available when budgets are not managed at the Campaign level.
  • End Date: Available when budgets are not managed at the Campaign level.
  • Deploy Date: Read-only field showing when the Line was created.

Budget Settings

  • Budget: Line budget by spend. This may be inherited from the Campaign or configured at the Line level.
  • Lifetime Cost: Total estimated Line cost based on serving dates and bids.
  • Estimated Daily Cost: Estimated daily spend if the Line budget were distributed evenly across its flight dates. This is not the actual Daily Budget.
  • Budget by Impressions: Line budget by impressions.
  • Lifetime Impressions: Estimated total impressions for the Line.
  • Estimated Daily Impressions: Estimated daily impressions if the budget were distributed evenly across the flight dates.
  • Budget Multiplier: Allows the daily budget to scale by a configured multiplier.
  • Budget Allocation: Uses weighted allocations across Lines when Manage Budgets is enabled at the Campaign level.

Bid Controls

The Bid Controls section determines how Pontiac calculates and submits bids for eligible inventory.

When setting up a Line, select the applicable Bid Type and configure the associated bid settings. Closing bids reflect the total cost of the media, including applicable Audience or Foot Traffic fees.

Available bid types include:

  • Basic Bid
    • Bid at Total eCPM
  • Bid at Floor
    • Bid at Floor Plus
  • Advanced Bid Controls

For bidding strategy guidance, see Bid Recommendations.

Basic Bid

Basic Bid applies a standard bid price across all eligible inventory for the Line.

If the final clearing price is lower than the configured bid, Pontiac adjusts the bid to one cent above the next-highest bid when possible to secure the impression efficiently.

  • Bid Price: Enter the CPM amount the Line is willing to bid. Default value is $5.11.

Bid at Total eCPM

When Bid at Total eCPM is enabled, Pontiac adjusts the media bid so that the total eCPM remains within the entered Bid Price after applicable fees are included. This feature is disabled by default. If you would like it to be enabled by default, reach out through the Help Center or to your Account Manager requesting this update.

The following fees are included in the calculation:

  • Margin
  • Foot Traffic Fee
  • Chalice Fee

Ad serving fees and third-party data costs are excluded from the Bid at Total eCPM calculation.

To enable Bid at Total eCPM:

  1. Navigate to the Line Setup section.
  2. Set Bid Type to Basic Bid.
  3. Select the arrow next to the Bid Price field.
  4. Enable Bid at Total eCPM.

Bid at Floor Price

Bid at Floor Price allows Pontiac to bid based on the CPM floor provided in the bid request, up to the configured Max Bid Price. If the bid floor exceeds the configured Max Bid Price, the Line will not bid on that request.

  • Max Bid Price: Sets the maximum amount the Line can bid.

Bid at Floor Price Plus

When Bid at Floor Price is selected, you can optionally increase the bid above the provided floor to improve auction competitiveness while continuing to respect the configured Max Bid Price.

Available options include:

  • Add CPM: Adds a specified CPM amount to the bid floor.
  • Add Percentage: Adds a specified percentage of the bid floor.

To configure Bid at Floor Price:

  1. Navigate to the Line Setup section.
  2. Set Bid Type to Bid at Floor Price.
  3. Enter the desired Max Bid Price.
  4. Select the arrow next to the Max Bid Price field.
  5. Enter either:
    • a static CPM amount to add to the floor, or
    • a percentage to add to the floor.

Bidding above the exact floor may improve auction competitiveness.

Example

If:

  • Max Bid Price = $15.00
  • Bid at Floor Price Plus = 10%
  • Bid Floor = $14.00

The calculated bid is:

$14.00 × 1.10 = $15.40

Because the calculated bid exceeds the configured Max Bid Price, Pontiac bids the $15.00 Max Bid Price.

Advanced Bid Controls

Advanced Bid Controls allow you to configure an overall Max Bid Price and customize bid prices for individual Deals.

Access Advanced Bid Controls by selecting Advanced Bid Controls as the Bid Type and then click the arrow next to the Max Bid Price field.

Available settings include:

  • Default Bid Price: The bid price used for targeted Deals that do not have a Deal-specific Bid Price configured.
  • Max Bid Price: The maximum amount the Line is permitted to bid.
  • Deal-Specific Bid Price: A unique Bid Price configured for an individual eligible Deal.

The Max Bid Price takes precedence over Deal-specific Bid Prices. If a Deal-specific Bid Price exceeds the Max Bid Price, the Line will not bid on that Deal.

Deal Eligibility in Advanced Bid Controls

The Deals displayed in Advanced Bid Controls depend on where Deal targeting is configured.

  • If Deals are targeted only at the Campaign level, all targeted Campaign Deals appear.
  • If Deals are targeted only at the Line level, all targeted Line Deals appear.
  • If Deals are targeted at both the Campaign and Line levels, only Deals targeted at both levels appear.

When targeting exists at both levels, the eligible Deal set is the intersection of the Campaign and Line Deal targeting.

If a new Deal is added through targeting and no Deal-specific Bid Price has been configured, the Deal initially uses the Default Bid Price.

Example Scenarios

Scenario 1: Max Bid Price is higher than all Deal Bid Prices

  • Default Bid Price = $10.00
  • Max Bid Price = $20.00

All targeted Deals in this example have Deal-specific Bid Prices below the $20.00 Max Bid Price. The Line is therefore eligible to bid on inventory from all displayed Deals.

If a new Deal is added through targeting and no Deal-specific Bid Price has been configured, it initially uses the $10.00 Default Bid Price. Because the Default Bid Price is below the $20.00 Max Bid Price, the new Deal is also eligible for bidding.

Scenario 2: Max Bid Price is higher than some Deal Bid Prices

  • Default Bid Price: $10.00
  • Max Bid Price: $13.00

In this example, only Deal IDs 15 and 23 have Deal-specific Bid Prices below the configured Max Bid Price.

The Line can therefore bid on inventory through Deals 15 and 23.

The Line will not bid on Deal IDs 20, 21, and 22 because their configured Deal Bid Prices exceed the $13.00 Max Bid Price.

If a new Deal is added through targeting and does not yet have a Deal-specific Bid Price, it initially uses the $10.00 Default Bid Price. Because $10.00 is below the $13.00 Max Bid Price, the new Deal is eligible for bidding.

Deal Floor Price Tooltip

Within the Advanced Bid Controls window, hover over the question mark icon for a Deal to view observed bid floor pricing from the previous day’s sample requests.

The tooltip includes:

  • Min: Lowest observed floor price
  • Max: Highest observed floor price
  • Avg: Average observed floor price
  • Median: Median observed floor priceay

These values provide visibility into the range and distribution of recently observed floor prices for the Deal and can help inform bid adjustments.

Budget Multiplier

Budget Multiplier allows the Line’s calculated daily budget to be increased by a configured multiplier.

For example, a Budget Multiplier of 1.1 allows the Line to spend up to 110% of its calculated daily budget.

The daily budget may adjust based on pacing, so actual daily spend may vary.

Foot Traffic Reporting

Enable Foot Traffic Reporting to track whether users served an ad later visited configured commercial locations.

When enabled, the Foot Traffic Reporting section becomes available.

For full setup instructions, supported location methods, attribution settings, and fees, see Foot Traffic Reporting.

Line Frequency

Enable Line Frequency to configure Frequency & Recency at the Line level.

For configuration options and Cap By definitions, see Frequency & Recency.

Line Pacing & Dayparts

Pacing & Dayparts can be configured at the Line level when Manage Dayparts is not enabled at the Campaign level.

If Manage Dayparts is enabled at the Campaign level, the Campaign-level Pacing & Dayparts settings apply to all associated Lines and Line-level controls are not available.

To configure Pacing & Dayparts for a Line:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Line.
  2. Select Edit.
  3. Open the Pacing & Dayparts section.
  4. Configure the applicable pacing and daypart settings.
  5. Select Submit to save the changes.

Available settings include:

  • Daily Pacing Type
    • Even
    • ASAP
    • Primetime
    • Custom
  • Apply Curve to All Days
  • Catch-up ASAP
  • Daypart in User Time Zone
  • Day and hour eligibility
  • Custom pacing weights

Pacing weights and Dayparts may use the Campaign’s selected Pacing Time Zone, depending on the selected configuration.

For definitions, configuration details, timezone behavior, Catch-up ASAP logic, Primetime and Custom pacing, and US national Campaign best practices, see Pacing & Dayparts.

Line Frequency & Recency

Frequency & Recency can be configured at the Line level when Enable Line Frequency is selected in Line Setup.

To configure Frequency & Recency for a Line:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Line.
  2. Select Edit.
  3. Ensure Enable Line Frequency is selected in the Setup section.
  4. Open the Frequency & Recency section.
  5. Configure the applicable settings.
  6. Select Submit to save the changes.

Available settings include:

  • Line Frequency
  • Time Frame Days
  • Line Recency
  • Campaign Frequency and Recency, when applicable
  • Cap By

Campaign- and Line-level Frequency & Recency settings may both apply to the same Line. When configured at both levels, delivery must satisfy the applicable caps at each level.

For definitions, supported values, Cap By options, Campaign-vs-Line behavior, and configuration examples, see Frequency & Recency.

Line Foot Traffic Reporting

Foot Traffic Reporting allows you to measure whether users who were served an ad later visited specified physical locations.

Foot Traffic Reporting is configured at the Line level. When enabled, a Foot Traffic Reporting section becomes available where locations can be added and managed. Foot Traffic Reports are available in the Reporting tab.

A Foot Traffic Attribution fee may apply when this feature is enabled. The fee is configured at the Seat level and may vary by account. Contact your Account Manager or reach out through the Help Center if you have questions about the applicable fee.

Enable Foot Traffic Reporting

To begin:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Line.
  2. Select Edit.
  3. Enable Foot Traffic Reporting in the Setup section.
  4. Navigate to the Foot Traffic Reporting section.
  5. Select Add Location.

Locations can be added using one of the following methods:

  • Address
  • Latitude Longitude (Lat Long)
  • Geofence
  • Bulk Upload

Choose the method that best matches the location information available.

Address

Use the Address method when you have a standard street address.

Pontiac attempts to convert the submitted address into a Latitude / Longitude point. Address-based locations support a maximum radius of 200 meters.

To add a location by Address:

  1. Select Add Location.
  2. Open the Address tab.
  3. Enter the applicable location details:
    • Location Name
    • Building Number
    • Street Address
    • City
    • State
    • Postal Code
    • Active Status
    • Radius (meters)
  4. Select Save.

Use the Radius field to define the area around the location that should be considered for Foot Traffic Attribution.

Latitude / Longitude (Lat Long)

Use the Lat Long method when you want to define the location using a specific geographic point.

To add a location using Latitude / Longitude:

  1. Select Add Location.
  2. Open the Lat Long tab.
  3. Enter a name for the location.
  4. Use the map to select the desired Latitude / Longitude point.
  5. Select Save.

This method can be useful when a standard street address does not accurately represent the location you want to measure.

Geofence

Use the Geofence method when a custom geographic boundary is more appropriate than a single point and radius.

To add a Geofence:

  1. Select Add Location.
  2. Open the Geofence tab.
  3. Use the Search tool to locate the desired area.
  4. Enter a name for the location.
  5. Select points on the map to create the Geofence shape.
  6. Use Reset Map Shape or Delete Shape as needed to adjust the boundary.
  7. Select Save.

Use Geofences when the physical location has an irregular footprint or cannot be represented accurately by a simple radius.

Bulk Upload

Use Bulk Upload to add multiple locations at once. The Bulk Upload option supports up to 200 locations per upload.

The required format is:

  • Format: Name, Building Number, Street Address, City, State, Postal Code, Active, Radius
  • Example Line: City Grill, 10701, Balls Ford Rd, Manassas, VA, 20109, 1, 117
  • Each field must be separated by a comma. The header row is optional.

Download the example file here:

sampleDownload

To upload locations in bulk:

  1. Select Add Location.
  2. Open the Bulk Upload tab.
  3. Format up to 200 locations using the required CSV structure.
  4. Upload the CSV file.
  5. Select Save.

Managing Foot Traffic Locations

After locations are added, review the configured locations to confirm that:

  • The correct physical locations are included.
  • Each location is active when it should be eligible for attribution.
  • Address, point, radius, or Geofence boundaries accurately represent the intended location.
  • Bulk-uploaded locations were added successfully.

Update or remove locations as needed before or during Line delivery.

Foot Traffic Attribution Reporting

Foot Traffic Reporting measures visits to the configured locations for users who were exposed to ads from the Line.

For additional information on Foot Traffic Attribution reporting and results, see Foot Traffic Studies.

Line Targeting

Line-level Targeting applies targeting requirements to an individual Line. Use it to define strategy-specific criteria that should apply only to that Line. Campaign and Line Targeting are evaluated together. An impression must satisfy the applicable criteria at both levels in order to be eligible to serve.

For complete definitions, formatting requirements, Allow and Block List behavior, and configuration guidance for each targeting option, see Targeting Methods.

To configure Line Targeting:

  1. Create a new Line or open an existing Line.
  2. Select Edit.
  3. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  4. Select Edit Targeting.
  5. Configure the applicable targeting options.
  6. Select Save.
  7. Select Submit on the Line to save all changes.

Line Targeting is organized into the following sections:

  • Inventory
    • Deals
    • Deal Lists
    • Exchanges
    • Sites
    • Site Lists
    • App Bundle
    • App Name
    • App Lists
    • Curation*
  • Location & Device
    • Geo
    • Zip Codes
    • Device Types
    • Browser
    • Operating Systems
  • Content
    • Channel
    • Content ID
    • Genre
    • Network
    • Publisher
    • Series
    • Title
    • Multi Field
  • Streaming & Video
    • Livestream
    • OLV
  • Advanced
    • Custom Model
    • Privacy

Curation

Curation is available under Inventory at the Line level only. It allows users to automatically create a curated Deal through Index or Microsoft using the Line’s targeting configuration.

When enabled, Pontiac creates a Deal in the selected partner’s marketplace that mirrors the applicable Line targeting parameters and automatically associates it with the Line. This can help increase scale by making inventory available through a curated Deal without requiring manual Deal creation.

Curation supports Display and Video Campaigns.

Available Curation Options

  • Index Curation: Enable Use Index Curated Deal to automatically create a curated Deal through Index Exchange.
    • Index Curation – Target CTR (Optional): Index Curation also provides an optional Use Target CTR feature that attempts to filter inventory based on a selected Click-Through Rate (CTR) goal.
    • When enabled, select a Target CTR threshold from the available dropdown options:
      • Higher than 0%
      • 0.01% or Higher
      • 0.02% or Higher
      • 0.05% or Higher
      • 0.075% or Higher
      • 0.1% or Higher
      • 0.15% or Higher
      • 0.2% or Higher
      • 0.5% or Higher
      • 1% or Higher
      • Important: Higher CTR goals introduce more restrictive inventory filtering and may limit delivery.
  • Microsoft Curation: Enable Use Microsoft Curated Deal to automatically create a curated Deal through Microsoft Exchange.

Both options can be enabled on the same Line and require the following:

  • Exchange targeting includes Index and/or Microsoft
  • All creatives associated to the line must be of one media type: display or video
  • Geo targeting must be more granular than Regions or an audience must be attached that pushed to a curation platform

Configuring Curation Targeting

  1. Create a new Line or open an existing Line in Edit mode.
  2. Navigate to the Targeting section.
  3. Under Inventory, select Curation from the Targeting dropdown menu.
  4. Enable Use Index Curated Deal and/or Use Microsoft Curated Deal.
  5. Confirm that the Line meets the applicable Exchange, creative, and targeting requirements.
  6. Select Save to apply the targeting configuration.

Important Considerations

  • Validation
    • If the required curation conditions are not met, the Line will fail to save and the user will be redirected to the Line setup page to correct the configuration.
  • Campaign and Line Targeting
    • Although Curation is configured at the Line level, Campaign level targeting requirements still apply.
    • Ensure that the Campaign’s inventory, geographic, Audience, and other applicable targeting restrictions do not conflict with the Line’s curated Deal configuration.
  • Inventory Availability
    • Curation can help increase scale but does not guarantee delivery. The curated Deal must receive eligible inventory that satisfies the applicable Campaign and Line targeting requirements.

See Targeting Methods for definitions, formatting requirements, configuration instructions, and best practices for shared Campaign and Line targeting options.

Line Creatives

Creatives can be managed at the Line level when different Lines within a Campaign require different Creative sets. Creatives must first be created under the Line’s Advertiser.

Use Line-level Creative management when Creatives should be associated with individual Lines rather than inherited across the Campaign. For example, a Campaign may contain separate Video, Audio, and Banner Lines. Managing Creatives at the Line level allows the applicable Creative assets to be associated only with the appropriate Line.

If Manage Creatives is enabled on the parent Campaign, Creatives are managed at the Campaign level and cannot be associated independently at the Line level. See Campaign Creatives

Associate a Creative to a Line

  1. Open the applicable Line and select Edit.
  2. Navigate to the Creatives section.
  3. Select Associate Creatives.
  4. Select the green plus sign (+) next to the applicable Creative or Creatives.
    • To remove an associated Creative, use the red minus sign (−).
  5. Repeat as needed to associate additional Creatives with the Line.
  6. Review the associated Creatives and close the Associate Creatives window.
  7. Select Submit to save the Line.

Repeat this process for other Lines when different Creative sets are required.

For information on creating, uploading, editing, auditing, eligibility, and general Creative management, see the Creatives documentation.

Line Audiences

Audiences can be associated at the Line level when different Lines within a Campaign require different Audience targeting strategies.

Lines can use eligible:

  • Custom Audiences
  • Third Party Audiences
  • Contextual Audiences
  • ART Audiences
  • Audience Groups

Audiences are created and managed from the Audiences section at the Seat level. Once available, they can be associated with an individual Line for targeting or anti-targeting.

Use Line-level Audiences when different Lines require different Audience strategies. If the same Audience targeting should apply across all Lines in the Campaign, consider managing the Audience at the Campaign level instead.

Campaign and Line Audience targeting are evaluated together. If Audiences are applied at both levels, review the combined configuration to make sure it does not unintentionally restrict eligible inventory.

Important: When Audiences are applied at both the Campaign and Line levels, make sure the Audience type is compatible with any other targeting applied at either level. Audience targeting and other targeting criteria are evaluated together, so incompatible combinations can significantly restrict or prevent eligible inventory.

For example:

  • ART Audiences are ZIP-based. Layering an ART Audience with ZIP targeting, particularly a ZIP Allow List that does not align with the ART Audience, can prevent delivery.
  • Contextual Audiences target contextually relevant sites and content. Layering a Contextual Audience with a restrictive Site Allow List can limit or prevent delivery if the eligible sites do not overlap.

Review Campaign-level and Line-level targeting together before launch to confirm the targeting methods are compatible.

For instructions on associating Audience Segments, configuring Include or Exclude behavior, Audience Groups, and Boolean Logic, see Associate Segments.

For information on creating and managing Audience types, see Audiences.

Line Pixels

Pixels can be managed at the Line level when different Lines within a Campaign require different Pixel configurations.

Best Practice: When the same Pixel or Pixels apply across multiple Lines, manage them at the Campaign level. This makes the Pixel setup easier to review in the UI because all associated Pixels can be viewed and managed in one place across the Campaign’s Lines.

Reporting is not affected by whether the Pixel is associated at the Campaign or Line level; users can still select the applicable Pixels in reporting. The Campaign-level recommendation is primarily for easier setup, maintenance, and visibility.

Use Line-level Pixel management when a Pixel should apply only to a specific Line or when different Lines require different Pixel configurations.

Pixels must first be created under the Line’s Advertiser. Pixels cannot be created or edited directly from the Line.

If Manage Pixels is enabled on the parent Campaign, Pixels are managed at the Campaign level and cannot be associated independently at the Line level. See Campaign Pixels for Campaign-level setup.

Associate Pixels to a Line

  1. Open the applicable Line and select Edit.
  2. Navigate to the Pixels section.
  3. Select Associate Pixel.
  4. Select the green plus sign (+) next to the applicable Pixel or Pixels.
    • To remove an associated Pixel, use the red minus sign (−).
  5. Review the associated Pixels and close the Associate Pixel window.
  6. Select Submit to save the Line.

For information on creating, editing, and managing Pixels, see the Pixels documentation.

For Campaign-level Pixel management, see Campaign Pixels.

Edit a Line

Existing Lines can be updated when needed.

Depending on the type of change, users can make smaller operational edits directly from the Campaign or Flights views, or open the Line in Edit mode for full configuration changes.

Quick Edits From the Campaign

Some common Line settings can be updated directly from the Campaign’s Lines section without opening the full Line Edit page.

Depending on the Campaign configuration, available quick edits can include:

  • Active Status
  • Budget
  • Budget Allocation Weight
  • Bid Type
  • Bid Price
  • Advanced Bid Controls, when applicable
  • Budget Multiplier
  • Other applicable Line delivery settings

Use Campaign-level quick edits for smaller operational changes when the setting is available directly from the Campaign view.

The exact fields available depend on how the Campaign is configured. For example, when Manage Budgets is enabled, some Line budget settings are controlled by the Campaign and may appear differently than they would on a Line with independent budget management.

Flight-Level Line Edits

When Flights are enabled, Flight-specific Line budget settings must be managed from the Campaign’s Flights tab rather than from the standard Line Edit page.

Depending on the Campaign budget configuration, Flight-specific Line settings include:

  • Flight Line Budget
  • Flight Budget Allocation Weight
  • Flight Budget Multiplier

These values apply to the Line within the selected Flight and must be edited from the Flights tab.

Use the Flights tab when adjusting how a Line is budgeted within a specific Flight. For broader Line configuration changes, use Campaign-level quick edits or open the Line in Edit mode.

For complete Flight setup and Line-level Flight controls, see Campaign Flights.

Edit a Line in Edit Mode

For changes that require access to the full Line configuration:

  1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser > Campaign.
  2. Expand the Lines section.
  3. Select the Line you want to update.
  4. Select Edit in the upper-right corner.
  5. Update the applicable Line sections.
  6. Select Submit to save all changes. Select Cancel to discard changes if needed.

Depending on the Campaign and Line configuration, some settings may be controlled at the Campaign level and unavailable for independent Line-level editing.

Setup

The Setup section controls the primary configuration of the Line.

Editable settings can include:

  • Name: Rename your Line.
  • Inventory Type: Select Web, In-App, or Combined.
  • Active Status: Check the ‘Active’ to set Line to live and uncheck it if you want to pause the Line.
  • Code: Optional and for reporting purposes.
  • Bid Type: Select Basic Bid, Bid at Floor, Advanced Bid Controls
  • Bid Price
  • Budget Multiplier, if Flights are not enabled
  • Enable Foot Traffic Reporting
  • Foot Traffic Lookback, when Foot Traffic Reporting is enabled
  • Budget Allocation Weight, if Manage Budgets enabled on the Campaign level

Campaign Managed Budgets

When Manage Budgets is enabled on the parent Campaign, applicable Line budget settings are controlled by the Campaign.

Lines follow the Campaign’s applicable Start Date, End Date, and Budget Type, and Campaign-managed budget allocation is configured using Line weights.

If Line-level budget control is required, Manage Budgets must be disabled on the Campaign.

If Flights are enabled, Flight-specific Line budgets, allocation weights, and Budget Multipliers are managed from the Flights tab rather than from Line Setup.

For complete definitions and setup behavior, see Line Setup, Campaign Setup, and Flights Setup.

Pacing & Dayparts

Line-level Pacing & Dayparts can be edited when Manage Dayparts is not enabled on the parent Campaign.

To update Line-level Pacing & Dayparts:

  1. Navigate to Pacing & Dayparts within the Line.
  2. Update the applicable pacing and Daypart settings.
  3. Select Submit when all Line edits are complete.

If Manage Dayparts is enabled on the Campaign, the Campaign controls Pacing & Dayparts for its Lines and the Line-level settings cannot be edited independently.

To move control to the Line level:

  1. Edit the parent Campaign.
  2. Disable Manage Dayparts.
  3. Select Submit to save the Campaign.
  4. Return to the Line and edit Pacing & Dayparts.

For complete definitions and configuration options, see Pacing & Dayparts.

Frequency & Recency

If Enable Line Frequency is enabled in Line Setup, Line-level Frequency & Recency settings can be edited.

To update these settings:

  1. Navigate to Frequency & Recency within the Line.
  2. Update the applicable Frequency & Recency settings.
  3. Select Submit when all Line edits are complete.

Frequency & Recency can be configured at both the Campaign and Line levels. If configured at both levels, Campaign-level Frequency & Recency takes precedence over the Line-level configuration.

For complete definitions and configuration options, see Frequency & Recency.

Foot Traffic Reporting

If Enable Foot Traffic Reporting is enabled in Line Setup, Foot Traffic locations can be managed from the Line.

To update Foot Traffic Reporting:

  1. Navigate to Foot Traffic Reporting within the Line.
  2. Add, edit, or remove the applicable Locations.
  3. Select Submit when all Line edits are complete.

Locations can be configured using:

  • Address
  • Latitude Longitude (Lat Long)
  • Geofence
  • Bulk Upload

For complete setup instructions, see Line Foot Traffic Reporting.

    Targeting Section

    The Targeting section controls the Line-level Targeting configuration.

    To update Line Targeting:

    1. Navigate to Targeting within the Line.
    2. Select Edit Targeting.
    3. Update the applicable Targeting settings.
    4. Select Save in the Targeting window.
    5. Select Submit when all Line edits are complete.

    Campaign- and Line-level Targeting are evaluated together. Review both levels when updating a Line to confirm that the combined configuration produces the intended inventory eligibility.

    For complete Targeting definitions and available methods, see Targeting Methods.

    Creatives

    Creatives can be managed at the Line level when Manage Creatives is not enabled on the parent Campaign.

    To update Line-level Creative associations:

    1. Navigate to Creatives within the Line.
    2. Select Associate Creatives.
    3. Add or remove the applicable Creatives.
    4. Select Submit when all Line edits are complete.

    Creatives must be created and edited at the Advertiser level.

    If Manage Creatives is enabled on the Campaign, Creatives are managed at the Campaign level and cannot be associated independently with individual Lines.

    To move Creative management to the Line level:

    1. Edit the parent Campaign.
    2. Disable Manage Creatives.
    3. Select Submit.
    4. Return to the Line and associate the applicable Creatives.

    For detailed Line-level behavior, see Line Creatives. For Creative creation, editing, specifications, and eligibility, see Creatives.

    Audiences

    Audience Targeting can be managed directly from the Line.

    To update Line-level Audiences:

    1. Navigate to Audiences within the Line.
    2. Select Associate Segments.
    3. Add, remove, or update the applicable Audience Segments and Boolean Logic.
    4. Close the Audience window.
    5. Select Submit when all Line edits are complete.

    Audience Targeting can also exist at the Campaign level. When Audiences are configured at both levels, the Campaign and Line Audience requirements are evaluated together.

    Review the complete Campaign and Line Audience configuration when making changes, particularly when different Audience types or related Targeting restrictions are layered across both levels.

    For Line-specific guidance, see Line Audiences. For Audience association and Boolean Logic, see Associate Segments.

    Pixels

    Pixels can be managed at the Line level when Manage Pixels is not enabled on the parent Campaign.

    To update Line-level Pixel associations:

    1. Navigate to Pixels within the Line.
    2. Select Associate Pixel.
    3. Add or remove the applicable Pixels.
    4. Select Submit when all Line edits are complete.

    Pixels must be created and edited at the Advertiser level.

    If Manage Pixels is enabled on the Campaign, Pixels are managed at the Campaign level and cannot be associated independently with individual Lines.

    To move Pixel management to the Line level:

    1. Edit the parent Campaign.
    2. Disable Manage Pixels.
    3. Select Submit.
    4. Return to the Line and associate the applicable Pixels.

    Best Practice: When the same Pixels apply across multiple Lines, manage them at the Campaign level. This makes the Pixel configuration easier to review in the UI because all associated Pixels can be viewed and managed in one place across the Campaign’s Lines. Reporting is not affected by whether the Pixel is associated at the Campaign or Line level.

    For detailed Line-level behavior, see Line Pixels. For Pixel creation and management, see Pixels.

    Clone a Line

    Cloning allows users to create a new Line based on an existing Line configuration without modifying the original.

    Use Clone when you want to create another Line with similar setup, bidding, Targeting, pacing, Frequency & Recency, Creative, Audience, or Pixel configuration within the same Campaign.

    To clone a Line:

    1. Navigate to the Line you want to clone.
    2. Select Clone in the upper-right corner.
    3. Enter a new Line Name for the cloned Line.
    4. Review the cloned Line configuration.
    5. Adjust any settings that should differ from the original Line.
    6. Select Submit to create the cloned Line.

    The cloned Line is created under the same Advertiser and Campaign as the original Line.

    Important: Cloning creates a separate Line. Changes made to the cloned Line do not affect the original Line, and changes made to the original Line do not affect the clone.

    Before launch, review the cloned Line to confirm that applicable budgets, bids, Deals, Targeting, Pacing & Dayparts, Frequency & Recency, Creatives, Audiences, Pixels, and other Line settings are appropriate for the new strategy.

    For guidance on updating the cloned Line configuration, see Edit a Line.

    Line Templates

    Line Templates allow users to save and reuse individual Line configurations for strategies that may be used across multiple Campaigns.

    Use a Line Template when the same bidding, inventory, targeting, pacing, or other Line setup is expected to be reused.

    Line Templates can include:

    • Line setup and bidding configuration
    • Targeting
    • Pacing & Dayparts
    • Frequency & Recency
    • Foot Traffic Reporting settings, when applicable

    Pontiac also provides Public Line Templates for common publisher, inventory, and media-buying strategies. For information on Pontiac-provided Templates, see Public Line Templates.

    For an overview of how Campaign and Line Templates work, see the Templates documentation.

    Create a Line From a Template

    Saved Line Templates can be used when creating a new Line within a Campaign.

    1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser > Campaign.
    2. Within the Lines section, expand Line Templates.
    3. Select the desired Line Template icon.
    4. Enter the new Line’s:
      • Name
      • Lifetime Impression or Spend Budget
      • Budget Multiplier
    1. Make any Line-specific changes needed for the new Campaign.
    2. Select Submit to save the Line.

    Templates provide a starting configuration. Before launch, review applicable budgets, bids, Deals, targeting, pacing, Frequency & Recency settings, and other Line requirements to confirm they are appropriate for the new Campaign.

    Save a Line as a Template

    Save a Line as a Template when its configuration is expected to be reused in future Campaigns.

    1. Open the Line you want to use as the basis for the Template, or create and configure a new Line.
    2. Select Save as Template in the upper-right corner.
    3. Enter a Name, Description, and Icon for the Line Template. Name and Icon are required fields.
    4. Select Save.

    The Line Template is then available for future Line creation and can be managed from the Seat-level Templates tab.

    Manage Line Templates

    Saved Line Templates are managed at the Seat level under Templates > Line Templates.

    From the Line Template page, users can:

    • View the saved Line configuration
    • Edit the Template
    • Clone the Template to create a new variation

    Changes made to a Line Template affect Lines created from the Template in the future. They do not update Lines that were previously created from that Template.

    For detailed instructions on editing, cloning, and managing saved Line Templates, see the Templates documentation.

    Line Performance Tab

    Overview

    The Line Performance tab provides a detailed view of delivery, pacing, bidding activity, inventory availability, daily performance, blockers, troubleshooting checks, and video performance for an individual Line.

    Use this tab to monitor whether a Line is delivering as expected, understand how efficiently it is bidding and winning impressions, identify possible delivery restrictions, and review detailed performance metrics over time.

    The tab includes the following sections:

    • Full Report Link: Opens Standard Reporting with the applicable Advertiser, Campaign, and Line preselected for an easy dashboard view of the Line’s reporting.
    • Line Metrics: Summary tiles for the selected reporting interval, including Impressions, Total Cost, Revenue, CPM, pacing, and Daily Budget.
    • Inventory Availability: Run and review Inventory Availability reports using the Line’s current configuration.
    • Bid Data: Review eligible requests, bids, impressions, confirmed spend, competitive metrics, and bid-to-impression ratios.
    • Blockers: Review categories of bid requests being blocked before becoming eligible.
    • Troubleshoot Checks: Run delivery diagnostics for status, budgets, Creatives, Deals, Targeting compatibility, bidding, Dayparts, and other serving requirements.
    • Line Daily Performance: Compare daily performance metrics in charts and tables and export results to CSV.
    • Video Events: Review and export video completion metrics for applicable Lines.

    Line Metrics

    At the top of the Performance tab, use the Reporting Interval filter to control the date range displayed in the summary metrics. All Reporting Intervals except Yesterday include data from the current day. Today’s metrics update hourly and have an approximately three-hour delay.

    Available metrics include:

    • Report Date: The selected report date or date range.
    • Impressions: Total impressions served by the Line during the selected Reporting Interval.
    • Total Cost: Total Line spend, including media cost and applicable margins or fees.
    • Revenue: The total Line revenue, calculated as Total Cost plus the applicable margin.
    • Total Cost CPM: Total cost per thousand impressions, calculated as (Total Cost / Impressions) × 1,000.
    • Line Pacing: The percentage of budget spent compared with perfect pacing based on the Line’s dates and budget. This metric updates daily and uses delivery through yesterday. Optimal pacing is generally between 90% and 110%.
    • Line Daily Pacing: The percentage of the daily allocated budget spent compared with the perfect daily pacing target. This metric updates daily and uses delivery through yesterday. Optimal pacing is generally between 90% and 110%.
    • Daily Budget: The Line’s targeted budget for the current day after accounting for the Budget Multiplier and selected pacing algorithm.

    Inventory Availability

    The Inventory Availability section allows users to create and review Inventory Availability reports directly from the Line.

    Inventory Availability helps users understand whether inventory is available for the Line’s current configuration before or while troubleshooting delivery. It can be used to estimate available scale, validate that Targeting is not overly restrictive, and identify where configuration changes may increase eligible inventory.

    This can be especially helpful when:

    • A Line is showing limited or no delivery and you want to confirm whether eligible inventory exists.
    • Evaluating the intersection of Campaign- and Line-level Targeting.
    • Reviewing available inventory before adjusting bids, budgets, or other delivery settings.

    Select Run Report to generate a new Inventory Availability report using the Line’s current configuration.

    The report is generated using:

    • Inventory type
    • Creative type
    • Advertiser
    • Campaign
    • Line
    • Effective Targeting: The intersection of Campaign- and Line-level Targeting.
    • Audiences: Line-level Audiences are automatically included.
      • Campaign-level Audiences are not automatically included. If Campaign-level Audiences apply, manually add an additional Audience group before running the report.
      • See Boolean Logic for details on Any and All logic between Audience groups.

    Important: Inventory Availability estimates potential inventory based on the selected configuration. It does not guarantee delivery. Actual delivery can also be affected by factors such as bids, budgets, pacing, Creative eligibility, Frequency & Recency, Deal availability, auction competition, and other serving requirements.

    After a report is submitted, it appears in the Inventory Availability report table for the Line.

    The table includes:

    • Report Status: Shows whether the report is processing, complete, or has an issue.
    • Report ID: Unique identifier for the report.
    • Report Name: Generated using the Line Name and date. Select the Report Name to open the full report.
    • Date Submitted: The date the report was created.

    Reports are ordered by Date Submitted, with the newest reports shown first.

    Results

    Once the report has finished processing, select the Report Name to review the results.

    Use the results to understand the available inventory for the evaluated configuration and identify whether changes to Targeting or Audience criteria may provide additional scale.

    For a detailed explanation of the report and its results, see Inventory Availability Tool.

    Bid Data

    The Bid Data section provides near-real-time insight into the Line’s bid funnel and delivery activity.

    Use the Time Frame filter to adjust the period displayed. Available options include 15 minutes, 1 hour, 12 hours, and 1 day, with data shown in 5-minute intervals.

    Available metrics include:

    • Eligible Requests: Bid requests that meet the applicable Targeting criteria.
    • Bids: Bids placed on Eligible Requests.
    • Imps: Confirmed impressions served after winning an auction.
    • Confirmed Spend: Confirmed spend generated by served impressions.
    • Avg Eligible Lines: The average number of Lines competing for inventory also eligible for this Line.
    • Competitive Position: Indicates how competitive the Line is relative to other eligible Lines. Values closer to 1 indicate a stronger competitive position.

    The section also includes Bid/Imp Ratios for additional insight into how frequently Eligible Requests result in Bids and how frequently Bids result in Impressions.

    For complete metric definitions, Bid/Imp Ratio interpretation, and guidance on using Bid Data to diagnose delivery issues, see Bid Data.

    Bid/Imp Ratios

    The Bid/Imp Ratios section provides additional insight into how Eligible Requests move through bidding and auction delivery.

    Available options and metrics include:

    • Time Frame: Select 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, or 48 hours. Data is displayed in hourly increments.
    • Imps to Bids Ratio: Shows how frequently submitted Bids result in won Impressionss.
    • Bids to Eligible Bids Ratio: Shows how frequently the platform places a Bid after a request passes Targeting eligibility.

    Users can hover over either chart to view the timestamp and ratio value for a specific point in time.

    Use these ratios alongside the main Bid Data metrics to help identify whether delivery is being restricted between Eligible Requests and Bids or between Bids and Impressions.

    For detailed ratio definitions, interpretation guidance, and recommended troubleshooting steps, see Bid Data.

    Blockers

    The Blockers section shows which categories are preventing bid requests from becoming eligible for the Line.

    Blocked requests are grouped into categories including:

    • Geography
    • Deals
    • Inventory
    • Day Parting
    • Audiences
    • Creative

    Hover over a category to view its Blocked % and Total Blocked. Use the legend to hide or restore categories and rescale the chart.

    Because blocker categories are calculated independently, the same request may be blocked by more than one category.

    Use Blockers to identify which restrictions are having the greatest impact on Eligible Requests, then review the applicable Targeting or serving configuration.

    For detailed definitions and guidance on interpreting the graph, see Blockers Graph.

    Troubleshoot Checks

    The Troubleshoot section on the Line Performance tab automatically runs a series of checks to help identify common delivery blockers related to Campaign and Line setup, Audiences, Creatives, Deals, budgets, Dayparts, Targeting, bidding, and auction performance.

    Troubleshoot Checks

    The Troubleshoot section on the Line Performance tab automatically runs a series of checks to help identify common delivery blockers related to Campaign and Line setup, Audiences, Creatives, Deals, budgets, Dayparts, Targeting, bidding, and auction performance.

    Troubleshoot Checks can return:

    • Pass: The applicable delivery requirement is satisfied.
    • Warning: The check could not be fully verified or part of the configuration requires review.
    • Fail: The check identified a condition that may prevent or limit delivery.

    Available checks include:

    • Advertiser, Campaign, and Line Status: Confirms that the Advertiser, Campaign, and Line are all Active.
    • Associated Audience Valid Records: Confirms that associated Audiences contain valid records that can be used for Targeting.
    • Auction Win Validation: Confirms that the Line has recently won auctions and served Impressions.
    • Bid Price vs. Deal Floor Validation: Confirms that the Line’s bid meets or exceeds the floor price of targeted Deals.
    • Creative Active Status: Confirms that at least one associated Creative is Active.
    • Creative Approval Status: Confirms that at least one associated Creative is approved and eligible to serve.
    • Creative Duration Compatibility: Confirms that at least one associated video or audio Creative duration is supported by the targeted Deals.
    • Creative Size Compatibility: Confirms that at least one associated Creative size is supported by the targeted Deals.
    • Creative Sensitive Category Compatibility: Confirms that Creatives with sensitive categories are targeted to inventory that allows those categories.
    • Daily Budget: Confirms that the Line has a calculated Daily Budget greater than zero and has remaining budget available to spend.
    • Dayparts Status: Confirms whether the Line is currently inside an active Daypart window and eligible to serve.
    • Deal Bid Request Availability: Confirms that targeted Deals are actively sending bid requests.
    • Deal Device Type Compatibility: Confirms that targeted Device Types align with Device Types observed on the targeted Deals.
    • Deal Exchange Compatibility: Confirms that targeted Exchanges align with the Exchanges serving the targeted Deals.
    • Deal Inventory Type Compatibility: Confirms that the Line’s selected Inventory Type is compatible with at least one targeted Deal.
    • Deal Media Type Compatibility: Confirms that the associated Creative type is compatible with the Media Type of at least one targeted Deal.
    • Deal Publisher Approval Status: Confirms that applicable publisher approval requirements have been satisfied.
    • Deal Required Field Presence: Confirms that targeted Deals are passing any fields required for the Line’s configuration.
    • Deal Targeting Intersection: Confirms that Campaign- and Line-level Deal Targeting overlap.
    • Device Targeting Intersection: Confirms that Campaign- and Line-level Device Targeting overlap.
    • Exchange Targeting Intersection: Confirms that Campaign- and Line-level Exchange Targeting overlap.
    • Geo Targeting Intersection: Confirms that Campaign- and Line-level Geo Targeting overlap.
    • Microsoft Creative Audit Approval: When applicable, confirms that at least one associated Creative is approved for the Microsoft exchange.

    Use Troubleshoot Checks together with Bid Data, Blockers, and Inventory Availability to determine where delivery may be restricted.

    Note: If no Deals are targeted and the Line is using open exchange inventory, Deal-specific checks are treated as not applicable.

    For complete Pass, Warning, and Fail messages, detailed check logic, and recommended troubleshooting steps, see Troubleshoot Feature.

    Line Daily Performance

    The Line Daily Performance section provides a day-by-day view of the Line’s delivery, cost, conversions, and other performance metrics.

    Performance Chart

    Use the chart to compare two selected metrics across the Line’s daily performance. Use the dropdowns in the upper-right corner of the chart to select the metrics to compare. The chart can also be filtered to display:

    • Only Days with Data: Displays only dates where activity was recorded.
    • All Days: Displays all dates in the reporting period, including dates with no activity.

    Available metrics include:

    • Imps: Total Impressions served by the Line.
    • Media Cost: Media spend before additional margins or fees.
    • Total Cost: Total Line cost, including applicable media costs and fees.
    • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per thousand Impressions, calculated as (Total Cost / Impressions) × 1,000.
    • IP Conversions: Conversions attributed using IP-based conversion tracking.
    • Chrome Convs: Conversions recorded through Chrome conversion tracking.
    • Clicks: Total ad Clicks.
    • CTR: Percentage of Impressions that resulted in a Click, calculated as (Clicks / Impressions) × 100.
    • CPC: Average Total Cost per Click, calculated as Total Cost / Clicks.
    • Transparency Score: Score representing the level of transparency available for the Line’s inventory.
    • Foot Traffic Attributed Visitors: Visitors attributed to the Line through Foot Traffic Reporting.
    • Revenue: Total Cost plus the applicable margin.
    • Media Cost CPM: Media Cost per thousand Impressions, calculated as (Media Cost / Impressions) × 1,000.
    • Data Cost: Cost associated with Audience data used for Targeting.
    • Foot Traffic Cost: Cost associated with Foot Traffic Reporting.
    • Credit Card Fee: Applicable credit card processing fees.
    • Hosting Fee: Applicable Creative hosting fees.
    • ART Fee: Cost associated with applicable ART usage.
    • Contextual Fee: Cost associated with Contextual AI usage.
    • Chalice Fee: Cost associated with applicable Chalice services.

    Daily Performance Table and CSV Export

    The table below the chart provides the Line’s daily performance data in a tabular format.

    To export the data:

    1. Navigate to the Line Daily Performance table.
    2. Select the download button on the right side of the table search bar.
    3. A CSV containing the selected Line Daily Performance metrics will be downloaded.

    The CSV can include:

    • Date (M/d/yyyy): Calendar date in a readable format.
    • Date (yyyyMMdd): Calendar date in numeric reporting format.
    • Imps: Total Impressions served.
    • Media Cost: Media spend before additional fees or margins.
    • Total Cost: Total Line cost including applicable fees.
    • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per 1,000 Impressions.
    • IP Conversions: Conversions attributed through IP-based tracking.
    • Clicks: Total ad Clicks.
    • CTR: Percentage of Impressions that resulted in a Click.
    • CPC: Average Total Cost per Click.
    • Transparency Score: Measure of inventory transparency.
    • Foot Traffic Attributed Visitors: Visitors attributed through Foot Traffic Reporting.
    • Revenue: Total Cost plus the applicable margin.
    • Media Cost CPM: Media Cost per 1,000 Impressions.
    • Data Cost: Cost associated with Audience data.
    • Foot Traffic Cost: Cost associated with Foot Traffic Reporting.
    • Credit Card Fee: Applicable credit card processing fee.
    • Hosting Fee: Applicable Creative hosting fee.
    • ART Fee: Cost associated with ART usage.
    • Contextual Fee: Cost associated with Contextual AI usage.
    • Chalice Fee: Cost associated with Chalice usage.

    To customize the metrics displayed in the table and included in the CSV, select the three-line column selector in the upper-right corner of the table and select or deselect the desired metrics.

    Completion Events

    The Completion Events dropdown section provides a table with detailed video and audio performance metrics for the Line. The table can also be downloaded as a CSV file.

    Available metrics include:

    • Date: The reporting date for the video or audio event metrics.
    • Imps: The number of times the video or audio ad was served.
    • Spend Per Complete: The average cost for each fully completed video or audio ad.
    • Starts: The number of times the video or audio ad started.
    • 25% Complete: The number of video or audio ads played through at least 25% of the duration.
    • 50% Complete: The number of video or audio ads played through at least 50% of the duration.
    • 75% Complete: The number of video or audio ads played through at least 75% of the duration.
    • 100% Complete: The number of video or audio ads played through the full duration.
    • Completion Rate: The percentage of Starts that reached 100% Complete, calculated as (100% Complete ÷ Starts) × 100.

    All metrics listed above are available for export. To customize the metrics included in the CSV file, select the three-line column selector in the upper-right corner of the table and select or deselect the desired Line metrics.

    Inventory Overview

    The Inventory section provides the tools used to identify, organize, and target the Sites, App Bundles, and Deals where Campaigns and Lines may be eligible to serve.

    From the Inventory tab, users can:

    • Create and manage custom Site Lists, App Lists, and Deal Lists
    • Browse available Deals
    • View and manage Negotiated Deals
    • Review inventory availability, pricing, Media Types, Inventory Types, Device Types, publisher requirements, and other Deal details
    • Review sample bid requests to better understand available inventory
    • Import eligible Negotiated or Programmatic Guaranteed Deals
    • Use Inventory resources for targeting at the Campaign or Line level

    er targeting settings, such as Device Type, Media Type, Deal, Site, App, Geography, Audience, or Creative requirements, do not align.

    Inventory Hierarchy

    Inventory resources are managed from the Inventory tab and can then be associated with Campaigns or Lines for targeting.

    Seat
    ├── Inventory
    │   ├── Site Lists
    │   ├── App Lists
    │   ├── Deal Lists
    │   ├── Deals
    │   └── Negotiated Deals
    └── Advertisers
        └── Campaigns
            └── Lines

    Custom Site, App, and Deal Lists created in the Inventory tab become available within the applicable Campaign and Line Targeting sections. Deals can also be targeted directly at either level. When targeting is applied at both the Campaign and Line levels, the settings must remain aligned for inventory to remain eligible.

    Inventory Targeting

    Inventory targeting determines the environments and supply sources where a Campaign or Line is eligible to serve. Inventory settings should align with the Line’s media strategy, Creatives, Devices, Deals, and other targeting requirements.

    Inventory Type

    • Web: Ads serve within web browsers across supported desktop, laptop, and mobile environments.
    • In App: Ads serve within supported applications.
    • Combined: Includes both Web and In App inventory on the same Line.
      • Combined allows the Line to receive both Web and In App inventory; it does not require an individual bid request to contain both a Site Domain and App Bundle.

    The selected Inventory Type should align with other Line settings:

    • Site Lists are used with Web inventory.
    • App Lists are used with In App inventory.
    • Deals should support the selected Inventory Type.
    • Device Types should align with the devices observed in the available inventory.
    • Media Type and Creative Type should align with the inventory available through the targeted Deals.

    Inventory Source

    • Open Exchange: Inventory made available through supply-side platforms (SSPs) in an open real-time bidding marketplace across many publishers.
      • A Line can access Open Exchange inventory without targeting a Deal.
    • Private Marketplace (PMP) Deals: Publisher-defined inventory made available through a private auction using a Deal ID.
    • Programmatic Guaranteed (PG) Deals: Direct publisher agreements with fixed pricing and guaranteed inventory volume. Targeting and delivery requirements are primarily defined by the publisher.

    Inventory sources can be further refined using Sites, Apps, Deals, Deal Lists, Exchanges, Device Types, Audiences, Geography, and other Campaign or Line targeting settings.

    How Inventory Eligibility Works

    Inventory eligibility is determined by all applicable Campaign and Line settings working together. Each additional targeting setting further refines the inventory that is eligible to receive a bid.

    For example, a Line may first be limited by its Inventory Type, then further restricted by the selected Inventory Source, Deals, Sites or Apps, Exchanges, Device Types, Media Type, and other targeting requirements.

    Inventory Type
    ↓
    Inventory Source / Deals
    ↓
    Sites or Apps
    ↓
    Exchanges / Device Types
    ↓
    Media and Creative Requirements
    ↓
    Other Campaign and Line Targeting
    ↓
    Eligible Inventory

    An incoming bid request must satisfy all applicable targeting requirements to remain eligible. Adding more targeting does not expand available inventory; it further restricts the set of requests that can qualify.

    Campaign level and Line level targeting are also evaluated together. If an inventory requirement is configured at both levels, the settings must be compatible for inventory to remain eligible.

    Inventory Lists

    Inventory Lists Overview

    Inventory Lists allow users to group commonly used Site Domains, App Bundles, or Deals into reusable lists that can be applied across multiple Advertiser Campaigns and Lines.

    Inventory Lists include:

    • Site Lists: Groups of website domains used for Web inventory targeting.
    • App Lists: Groups of App Bundles used for In App inventory targeting.
    • Deal Lists: Groups of Deals that can be reused across Campaigns and Lines.

    Site and App List Targeting

    Site and App Lists should be used based on the selected Inventory Type:

    • Web: Use Site Lists to allow or block website domains.
    • In App: Use App Lists to allow or block App Bundles.
    • Combined: Eligible for both Web and In App inventory, so Site and App targeting should be configured carefully based on the intended strategy.

    Do not apply both a Site Allow List and an App Allow List to the same Campaign or Line. When both Allow Lists are applied, a bid request must satisfy both targeting criteria to be eligible. Since Web requests typically pass a Site Domain and In App requests typically pass an App Bundle, requiring both will generally prevent delivery.

    If the intended strategy is to allow specific Sites for Web inventory and specific Apps for In App inventory, separate the strategy into different Lines:

    • Web Line: Select Web as the Inventory Type and apply the Site Allow List.
    • In App Line: Select In App as the Inventory Type and apply the App Allow List.

    If needed, clone the existing Line and separate the Site and App targeting between the two Lines. This allows each inventory type to be evaluated against the appropriate Allow List.

    Block Lists can still be used where appropriate to exclude unwanted Sites or Apps.

    Site Lists

    Site Lists group website domains for targeting across Campaigns and Lines. They are intended for Web inventory and can be applied as either an Allow List or Block List.

    If no Site List is applied, domain targeting remains open by default, subject to any other Campaign or Line Targeting settings.

    Create Custom Site Lists

    1. Navigate to the Inventory tab.
    2. Select New Site List.
    3. Name the new Site List.
    4. Enter each website on a new line.
      • Include the applicable top-level domain, second-level domain, and subdomain when needed.
      • Do not include the URL scheme, such as https://.
      • Do not include page paths or subdirectories.
      • Use wildcard targeting, such as *.abc.com, when you want to target subdomains of a domain.
    5. Save the Site List.

    Once saved, the Site List becomes available for use in Campaign and Line Targeting.

    Use a Site List in Campaign or Line Targeting

    Site Lists can be applied at the Campaign and/or Line level.

    1. Open the applicable Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
    2. Navigate to Targeting.
    3. Select Edit Targeting.
    4. Open Inventory > Site Lists.
    5. Search for the Site List by Name.
    6. Select the green plus sign (+) to add the Site List.
      • To remove a Site List from targeting select the red minus sign (-).
    7. Select how the list should be applied:
      • Allow List: Limits eligible Web inventory to domains included in the Site List.
      • Block List: Prevents the Campaign or Line from serving on domains included in the Site List.
    8. Save the Targeting changes and submit the Campaign or Line update.

    If Site List Targeting is applied at both the Campaign and Line levels, the settings are evaluated together. The resulting inventory must satisfy the applicable Targeting requirements at both levels.

    Example: If a Campaign Allow List includes example.com and publisher.com, but the Line Allow List includes only example.com, the Line is effectively limited to example.com.

    Wildcard Example: *.abc.com can be used to target subdomains such as news.abc.com, sports.abc.com, and www.abc.com.

    App Lists

    App Lists group App Bundles for targeting across Campaigns and Lines. An App Bundle is the unique application identifier passed in the bid request and can be used to allow or block specific apps from serving.

    Once created, an App List can be reused across multiple Campaigns and Lines.

    Create Custom App Lists

    1. Navigate to the Inventory tab.
    2. Select New App List.
    3. Name the new App List.
    4. Enter each App Bundle on a new line in the following format:
      • Line Format: App Bundle
      • Line Example: com.king.candycrushsaga
    5. Save the App List.

    Once saved, the App List becomes available for use in Campaign and Line Targeting.

    Use an App List in Campaign or Line Targeting

    App Lists can be applied at the Campaign and/or Line level.

    1. Open the applicable Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
    2. Navigate to Targeting.
    3. Select Edit Targeting.
    4. Open Inventory > App Lists.
    5. Search for the App List by Name.
    6. Select the green plus sign (+) to add the App List.
    7. Select how the list should be applied:
      • Allow List: Limits eligible App inventory to App Bundles included in the App List.
      • Block List: Prevents the Campaign or Line from serving on App Bundles included in the App List.
    8. Save the Targeting changes and submit the Campaign or Line update.

    If App List Targeting is applied at both the Campaign and Line levels, the settings are evaluated together. The resulting inventory must satisfy the applicable Targeting requirements at both levels.

    Example: If a Campaign Allow List includes com.publisher.app1 and com.publisher.app2, but the Line Allow List includes only com.publisher.app1, the Line is effectively limited to com.publisher.app1.

    App Name Targeting

    In addition to targeting by App Bundle ID through App Lists, users can target inventory directly by App Name at the Campaign or Line level.

    App Name Targeting uses the app name passed in the bid request and can be configured as an Allow List or Block List.

    This can be useful when targeting specific apps by their recognizable name rather than by App Bundle ID.

    For more information on configuring App Name Targeting, see the applicable Inventory Targeting Methods documentation.

    Deal Lists

    Deal Lists allow users to group multiple Deals into a reusable list that can be applied across Campaigns and Lines. They are useful when the same group of Deals will be targeted across multiple strategies.

    Create Custom Deal Lists

    1. Navigate to the Inventory tab.
    2. Select New Deal List.
    3. Name the Deal List.
    4. Add Deals from the available Deals table using the green plus sign (+).
      • To remove a Deal, use the red minus sign (−).
    5. Save the Deal List.

    Once saved, the Deal List becomes available for use in Campaign and Line Targeting.

    Use a Deal List in Campaign or Line Targeting

    Deal Lists can be applied at the Campaign and/or Line level.

    1. Open the applicable Campaign or Line in Edit Mode.
    2. Navigate to Targeting.
    3. Select Edit Targeting.
    4. Open Inventory > Deal Lists.
    5. Search for the Deal List by Name.
    6. Select the green plus sign (+) to add the Deal List.
    7. Save the Targeting changes and submit the Campaign or Line update.

    If Deal List Targeting is applied at both the Campaign and Line levels, the settings are evaluated together. The resulting inventory must satisfy the applicable Deal Targeting requirements at both levels.

    Example: If a Campaign targets a Deal List containing Deals A, B, and C, but the Line targets a Deal List containing only Deals B and C, the Line is effectively limited to Deals B and C.

    Deals

    The Deals section displays the Deals available through Pontiac. Use the table to evaluate inventory availability and determine whether a Deal aligns with the Campaign or Line’s media, inventory, device, Creative, geographic, and bidding requirements.

    Users can download the table as a CSV for additional review.

    Deal Table Fields

    The Deals table includes the following columns:

    • Deal ID: Pontiac Deal ID.
    • Name: The deal name. This field is editable.
    • Avails: The estimated number of bid requests observed for the Deal during the selected Reporting Interval. Avails indicates available request volume and should not be interpreted as expected impressions or guaranteed delivery.
    • Deal Provider: The provider associated with the deal.
    • Brand: The brand associated with the deal.
    • Content Type: The content type associated with the deal.
    • Media Type: The media type that the deal is set up to serve.
      • Video – Streaming/CTV
      • Video – Online (OLV)
      • Video – Combined
      • Audio – Combined
      • Audio – Podcast
      • Audio – Streaming
      • Display
      • Native
      • Unspecified
    • Exchanges: The exchange the deal is served through.
      • Magnite (DV+)
      • Freewheel
      • Index
      • Magnite
      • Microsoft
      • Triton
      • Adswizz
    • Floor Price: The minimum CPM required to bid on the Deal.
      • Use the Floor Price as a starting point for bid guidance. For the Max Bid, it is generally recommended to begin approximately $2-5 above the Floor Price to remain competitive in the RTB auction. Once the Line is achieving the desired scale, gradually test lower bids to identify the most efficient bid level while maintaining delivery.
    • Recommended Bid: The recommended bid price for the deal.
    • Livestream: Indicates whether live content is coming through the deal. Hover over this field to see the percentage breakdown by type.
      • Livestream
      • VOD
      • Unknown
    • Duration: The creative duration intervals coming through the deal. Hover over this field to see the percentage breakdown by duration.
      • 15s
      • 30s
      • 45s
      • 60s
      • 90s
    • Sizes: The creative sizes coming through the deal. Hover over this field to see the percentage breakdown by size.
    • Auction Type: The auction types coming through the deal. Hover over this field to see the percentage breakdown by auction type.
      • First Price
      • Second Price Plus
    • Device Types: The device types coming through the deal. Hover over this field to see the percentage breakdown by device type.
      • Mobile/Tablet
      • Personal Computer
      • Connected TV
      • Phone
      • Tablet
      • Connected Device
      • Set Top Box
      • Unknown
    • Countries: Shows the countries associated with the Deal. This field is populated based on observed Deal traffic. Hover over the field to view the percentage breakdown by country.
    • Permitted Sensitive Categories: The sensitive categories that are allowed to serve on the deal. Possible values include:
      • Beer & Wine
      • CBD
      • Cannabis
      • Firearms & Weapons
      • Gambling
      • Lawyer
      • Liquor
      • Pharma
      • Political
      • Religion
      • Tobacco
    • Publisher Approval Required: Indicates whether additional publisher approval is required for the Deal. If required, the applicable approval group may include:
      • ABC News
      • Approved by Freewheel
      • Disney XP
      • Disney+
      • ESPN
      • Hulu
      • Samsung Political
    • Notes: Additional notes associated with the Deal.
    • Start Date: The deal start date, if applicable.
    • End Date: The deal end date, if applicable.
    • Last Served Date: The most recent date the Deal served.
    • Action: Indicates whether the Deal is already available or whether access can be requested.
      • All deals will be approved within 24 hours after being requested.
      • Once approved, these can be targeted by individually targeting them or by creating a Deal List and adding them to the Campaign targeting section.
    • Creative Types: Shows the creative types the deal serves to and the percentage breakdown for each creative type. Possible values include:
      • Video
      • Audio
      • Banner
      • HTML5
      • Native
    • Inventory Types: Shows the inventory type of the deal. Hover over this field to see the percentage breakdown by inventory type. Possible values include:
      • Web
      • In App
      • Combined

    Checking Deal Compatibility

    When selecting a Deal, compare the Campaign or Line configuration against the corresponding fields in the Deals table to confirm that the inventory supports the intended strategy. Targeting a Deal does not override other Campaign or Line targeting requirements. Requests from the Deal must still satisfy all applicable Inventory Type, Device, Geography, Audience, Creative, and other targeting settings.

    Campaign / Line SettingDeals Table Field
    Inventory TypeInventory Types
    Media strategyMedia Type
    Creative formatCreative Types
    Device targetingDevice Types
    Exchange targetingExchanges
    Country targetingCountries
    Video/Audio durationDuration
    Creative sizeSizes
    Livestream targetingLivestream
    Sensitive CreativePermitted Sensitive Categories
    Creative approvalPublisher Approval Required
    Bid configurationFloor Price / Recommended Bid
    Available scaleAvails

    A Deal may align with one setting but still be ineligible because of another. Review the applicable fields together when configuring or troubleshooting Campaign delivery.

    Sample Bid Requests

    Select a hyperlinked Deal Name in the Inventory > Deals or Inventory > Negotiated Deals table to review sample bid requests received for that Deal. Sample requests provide a closer look at the inventory attributes being passed to Pontiac by the publisher or SSP.

    Users can review or download these logs when validating Deal setup, confirming available inventory, or troubleshooting why a Deal may not align with Campaign or Line targeting.

    The fields available in a sample request may vary depending on the Exchange, publisher, Media Type, and Inventory Type.

    When troubleshooting delivery, compare the values observed in the sample bid requests with the applicable Campaign and Line targeting settings. A Deal may be receiving bid requests but still be ineligible to serve if the incoming requests do not satisfy all configured targeting requirements.

    The deal_id value in the sample logs corresponds to the RTB Deal ID / External Deal ID rather than the Pontiac internal Deal ID.

    Sample Download: For reference, download sample bid requests for Spectrum-LiveSports-CTV-OTT-Freewheel (Pontiac Deal ID: 556) to see an example of the inventory information available in these logs.

    Spectrum-LiveSports-CTV-OTT-Freewheel Sample LogsDownload

    Inventory Type Compatibility

    The Line’s selected Inventory Type must be compatible with the inventory available through the targeted Deal:

    • Web Line: Compatible with Deals showing Web or Combined under Inventory Types.
    • In App Line: Compatible with Deals showing In App or Combined under Inventory Types.
    • Combined Line: Compatible with Deals showing Web, In App, or Combined inventory.

    For example, an In App Line targeting a Deal that only shows Web inventory would not be eligible to serve through that Deal.

    For example, an In App Line targeting a Deal that only shows Web inventory would not be eligible to serve through that Deal.

    A compatible Inventory Type does not guarantee that the Deal is fully aligned with the Line. Review other applicable fields, including Media Type, Creative Types, Device Types, Exchanges, Countries, Duration, Sizes, and any publisher or Creative requirements.

    Requesting and Targeting Deals

    Deal access requests are generally approved within 24 hours. Once a Deal is available to the Seat, it can be targeted individually or through a Deal List.

    To target an individual Deal:

    1. Navigate to the applicable Campaign or Line.
    2. Open Targeting > Deals.
    3. Search for the Deal by Pontiac Deal ID or Name.
    4. Select the green + button to associate the Deal.
    5. Save the Targeting window and the Campaign or Line.

    The Floor Price provides guidance for the minimum bid required to participate in the auction. Because Deals still operate in an RTB environment, competitive bids may be required to achieve the desired scale. Use the Recommended Bid field, when available, as additional guidance.

    Deal Identifiers Explained

    ID, Name, and RTB Deal ID

    Each Deal and Negotiated Deal in the platform is associated with three key identifiers:

    1. ID: A unique internal numeric identifier used by the system.
    2. Name: The human-readable name of the Deal, often used for reporting and navigation.
    3. RTB Deal ID / External Deal ID: The identifier used in RTB auctions to reference the Deal externally.

    Understanding the differences between these identifiers is important for importing Deals, setting targeting, and troubleshooting campaign issues.

    Deals Example

    In the Bidder > Inventory > Deals section, consider the following Deal:

    • ID: 15
    • Name: Magnite-Performance-15-90s-MANY

    If you click the hyperlinked Deal Name in the interface, you can view sample logs. Scroll to the right to locate the column deal_id to locate the Rtb Deal ID: IOA-PI-RON-CTV-Performance-175622-ED

    To target this Deal at the Campaign or Line level:

    1. Navigate to Targeting > Edit Targeting > Deals.
    2. Search by either ID or Name.
    3. Press the green plus button to the left of the deal ID.
    4. Click the Save button on the lower right of the window.
    5. Save the entire Campaign or Line.

    Note: You cannot search by Rtb Deal ID in the targeting interface.

    Negotiated Deals Example

    In the Bidder > Inventory > Negotiated Deals section, consider the following Deal:

    1. ID: 1
    2. Name: Magnite Test
    3. Rtb Deal ID: ioa-pi-tamtest-08302022-000000
      • Clicking the Deal Name allows you to view sample logs. The column deal_id in the logs corresponds to the Rtb Deal ID.

    To target this Deal at the Campaign or Line level:

    1. Navigate to Targeting > Edit Targeting > Deals.
    2. Search using either the ID or Name.
    3. Press the green plus button to the left of the deal ID.
    4. Click the Save button on the lower right of the window.
    5. Save the entire Campaign or Line.

    Note: You cannot search by Rtb Deal ID in the targeting interface.

    Deal Landscape Example

    In the ART Platform > Deal Landscape > Deals table, consider the following Deal:

    • ID: 107
    • Name: Roku-RON-15-90s-MANY
    • External Deal ID: c4d0839f-669b-4e97-bb55-f659ead76335
      • Clicking the Deal Name allows you to view sample logs. The column deal_id in the logs corresponds to the Rtb Deal ID.

    Negotiated Deals

    Negotiated Deals are Deals created directly between the advertiser and a publisher or SSP and made available to the applicable Pontiac Seat.

    The Negotiated Deals section under the Inventory tab displays the Negotiated Deals available to the Seat. These Deals use the same core table fields described in the Deals section above, including Avails, Media Type, Inventory Types, Device Types, Floor Price, Creative Types, and publisher requirements.

    Users can download the table as a CSV for additional review.

    Importing Negotiated Deals

    Users with access can import their own Negotiated Deals directly through the platform. Reach out to your Account Manager or through the Help Center if this feature is not enabled for your Seat.

    When the SSP or publisher sends the Deal to Pontiac, use:

    • Pontiac Intelligence: CTV, Video, or Audio
    • Pontiac – Web: Display

    For full setup instructions, see Import Deal.

    Targeting Negotiated Deals

    Once available, Negotiated Deals can be targeted individually or added to a Deal List for reuse across Campaigns and Lines.

    To target an individual Deal, navigate to the applicable Campaign or Line Targeting > Deals section and select the green + button next to the Deal.

    Use the Floor Price as a starting point for bid guidance. For the Max Bid, it is generally recommended to begin approximately $2–$5 above the Floor Price to remain competitive in the RTB auction. Once the Line is achieving the desired scale, gradually test lower bids to identify the most efficient bid level while maintaining delivery.

    Import Deal

    Users can import their own Negotiated Deals directly through the platform by navigating to Bidder > Inventory > Negotiated Deals > Import Deal. Reach out to your Account Manager or through the Help Center if this feature is not enabled for your Seat.

    When the SSP or publisher sends the Deal to Pontiac, use:

    • Pontiac Intelligence: CTV, Video, or Audio
    • Pontiac – Web: Display

    Steps to Import a Deal

    1. Navigate to the Inventory tab.
    2. On the right-hand side of the Negotiated Deals section, click Import Deal.
      • If the button is not available, reach out to your Account Manager or through the Help Center to request access.
    3. Enter the exact Deal ID supplied by the SSP or publisher.
      • Deal ID formats vary by provider. Common examples include:
        • DVPlus: 13-character string with prefix + hyphen + digits (e.g., MGNI-AP-17821)
        • Freewheel: 14-character string with prefix + hyphens + digits (e.g., FWM-USD-00679)
        • Index: ‘IX’ character prefix + 18 or more alphanumeric string (e.g., IX1MPDSPLiveSportsOTTG4eqZIAR)
        • Magnite: Deal ID formats vary by publisher/SSP and may not match the examples below. Always use the deal ID provided to you. Examples include:
          • 36-character UUID (e.g., 47d1c4fa-8126-46ed-821f-4fde61a3f331)
          • 43-character string with multiple hyphens (e.g., Disney-DXP-Live-IOA-PontiacIntelligence-2025)
          • 32-character string with multiple hyphens + digits (e.g., IOA-PI-BusinessFinance-CTV-176526)
        • Microsoft (MSFT): 7 digit integer (e.g., 2481832)
        • NBC: 12-character string with prefix + zero-padded integer (e.g., NBC-PON-00004)
        • Samsung: 36-character UUID (e.g., 8deb491f-546c-4ee4-bbea-f7cf29e2b41d)
        • Triton: 5-character short alphanumeric (e.g., M3mmD)
    4. Select Import.
    1. After importing the Deal, one of two scenarios will occur:
      1. Deal Already Exists
        • If Pontiac is already receiving the Deal and it exists in the database, the Deal details will populate in the dialog box.
        • Complete any remaining fields and select Save. Once saved, the Deal is available for targeting.
      2. Deal Has Not Yet Been Ingested
        • If Pontiac has not received bid requests for the Deal, a warning will appear indicating that no records are currently available.
        • The Deal can still be created and associated with the Seat in advance.
        • Review Avails once the publisher begins sending traffic to verify that Pontiac is receiving bid requests.
        • For Programmatic Guaranteed (PG) Deals, importing and configuring the Deal in advance is recommended.
    1. Complete the required fields:
      • Name
      • Auction Type
      • Floor Price
      • Media Type
      • PG Deal checkbox, if applicable
    2. Sensitive Supply
      • The Sensitive Supply checkbox supports privacy requirements for certain exchanges and inventory sources by hiding IP data associated with the imported Negotiated Deal.
        • Sensitive Supply: When enabled, IP data is hidden for the associated Deal.
        • Disney Deals: Enable Sensitive Supply for Deals provided by Disney properties, including Hulu, Disney+, ESPN, and ABC. If not selected during import, qualifying Disney inventory is automatically identified through sample bid requests and Sensitive Supply is enabled.
        • AdsWizz and Triton Deals: Sensitive Supply is automatically enabled and cannot be modified for Deals from these exchanges.
    3. Select Save to complete the import.

    Troubleshooting Imported Deals

    • Check Avails: After importing a Deal, review the Avails column in Inventory > Negotiated Deals.
      • Avails represents the approximate number of available bid requests received for the Deal during the selected Reporting Interval. Use this field to confirm that Pontiac has started receiving traffic for the imported Deal.

    If the Deal does not appear or no requests are being received, common causes include:

    • Incorrect Platform Endpoint: Confirm that the publisher or SSP sent the Deal to the correct Pontiac endpoint:
      • Pontiac Intelligence: CTV, Video, or Audio
      • Pontiac – Web: Display
    • Deal Date Issue: Confirm the Deal’s Start Date and End Date with the publisher and/or SSP.
      • If the Start Date is in the future, the Deal may not yet be visible or sending bid requests.
      • If the End Date has passed or was not extended for the current Campaign flight, the Deal may no longer be sending bid requests.

    Best Practices

    • Ask publishers to set the Deal Start Date as immediate rather than matching the Campaign Start Date. This allows the Deal to be configured in advance.
    • If a Deal does not appear, first confirm the platform endpoint and Start Date with the publisher or SSP.
    • If both the Seat and Start Date are correct but the Deal is still unavailable, a synchronization issue may be involved. Requesting a replacement Deal from the publisher may be the fastest resolution.
    • If the replacement Deal still cannot be found, contact your Account Manager or submit a ticket through the Help Center.
    • For PG Deals, import and configure the Deal in advance whenever possible to help ensure the Campaign is ready when publisher-side delivery begins.

    Overview

    Templates allow users to save reusable Campaign and Line configurations so new strategies can be created more quickly and consistently. Instead of rebuilding the same setup each time, a Template can preserve commonly used configuration choices such as targeting, bidding, pacing, Frequency & Recency, and other applicable settings.

    Templates can help:

    • Reduce repetitive Campaign and Line setup
    • Maintain consistent targeting and bidding strategies
    • Standardize commonly used configurations across users and Advertisers
    • Reduce configuration mistakes
    • Quickly recreate successful Campaign or Line structures
    • Build reusable strategies for specific publishers, inventory types, media types, or Campaign goals

    Templates are managed at the Seat level under the Templates tab, where users can view, edit, and clone saved Campaign and Line Templates.

    Template Types

    Pontiac supports two primary types of Templates:

    • Campaign Templates: Save reusable Campaign configurations and can include Campaign setup, targeting, Lines, Pacing & Dayparts, and Frequency & Recency settings.
    • Line Templates: Save reusable individual Line configurations, including applicable setup, bidding, targeting, Pacing & Dayparts, Frequency & Recency, and Foot Traffic Reporting settings.

    Line Templates can be either:

    • Custom Line Templates: Created by users from existing Lines for reuse in future Campaigns.
    • Public Line Templates: Preconfigured Line Templates created and maintained by Pontiac for common publishers, inventory strategies, and media-buying use cases.

    How Templates Work

    Templates provide a reusable starting configuration rather than requiring users to rebuild a Campaign or Line from scratch.

    Configure Campaign or Line

    ↓

    Save as Template

    ↓

    Manage Template at Seat Level

    ↓

    Use Template to create a new Campaign or Line

    ↓

    Review and adjust before launch

    Templates do not remain connected to the Campaigns or Lines created from them.

    • Changes made to a Template apply when the Template is used to create future Campaigns or Lines.
    • Changes made to a Template do not update Campaigns or Lines that were previously created from it.
    • Changes made to a Campaign or Line created from a Template do not update the original Template.
    • Campaigns and Lines created from Templates can be edited after creation.

    Important: Templates provide a starting configuration. Before launch, review the resulting Campaign or Line to confirm that applicable dates, budgets, bids, targeting, pacing, Frequency & Recency settings, Creatives, and other requirements are appropriate for the new Campaign.

    Campaign Template vs. Line Template

    Use a Campaign Template when you want to reuse a broader Campaign structure that may include multiple Lines and Campaign-level settings.

    Common Campaign Template use cases include:

    • Standard Campaign structures used across multiple Advertisers
    • Campaigns that regularly contain the same types of Lines
    • Reusable Campaign-level targeting
    • Standard pacing, Frequency & Recency, Creative management, or budget management configurations
    • Multi-Line strategies that should be recreated together

    Use a Line Template when you want to reuse an individual media-buying, inventory, bidding, or targeting strategy.

    Common Line Template use cases include:

    • Publisher-specific Lines
    • CTV, OLV, Audio, Display, or Native strategies
    • Reusable Deal targeting
    • Standard Device or Inventory Type configurations
    • Consistent bidding strategies
    • Reusable geographic, content, or inventory targeting

    For instructions on using Templates directly from a Campaign or Line workflow, see Campaign Templates and Line Templates.

    Campaign Templates

    Campaign Templates allow users to save and reuse a broader Campaign structure, including applicable Campaign settings, targeting, and selected Lines.

    Use a Campaign Template to Create a New Campaign

    Saved Campaign Templates can be used to create a new Campaign with a previously configured Campaign structure.

    Depending on how the Template was configured, the new Campaign may inherit:

    • Campaign Setup settings
    • Campaign-level Targeting
    • Included Lines and their saved configurations
    • Pacing & Dayparts settings
    • Frequency & Recency settings
    • Applicable Campaign management settings, such as Manage Budgets, Manage Creatives, Manage Dayparts, Programmatic Guaranteed, or Flights

    Using a Campaign Template creates a new Campaign based on the saved Template configuration. The resulting Campaign is independent from the Template and can be edited as needed.

    To create a new Campaign from a Template:

    1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser.
    2. Locate the Campaign Templates section within the Campaigns section.
    1. Select the desired Campaign Template Icon.
    1. A new Campaign will be created using the settings stored in the Template.
    2. Review the Campaign Setup settings inherited from the Template.
    3. Review any Lines included with the Template and confirm that each Line is appropriate for the new Campaign.
    4. Make any Campaign- or Line-specific adjustments needed for the new strategy.
    5. Select Submit to save the Campaign.

    Review the Campaign Before Launch

    Templates provide a starting configuration and should always be reviewed before the Campaign is activated.

    Confirm the following as applicable:

    • Campaign Setup: Review the Campaign Name, Active Status, Budget Type, management settings, and Pacing Time Zone.
    • Dates and Budgets: Enter or update the Campaign dates and budgets required for the new Campaign.
    • Lines: Confirm that the appropriate Lines were included and remove, add, or edit Lines as needed.
    • Line Budgets and Bids: Review Line budgets, Budget Multipliers, bid settings, and any Advanced Bid Controls.
    • Targeting: Confirm that Campaign- and Line-level Targeting is appropriate for the new Advertiser, Campaign, inventory, geography, and strategy.
    • Deals: Confirm that any saved Deal targeting is still applicable and available for the new Campaign.
    • Pacing & Dayparts: Review the saved pacing strategy, Dayparts, and applicable time zone settings.
    • Frequency & Recency: Confirm that the saved Campaign- and Line-level frequency settings are appropriate.
    • Creatives: Associate the applicable Creatives and confirm that Creative management is configured at the intended Campaign or Line level.
    • Pixels: Associate any required tracking Pixels at the appropriate level.
    • Flights: If Flights are enabled, review Flight dates, budgets, included Lines, and applicable Flight settings.
    • Foot Traffic Reporting: If included on any Lines, review the saved locations and reporting configuration.
    • Active Status: Confirm the Campaign and applicable Lines should be Active before launch.

    Important: A Campaign created from a Template does not remain connected to the original Template. Changes made to the Campaign do not update the Template, and future changes to the Template do not update Campaigns that were previously created from it.

    For information on updating the reusable configuration itself, see Edit a Campaign Template.

    Create a Campaign Template

    Campaign Templates can be created from an existing Campaign or from a newly configured Campaign. Save a Campaign as a Template when its structure or multi-Line strategy is expected to be reused.

    To save a Campaign as a Template:

    1. Open the Campaign you want to use as the basis for the Template, or create and configure a new Campaign.
    2. Select Save as Template in the upper-right corner.
    1. Enter a Name, Description, and Icon for the Campaign Template. Name and Icon are required fields.
    1. Select Save.

    All Lines from the source Campaign are included in the Campaign Template by default. Included Lines can be managed after the Template is saved under Templates > Campaign Templates.

    The Campaign Template is then available for future Campaign creation and can be managed from the Seat-level Templates tab.

    For instructions on using the Template, see Use a Campaign Template to Create a New Campaign.

    Find and Manage Campaign Templates

    Saved Campaign Templates are managed at the Seat level from the Templates tab.

    Use this area to locate existing Campaign Templates, review their saved configuration, update the Template for future Campaign creation, or create a new Template variation by cloning an existing one.

    Find a Campaign Template

    To locate an existing Campaign Template:

    1. Navigate to the Templates tab.
    2. Expand the Campaign Templates section.
    3. Locate the Template by its Name, ID, or Description.
    1. Select the Template Name to open the Campaign Template.

    Review a Campaign Template

    Opening a Campaign Template allows users to review the configuration that will be applied when the Template is used to create a new Campaign.

    Depending on the Template configuration, this can include:

    • Template Setup
    • Campaign Setup
    • Included Lines
    • Campaign-level Targeting
    • Pacing & Dayparts
    • Frequency & Recency
    • Other applicable Campaign settings

    Reviewing the Template before use can help confirm that the saved configuration still reflects the intended Campaign structure and strategy.

    • View the saved Campaign configuration.
    • Edit the Template to update its configuration.
    • Clone the Template to create a new variation while preserving the original.

    Changes made to a saved Campaign Template are used when the Template is selected for future Campaign creation. They do not modify Campaigns that were previously created from the Template.

    Template Setup

    Template Setup controls the saved Template itself. These fields describe and manage the reusable Template as an object in the Templates section.

    It includes:

    • Name: The name used to identify the Campaign Template.
    • Active Status: Whether the Campaign Template itself is Active or Inactive.
      • Template Setup > Name / Active Status = the saved Template.
    • Template Description: Describes the intended purpose or strategy of the Template.
    • Icon: The visual identifier used to recognize the Template.

    These settings are about how the Template is identified and managed, not the Campaign that will eventually be created from it. Pasted text

    Campaign Setup

    Campaign Setup controls the Campaign configuration stored inside the Template. These are the settings that will be used as the starting configuration when the Template is selected to create a new Campaign.

    It includes settings such as:

    • Name
    • Code
    • Budget Type
    • Active Status
      • Campaign Setup > Name / Active Status = the new Campaign configuration created from that Template.
    • Manage Budgets
    • Auto Pace
    • Manage Creatives
    • Manage Dayparts
    • Programmatic Guaranteed
    • Enable Flights
    • Pacing Time Zone

    Manage a Campaign Template

    From the Campaign Template page, users can:

    • View the saved Campaign configuration.
    • Edit the Template to change the configuration that will be used for future Campaigns.
    • Manage Included Lines to control which Line structures are recreated with the Campaign.
    • Clone the Template to create a new reusable variation while preserving the original.

    When editing a Campaign Template, changes are saved to the Template itself and are used the next time the Template is selected to create a Campaign.

    Important: Changes made to a Campaign Template do not update Campaigns that were previously created from it. Likewise, changes made to an individual Campaign created from a Template do not update the original Template.

    Edit vs. Clone

    Use Edit when the existing Template should be updated for future use.

    Use Clone when a new Template variation is needed but the original Template should remain unchanged.

    For example, cloning can be useful when creating a second version of an existing Campaign strategy with different Targeting, Lines, pacing settings, or other configuration while preserving the original Template.

    For detailed instructions on modifying a saved Template, see Edit a Campaign Template.

    For instructions on creating a variation of an existing Template, see Clone a Campaign Template.

    Edit a Campaign Template

    Editing a Campaign Template updates the configuration that will be used when the Template is selected to create future Campaigns.

    Changes made to a Campaign Template do not update Campaigns that were previously created from that Template.

    To edit a Campaign Template:

    1. Navigate to Templates > Campaign Templates.
    2. Open the applicable Campaign Template.
    3. Select Edit.
    4. Update the applicable Template sections.
    5. Select Submit to save all changes.

    Template Setup

    The Template Setup section controls the Template itself, including how it is identified and displayed within the Templates section.

    Available fields include:

    • Name: A unique name used to identify the Campaign Template.
    • Active Status: Determines whether the Campaign Template itself is Active or Inactive.
    • Template Description: Describes the intended purpose or strategy of the Template.
    • Icon: Provides a visual identifier that can make the Template easier to recognize.

    These settings apply to the saved Template, not to the Campaign created from it.

    Campaign Setup

    The Campaign Setup section controls the Campaign configuration stored within the Template and used when creating a new Campaign.

    Available fields include:

    • Name: The Campaign Name that will be used as part of the Template configuration.
    • Code: Optional and for reporting purposes.
    • Budget Type: Spend or Impressions
    • Active Status: Determines whether Campaigns created from the Template are Active or Inactive.
    • Manage Budgets: When enabled, Lines included in the Campaign will follow the Campaign Start Date, End Date, and Budget Type. Budgets are allocated to Lines by weights.
    • Auto Pace: Enables automatic Campaign pacing by allowing Line budgets to remain fluid between Lines, helping the Campaign achieve its overall pacing goal.
    • Manage Creatives: Allows Creatives to be managed at the Campaign level.
    • Manage Dayparts: Allows pacing and daypart settings to be managed at the Campaign level.
    • Programmatic Guaranteed:Configures the Campaign for Programmatic Guaranteed delivery. Enabling this option removes previously configured targeting or settings that are not applicable to PG Campaigns. Publisher-side Deal configuration controls targeting and delivery.
    • Enable Flights: Allows Campaign flights to be configured with Start Dates, End Dates, budgets, and applicable rollover settings.
    • Pacing Timezone: Defines the time zone used for Campaign pacing.

    Note: The Name and Active Status fields appear in both Template Setup and Campaign Setup, but they control different things. Template Setup applies to the reusable Template itself, while Campaign Setup applies to the Campaign configuration stored within the Template.

    For complete definitions and behavior of these settings, see Campaign Setup.

    Lines

    The Lines section determines which Lines from the source Campaign are included when the Campaign Template is used to create a new Campaign.

    Campaign Templates include all Lines from the source Campaign by default. Use this section to remove Lines that should not be recreated with the Template.

    To manage included Lines:

    1. Navigate to the Lines section.
    2. Check Include next to each Line that should remain part of the Template.
    3. Uncheck Include next to any Line that should not be included.
    4. Select Submit when all Template edits are complete.

    Use included Lines when the same multi-Line strategy should be recreated together.

    Pacing & Dayparts Section

    If Manage Dayparts is enabled in the Campaign Setup section of the Template, Campaign-level Pacing & Dayparts settings can be stored and edited within the Template.

    To update these settings:

    1. Navigate to the Pacing & Dayparts section within the Campaign Template.
    2. Update the applicable pacing and Daypart settings.
    3. Select Submit when all Template edits are complete.

    The saved Pacing & Dayparts configuration will be used as the starting configuration when the Template is used to create a new Campaign.

    For complete definitions and configuration options, see Pacing & Dayparts.

    Frequency & Recency Section

    If Enable Campaign Frequency is enabled in the Campaign Setup section of the Template, Campaign-level Frequency & Recency settings can be stored and edited within the Template.

    To update these settings:

    1. Navigate to Frequency & Recency.
    2. Update the applicable Frequency & Recency settings.
    3. Select Submit when all Template edits are complete.

    The saved configuration will be applied as the starting Campaign-level Frequency & Recency settings when a new Campaign is created from the Template.

    For complete definitions and configuration options, see Frequency & Recency.

    Targeting Section

    The Targeting section controls the Campaign-level Targeting stored within the Template.

    To update Campaign-level Targeting:

    1. Navigate to the Targeting section within the Campaign Template.
    2. Select Edit Targeting.
    3. Update the applicable targeting settings.
    4. Select Save in the targeting window.
    5. Select Submit when all Template edits are complete.

    Targeting stored in the Template is copied into the new Campaign when the Template is used.

    Important: Review saved Targeting whenever a Template is reused. Targeting that was appropriate for the original Campaign may not be appropriate for a different Advertiser, geography, Deal, inventory strategy, or Campaign objective.

    For details on available Targeting options, see Targeting Methods.

    Clone a Campaign Template

    Cloning allows users to create a new Campaign Template based on an existing Template without modifying the original.

    Use Clone when you want to create a reusable variation of an existing Campaign Template, such as a version with different Campaign settings, included Lines, Pacing & Dayparts, Frequency & Recency, or Targeting.

    To clone a Campaign Template:

    1. Navigate to Templates > Campaign Templates.
    2. Open the Campaign Template you want to clone.
    3. Select Clone.
    4. The Clone Template page will open with the existing Template configuration copied into the new Template.
    5. Update the Template Setup information so the cloned Template can be distinguished from the original.
    6. Review each applicable section and make any changes needed for the new Template variation.
    7. Select Submit to save the cloned Template.

    From the Clone Template page, users can review and update:

    • Template Setup: Update the Template Name, Description, Icon, or Active Status.
    • Campaign Setup: Review the Campaign Name, Code, Budget Type, Active Status, Manage Budgets, Auto Pace, Manage Creatives, Manage Dayparts, Programmatic Guaranteed, and Pacing Time Zone settings.
    • Lines: Review which Lines should be included in the cloned Template.
    • Pacing & Dayparts: Update Campaign-level pacing or Daypart settings when applicable.
    • Frequency & Recency: Update Campaign-level Frequency & Recency settings when applicable.
    • Targeting: Select Edit Targeting to review or change the Campaign-level Targeting stored in the cloned Template.

      The cloned Campaign Template is saved as a separate Template and can be managed independently from the original.

      Important: Changes made to the cloned Template do not affect the original Template, and changes made to the original Template do not affect the clone.

      Use Clone when you want to create another reusable Template configuration. If you want to create an actual Campaign from an existing Template, use the Campaign creation workflow instead.

      For instructions on creating a Campaign from a Template, see Use a Campaign Template to Create a New Campaign.

      Line Templates

      Line Templates allow users to save and reuse individual media buying strategies. Users can create Custom Line Templates or use Public Line Templates provided by Pontiac.

      Use a Line Template to Create a New Line

      Saved Line Templates can be used when creating a new Line within a Campaign.

      Users can select either a Custom Line Template created for the Seat or an available Public Line Template provided by Pontiac.

      To create a new Line from a Template:

      1. Navigate to the applicable Advertiser > Campaign.
      2. Within the Lines section, expand Line Templates.
      3. Locate the desired Template and select its icon.
      4. Enter the required information for the new Line, including:
        • Name
        • Lifetime Impression or Spend Budget
        • Budget Multiplier
      5. Continue into the Line configuration created from the Template.
      6. Review the inherited Line settings and make any Campaign-specific adjustments.
      7. Select Submit to save the Line.

      The new Line uses the configuration stored in the selected Template as its starting point.

      Important: Before launch, review the resulting Line to confirm that applicable budgets, bids, Deals, Targeting, Pacing & Dayparts, Frequency & Recency, Foot Traffic Reporting, and other Line requirements are appropriate for the new Campaign.

      A Line created from a Template can be edited independently. Changes made to the resulting Line do not update the original Template, and future changes to the Template do not update Lines that were previously created from it.

      For the Campaign-level workflow, see Line Templates in the Line documentation.

      Public Line Templates

      Public Line Templates provide preconfigured starting points for common publisher and inventory strategies. Instead of manually configuring every Deal, bid, and Targeting setting, users can select an available Public Line Template and begin with configuration already created by Pontiac.

      Depending on the Template, the resulting Line may include:

      • Relevant Deals
      • Advanced Bid Controls
      • Inventory targeting
      • Publisher-specific configuration
      • Other configuration associated with the strategy

      After selecting a Public Line Template, review the resulting Line and make any changes needed for the new Campaign before launch.

      Available Public Line Templates include:

      • 843 – Spectrum
      • 868 – ESPN
      • 869 – Channel-Network Targeted (Sports Streaming)
      • 870 – NFL
      • 871 – NBA
      • 872 – MLB
      • 873 – College Football 2025
      • 874 – NFL Live
      • 875 – Roku
      • 876 – Fire TV
      • 877 – Paramount
      • 878 – Samsung
      • 879 – Sling
      • 880 – Pluto
      • 881 – Tubi
      • 882 – Fubo
      • 883 – Philo
      • 884 – Scripps
      • 885 – DirectTV
      • 895 – News & Weather
      • 896 – Entertainment
      • 897 – Discovery
      • 898 – Food & Home Channel-Network
      • 907 – Channel-Network Various
      • 909 – High Transparency (Deals with over 80% transparency)

      Create a Line Template

      Custom Line Templates can be created from an existing Line or from a newly configured Line.

      Save a Line as a Template when its bidding, inventory, Targeting, pacing, or other configuration is expected to be reused in future Campaigns.

      To save a Line as a Template:

      1. Open the Line you want to use as the basis for the Template, or create and configure a new Line.
      1. Select Save as Template in the upper-right corner.
      2. Enter a Name, Description, and Icon for the Line Template. Name and Icon are required fields.
      1. Select Save.

      The Line Template is then available for future Line creation and can be managed from the Seat-level Templates tab.

      Find and Manage Line Templates

      Saved Custom Line Templates are managed at the Seat level from the Templates tab.

      Use this area to locate existing Line Templates, review their saved configuration, edit settings that will be used for future Lines, or create a new Template variation by cloning an existing Template.

      Find a Line Template

      1. Navigate to the Templates tab.
      2. Expand the Line Templates section.
      1. Locate the Template by its Name, Description, or Icon.
      2. Select the Template Name to open and review the saved configuration.

      From the Line Template page, users can:

      • View the saved Line configuration
      • Edit the Template
      • Clone the Template to create a separate variation

      Changes made to the Template are used when creating future Lines. They do not update Lines that were previously created from the Template.

      Edit a Line Template

      Editing a Line Template updates the configuration that will be used when the Template is selected to create future Lines. Changes made to a Line Template do not update Lines that were previously created from it.

      To edit a Line Template:

      1. Navigate to Templates > Line Templates.
      2. Open the applicable Line Template.
      3. Select Edit.
      4. Update the applicable Template sections.
      5. Select Submit to save the changes.

      A Line Template can include the following configuration sections:

      • Template Setup
      • Line Setup
      • Pacing & Dayparts, when available
      • Frequency & Recency
      • Targeting

      Template Setup

      The Template Setup section controls the Template itself, including how it is identified and displayed within the Templates section.

      Available fields include:

      • Name: The name used to identify the Line Template.
      • Active Status: Determines whether the Line Template itself is Active or Inactive.
      • Template Description: Describes the intended purpose or strategy of the Template.
      • Icon: Provides a visual identifier that makes the Template easier to recognize.

      The Template ID is also displayed when viewing the Template and can be used to identify the saved Template.

      These settings apply to the reusable Template itself, not to the Line created from it.

      Line Setup

      The Line Setup section controls the Line configuration stored within the Template and used when creating a new Line.

      Available fields include:

      • Name: The Line Name stored in the Template.
      • Inventory Type: Defines whether the Line uses Web, In App, or Combined inventory.
      • Active Status: Determines whether Lines created from the Template are Active or Inactive.
      • Code: Optional and used for reporting purposes.
      • Bid Type: Determines the bidding method used by the Line.
      • Bid Price: Defines the applicable bid price or bidding configuration.
      • Budget Multiplier: Controls the Line’s Budget Multiplier.
      • Enable Foot Traffic Reporting: Enables Foot Traffic Reporting for Lines created from the Template.
      • Foot Traffic Lookback: Defines the lookback window used when Foot Traffic Reporting is enabled.

      Note: The Name and Active Status fields appear in both Template Setup and Line Setup, but they control different things. Template Setup applies to the reusable Line Template itself, while Line Setup applies to the Line configuration stored within the Template.

      For complete definitions and behavior of these settings, see Line Setup.

      Pacing & Dayparts

      The Pacing & Dayparts section stores Line-level pacing and Daypart settings when these settings are available for the Template.

      When Pacing & Dayparts is not managed at the Campaign level:

      1. Navigate to Line’s Pacing & Dayparts.
      2. Update the applicable pacing and Daypart settings.
      3. Select Submit when all Template edits are complete.

      For complete definitions and configuration options, see Pacing & Dayparts.

      Frequency & Recency

      When Line-level Frequency & Recency is enabled for the Template, the saved settings can be reviewed or updated from the Frequency & Recency section.

      1. Navigate to Frequency & Recency.
      2. Update the applicable Frequency & Recency settings.
      3. Select Submit when all Template edits are complete.

      The saved configuration is used as the starting Line-level Frequency & Recency configuration when the Template is used to create a new Line.

      For complete definitions and configuration options, see Frequency & Recency.

      Foot Traffic Reporting

      If Enable Foot Traffic Reporting is enabled in the Line Setup section of the Template, Foot Traffic locations can be stored and managed as part of the Line Template.

      To update Foot Traffic Reporting:

      1. Navigate to the Foot Traffic Reporting section within the Line Template.
      2. Add, edit, or remove the applicable Locations.
        • Locations can be configured using:
          • Address
          • Latitude Longitude (Lat Long)
          • Geofence
          • Bulk Upload
      3. Select Submit when all Template edits are complete.

      The saved Foot Traffic Reporting configuration will be used as the starting configuration when the Template is used to create a new Line.

      For instructions on creating and managing Foot Traffic locations, see Line Foot Traffic Reporting

      Targeting

      The Targeting section controls the Line-level Targeting stored within the Template.

      To update Targeting:

      1. Navigate to Targeting.
      2. Select Edit Targeting.
      3. Update the applicable Targeting settings.
      4. Select Save in the Targeting window.
      5. Select Submit when all Template edits are complete.

      Targeting stored in the Template is copied into the new Line when the Template is used.

      Important: Review saved Targeting whenever a Line Template is reused. Targeting that was appropriate for the original strategy may not be appropriate for a different Campaign, Advertiser, geography, Deal, inventory source, or Campaign objective.

      For available Targeting options, see Targeting Methods.

      Clone a Line Template

      Cloning allows users to create a new Line Template based on an existing Template without modifying the original.

      Use Clone when you want to create a reusable variation of an existing Line Template, such as a version with different bidding, Targeting, inventory, pacing, Frequency & Recency, or other Line settings.

      To clone a Line Template:

      1. Navigate to Templates > Line Templates.
      2. Open the Line Template you want to clone.
      3. Select Clone.
      4. The Clone Template page will open with the existing Template configuration copied into the new Template.
      5. Update the Template Setup information so the cloned Template can be distinguished from the original.
      6. Review and adjust any applicable Line Template settings, including:
        1. Template Setup
        2. Line Setup
        3. Pacing & Dayparts
        4. Frequency & Recency
        5. Foot Traffic Reporting
        6. Targeting
      7. Select Submit to save the cloned Template.

      The cloned Line Template is saved as a separate Template and can be managed independently from the original.

      Important: Changes made to the cloned Template do not affect the original Template, and changes made to the original Template do not affect the clone.

      Use Clone when you want to create another reusable Template configuration. If you want to create an actual Line from an existing Template, use the Line creation workflow instead.

      For instructions on creating a Line from a Template, see Use a Line Template to Create a New Line.

      Reporting Overview

      Reporting Timezones

      Reporting data can be displayed or generated in different timezones depending on the reporting tool and selected settings. When comparing reports or reconciling metrics across Pontiac, confirm that the same timezone is being used.

      • Seat Timezone: The default account timezone configured under Admin > Seat Settings > Preferences. It is used for applicable platform reporting and Advertiser-\ level metrics.
      • Selected Reporting Timezone: Standard Reporting allows users to select the timezone used to display report metrics. The selected timezone applies across the Standard Reporting views.
      • User Timezone: Uses the user timezone offset passed with each impression to display activity based on the local time where the impression was served. If a user timezone offset is unavailable, the impression defaults to UTC.
      • UTC: The standard timezone used for billing and account activity. When reconciling reporting against billing metrics, use UTC.

      Different timezone selections can cause the same activity to appear under different dates or hours. For example, an impression served late in the evening in Pacific Time may fall on the following calendar day when viewed in UTC.

      For the most accurate comparisons, use the same Reporting Interval and Timezone across the reports or platform views being compared.

      Important: Reporting timezones do not control Campaign pacing or dayparting. Pacing and dayparting use the timezone configured for the applicable Campaign or Line.

      Standard Reporting vs Custom Reporting

      The Reporting tab provides tools to analyze Campaign performance, compare delivery across different dimensions, and create downloadable reports for additional analysis.

      Pontiac provides two primary reporting options:

      1. Standard Reporting: An interactive reporting dashboard for reviewing performance directly in the platform. Select an Advertiser, Campaign, and applicable Lines to analyze performance through summary metrics, charts, tables, inventory breakdowns, Creative performance, geographic reporting, and other views.
      1. Custom Reporting: A configurable reporting tool that allows users to select specific Advertisers, Campaigns, Lines, dimensions, metrics, date ranges, and other report settings to generate downloadable reports. Custom Reports can also be scheduled for automated delivery.

      Use Standard Reporting for quick performance analysis and visual comparisons within Pontiac. Use Custom Reporting when you need a specific data breakdown, additional dimensions or metrics, conversion reporting, log-level data, or recurring report delivery.

      Reporting OptionBest ForOutput
      Standard ReportingInteractive Campaign analysis, trends, comparisons, and visualizationsCharts, tables, and CSV downloads within Pontiac
      Custom ReportingDetailed data exports, custom dimensions and metrics, attribution reports, and recurring reportingDownloadable reports or scheduled delivery

      Standard Reporting

      Overview

      Standard Reporting provides an interactive view of performance for selected Advertisers, Campaigns, and Lines. Use the dashboard to review overall delivery, compare performance metrics, analyze inventory and Creative performance, review geographic delivery, and export supporting data for additional analysis.

      Standard Reporting includes the following views:

      • Summary
      • Inventory
      • Creatives
      • Device Type
      • Network
      • Deal
      • Channel
      • App
      • Foot Traffic
      • Geo

      Each view uses the Advertiser, Campaign, Line, Reporting Interval, and applicable Timezone settings selected at the top of the report.

      Create a Standard Report

      To create a Standard Report:

      1. Navigate to Reporting > Standard Reporting.
      2. Select the Advertiser you want to analyze.
      3. Select the applicable Campaign.
      4. Select one or more Lines, if needed.
      5. Select the Timezone used to display reporting metrics.
      6. Select the Reporting Interval.
      7. Select Update to generate the report.

      The selected filters apply across the Standard Reporting views, allowing users to analyze the same reporting scope across Summary, Inventory, Creatives, Device Type, and other sections.

      Users can also open Standard Reporting directly from the Performance tab of an Advertiser, Campaign, or Line by selecting the Full Report Link. The applicable Advertiser, Campaign, and Line fields will automatically populate in Standard Reporting.

      Report Filters & Timezone

      The filters at the top of Standard Reporting determine the data included throughout the report.

      • Advertiser: Select the Advertiser whose performance you want to analyze.
      • Campaign: Select a Campaign associated with the selected Advertiser.
      • Line: Select one or more Lines associated with the selected Campaign. Leave the selection broad when you want to review Campaign-level performance across multiple Lines.
      • Timezone: Select the timezone used to display reporting metrics throughout Standard Reporting. The Volume by Hour heatmap displays data in User Time Zone by default; uncheck Display in User Time Zone to display the heatmap using the selected Standard Reporting Timezone.
      • Reporting Interval: Select the date range used for the report.
      • Update Reporting: Apply the selected filters and refresh the Standard Reporting data.

      The report displays the selected reporting timezone at the top of the page: Metrics are displayed in the selected timezone: {timezone}

      Changing the reporting timezone can cause activity to appear under different dates or hours. When comparing Standard Reporting with another report or platform view, confirm that the same Reporting Interval and Timezone are being used.

      Summary

      The Summary section provides a high-level view of performance for the selected Advertiser, Campaign, Lines, Reporting Interval, and Timezone.

      Use this section to quickly review overall delivery, compare performance metrics over time, identify hourly trends, understand which supply sources are driving impressions, evaluate inventory transparency, and review video completion activity.

      The Summary section includes:

      • Top Tiles: Key reporting metrics for the selected reporting scope.
      • Metric Comparison: Compare two performance metrics over time.
      • Performance Table: Review detailed reporting data and export it as a CSV file.
      • Volume by Hour: Analyze hourly delivery and spend patterns.
      • Supply Breakdown: Review the top Networks, Publishers, Deals, Channels, and Apps by Impressions.
      • Transparency: Review how consistently key inventory identifiers are reported.
      • Video Events: Analyze video playback milestones from Start through Completion.

      Top Tiles

      The Top Tiles provide a quick snapshot of overall performance for the selected reporting scope and interval.

      Available metrics include:

      • Report Date: The selected report date or date range.
      • Impressions: The total number of Impressions served.
      • Total Cost: Total spend, including Media Cost and applicable margins or fees.
      • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per thousand Impressions, calculated as (Total Cost / Impressions) x 1,000.
      • Revenue: Total Cost plus any additional Advertiser Margin.
      • Transparency Score: Indicates the level of inventory transparency and reporting data availability.

      Note: Reporting Intervals that include today may contain partial-day data. Today’s metrics update hourly and have an approximately three-hour delay.

      Metric Comparison Chart

      The Metric Comparison chart allows users to compare two performance metrics over time. Filter the chart to display only dates with activity or all dates within the selected Reporting Interval.

      Available metrics include:

      • Impressions: Total number of Impressions served.
      • Media Cost: Media spend before additional fees or margins.
      • Total Cost: Total spend, including Media Cost and applicable margins or fees.
      • Total Cost CPM: Total Cost per thousand Impressions.
      • Revenue: Total Cost plus any additional Advertiser Margin.
      • VCR: Percentage of video Impressions that played to completion.
      • IP Conversions: Conversions attributed through IP-based conversion tracking.
      • Foot Traffic ‘Attributed Visitors’: Users who were served an Ad and later visited a tracked location.

      Use the chart to compare related performance indicators, such as Impressions vs. Total Cost or Impressions vs. IP Conversions, and identify trends across the Reporting Interval.

      Performance Table

      The Performance Table provides a detailed view of the reporting data shown in the Summary section and can be downloaded for additional analysis.

      • Use the Search bar to locate specific rows.
      • Select the Download icon to export the table as a CSV file.
      • Select the three-line menu in the upper-right corner of the table to choose which metrics are displayed and included in the export.

      Volume by Hour Heatmap

      The Volume by Hour heatmap displays reporting activity by date and hour, helping users identify peak delivery periods and changes in volume throughout the day.

      By default, Display in User Time Zone is checked. When enabled, each impression is displayed using the user timezone associated with the impression. If the checkbox is unchecked, the heatmap is displayed using the Timezone selected at the top of Standard Reporting.

      Use the color key in the upper-right corner to compare relative volume from Low to High. Hover over any cell to view the Total Cost for the corresponding date and hour.

      This view can help users:

      • Identify peak delivery periods
      • Detect unusual spikes or drops in activity
      • Review how delivery aligns with dayparting strategies
      • Compare performance across hours and dates

      Supply Breakdown

      The Supply Breakdown section provides a quick view of the top supply sources driving Impressions for the selected reporting scope.

      The charts display the top 10 performers across:

      • Networks
      • Publishers
      • Deals
      • Channels
      • Apps

      Hover over a chart segment to view the supply source and number of Impressions served. Use this section to quickly identify which publishers, Deals, networks, channels, and Apps are contributing the greatest share of delivery.

      Transparency (% reported)

      The Transparency section shows how consistently key inventory identifiers are reported for the selected Impressions.

      Transparency is displayed for identifiers including:

      • Series
      • Title
      • Network
      • Channel
      • Full IP

      For each identifier, the chart shows:

      • Percentage of Impressions where the value was reported
      • Number of unique values reported
      • Total number of Impressions associated with the category

      Use this section to understand the level of metadata available from the inventory being purchased and identify areas where reporting may be limited.

      Completion Events

      The Completion Events chart shows how Video and Audio Impressions progress through the major playback milestones:

      Start
      ↓
      Q1 – 25%
      ↓
      Q2 – 50%
      ↓
      Q3 – 75%
      ↓
      Complete – 100%

      The chart hover displays the following values for each playback milestone:

      • Completion Rate: The percentage of Eligible Impressions that reached the selected playback milestone.
      • Eligible Impressions: Impressions eligible to be measured for playback completion events.
      • Completed Impressions: Eligible Impressions that reached the selected playback milestone.

      These values are available for Start, Q1 (25%), Q2 (50%), Q3 (75%), and Complete (100%).

      Use the chart to compare the number of Impressions reaching each playback milestone and evaluate overall Video and Audio completion performance. A drop between milestones can help identify where users stop playback before the Creative reaches completion

      Inventory

      The Inventory section includes a chart and table for analyzing Campaign performance across inventory sources.

      The chart can be grouped by:

      • Site Domain
      • Exchange
      • Publisher
      • Series
      • Title
      • Genre

      Available chart metrics include:

      • Total Cost
      • Revenue
      • Total Cost CPM
      • CTR

      The bar chart displays performance for the selected category and metric. Hover over a bar to view the Category Name, Total Impressions, and Total Cost.

      Inventory Table

      The table provides the underlying inventory performance data and includes Impressions along with the available inventory metrics.

      Use the Show dropdown to control the number of results displayed in the chart: 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100.

      To export the data, select the Download icon to the right of the search bar. The table will be exported as a CSV file.

      Select the three-line menu in the upper-right corner of the table to choose which columns are displayed and customize the data included in your view.

      Available columns include:

      • Category: Displays the selected inventory grouping, such as Site Domain, Exchange, Publisher, Series, Title, or Genre.
      • Imps: The total number of Impressions served.
      • Clicks: The total number of clicks.
      • Total Cost: The total cost attributed to the inventory.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser for Impressions served through the selected inventory source, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Total Cost CPM: The total cost per thousand Impressions.
      • CTR: The click-through rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.


      Creatives

      The Creatives section includes a chart and table for comparing Campaign performance by Creative.

      The chart displays performance for each Creative based on the selected metric, making it easier to identify which Creative assets are generating the strongest delivery and performance. Hover over a bar to view additional details for the selected Creative.

      Creatives Table

      The table provides detailed performance metrics for each Creative included in the Campaign.

      Use the Show dropdown to control the number of Creatives displayed in the chart.

      Use the Search bar to locate a specific Creative by name or ID. Select the Download icon to export the table as a CSV file.

      Available metrics include:

      • Creative ID: The unique ID assigned to the Creative.
      • Name: The name of the Creative.
      • Imps: The total number of Impressions served by the Creative.
      • Total Cost: The total cost attributed to the Creative.
      • Clicks: The total number of clicks attributed to the Creative.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser for Impressions served by the Creative, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Total Cost CPM: The total cost per thousand Impressions.
      • CTR: The click-through rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.
      • Completion Rate: The percentage of eligible Impressions that reached completion.

      Device Type

      The Device Type section includes a chart and table for comparing performance across device types based on the selected Advertiser, Campaign, Lines, and Reporting Interval.

      The chart displays Total Impressions alongside the selected performance metric. Use the metric dropdown to compare Impressions against:

      • Total Cost
      • Revenue
      • Total Cost CPM
      • CTR

      The left Y-axis displays Impressions, while the right Y-axis displays the selected metric, making it easier to compare delivery and performance across device types.

      Device Type Table

      The table provides detailed performance metrics for each device type.

      Select the Download icon to export the table as a CSV file. Use the three-line menu in the upper-right corner of the table to choose which columns are displayed and customize the view.

      Available columns include:

      • Device Type: The name of the device type.
      • Imps: The total number of Impressions served by the device type.
      • Clicks: The total number of clicks attributed to the device type.
      • Total Cost: The total cost attributed to the device type.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser for Impressions served on the device type, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Total Cost CPM: The total cost per thousand Impressions.
      • CTR: The click-through rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.

      Network

      The Network section includes a chart and table for comparing performance across networks based on the selected Advertiser, Campaign, Lines, and Reporting Interval.

      The chart displays Total Impressions alongside the selected performance metric. Use the metric dropdown to compare Impressions against:

      • Total Cost
      • Revenue
      • Total Cost CPM
      • CTR

      The left Y-axis displays Impressions, while the right Y-axis displays the selected metric, making it easier to compare delivery and performance across networks.

      Network Table

      The table provides detailed performance metrics for each network.

      Select the Download icon to export the table as a CSV file. Use the three-line menu in the upper-right corner of the table to choose which columns are displayed and customize the view.

      Available columns include:

      • Network: The name of the network.
      • Imps: The total number of Impressions served by the network.
      • Clicks: The total number of clicks attributed to the network.
      • Total Cost: The total cost attributed to the network.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser for Impressions served through the network, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Total Cost CPM: The total cost per thousand Impressions.
      • CTR: The click-through rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.

      Deal

      The Deal section includes a chart and table for comparing performance across Deals based on the selected Advertiser, Campaign, Lines, and Reporting Interval.

      The chart displays Total Impressions alongside the selected performance metric. Use the metric dropdown to compare Impressions against:

      • Total Cost
      • Revenue
      • Total Cost CPM
      • CTR
      • Transparency Score

      The left Y-axis displays Impressions, while the right Y-axis displays the selected metric, making it easier to compare delivery and performance across Deals.

      Deal Table

      The table provides detailed performance metrics for each Deal.

      Select the Download icon to export the table as a CSV file. Use the three-line menu in the upper-right corner of the table to choose which columns are displayed and customize the view.

      Available columns include:

      • Deal: The name of the Deal.
      • Imps: The total number of Impressions served through the Deal.
      • Clicks: The total number of clicks attributed to the Deal.
      • Total Cost: The total cost attributed to the Deal.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser for Impressions served through the Deal, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Total Cost CPM: The total cost per thousand Impressions.
      • CTR: The click-through rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.
      • Transparency Score: The score indicating the level of inventory transparency associated with the Deal.

      Channel

      The Channel section includes a chart and table for comparing performance across channels based on the selected Advertiser, Campaign, Lines, and Reporting Interval.

      The chart displays Total Impressions alongside the selected performance metric. Use the metric dropdown to compare Impressions against:

      • Total Cost
      • Revenue
      • Total Cost CPM
      • CTR

      The left Y-axis displays Impressions, while the right Y-axis displays the selected metric, making it easier to compare delivery and performance across channels.

      Channel Table

      The table provides detailed performance metrics for each Channel.

      Select the Download icon to export the table as a CSV file. Use the three-line menu in the upper-right corner of the table to choose which columns are displayed and customize the view.

      Available columns include:

      • Channel: The name of the Channel.
      • Imps: The total number of Impressions served through the Channel.
      • Clicks: The total number of clicks attributed to the Channel.
      • Total Cost: The total cost attributed to the Channel.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser for Impressions served through the Channel, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Total Cost CPM: The total cost per thousand Impressions.
      • CTR: The click-through rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.

      App

      The App section includes a chart and table for comparing performance across Apps based on the selected Advertiser, Campaign, Lines, and Reporting Interval.

      The chart displays Total Impressions alongside the selected performance metric. Use the metric dropdown to compare Impressions against:

      • Total Cost
      • Revenue
      • Total Cost CPM
      • Transparency Score
      • Completion Rate

      The left Y-axis displays Impressions, while the right Y-axis displays the selected metric, making it easier to compare delivery and performance across Apps.

      App Table

      The table provides detailed performance metrics for each App.

      Select the Download icon to export the table as a CSV file. Use the three-line menu in the upper-right corner of the table to choose which columns are displayed and customize the view.

      Available columns include:

      • App Bundle ID: The App Bundle ID passed in the bid request.
      • App Name: The name of the App associated with the inventory.
      • Imps: The total number of Impressions served through the App.
      • Clicks: The total number of clicks attributed to the App.
      • Total Cost: The total cost attributed to the App.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser for Impressions served through the App, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Total Cost CPM: The total cost per thousand Impressions.
      • CTR: The click-through rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.

      Foot Traffic

      The Foot Traffic section provides performance and validation details for each configured Location.

      Available metrics include:

      • Location ID: The unique identifier assigned to the Location.
      • Location Name: The name assigned to the Location.
      • Type: The Location type, such as Address.
      • Active Status: Indicates whether the Location is Active or Inactive.
      • Validation Status: Indicates whether the Location is Valid or Invalid.
      • Attributed Visitors: The number of users who were served an Ad from the Campaign and subsequently visited the Location during the selected Reporting Interval.
      • Average Daily Visitors: The average number of total visitors recorded at the Location per day during the selected Reporting Interval. This metric can help confirm that the Location is receiving visitor activity. If no visitors are recorded, review the Location setup or contact your Account Manager or the Help Center for assistance.

      Select the Download icon next to the search bar to export the table as a CSV file.

      Geo

      The Geo section includes an interactive map and table for analyzing where Impressions were served geographically.

      Use the Geo filter in the lower-right corner of the map to group performance by:

      • Country
      • Region
      • DMA
      • ZIP Code

      The selected Geo filter updates both the map and the table below it.

      Map View

      Use the map view controls to toggle between:

      • Heatmap: The default view. Displays the concentration of served Impressions geographically. Select a state to display ZIP Code boundaries within that state.
      • Boundaries: Displays state or region boundaries, with each area shaded based on Impression volume. Select a state to display ZIP Code boundaries within that state.

      Below the map view controls, the following message is displayed: Click a State to See ZIP Codes

      Geo Table

      The Geo Table displays performance metrics based on the geographic level selected in the Geo dropdown. Available geographic groupings include Country, Region, DMA, and ZIP Code.

      Use the Search bar to locate a specific geographic value. Select the Download icon to export the table as a CSV file.

      • Page Size: Adjust the number of rows displayed on each page.
      • Total Items: Displays the total number of geographic values included in the current view.
      • Page: Displays the current page and total number of available pages.
      • Columns: Select the three-line menu to choose which columns are displayed in the table.

      Available columns include:

      • Country / Region / DMA / ZIP Code: Displays the geographic value based on the selected Geo filter.
      • Imps: The total number of Impressions served in the geographic area.
      • Clicks: The total number of clicks attributed to the geographic area.
      • Total Cost: The total cost attributed to Impressions served in the geographic area.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser for Impressions served in the geographic area, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Total Cost CPM: The total cost per thousand Impressions.
      • CTR: The click-through rate, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.
      • Completion Rate: The percentage of eligible Impressions that reached completion.

      Custom Reporting

      Overview

      Custom Reporting allows users to build downloadable reports using selected Advertisers, Campaigns, Lines, Dimensions, Metrics, and a Reporting Interval.

      Unlike Standard Reporting, Custom Reporting allows users to choose the specific fields included in the output, making it useful for deeper analysis, custom data exports, conversion reporting, log-level data, and reach/frequency analysis.

      Custom Reports can be generated on demand or scheduled for automatic delivery where supported.

      Custom Report Types

      Available report types include:

      • Custom Report: Build a performance report using selected Dimensions and Metrics.
      • IP Conversion Pixel: Path to Conversion: Analyze the Impression activity associated with IP-based conversions.
      • Cookie: Path to Conversion: Analyze the Impression activity associated with Cookie-based conversions.
      • IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits: Review visits recorded by an IP Conversion Pixel.
      • IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate: Compare Impressions and conversions to evaluate conversion performance.
      • Log Level Report: Export detailed Impression-level and bid request data for purchased inventory.
      • Reach/Frequency Report: Review unique reach across supported identifiers and estimate frequency.

      Selecting Dimensions, Metrics, and Columns

      Available reporting fields are organized into categories to make them easier to locate and select.

      • Dimensions: Determine how report data is grouped or segmented, such as by Date, Campaign, Line, Creative, Device, or Inventory.
      • Metrics: Determine which performance values are included, such as Impressions, Total Cost, Revenue, or Conversions.
      • Columns: Used in Log Level Reporting to select the individual fields included in the exported data.

      Each report type displays the fields and categories applicable to that report.

      The order in which Dimensions and Metrics are selected determines the order of the corresponding columns in the report output. Adjust the selection order when configuring a report to change the column order.

      Report Limitations

      Custom Reports are subject to a maximum number of returnable rows: 10,000,000 rows, depending on the delivery method and report type selected. If a report exceeds the supported limit, a warning will appear indicating that the results are incomplete.

      If a report exceeds the limit:

      • Reduce the Reporting Interval.
      • Select fewer Dimensions.
      • Split the data into multiple reports.
      • Contact your Account Manager for additional assistance.

      Custom Reporting Time Zone

      The Time Zone selected on the Custom Report determines how report activity is grouped by Date and Hour.

      Available options may include Seat Time Zone, User Time Zone, UTC, and other supported time zones.

      • UTC: Use UTC when reconciling report totals with Pontiac billing, as billing activity is calculated in UTC.
      • Seat Time Zone: Groups report activity according to the Seat Time Zone configured under Admin > Seat Settings > Preferences.
      • User Time Zone: Uses the user time zone offset passed in the bid request to assign each Impression to the local time where it was served. If the user time zone offset is unavailable, the Impression defaults to UTC.

      The selected Time Zone affects how Date and Hour values are represented in the report.

      Scheduled Report Time Zone & Delivery

      Scheduled Reports allow users to configure the Delivery Time and Time Zone used for each scheduled delivery.

      When creating or editing a Scheduled Report, these settings appear below the Reporting Interval:

      • Delivery Time: Select the time the scheduled report should be generated and delivered.
      • Time Zone: Select the time zone used to define both the reporting period and delivery time.

      The selected Time Zone determines the start and end of the reporting day or month so the report contains the complete reporting period for that time zone before it is generated and delivered.

      The Scheduled Report Time Zone defaults to UTC. User Time Zone is not available in the Scheduled Report Time Zone dropdown. Instead, select the specific time zone that best aligns with the Campaigns included in the report.

      For example, if a report is configured to deliver at 1:00 AM Pacific Time, the report will include the complete prior Pacific calendar day through 11:59 PM PT before it is generated and delivered.

      Seat Time Zone

      The Seat Time Zone can be configured under Admin > Seat Settings > Preferences.

      This setting affects metrics displayed in the Advertiser views, as well as applicable reporting views.

      The Seat Time Zone does not control:

      • Billing activity: Account balance activity and billing transactions are calculated in UTC.
      • Campaign and Line pacing: Pacing and Dayparts use the time zone configured for the applicable Campaign in the Setup section.

      All account balance activity is displayed and billed in UTC.

      Report Status

      When a report fails or returns incomplete results, hover over the Status to view additional information about the issue.

      Common status messages include:

      • Report exceeds maximum rows: The report exceeds the maximum returnable number of rows and contains incomplete results. Reduce the Reporting Interval or use more restrictive parameters.
      • Report failed to process: Contact your Account Manager or reach out through the Help Center for assistance.
      • Report timeframe too large: Reduce the Reporting Interval and run the report again.

      Scheduled Reports

      Custom Reports can be automatically delivered by Email, FTP, AWS S3, or Google Cloud Storage on a recurring schedule.

      To schedule a report:

      1. Create or edit a Custom Report.
      2. Select Schedule Automated Report in the Report Setup.
      1. Open the Scheduled Reports tab.
      1. Configure the Report Frequency, Reporting Interval, Delivery Time, Time Zone, and delivery method.
      2. Select Save.

      Configure the following settings:

      • Report Frequency: Determines how often the report is generated.
        • Daily: Generates the report for the previous day.
        • Weekly: Generates the report on the configured weekly schedule.
        • Monthly: Generates the report once per month.
        • Custom:
          • Set a specific day frequency. For example, every 2 days.
          • Set a specific week frequency on a specific day. For example, every 2 weeks on Monday.
          • Set a specific Reporting Interval for Yesterday, Last 7 days, Last 30 days, Month to Date, Previous Month, Custom Last __ Days
      • Reporting Interval: Determines the period of data included in each report. Yesterday, Last 7 days, Last 30 days, Month to Date, Previous Month, Custom Last __ Days
      • Delivery Time: Select the time the report should be generated and delivered.
      • Time Zone: Select the time zone used to define both the reporting period and Delivery Time.
        • The Time Zone defaults to UTC.
        • User Time Zone is not available for Scheduled Reports Time Zone. Select the specific time zone that best aligns with the Campaigns included in the report.
        • The selected Time Zone defines the start and end of the reporting day or month, ensuring the applicable reporting period is complete before the report is generated and delivered.
        • For example, if a Daily report is configured for delivery at 1:00 AM Pacific Time, the report will include the complete prior Pacific calendar day through 11:59 PM PT before it is generated and delivered.
      • Deliver Methods: Choose delivery method by selecting the checkbox for each.
        • Email
          • Enter the email addresses that should receive the report. Separate multiple addresses with commas.
        • FTP
        • Enter the required FTP connection information:
          • FTP Server
          • FTP Path
          • FTP Port
          • FTP Username
            FTP Password
        • AWS S3
        • To deliver the report to an AWS S3 bucket, configure the following:
          • Bucket: Enter the name of the S3 bucket. Do not include the s3:// prefix.
          • Path: Enter the location and filename where the report should be saved.
            • Use %dateInt% to include the report date in YYYYMMDD format.
            • For example: output-path/Pontiac-reports-%dateInt%.csv
            • Including %dateInt% in recurring report filenames prevents the previous report from being overwritten.
          • View Security Policy: Displays the security policy required for Pontiac to deliver files to the configured bucket.
          • Verify: Validates the configured bucket and permissions.
        • Google Cloud Storage
        • To deliver the report to Google Cloud Storage, configure the following:
          • Bucket: Enter the name of the Google Cloud Storage bucket. Do not include the gs:// prefix.
          • Path: Enter the location and filename where the report should be saved.
            • Use %dateInt% to include the report date in YYYYMMDD format and prevent recurring files from being overwritten.
          • Credentials: Enter the valid JSON credentials required for delivery.

      AWS S3 Setup Example

      Once the Bucket and Path are entered in Pontiac:

      • Select View Security Policy and copy the provided JSON policy.
      • Open the applicable bucket in AWS S3.
      • Navigate to the Permissions tab.
      • Scroll to Bucket Policy and select Edit.
      • Add the Pontiac JSON security policy.
      • Select Save.
      • Return to Pontiac and select Verify to confirm the configuration.

      Google Storage Example

      Custom Report

      The Custom Report allows users to build a downloadable CSV using selected Dimensions and Metrics to analyze Campaign performance at the desired level of detail.

      Dimensions determine how report data is grouped, while Metrics determine the performance values included in the report.

      Create a Custom Report

      1. Navigate to Reporting > Custom Reporting.
      2. Select New Custom Report.
      3. Select Custom Report as the Type.
      4. Configure the report settings, Dimensions, and Metrics.
      5. Select Save.
      6. Once the report has processed, expand the Custom Reporting section and select Download next to the report name.
        • If Schedule Automated Report is enabled, the report will also be delivered using the configured delivery method.

      Report Settings

      Configure the following when creating a Custom Report:

      • Name: Enter a name for the report.
      • Schedule Automated Report: Enable this option to generate and deliver the report automatically on a recurring schedule. See Scheduled Reports for setup details.
      • Advertiser ID: Select the Advertisers to include. By default, all Advertisers are included.
      • Campaign ID: Select the Campaigns to include. By default, all Campaigns under the selected Advertisers are included.
      • Line ID: Select the Lines to include. By default, all Lines under the selected Advertisers and Campaigns are included.
      • Start Date: Select the beginning of the Reporting Interval.
      • End Date: Select the end of the Reporting Interval.
      • Type: Select Custom Report.
      • Time Zone: Select the time zone used to generate the report, such as Seat Time Zone, User Time Zone, UTC, or another supported time zone.
      • Dimensions: Select the categorical fields used to group and segment report data.
      • Metrics: Select the quantitative performance values included in the report.

      Dimensions

      Available Dimensions include:

      Date & Time

      • Date: The date associated with the reported activity based on the selected report Time Zone. Selecting Date produces both Date (yyyyMMdd) and Date (M/d/yyyy) in the report output, such as 20260903 and 9/3/2026.
      • Hour: The hour in which the reported activity occurred, based on the selected report Time Zone. Values are returned using a 24-hour clock.

      Advertiser, Campaign & Line

      • Advertiser ID: The unique numeric Pontiac ID assigned to the Advertiser.
      • Advertiser Name: The name of the Advertiser.
      • Advertiser Code: The custom code associated with the Advertiser, when configured.
      • Campaign ID: The unique numeric Pontiac ID assigned to the Campaign.
      • Campaign Name: The name of the Campaign.
      • Campaign Code: The custom code associated with the Campaign, when configured.
      • Line ID: The unique numeric Pontiac ID assigned to the Line.
      • Line Name: The name of the Line.
      • Line Code: The custom code associated with the Line, when configured.

      Creative

      • Creative ID: The unique numeric Pontiac ID assigned to the Creative.
      • Creative Name: The name of the Creative.
      • Creative Size: The dimensions of the Creative in pixels, such as 1920x1080.

      Inventory

      • Deal ID: The Deal ID associated with the inventory transaction, as provided in the bid request. This ID is not Pontiac’s internal numeric Deal ID.
      • Deal Name: The Pontiac Deal name associated with the Deal ID.
      • Exchange: The Exchange or SSP through which the inventory was purchased, such as magnite or index for example.
      • Site Domain: The website domain associated with the inventory, when provided. This field may be blank for App inventory.
      • App Bundle: The App Bundle ID associated with the inventory. Values may be numeric or alphanumeric.
      • App Domain: The domain associated with the App inventory, when provided, such as samsungtvplus.com.
      • App Name: The App name provided with the inventory request.
      • Impression Tag ID: The impression tag identifier provided with the inventory request. Values may be numeric or alphanumeric.
      • Inventory Type: The inventory environment associated with the Impression, such as app.
      • Auction Type: The numeric auction type associated with the bid request. For example, 1 represents a first-price auction.

      Location

      • Country Code: The two-character country code associated with where the Impression was served, such as US.
      • Country Name: The full country name associated with where the Impression was served, such as United States.
      • Region/State Code: The region or state code associated with where the Impression was served, such as HI for Hawaii.
      • Region/State Name: The full name of the region or state where the Impression was served, such as Hawaii.
      • DMA Code: The three-digit Designated Market Area (DMA) code associated with where the Impression was served, such as 744.
      • DMA Name: The name of the Designated Market Area associated with where the Impression was served, such as Honolulu HI.
      • Zip Code: The ZIP or postal code associated with where the Impression was served, such as 96706.

      Device

      • Browser: The browser value associated with the Impression, when available, such as safari.
      • Device Make: The device manufacturer or brand provided with the Impression, such as roku or samsung.
      • Device Model: The device model provided with the Impression, such as digital video player or tizen tv.
      • Device Type: The numeric device type value associated with the Impression. For example, 3 represents Connected TV and 7 represents Set Top Box in the sample output.
      • Device Type Name: The human-readable device type associated with the numeric Device Type value, such as connectedTv or setTopBox.
      • Operating System: The operating system associated with the device, such as roku os or tizen.

      Content

      • Content Channel: The content channel value provided with the inventory request, when available.
      • Content Episode: The episode value provided with the content metadata, when available.
      • Content Genre: The content genre provided with the inventory request, such as entertainment, sports, or news.
      • Content Network: The content network value provided with the inventory request, when available.
      • Publisher Name: The publisher name provided with the inventory, when available.
      • Content Series: The content series value provided with the inventory request, when available.
      • Content Title: The content title provided with the inventory request, when available.
      • Multi Field: A combined content metadata field that returns an available content value.

      Metrics

      Available Metrics include:

      Delivery

      • Impressions: The total number of Impressions served.
      • Clicks: The total number of clicks recorded.
      • Starts: The number of eligible playback events that reached the Start milestone.
      • 25% Complete: The number of eligible playback events that reached 25% completion.
      • 50% Complete: The number of eligible playback events that reached 50% completion.
      • 75% Complete: The number of eligible playback events that reached 75% completion.
      • Completions: The number of eligible playback events that reached 100% completion.

      Cost & Revenue

      • Total cost: The total cost of the purchased media including applicable DSP fees.
      • Media cost: The cost of the purchased media before DSP fees are applied.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Profit: The difference between Revenue and Total Cost.

      CPM

      • Total cost CPM: The Total Cost per thousand Impressions, calculated as Total Cost divided by Impressions multiplied by 1,000.
      • Media cost CPM: The Media Cost per thousand Impressions, calculated as Media Cost divided by Impressions multiplied by 1,000.
      • Revenue CPM: The Revenue per thousand Impressions, calculated as Revenue divided by Impressions multiplied by 1,000.

      Fees

      • ART Fee: The fee attributed to the use of ART audiences, when applicable.
      • CC Fee: The fee attributed to credit card processing, when applicable.
      • Chalice Fee: The fee attributed to the use of Chalice, when applicable.
      • Contextual Fee: The fee attributed to Contextual targeting, when applicable.
      • Creative Hosting Fee: The portion of spend attributed to Creative hosting and serving, when applicable.
      • Data Costs: The cost attributed to third party segments used for targeting, when applicable.
      • Foot Traffic Fee: The fee attributed to Foot Traffic measurement, when applicable.
      • Platform Fee: The portion of spend retained by the platform as margin.

      Path To Conversion

      There are two Path to Conversion report types available:

      • IP Conversion Pixel: Path to Conversion
      • Cookie: Path to Conversion

      The Path to Conversion report shows the Impression activity associated with users who later completed an IP- or Cookie-based conversion. It provides the sequence from an attributed Impression through the recorded conversion, allowing users to analyze the media, Creative, inventory, and other attributes associated with conversion activity.

      Key time fields include:

      • Impression Time: The date and time the attributed Impression was served.
        • The total number of ‘imp_times’ shows how many impressions were served to users who then converted, corresponding to the ‘Attributed Imps’ field in the IP Conversion Pixel metrics under the Advertiser.
      • Conversion Time: The date and time the associated conversion was recorded.
        • The total number of unique ‘conv_times’ represents the total number of conversions or visits driven by the campaign, corresponding to the ‘Total Convs’ field in the IP Conversion Pixel metrics under the Advertiser.

      Multiple Impressions may be associated with the same conversion. The report can therefore be used to evaluate the sequence of Impressions that occurred before a conversion and the fractional attribution assigned to each Impression.

      Lookback Window

      • The Lookback Window determines how far before each conversion Pontiac searches for eligible Impressions to include in the conversion path.
      • By default, Path to Conversion reports use a 30-day lookback window. Enter a custom Lookback Window when needed.
      • For assistance with a longer Lookback Window, contact your Account Manager or reach out through the Help Center.

      Create a Path to Conversion Report

      1. Navigate to Reporting > Custom Reporting.
      2. Select New Custom Report.
      3. Select either:
        1. IP Conversion Pixel: Path to Conversion, or
        2. Cookie: Path to Conversion
      4. Select the applicable Advertisers, Campaigns, Lines, and Pixels.
      5. Select the Start Date and End Date.
      6. Configure the applicable report settings, Dimensions, and Metrics.
      7. Select Save.
      8. Once the report has processed, select Download next to the report name.
        • If Scheduled Automated Reports were selected, the report will be delivered via your chosen delivery method.
        • Select Run Now to generate a current report and deliver it using the configured delivery method.

      Report Settings

      • Name: Enter a name for the report.
      • Schedule Automated Report: Enable this option to generate and deliver the report automatically on a recurring schedule. See Scheduled Reports for setup details.
      • Advertiser ID: Select the Advertisers to include. By default, all Advertisers are included.
      • Campaign ID: Select the Campaigns to include. By default, all Campaigns under the selected Advertisers are included.
      • Line ID: Select the Lines to include. By default, all Lines under the selected Advertisers and Campaigns are included.
      • Pixel ID: Select the Pixels to include. By default, all applicable Pixels are included.
      • Start Date: Select the beginning of the Reporting Interval.
      • End Date: Select the end of the Reporting Interval.
      • Type: Select the applicable Path to Conversion report type. IP or Cookies.
      • Time Zone: Select the time zone used to generate the report.
      • Lookback Window: Select how far before each conversion Pontiac should look for eligible attributed Impressions.
      • Match on User Agent: When enabled, conversion matching also considers the User Agent. This may be useful for OLV or Display Campaigns where the Impression and conversion are expected to occur on the same device.
      • Dimensions: Select the categorical fields used to describe and group the conversion path.
      • Metrics: Select the quantitative values included in the report.

      Dimensions

      Available Dimensions are organized into the following categories.

      Date & Time

      • Conversion Date: The calendar date on which the conversion was recorded.
      • Conversion Time: The date and time the conversion was recorded.
      • Impression Date: The calendar date on which the attributed Impression was served.
      • Impression Time: The date and time the attributed Impression was served.

      Advertiser, Campaign & Line

      • Advertiser ID: The unique numeric Pontiac ID assigned to the Advertiser.
      • Advertiser Name: The name of the Advertiser.
      • Campaign ID: The unique numeric Pontiac ID assigned to the Campaign.
      • Campaign Name: The name of the Campaign.
      • Line ID: The unique numeric Pontiac ID assigned to the Line.
      • Line Name: The name of the Line.

      Creative

      • Creative ID: The unique numeric Pontiac ID assigned to the Creative.
      • Creative Name: The name of the Creative.

      Pixel & Conversion

      • Pixel ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Pixel associated with the conversion.
      • Pixel Name: The name of the Pixel associated with the conversion.
      • Conversion ID: The identifier associated with the recorded conversion event.
      • Order ID: The order or transaction identifier passed to the Pixel. This field is populated only when an Order ID value is dynamically passed with the Pixel request.
      • Order Value: The order or conversion value passed to the Pixel. This field is populated only when an Order Value is dynamically passed with the Pixel request.
      • Click: Indicates whether the attributed Impression was associated with a click event.
        • 1: A click was associated with the attributed Impression.
        • 0: No click was associated with the attributed Impression.

      Inventory

      • Deal Name: The name of the Deal associated with the attributed Impression.
      • Exchange: The Exchange or SSP through which the inventory was purchased, such as magnite or index for example.
      • Site Domain: The website domain associated with the inventory, when provided. This field may be blank for App inventory.
      • Site Page: The webpage associated with the inventory, when provided.
      • App Bundle: The App Bundle ID associated with the inventory. Values may be numeric or alphanumeric.
      • App Domain: The domain associated with the App inventory, when provided, such as samsungtvplus.com.
      • App ID: The App identifier provided with the inventory request.
      • App Name: The App name provided with the inventory request.
      • App Store URL: The URL of the App’s store listing, when available.
      • Inventory Type: The inventory environment associated with the Impression, such as app.

      Location

      • Region/State Code: The region or state code associated with the attributed impression, such as OR or NY.
      • Zip Code: The ZIP or postal code associated with the attributed impression.
      • Home or Business: The residential or business classification associated with the IP address, when available.

      Device

      • Browser: The browser value associated with the attributed impression, when available, such as safari.
      • Device Type: The numeric device type value associated with the attributed impression. For example, 3 represents Connected TV and 7 represents Set Top Box in the sample output.
      • Device Type Name: The human-readable device type associated with the numeric Device Type value, such as connectedTv or setTopBox.
      • Operating System: The operating system associated with the device on which the attributed Impression was served.
      • User Agent: The User Agent associated with the device or browser, when available.

      Content

      • Content Channel: The content channel provided with the attributed Impression, when available.
      • Content Genre: The content genre provided with the attributed Impression, when available.
      • Content Network: The content network provided with the attributed Impression, when available.
      • Publisher Name: The publisher name associated with the attributed Impression, when available.
      • Content Series: The content series provided with the attributed Impression, when available.
      • Content Title: The content title provided with the attributed Impression, when available.

      Attribution & Identifiers

      • Auction ID: The identifier associated with the auction.
      • Auction ID (SSP): The auction identifier provided by the SSP.
      • User ID: The user identifier associated with the conversion path, when available.
      • Consumer ID: The Consumer ID dynamically passed to the Pixel, when provided.

      The following identifier differs by report type:

      • IP Conversion: Path to Conversion – IP Address Hashed: A hashed version of the IP address associated with the activity for privacy.
      • Cookies: Path to Conversion – Cookie ID: The Cookie identifier associated with the conversion path.

      Custom Parameters

      • Custom Variable 1: The value dynamically passed to the Pixel using var1, when provided.
      • Custom Variable 2: The value dynamically passed to the Pixel using var2, when provided.
      • Custom Variable 3: The value dynamically passed to the Pixel using var3, when provided.
      • Custom Variable 4: The value dynamically passed to the Pixel using var4, when provided.
      • Other Parameters: Additional parameter values associated with the Pixel request, when available.

      Pixel Query String Parameters

      The following fields are populated from optional query string parameters passed when the Pixel fires:

      • Order ID: The order or transaction identifier associated with the conversion, when provided.
      • Order Value: The order or conversion value associated with the conversion, when provided.
      • Custom Variable 1–4: Custom values associated with the conversion, when provided.
      • Consumer ID: The customer identifier associated with the conversion, when provided.

      These values must be dynamically populated by the website, tag manager, or other Pixel implementation and will only appear in reporting when included in the Pixel request.

      See Pixel Query String Parameters for implementation details.

      Metrics

      Attribution & Conversions

      • Fractional Attribution: The portion of a conversion credited to the Attributed Impression represented by the row. Conversion credit is divided evenly across all Impressions associated with that conversion.
        • For example, if a conversion has 9 attributed Impressions, each Impression receives approximately 0.111 Fractional Attribution (1 ÷ 9).
        • A value of 0.021 indicates that the Impression received approximately 1/48 of the conversion credit.
        • When Fractional Attribution is summed across all Impressions associated with the same conversion, the total should equal approximately 1.
      • Fractional Conversion: The portion of an attributed Impression assigned to the conversion represented by the row. If the same Impression is associated with multiple conversions, the Impression is divided evenly across those conversions.
        • 1 indicates that the Impression is associated with one conversion.
        • 0.5 indicates that the Impression is associated with two conversions.
        • 0.333 indicates approximately three conversions.
        • 0.25 indicates four conversions.
        • 0.2 indicates five conversions.
      • Attributed Impressions: The number of attributed Impressions represented by the row. Because the Path to Conversion report is Impression-level, this value is typically 1 per row. Summing this column across the report provides the total number of Impressions attributed to conversions.

      Cost

      • Total Cost: The Total Cost associated with the attributed Impression represented by the row.

      IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits

      The IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits report provides page visit activity recorded by selected IP Conversion Pixels.

      Unlike the Path to Conversion report, Page Visits is not dependent on an attributed Impression or specific Line. Each row represents a visit recorded when the selected Pixel fired, regardless of whether the visitor was previously served an Ad.

      This report can be used to analyze site activity, visitor location, Pixel-specific values, and optional conversion or custom data passed when the Pixel fires.

      Create an IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits Report

      1. Navigate to Reporting > Custom Reporting.
      2. Select New Custom Report.
      3. Select IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits as the Type.
      4. Select the Start Date and End Date.
      5. Select Save.
      6. Once the report has processed, select Download next to the report name.
        • If Schedule Automated Report is enabled, the report will also be delivered using the configured delivery method.

      Report Settings

      • Name: Enter a name for the report.
      • Schedule Automated Report: Enable this option to generate and deliver the report automatically on a recurring schedule. See Scheduled Reports for setup details.
      • Advertiser ID: Select the Advertisers to include. By default, all Advertisers are included.
      • Pixel ID: Select the Pixels to include. By default, all applicable Pixels are included.
      • Start Date: Select the beginning of the Reporting Interval.
      • End Date: Select the end of the Reporting Interval.
      • Type: Select IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits.
      • Time Zone: Select the time zone used to generate the report.
      • Dimensions: Select the fields to include in the report.

      Dimensions

      Available Dimensions include:

      • Pixel ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the IP Conversion Pixel that recorded the page visit.
      • Pixel Name: The name of the IP Conversion Pixel that recorded the page visit.
      • Conversion Time: The date and time the Pixel fired and the page visit was recorded.
      • IP Address Hashed: A hashed version of the visitor’s IP address used for privacy-preserving reporting.
      • Home Or Business: Indicates whether the IP address is classified as residential or business, when available.
      • Zip Code: The ZIP or postal code associated with the visitor.
      • Region/State Code: The region or state code associated with the visitor, such as OR or NY.
      • Advertiser Id: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Advertiser associated with the Pixel.
      • Date: The calendar date on which the page visit was recorded, based on the selected report Time Zone.
      • Custom Variable 1: A custom value associated with the page visit, when provided.
      • Custom Variable 2: A custom value associated with the page visit, when provided.
      • Custom Variable 3: A custom value associated with the page visit, when provided.
      • Custom Variable 4: A custom value associated with the page visit, when provided.
      • Other Parameters: Additional query string parameter values captured when the Pixel fires, when available.
      • Order ID: The order or transaction identifier associated with the page visit, when provided.
      • Order Value: The order or conversion value associated with the page visit, when provided.
      • Consumer Id: The customer identifier associated with the page visit, when provided.
      • Referrer Url: The URL of the page or source that referred the visitor to the page where the Pixel fired, when available.

      Pixel Query String Parameters

      The following fields are populated from optional query string parameters passed when the Pixel fires. These values must be dynamically populated by the website, tag manager, or other Pixel implementation and will only appear in reporting when included in the Pixel request.

      • Order ID: Populated using the ORDER_ID query string parameter.
      • Order Value: Populated using the ORDER_AMOUNT query string parameter.
      • Custom Variable 1: Populated using the VAR1 query string parameter.
      • Custom Variable 2: Populated using the VAR2 query string parameter.
      • Custom Variable 3: Populated using the VAR3 query string parameter.
      • Custom Variable 4: Populated using the VAR4 query string parameter.
      • Consumer ID: Populated using the CONSUMER_ID query string parameter.

      See Pixel Query String Parameters for implementation details.

      IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate

      The IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate report measures conversion performance by comparing attributed conversions against Impressions over the selected Reporting Interval.

      Conversion Rate is calculated as: Conversions ÷ Impressions

      This report can be used to evaluate conversion performance over time and across selected Advertisers, Campaigns, and Lines.

      Conversion Counting by Line

      When the Line ID Dimension is included, conversions are reported at the Line level and are not de-duplicated across Lines. This behavior aligns with the conversion metrics displayed in the Pontiac UI.

      For example, if a user is served an Ad from two different Lines within the same Campaign and later completes one conversion, that conversion may be attributed to both Lines. In this case:

      • Line 1 records 1 conversion.
      • Line 2 records 1 conversion.
      • The Campaign level total across those Lines may therefore show 2 conversions.

      To report unique conversions across an Advertiser or Campaign for the selected date or dates, generate the report without the Line ID Dimension.

      For unique conversion analysis across a full Campaign flight, use the IP Conversion Pixel: Path to Conversion report and de-duplicate the hashed IP address across the applicable dates.

      Lookback Window

      • The Lookback Window determines how far before each conversion Pontiac searches for eligible Impressions to attribute to that conversion.
      • By default, IP Conversion Pixel reports use a 30-day lookback window. Enter a custom Lookback Window when needed. For assistance with a longer Lookback Window, contact your Account Manager or reach out through the Help Center.

      Create an IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate Report

      1. Navigate to Reporting > Custom Reporting.
      2. Select New Custom Report.
      3. Select IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate as the Type.
      4. Select the applicable Advertisers, Campaigns, Lines, and Pixels.
      5. Select the Start Date and End Date.
      6. Configure the applicable report settings and Dimensions.
      7. Select Save.
      8. Once the report has processed, select Download next to the report name.
        • If Schedule Automated Report is enabled, the report will also be delivered using the configured delivery method.

      Report Settings

      • Name: Enter a name for the report.
      • Schedule Automated Report: Enable this option to generate and deliver the report automatically on a recurring schedule. See Scheduled Reports for setup details.
      • Advertiser ID: Select the Advertisers to include. By default, all Advertisers are included.
      • Campaign ID: Select the Campaigns to include. By default, all Campaigns under the selected Advertisers are included.
      • Line ID: Select the Lines to include. By default, all Lines under the selected Advertisers and Campaigns are included.
      • Pixel ID: Select the Pixels to include. By default, all applicable Pixels are included.
      • Start Date: Select the beginning of the Reporting Interval.
      • End Date: Select the end of the Reporting Interval.
      • Type: Select IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate.
      • Time Zone: Select the time zone used to generate the report.
      • Lookback Window: Select how far before each conversion Pontiac should look for eligible attributed Impressions.
      • Dimensions: Select how conversion activity is grouped in the report. Available options include Line Id, Line Name, and Home Or Business.

      Dimensions

      Available Dimensions include:

      • Line Id: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Line associated with the attributed conversion.
      • Line Name: The name of the Line associated with the attributed conversion.
      • Home Or Business: Indicates whether the IP address associated with the conversion is classified as residential or business, when available.

      Log Level Reporting

      Log Level Reporting provides Impression-level data for purchased inventory, including auction, Creative, device, geographic, inventory, content, Deal, cost, and event information.

      Log Level Reports must be configured as Scheduled Reports and delivered to either:

      • AWS S3
      • Google Cloud Storage

      The Scheduled Report Time Zone determines the reporting window and delivery time. The Time Zone defaults to UTC.

      See Scheduled Reports for delivery configuration details.

      Create a Log Level Report

      1. Navigate to Reporting > Custom Reporting.
      2. Select New Custom Report.
      3. Select Log Level Report as the Type.
      4. Enable Schedule Automated Report.
      5. Open the Scheduled Reports tab.
      6. Configure the Report Frequency, Reporting Interval, Delivery Time, and Time Zone.
      7. Select either AWS S3 or Google Cloud Storage as the delivery method.
      8. Configure and verify the selected storage destination.
        • See Scheduled Reports for AWS S3 and Google Cloud Storage setup examples.
      9. Select Save.

      IAB Field Value Mappings

      Certain bid request fields return numeric values that correspond to standardized descriptions. The tables below provide mappings for Device Type, Device Connection Type, Geo Type, Video Placement, Video Start Delay, Video Protocol, and Livestream.

      See the OpenRTB Specifications for additional information about bid request and bid response fields. For bcat, refer to the IAB content category list.

      Device Type

      ValueDescription
      1Mobile/Tablet
      2Personal Computer
      3Connected TV
      4Phone
      5Tablet
      6Connected Device
      7Set Top Box

      Device Connection Type

      ValueDescription
      0Unknown
      1Ethernet
      2WIFI
      3Cellular Network – Unknown Generation
      4Cellular Network – 2G
      5Cellular Network – 3G
      6Cellular Network – 4G

      Geo Type

      ValueDescription
      1GPS/Location Services
      2IP Address
      3User Provided (e.g. Registration data)

      Video Placement

      ValueDescription
      1In-Stream
      2In-Banner
      3In-Article
      4In-Feed
      5Interstitial/Slider/Floating

      Video Start Delay

      ValueDescription
      > 0 Mid-Roll (Value indicates start delay in second)
      0Pre-Roll
      -1Generic Mid-Roll
      -2Generic Post-Roll

      Video Protocol

      ValueDescription
      1VAST 1.0
      2VAST 2.0
      3VAST 3.0
      4VAST 1.0 Wrapper
      5VAST 2.0 Wrapper
      6VAST 3.0 Wrapper
      7VAST 4.0
      8VAST 4.0 Wrapper
      9DAAST 1.0
      10DAAST 1.0 Wrapper

      Livestream

      ValueDescription
      0Non-live Content
      1Live Content

      Available Fields

      Select the fields to include in the Log Level Report. Values reflect the Impression, bid request, auction, and associated Pontiac records for purchased inventory.

      Auction & Impression

      • Exchange: The SSP or Exchange through which the auction was processed.
      • Auction Id: The unique identifier associated with the auction.
      • Impression Id: The Impression identifier within the bid request.
      • Impression Tag Id: The tag identifier associated with the Impression opportunity.
      • Impression Bid Floor: The minimum bid price specified for the Impression opportunity.
      • Impression Bid Floor Currency: The currency associated with the Impression Bid Floor.
      • Bid Price Millicents: The bid price submitted for the Impression, represented in millicents.
      • Win Price Millicents: The price associated with winning the Impression, represented in millicents.
      • Bid Timestamp: The timestamp when the bid was submitted.
      • Win Timestamp: The timestamp associated with the auction win.
      • Impression Timestamp: The timestamp when the Impression was recorded.
      • Source FD: Indicates the entity responsible for the final Impression sale decision, where 0 = Exchange and 1 = upstream source.
      • Source Pchain: The payment ID chain associated with the inventory request, when provided.
      • Auction Type: The auction type associated with the request.
      • BCAT: The blocked IAB content categories provided by the publisher.
      • Currency: The currency associated with the transaction.
      • Private Auction: Indicates whether the auction was private, where 1 = Private Auction and 0 = Open Auction.

      Advertiser, Campaign, Line & Creative

      • Advertiser Id: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Advertiser.
      • Advertiser Code: The custom code associated with the Advertiser, when configured.
      • Advertiser Name: The name of the Advertiser.
      • Campaign Id: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Campaign.
      • Campaign Code: The custom code associated with the Campaign, when configured.
      • Campaign Name: The name of the Campaign.
      • Line Id: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Line.
      • Line Code: The custom code associated with the Line, when configured.
      • Line Name: The name of the Line.
      • Creative Id: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Creative.
      • Creative Name: The name of the Creative.
      • Creative Type: The Creative type, such as Display, Video, or Audio.
      • Creative Categories: The IAB categories associated with the Creative.
      • Creative Duration: The duration of the Creative, when applicable.
      • Creative Domain: The domain associated with the advertised brand.
      • Width: The Creative width in pixels.
      • Height: The Creative height in pixels.

      Video

      • Video Placement: The numeric placement type associated with the Video inventory.
      • Video Start Delay: Indicates when the Video Creative begins relative to the content.
      • Video Protocols: The VAST or DAAST protocol value associated with the request.

      Device

      • Device Type: The numeric device type associated with the Impression.
      • Device Connection Type: The numeric connection type associated with the device.
      • Device IFA: The privacy-protected advertising identifier associated with the device, when available.
      • Device Make: The manufacturer or brand of the device.
      • Device Model: The model of the device.
      • Device Language: The language setting provided by the device.
      • Operating System: The operating system associated with the device.
      • OS Version: The operating system version.
      • Hardware Version: The hardware version provided by the device.
      • User Agent: The User Agent provided with the inventory request.
      • Browser: The browser associated with the device or request.

      Geography

      • Geo Country: The country code associated with the Impression, such as US.
      • Geo Region: The region or state code associated with the Impression.
      • Geo Zip: The ZIP or postal code associated with the Impression.
      • Geo Metro: The metropolitan/DMA code associated with the Impression, when provided.
      • Geo Latitude: The latitude associated with the geographic location.
      • Geo Longitude: The longitude associated with the geographic location.
      • UTC Offset: The user time zone offset provided with the bid request, when available.
      • Geo Type: The numeric value indicating how the geographic location was determined.
      • Geo IP Service: The service used to determine geographic information from the IP address, when provided.
      • IP Address Hashed: A hashed version of the IP address for privacy.
      • IP Address Hashed Std: A standardized hashed version of the IP address for privacy.

      Site & App

      • Site Domain: The website domain associated with the inventory.
      • Site Page: The specific webpage associated with the inventory, when provided.
      • App Bundle: The App Bundle ID associated with the inventory.
      • App Id: The App identifier provided with the request.
      • App Domain: The domain associated with the App.
      • App Name: The App name provided with the inventory request.
      • App Category: The IAB category or categories associated with the App.
      • App Store URL: The URL of the App’s store listing, when provided.

      Content

      • Content Id: The identifier associated with the content.
      • Content Livestream: Indicates whether the content is Live, where 1 = Live and 0 = Non-Live.
      • Content Context: Additional context associated with the content, when provided.
      • Content Length: The length of the content in seconds.
      • Content Genre: The genre associated with the content.
      • Content Episode: The episode identifier or number.
      • Content Season: The season associated with episodic content.
      • Content Title: The title of the content.
      • Content Series: The series associated with the content.
      • Content URL: The URL associated with the content, when provided.
      • Content Category: The IAB category or categories associated with the content.
      • Content Network: The network associated with the content.
      • Content Channel: The channel associated with the content.
      • Content Content Rating: The content rating provided with the inventory request.
      • Content Producer Name: The producer or creator associated with the content.

      Publisher

      • Publisher Id: The publisher identifier provided with the inventory.
      • Publisher Name: The publisher name provided with the inventory.
      • Publisher Domain: The domain associated with the publisher.

      Deal

      • Deal Id: The Deal ID provided with the private auction.
      • Deal At: The numeric auction type specified for the Deal.
      • Deal Bid Floor: The bid floor associated with the Deal.
      • Deal Bid Floor Currency: The currency associated with the Deal Bid Floor.

      Cost & Fees

      • Data Cost: The cost attributed to third party data used for targeting.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser for the Impression, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • Total Cost: The Total Cost associated with the Impression.
      • Fees: The applicable fees associated with the Impression.
      • Foot Traffic Fee: The fee attributed to Foot Traffic measurement.
      • Data Comm: The commission associated with data use.
      • Art Fee: The fee attributed to ART audience usage.
      • Contextual Fee: The fee attributed to Contextual targeting.
      • Creative Hosting Fee: The fee attributed to Creative hosting and serving.
      • CC Fee: The fee attributed to credit card processing, when applicable.
      • Chalice Fee: The fee attributed to Chalice.

      Click & Completion Events

      Because Log Level Reporting is Impression-level, these event fields indicate whether the event occurred for the Impression represented by the row:

      • Clicks: Indicates whether a click was recorded, where 1 = event occurred and 0 = event did not occur.
      • Starts: Indicates whether playback reached the Start milestone, where 1 = event occurred and 0 = event did not occur.
      • 25% Complete: Indicates whether playback reached 25% completion, where 1 = event occurred and 0 = event did not occur.
      • 50% Complete: Indicates whether playback reached 50% completion, where 1 = event occurred and 0 = event did not occur.
      • 75% Complete: Indicates whether playback reached 75% completion, where 1 = event occurred and 0 = event did not occur.
      • Completions: Indicates whether playback reached 100% completion, where 1 = event occurred and 0 = event did not occur.

      Download the CTV log level report schema for a full list of available fields.

      ctv-log-level-report-schema (2)Download

      Reach/Frequency Report

      The Reach/Frequency Report provides insight into the number of unique users or devices reached by selected Advertisers, Campaigns, and Lines during the Reporting Interval.

      The report includes:

      • Unique Device IDs (IFAs)
      • Unique IP Addresses
      • Unique Cookies IDs
      • Impressions Served

      Use these values to estimate average Frequency for each identifier type: Frequency = Impressions Served ÷ Unique Identifier Count

      For example, if a Campaign served 100,000 Impressions across 25,000 unique Device IDs, the estimated Device ID Frequency would be 4 Impressions per Device ID.

      Because Device IDs, IP Addresses, and Cookie IDs use different methods to identify users or devices, each may produce a different Reach and Frequency estimate.

      Create a Reach/Frequency Report

      1. Navigate to Reporting > Custom Reporting.
      2. Select New Custom Report.
      3. Select Reach/Frequency Report as the Type.
      4. Select the applicable Advertisers, Campaigns, and Lines.
      5. Select the Start Date and End Date.
      6. Configure the applicable report settings and Dimensions.
      7. Select Save.
      8. Once the report has processed, select Download next to the report name.
        • If Schedule Automated Report is enabled, the report will also be delivered using the configured delivery method.

      Report Settings

      • Name: Enter a name for the report.
      • Schedule Automated Report: Enable this option to generate and deliver the report automatically on a recurring schedule. See Scheduled Reports for setup details.
      • Advertiser ID: Select the Advertisers to include. By default, all Advertisers are included.
      • Campaign ID: Select the Campaigns to include. By default, all Campaigns under the selected Advertisers are included.
      • Line ID: Select the Lines to include. By default, all Lines under the selected Advertisers and Campaigns are included.
      • Start Date: Select the beginning of the Reporting Interval.
      • End Date: Select the end of the Reporting Interval.
      • Type: Select Reach/Frequency Report.
      • Time Zone: Select the time zone used to generate the report.
      • Dimensions: Select how Reach/Frequency data is grouped in the report.

      Dimensions

      Available Dimensions include:

      • Advertiser ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Advertiser.
      • Advertiser Name: The name of the Advertiser.
      • Campaign ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Campaign.
      • Campaign Name: The name of the Campaign.
      • Line ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Line.
      • Line Name: The name of the Line.

      Metrics

      • Unique Device IDs (IFAs): The number of unique advertising device identifiers associated with served Impressions, when available.
      • Unique IP Addresses: The number of unique IP addresses associated with served Impressions.
      • Unique Cookie IDs: The number of unique Cookie identifiers associated with served Impressions, when available.
      • Impressions Served: The total number of Impressions served for the applicable row.

      Sub Seat Reporting

      Sub Seat Reporting allows users on a Master Seat to review performance across associated Sub Seats. This provides a centralized view of Sub Seat activity without requiring users to switch into each individual Sub Seat.

      To access Sub Seat Reporting, navigate to: Master Seat > Sub Seats > Reporting

      The Sub Seats section includes separate Seats, Reporting, and Pacing tabs. The Reporting tab provides both Standard Reporting and Custom Reporting for Sub Seat activity.

      Standard Reporting

      The Standard Reporting section provides a summary and downloadable table of performance across selected Sub Seats and Advertisers.

      Use the following filters to define the reporting view:

      • Seats: Select the Sub Seats to include in the report.
      • Advertiser: Select the applicable Advertiser.
      • Reporting Interval: Select the date range for the reported activity.

      Performance Summary

      The performance tiles display:

      • Impressions: The total number of Impressions served for the selected filters and Reporting Interval.
      • Total Cost: The total cost associated with the selected Sub-Seat activity.
      • Total Cost CPM: The Total Cost per thousand Impressions.

      Reporting Table

      The table provides detailed Sub Seat performance and can be downloaded for additional analysis.

      Available columns include:

      • Advertiser: The name of the Advertiser associated with the reported activity.
      • Seat ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Sub-Seat.
      • Date: The date associated with the reported activity.
      • Imps: The total number of Impressions served.
      • Media Cost: The cost of purchased media before applicable DSP fees.
      • Total Cost: The total cost of the purchased media including applicable DSP fees.
      • Revenue: The total amount billed to the Advertiser, calculated as Total Cost plus the Advertiser Margin.
      • IP Conversions: The number of attributed IP Conversion events associated with the reported activity.
      • Transparency Score: The inventory transparency score associated with the reported activity.

      Select the Download option to export the table for further analysis.

      Custom Reporting

      The Custom Reporting section allows Master Seat users to create configurable reports for Sub-Seat activity.

      Select New Custom Report to create a report using the same Custom Reporting options available elsewhere in Pontiac, including applicable:

      • Advertisers
      • Reporting Interval
      • Time Zone
      • Dimensions
      • Metrics
      • Scheduled Report settings

      See Custom Reporting for complete setup instructions, report types, available Dimensions and Metrics, and Scheduled Reporting configuration.

      Conversion Tracking

      Pontiac IP Conversions

      Pontiac IP Conversion Pixels can be placed on an Advertiser’s website to measure online activity associated with users who were previously served an Ad through Pontiac. Examples of measurable activity include page visits, shopping cart activity, form submissions, and purchases.

      IP Conversion attribution uses IP address data to associate website activity with previously served Impressions within the applicable Lookback Window. This allows users to evaluate online activity associated with Campaign delivery and analyze conversion performance within Pontiac.

      Create an IP Conversion Pixel

      1. Open the applicable Advertiser in Pontiac.
      2. Select New Pixel.
      3. Enter a name for the Pixel and complete the applicable settings.
      4. Select Save.
      5. Once the Pixel has generated, open the Pixel to view the available implementation code.
      6. Copy the applicable Image or JavaScript version of the Pixel based on the website or tag management implementation.
      7. Implement the Pixel on the page or pages where the desired activity should be recorded.
      8. Associate the Pixel with the applicable Campaigns or Lines for attribution and reporting.

      The required Pixel format and implementation method may depend on the configuration of the website or tag management platform where the Pixel is placed.

      Pixel Placement

      Pixel placement depends on the activity being measured.

      • Purchase or completed action: Place the Pixel on the page displayed after the action is completed, such as an order confirmation or Thank You page.
      • Specific page visit: Place the Pixel on the page where the visit should be recorded.
      • General site visits: Implement the Pixel so it fires across the applicable pages of the website.

      Each time the Pixel fires, Pontiac records the applicable site activity for reporting. When eligible previously served Impressions are found within the Lookback Window, that activity can also be attributed to Campaign delivery.

      Lookback Window

      IP Conversion metrics displayed in Pontiac use a standard 30-day Lookback Window. This means an eligible website action must occur within 30 days of an eligible Impression to be included as a conversion. Custom Lookback Windows can be used with applicable IP Conversion reports in Custom Reporting. For assistance with a longer Lookback Window, contact your Account Manager or reach out through the Help Center.

      Conversion Attribution

      For Advertiser and Campaign metrics, a conversion may be attributed to more than one Line when eligible Impressions from multiple Lines are associated with the conversion.

      For example, if a user is served an Ad from two different Lines within the same Campaign and later completes one conversion:

      • Line 1 may receive 1 conversion.
      • Line 2 may receive 1 conversion.
      • When aggregated across the Lines, the Campaign may therefore display 2 conversions.

      This Line-level behavior is also reflected in the IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate report when the Line Id Dimension is included.

      To review unique conversions across an Advertiser or Campaign for selected dates, generate an IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate report without the Line Id Dimension.

      For Impression-level conversion paths and unique conversion analysis across a full Campaign flight, use the IP Conversion Pixel: Path to Conversion report. The Path to Conversion report can be used to review the individual Impressions attributed to each conversion and de-duplicate the hashed IP address across the applicable dates.

      See the Custom Reporting documentation for additional setup instructions and definitions for each IP Conversion report type.

      IP Conversion Reporting

      Custom Reporting provides several reports for analyzing IP Conversion activity:

      • IP Conversion Pixel: Path to Conversion: Provides Impression-level data for Impressions attributed to conversions, including media, Creative, inventory, and fractional attribution details.
      • IP Conversion Pixel: Page Visits: Provides page visit activity recorded by the selected IP Conversion Pixels, independent of whether the visitor was previously served an Ad.
      • IP Conversion Pixel: Conversion Rate: Compares attributed conversions with Impressions and can be used to evaluate conversion performance across Advertisers, Campaigns, and Lines.

      Use the report type that best aligns with the conversion analysis being performed.

      Query String Parameters

      Optional query string parameters can be used to pass additional visitor, conversion, and transaction data when an IP Conversion Pixel fires.

      These values must be dynamically populated by the website, tag manager, or other Pixel implementation. When included in the Pixel request, supported values can be included in applicable Custom Reports.

      Common parameters include:

      • Client IP (CLIENT_IP): Passes the visitor IP address observed by the website. This can be useful when the Pixel is implemented through a container or another environment where the IP address observed directly by the Pixel may not represent the visitor. When provided, Client IP is used for applicable attribution and reporting.
      • Order ID (ORDER_ID): Passes a unique order or transaction identifier.
      • Order Amount (ORDER_AMOUNT): Passes the value associated with the order or conversion for reporting and ROAS analysis.
      • Consumer ID (CONSUMER_ID): Passes a customer identifier associated with the activity.
      • Custom Variable 1 (VAR1): Passes a custom value for additional reporting.
      • Custom Variable 2 (VAR2): Passes a custom value for additional reporting.
      • Custom Variable 3 (VAR3): Passes a custom value for additional reporting.
      • Custom Variable 4 (VAR4): Passes a custom value for additional reporting.

      For example, an e-commerce implementation may dynamically pass the transaction ID through Order ID and the transaction amount through Order Amount when a purchase Pixel fires. These values can then be included in Custom Reporting for additional conversion and ROAS analysis.

      See Pixel Query String Parameters for the complete list of supported parameters and implementation details.

      Foot Traffic Studies

      Foot Traffic Attribution, powered by OnSpot, allows Advertisers to measure visits to tracked commercial Locations following Ad exposure through Pontiac.

      Attribution uses Mobile Advertising IDs and mobile GPS location data to identify users who were served an Ad and were later observed at a configured Location.

      How Foot Traffic Attribution Works

      • Mobile Attribution: OnSpot identifies users who were served an Ad and whose mobile device was later detected at a tracked Location.
      • CTV Household Extension: For CTV Campaigns, household extension can associate TVs, desktops, and laptops with mobile devices using household IP relationships. Mobile GPS data can then be used to attribute a Location visit to an exposed household.
      • Availability: Foot Traffic Attribution is currently available only in the United States.
      • Location Limit: Each Line can track up to 200 Locations.

      Set Up Foot Traffic Attribution

      Foot Traffic Attribution is configured at the Line level.

      1. Create or edit the applicable Line.
      2. Enable Foot Traffic in the Line Setup section.
      3. Open the Foot Traffic Reporting section.
      4. Select Add Location and configure the Locations to track.
      5. Save the Line.

      See Line Foot Traffic Reporting for additional information about adding and managing Locations.

      Foot Traffic Fee: A Foot Traffic fee may apply when Foot Traffic Attribution is enabled. The fee amount is configured at the Seat level and may vary by account. Contact your Account Manager or reach out through the Help Center if you have questions about the applicable fee.

      Foot Traffic Report Availability

      Foot Traffic Studies are generated daily with a 5-day reporting delay.

      For example, Foot Traffic activity recorded on January 15 will become available in the report generated on January 20.

      To download a Foot Traffic Study:

      1. Navigate to Reporting > Foot Traffic Studies.
      2. Locate the applicable report date.
      3. Select Download to retrieve an individual report or Download All to retrieve all available reports.

      Report Fields

      Foot Traffic Study reports include the following fields:

      • Date: The date associated with the reported Foot Traffic activity.
      • Line ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Line.
      • Line Name: The name of the Line.
      • Campaign ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Campaign containing the Line.
      • Campaign Name: The name of the Campaign containing the Line.
      • Location ID: The unique identifier assigned to the tracked Location.
      • Location Name: The name assigned to the tracked Location.
      • Daily Visitors: The total number of visitors recorded at the Location on the report date. This metric can help confirm that the Location is receiving visitor activity. If no visitors are recorded, review the Location setup or contact your Account Manager or through the Help Center for assistance.
      • Attributed Visitors: The number of users who were served an Ad from the Campaign and subsequently visited the tracked Location on the report date.

      Overview

      The Pacing tab provides a centralized view of Campaign and Line delivery across the current Seat. It allows users to compare budget, Spend, Impressions, and pacing performance across active and completed Campaigns.

      Pacing metrics help identify Campaigns and Lines that may be underpacing, on pace, or overpacing so users can investigate delivery and make adjustments where needed.

      The table includes both historical and current delivery metrics, including:

      • Lifetime Budget and delivery
      • Yesterday’s Budget and delivery
      • Today’s Budget and delivery
      • Lifetime, Yesterday, and Today Pacing
      • Start and End Dates
      • CPM, CTR, Conversions, and Remaining Days

      For Master Seats with Sub Seats enabled, a separate Sub Seats > Pacing view provides the same core pacing information across associated Sub Seats.

      Campaign Pacing Tab

      The Pacing tab provides a centralized view of Campaign pacing and delivery across the current Seat. Use this table to identify Campaigns that are underpacing, on pace, or overpacing and quickly review current and historical delivery.

      Campaign and Line Pacing

      Each Campaign row can be expanded to display the Lines contained within that Campaign. This allows users to review Campaign-level pacing and then drill down into Line-level delivery without leaving the Pacing tab.

      Select the expand arrow next to a Campaign to display its associated Lines. The Line-level table includes pacing and delivery metrics such as Lifetime Pacing, Lifetime Budget, Lifetime Spend, Lifetime Impressions, Yesterday and Today delivery, and other available Line-level fields.

      Use the expanded view to identify whether a Campaign pacing issue may be associated with a specific Line and select the applicable Line ID to navigate directly to the Line for further investigation or adjustments.

      Table Filters

      Use the filters above the table to narrow the Campaigns displayed:

      • In Range: Show only Campaigns with a flight that includes the current date.
      • Remaining Days: Filter Campaigns based on the number of days remaining in the flight. Available operators include:
        • Less Than
        • Less Than or Equal To
        • Equal To
        • Greater Than or Equal To
        • Greater Than
      • Lifetime Pacing: Filter Campaigns based on their Lifetime Pacing percentage. Available operators include:
        • Less Than
        • Less Than or Equal To
        • Equal To
        • Greater Than or Equal To
        • Greater Than

      Enter a value after selecting an operator to identify Campaigns that meet the applicable Remaining Days or Lifetime Pacing criteria.

      Use the Search bar to locate Campaigns by keyword or ID. Select the Download icon next to the Search bar to export the table as a CSV file.

      Columns

      • Campaign Status: Indicates the current status of the Campaign.
        • Green indicates Active.
        • Red indicates Inactive.
        • A yellow warning icon indicates an issue that may prevent the Campaign from serving. Hover over the icon to view the warning.
      • Advertiser Status: Indicates the status of the Advertiser associated with the Campaign.
        • Green indicates Active.
        • Red indicates Inactive.
        • An Active Campaign under an Inactive Advertiser is not eligible to serve.
      • Campaign ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Campaign.
      • Campaign Name: The name of the Campaign.
      • Budget Type: Indicates whether Campaign delivery is budgeted by Spend or Impressions.
        • If the Campaign is budgeted by impressions, this metric will display the lifetime budget in impressions.
        • If the Campaign is budgeted by spend, this metric will display the lifetime budget in dollars with a $ sign.
      • Lifetime Pacing: Compares actual Campaign delivery through yesterday with the delivery expected based on the Campaign flight dates and Lifetime Budget. This metric updates daily and does not include today’s delivery.
        • A Lifetime Pacing value near 100% indicates that delivery is aligned with expected pacing.
        • As a general reference, 90%–110% indicates that the Campaign is near expected pacing.
      • Lifetime Budget: The total Campaign budget for the full flight.
        • For an Impression-budgeted Campaign, the value is displayed in Impressions.
        • For a Spend-budgeted Campaign, the value is displayed in dollars.
      • Lifetime Spend: The total Campaign spend to date. This metric is updated hourly.
      • Lifetime Imps: The total number of Impressions served to date. This metric is updated hourly.
      • Yesterday Budget: The Campaign’s Daily Budget for the previous day.
        • For an Impression-budgeted Campaign, the value is displayed in Impressions.
        • For a Spend-budgeted Campaign, the value is displayed in dollars.
      • Yesterday Spend: The total amount spent during the previous day.
      • Yesterday Imps: The total number of Impressions served during the previous day.
      • Yesterday Pacing: Indicates whether the Campaign is pacing to deliver its remaining budget if delivery continues at the rate observed yesterday.
        • ((Lifetime Budget – Delivery to Date) ÷ Remaining Days) ÷ Yesterday’s Delivery
        • Delivery is evaluated using Spend or Impressions based on the Campaign’s Budget Type.
      • Today Budget: The Campaign’s Daily Budget for the current day.
        • For an Impression-budgeted Campaign, the value is displayed in Impressions.
        • For a Spend-budgeted Campaign, the value is displayed in dollars.
      • Today Spend: The total amount spent today.
      • Today Imps: The total number of Impressions served today.
      • Today Pacing: Indicates whether the Campaign is pacing to deliver its remaining budget if delivery continues at the rate observed so far today.
        • ((Lifetime Budget – Delivery to Date) ÷ Remaining Days) ÷ Today’s Delivery
        • Delivery is evaluated using Spend or Impressions based on the Campaign’s Budget Type.
      • Start Date: The Campaign Start Date.
      • End Date: The Campaign End Date.
      • CPM: The Campaign’s Lifetime Cost per thousand Impressions through yesterday.
      • CTR: The Campaign’s Lifetime click-through rate through yesterday, calculated as Clicks divided by Impressions.
      • Conversions: The Lifetime number of conversions attributed to the Campaign through yesterday.
      • Remaining Days: The number of days remaining until the Campaign End Date.

      Sub Seats Pacing Tab

      For Master Seats with Sub Seats enabled, navigate to: Master Seat > Sub Seats > Pacing

      The Pacing subtab provides a high-level view of Campaign pacing across all associated Sub Seats, allowing Master Seat users to identify delivery issues without switching into each Sub Seat individually.

      The table provides the same core pacing functionality as the main Pacing tab, with additional Sub Seat context.

      Additional and enhanced fields include:

      • Seat ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Sub-Seat.
      • Advertiser ID: The unique Pontiac ID assigned to the Advertiser. Select the Advertiser ID to navigate directly to the Advertiser. Hover over the ID to view the Advertiser Name.
      • Advertiser Status: Indicates whether the Advertiser associated with the Campaign is Active or Inactive.
      • Campaign ID: Select the Campaign ID to navigate directly to the Campaign. Hover over the ID to view the Campaign Name.

      These links make it easier to move directly from the Master Seat pacing view to the applicable Advertiser or Campaign for further investigation or adjustments.

      © 2026 Pontiac Wiki Sec · All Rights Reserved · Developed by RDK

      • Contact Us
      • Privacy Policy
      • Terms & Conditions
      • Pontiac.media